Instruction Manual BOILER

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
General
Preface / conditions for use of manual............................................................................1
General guarantee information.......................................................................................2
Safety precaution.........................................................................................................3
System Concept
Technical data.............................................................................................................4
Steam Water System....................................................................................................5
Fuel Oil Supply Pressure Atomizing Burner....................................................................6
Electric drawing..........................................................................................................7
Drawings....................................................................................................................8
Spare Parts..................................................................................................................9
AQ-16 Boiler
Operation and maintenance.........................................................................................10
Feed and boiler water.................................................................................................11
Water level gauge......................................................................................................12
Safety valves.............................................................................................................13
Feed water system......................................................................................................14
Feed water pump unit.................................................................................................15
Chemical dosing pump...............................................................................................16
Salinity alarm equipment............................................................................................17
Oil detection equipment..............................................................................................18
Steam dump equipment...............................................................................................19
Pressure Atomizing Burner

Descriptions..............................................................................................................20
Operation and maintenance.........................................................................................21
Fuel oil pump unit......................................................................................................22
Aalborg Control System (Touch)

Aalborg control system (Touch)...................................................................................23
Operation of the panels (Touch)...................................................................................24
Commisioning and service (Touch)..............................................................................25
Language UK i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Burner sequence diagram (Touch)................................................................................26

Flame safeguard (Touch)............................................................................................27
Spare parts catalogue

Spare parts for AQ-16.................................................................................................28
Spare parts for burner.................................................................................................29
ii Language UK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Preface / conditions for use of manual

.
Description Document ID Page
Preface / conditions.................................................... SD9010_40.................. 1-2
Language UK 1-1 / 2
SD9010_40#B.1
PREFACE / CONDITIONS
Preface / conditions
1 Preface / conditions for use of manuals
1.1 Introduction
The present (set of) manual(s) have been produced with the intension of giving the
user the greatest benefit in relation to the scope of supply supplied by Alfa Laval.
However unless the user do read and understand the manual(s) in its full extend, this
may not be the result why it is important to emphasize that this takes place as intended.
1.2 Prequalification / required basic knowledge
The content of the manual(s) has been developed on the basis that the user has both
the necessary engineering qualification, as well as the understanding and knowledge
of the normal design and operations for the complete plant, within the maritime field.
1.3 Content of manual(s)
The content of the manual(s) have been composed by a number of standard documents
as well as scope of supply related documents. The intension is to cover the scope of
supply delivered by Alfa Laval, and as such there might be areas of the total plant
which is not covered by this manual(s). Drawings with dimension for installations,
maintenance space, data sheets, etc. have to be observed with care in order to obtain
the correct result. Many of the instructions contain pictures, sketches and drawings for
information and guide line purpose and should be used as intended only.
1.4 Responsibility
It is the users’ responsibility to use the manuals as intended, and where not found
sufficient to raise the relevant questions.
1.5 Subject to change
The manual has been compiled with great care. However, it may be necessary within
the scope of product care to make changes to the product and its operation without
prior notice which are not contained in this manual. Alfa Laval are not liable for any
costs ensuing for this reason.
1.6 Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and
software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee
full agreement. However, the documents and data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for im-
provement are welcomed.
1-2 / 2 Language UK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
General guarantee information

.
General guarantee information.................................... SD9010_39.................. 2-2
Language UK 2-1 / 3
SD9010_39#E.1
GENERAL GUARANTEE INFORMATION
General guarantee information
1 Guarantee agreement and conditions

The guarantee agreement and conditions for the boiler plant are agreed on the con-
tractual stage, and keep valid as long as the contract is in force. The guarantee agree-
ment can not be transferred to another party without a written agreement with Alfa
Laval.
1.1 Conditions
The guarantee does not cover normal wear and tear on parts, unless this is stated in the
guarantee agreement, or if the plant/items are not operated or handled as intended per
the instruction manuals. Typical parts which are not covered by the guarantee due to
normal wear and tear is, but not limited to, Photo cells, Electrodes, Burner Nozzles,
Mechanical Seals, Bearings, Pump Impellers and Spindles, Gaskets, Water Level
Glasses, Refractory, Filter elements, Diaphragm of Membrane Pumps, and Valves
Stem seals. Typical items which are not covered due to wrong operation conditions
include, but not limited to, are: Valve damages, Pump Impellers and Spindles due to
foreign matters in the fluid.
1.2 Trouble shooting
Normal trouble shooting in order to identify failing items are not covered by the guar-
antee, however guidance by e-mail are available for such when needed.
1.3 Requirement for support
When needed support can be obtained, and if so following should be informed in order
to make the process smooth and fast.
• Order number (is typically mentioned both on the outside of the instruction manual,
and on the first pages with the technical data of the plant
• Short description of the observed trouble
• Which alarms has been activated, and in which burner sequence step
• If the failing item is known, the Tag number or Data Sheet number, and serial
number
• Photo’s which can support the process
• Use English language
1.4 Guarantee claim handling
Claim handling has to follow the contractual flow and condition. This means that a
claim has to be issued to the vendor, including the above mentioned information. This
causes that yard, or other dealers, in between the user and Alfa Laval has to be part of
a claim flow. This process might slow down the response time and therefore, in emer-
2-2 / 3 Language UK
SD9010_39#E.1
GENERAL GUARANTEE INFORMATION
gency matters where prompt action may be needed, Alfa Laval accept to be contacted
directly, provided this takes place as a parallel flow (cc in correspondence) not over-
ruling the normal contractual flow and conditions.
Language UK 2-3 / 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Safety precaution
.
Safety precautions..................................................... SD9010_41.................. 3-2
Language UK 3-1 / 5
SD9010_41#B.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety precautions
1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to lay down general guidelines and precautions to the
user of the plant, and its components, in connection with operation and maintenance
of the plant, in order to ensure the safety of personnel as well as of the plant.
It is important to study the instruction manuals carefully and observe the warnings
before installation, operation, service and maintenance. Not following the instructions
can result in serious accidents.
In order to make the information clear and understandable, only foreseeable conditions
have been considered. No warnings are given for situations arising from the unintended
usage of the machine and its tools. The plant and its components shall be used as
intended only.
1.1 Exception
This document does not overrule other precautions given for specific equipment(s)
operations and maintenance instructions.
1.2 Education
The user of the equipment must be in possession of an education relevant for the op-
eration and maintenance of the plant.
Operation and maintenance work must only be carried out by qualified and authorized
personnel.
1.3 Working clothes
Protective clothes must be of tight-fit.

If there is a possibility of your face coming in contact with metal splinters or dust, you
should wear a full face protection mask with protective goggles.
Always wear safety boots if there is a risk of heavy objects turning over, slipping off
or falling down and squashing your feet.
Use heat protective gloves to protect fingers and hands towards hot items.
Use ear protection in noisy environments.
1.4 Tools
As a measure to avoid injuries, only suitable/professional tools and working aids must
be used for maintenance, adjustment and repair work.
1.5 Lifting
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting instructions.

Do not work under a hanging load.
3-2 / 5 Language UK
SD9010_41#B.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.6 General maintenance and fault rectification practice
Allow the unit to cool prior to servicing and maintenance work to avoid injury through
high temperatures.
Necessary installation, service and inspection work should be carried out at the speci-
fied time.
Inform relevant staff before beginning any service work.
For all service, inspection and repair work, electrically isolate the equipment and ensure
the mains switch cannot be accidentally switched back on. Cut off the fuel supply.
If, during servicing or testing, seal/joints/packings have to be opened, these have to be
thoroughly cleaned to ensure tight sealing when re-assembling.
Damaged seals/joints/packings must be replaced. Carry out a pressure/leak test!
Flame monitoring devices, limit controls, correcting elements and all other safety de-
vices must be commissioned by, and may only be replaced by, the manufacturer or
authorized personnel.
Screwed connections, which have been loosened, must be re-tightened without cross-
threading.
Following service work, all related safety devices should be tested to ensure they are
functioning correctly.
1.7 Pressurized equipment and items
Always relieve the pressure before starting to work on pressure equipment and/or lines.
Close all shut-off valves. Vent all pressure lines.
Always be extremely careful when checking pressurized lines for leaks.
Pressure test with air/gas is dangerous, use hydraulic pressure test when possible.
Fluids or air escaping under pressure can penetrate clothes and skin.
Be careful when changing pressure hoses; mixing up pressure hoses by mistake may
reverse the function of the equipment.
1.8 Chemicals, cleaning agents, lubricants, etc.
When using/handling chemicals, cleaning agents, and similar articles make sure you
follow the general rules and regulations of protection as well as the suppliers recom-
mendation regarding ventilation, personnel protection etc.
1.9 Electrical equipment
Make sure that the electric power supply is disconnected/switched off in relation to
maintenance. The touching of parts, which are connected to the electric power supply,
can cause immediate loss of life.
Always secure non-insulated and uncovered power lines and connectors against un-
intended touching.
Electric components stored and unused for longer periods of time should be carefully
inspected before use, to ensure that the integrity of any electrical insulation remains
intact.
Always check on wet electric components to determine whether parts that could be
touched are electrically live.
Language UK 3-3 / 5
SD9010_41#B.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When working on high voltage equipment/groups, connect the mains supply cable to
earth after disconnecting/switching the power supply off in order to discharge com-
ponents such as capacitors.
1.10 Hinged equipment
When opening doors or swinging out hinged equipments/parts, these must be fixed in
position during maintenance in order to prevent unintended movement of the item, for
instance due to ships rolling.
1.11 Valves
Shut-off valves may leak due to impurities or wear, whereas it must be ensured that
fluids, air or steam which might leak through, will not cause any dangerous situation
in connection with maintenance.
Do always disconnect actuators both electrically and pneumatically in case of main-
tenance and trouble shooting.
Do never use the fingers to check automatic valves as there might be springs which
may suddenly release their power – always use tools for this purpose.
1.12 Rotating equipment
Rotating equipment must always be disconnected, electrically and/or hydraulically

and/or pneumatically, in connection with maintenance.
Do not touch rotating machines/parts when in operation.
1.13 Hot surfaces/equipment
Depending on the operating conditions many items may reach a temperature which
can harm the human body, for instance the boiler, all pipe lines, valve and actuator,
etc. Always let these items cool down before touching it or wear protective gloves.
1.14 Warning signs
Always follow the instructions given in relation to warning signs attached to parts and
machinery.
1.15 Alterations to the construction of the equipment
No alterations to the equipment are to be made without the approval of the manufac-
turer.
Any parts not in perfect working order should be replaced immediately.
No additional components may be fitted, which have not been tested for use with the
equipment.
Parts from other manufacturers are not guaranteed to be suitable to meet the necessary
operational and safety requirements.
1.16 Spare parts
Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts. Parts from other manufacturers are not guar-
anteed to be suitable to meet the necessary operational and safety requirements.
3-4 / 5 Language UK
SD9010_41#B.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.17 Waste disposal
All materials used should be handled and disposed of correctly, with due regard to the
environment and valid rules/regulations/law.
Note: In case of any doubts please contact Alfa Laval.
Language UK 3-5 / 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Technical data
.
Technical data for boiler plant..................................... 106591........................ 4-2
Technical data for Aalborg AQ-16............................... 106591........................ 4-3
Technical data for oil pump........................................ 106591........................ 4-6
Technical data for feed water pumps............................ 106591........................ 4-8
Language UK 4-1 / 8
TECHNICAL DATA FOR BOILER PLANT
Technical data for boiler plant
1 General data
• Request No./Order No.:..........................................................................106591-1

• Hull No./Nos.:.......................................................................................WZL1301
2 General plant data
• Classification society:......................................................................................BV
• Service level:...........................................................................................Essential
• Flange standard:.....................................................................EN+ Counter flange
• Plant supply voltage:..............................................................................3 x 440 V
• Plant control voltage:...................................................................................230 V
• Pilot voltage:..................................................................................................24 V
• Frequency:...................................................................................................60 Hz
• Pressure gauge calibration:.............................................................................MPa
• Thermometer calibration:...................................................................................ºC
• Language on signs:....................................................................................English
• Ambient air temperature:..............................................................................45 ºC
3 Documentation data
• Language for manuals:..............................................................................English

• Set of approval manual:.......................................................................6 sets+1CD
• Set of working manual:.......................................................................6 sets+1CD
• Set of instruction manual:.............................................................................4 sets
4-2 / 8 Language UK
TECHNICAL DATA FOR AALBORG AQ-16
Technical data for Aalborg AQ-16
1 General data
• Request No./Order No.:..........................................................................106591-1

• Hull No./Nos.:.......................................................................................WZL1301
2 Dimensions for boiler unit
• Height to top of smoke outlet box:.........................................................4,285 mm

• Diameter incl. insulation:.......................................................................1,950 mm
• Weight of boiler unit excl. water:................................................................7.0 ton
• Weight of boiler unit incl. water:..............................................................12.0 ton
3 Water/steam process data
• Steam output, simultaneous operation:..................................................1,050 kg/h

• Steam output, oil fired section:................................................................600 kg/h
• Steam output, exhaust section:.................................................................450 kg/h
• Working pressure:..............................................................................0.60 MPa(g)
• Working temperature:.................................................................................165 ºC
• Max. allowable working pressure:.....................................................0.80 MPa(g)
• Feed water operation:..................................................................................OnOff
• Feed water temperature, layout:....................................................................60 ºC
4 Data for pressure part
• Boiler type:.......................................Vertical, composite smoke/water tube boiler

• Boiler model:...............................................................................................AQ16
• Test pressure:..........................................................1.5 x Design pressure MPa(g)
• Protection of boiler body:........................................................................Standard
• Insulation thickness:...................................................................................75 mm
• Cladding type:............................................................................................Trapez
• Colour of insulation plates:............................................................................Blue
Language UK 4-3 / 8
5 Combustion process data (oil-fired section)
• Min. calorific value of diesel oil:.......................................................42,200 kJ/kg

• Min. viscosity of diesel oil:..............................................................3 cSt. at 40ºC
• Max. viscosity of diesel oil:............................................................14 cSt. at 40ºC
• Max. density of diesel oil:.........................................................900 kg/m³ at 15ºC
• Min. calorific value of fuel oil:..........................................................40,200 kJ/kg
• Max. viscosity of fuel oil:.............................................................380 cSt. at 50ºC
• Max. density of fuel oil:............................................................991 kg/m³ at 15ºC
• Turn down ratio on fuel oil:..............................................................................3:1
• Fuel oil temperature before pre-heater:.........................................................60 ºC
• Fuel oil viscosity at burner inlet:..............................................................8-10 cSt.
• Fuel oil temperature at burner inlet:............................................................145 ºC
• Air excess No. at 100% load:............................................................................1.2
• Flue gas temperature (clean boiler):............................................................351 ºC
• Air consumption at 100% load:................................................................715 kg/h
• Flue gas flow (approx.):...........................................................................760 kg/h
6 Combustion process data (exhaust gas sec-

tion)
• Main engine:.....................................................................................8DKM-28EL
• Engine load, design:..............................................................................90 %MCR
• Design condition:............................................................................................ISO
• Exhaust gas flow:................................................................................21,680 kg/h
• Inlet temperature of exhaust gas:.................................................................318 ºC
• Outlet temperature of exhaust gas:..............................................................269 ºC
7 Data for pressure loss layout
• Pressure loss across flue gas system, max.:...........................................10 mmWC

• Pressure loss across boiler (oil-fired section):....................................25.0 mmWC
• Pressure loss across boiler (exhaust gas section):................................110 mmWC
8 Data for burner
• Burner type:.............................................................................Pressure atomizing

• Burner regulation:...............................................................................Modulating
4-4 / 8 Language UK
• Model:.........................................................................................................RMS7
• Primary fuel:...................................................................................Heavy fuel oil
• Secondary fuel:.......................................................................................Diesel oil
• Burner capacity on diesel oil, min.:............................................................40 kg/h
• Burner capacity on diesel oil, max.:...........................................................42 kg/h
• Burner capacity on fuel oil, min.:...............................................................40 kg/h
• Burner capacity on fuel oil, max.:..............................................................44 kg/h
• Burner oil pump pressure - max:.............................................................3 MPa(g)
• Nozzle.....................................................................................................W90/50º
• Flame tube:..................................................................................................M6/1a
• Diffuser disc:.............................................................................................175x50
• Colour of burner unit:......................................................................................Red
9 Data for control system
• Insulation class:...................................................................................................F
• Degree of protection:......................................................................................IP44
• Colour of boiler control panel:.................................Light Blue-Green(RAL6027)
• HMI unit:........................................................................................................Yes
• Ethernet:...........................................................................................................No
• MODBUS interface:........................................................................................Yes
10 Operational data for boiler plant
• Operation:......................................................................................24h unattended
• Automatic mode:.............................................................................................Yes
• Manual mode:..................................................................................................Yes
• Emergency mode:............................................................................................Yes
Language UK 4-5 / 8
TECHNICAL DATA FOR
TECHNICAL DATAOIL PUMP
SD9010#-
Technical
Technicaldata
dataforfor
oilfuel
pumpoil pumps
1 General data
• Project No.: ................................................................................. 106591-01-2

• Hull No.: ......................................................................................... WZL1301
• Classification society: ................................................................................ BV
• Pressure gauge calibration: ...................................................................... MPa
• Thermometer calibration:............................................................................ °C
• Language for signs: ............................................................................. English
• Colour of fuel oil pump unit: ................................................. Maker Standard
2 Data for fuel oil pumps
• Pump type .................................................................................... DS1/150.32

• Pump operation type: ..................................................................... Screw type
• Delivery head: .................................................................................... 0.5 MPa
• Relief valve set point (factory set): .................................................... 0.8 MPa
• Oil temperature, maximum: ................................................................. 150 °C
• Pump capacity at 3,0 cSt: ..................................................................... 126 l/h
• Pump capacity at 380 cSt: .................................................................... 234 l/h
• NPSH at 3.0 cSt. (including filter):........................................................... 2 m
• NPSH at 380 cSt. (including filter):.......................................................... 2 m
• Weight of fuel oil pump unit:..................................................................40 kg
3 Data for pump motor
• Motor make: ............................................................................................... AC

• Motor type: ................................................................................. ACA 71 A-6
• Power supply: ........................................................................ 3 x 440V, 60Hz
• Rated output for motor:..................................................................... 0,21 kW
• Revolutions: .................................................................................. 1105 r.p.m.
• Ambient air temperature: ....................................................................... 50 °C
• Starting method:.....................................................................................Direct
4-6 / 8 Language UK
TECHNICAL DATA FOR OIL PUMP
page 2/2
• Starting current: ...................................................................................... 2,8 A

• Operating current (full load): .................................................................. 0,7 A
• Power consumption at 3,0 cSt:........................................................... 0,05 kW
• Power consumption at 380 cSt:............................................................ 0,1 kW
• Numbers of cable entries with reliefer: ................................... 2 pcs. M20x1,5
• Insulation class:............................................................................................. F
• Degree of protection: ............................................................................... IP55
Language UK 4-7 / 8
TECHNICAL DATA FOR FEED WATER PUMPS
Technical data for feed water pumps
1 General data
• Request No./Order No.:.............................................................................106591

• Hull No./Nos.:.........................................................................................Wzl1301
2 Data for pump
• Pump operation type:...........................................................................Centrifugal

• Pump type:................................................................................................CR1-17
• Number of pumps:...............................................................................................2
• F.W pump designed for simultaneous operation:.............................................Yes
• Delivery head:.............................................................................................130 m
• Pump capacity:.........................................................................................1.5 m³/h
• NPSH:.........................................................................................................0.94m
• Max. media temperature:............................................................................120 ºC
• Weight of unit:...........................................................................................35.6 kg
• Colour of unit:.............................................................................Makers standard
3 Data for pump motor
• Motor type:..................................................................................Makers standard

• Power supply:.........................................................................................3 x 440V
• Rated output for motor:..............................................................................1.5 kW
• Rated current:.............................................................................................2.86 A
• Starting method:..........................................................................................Direct
• Starting current:.............................................................................................27 A
• Revolutions:........................................................................................3500 r.p.m.
• Ambient air temperature:..............................................................................45 °C
• Insulation class:...................................................................................................F
• Degree of protection:......................................................................................IP55
4-8 / 8 Language UK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Steam Water System

Tag Number
.
................................... P&I diagram-Steam water system................................ X01_910020................ 5-3
................................... List of parts - steam/water........................................... X01_910020................ 5-5
3C1, 3C301.................. Safety valve, DN 32/50, PN 40/16............................... 2611171...................... 5-9
3C184, 3C484.............. Expansion joint, DN 50.............................................. 85Y_013421................ 5-11
3C186, 3C486.............. Remote pull for safety valve....................................... K03_032121................ 5-13
3C2............................. Stop valve, angle, DN 65, PN 25................................. 2511092...................... 5-15
3C3,3C303,3C6............ Stop valve, straight, DN 20, PN 25.............................. 2501087...................... 5-16
3C4,3C304.................. Stop valve, straight, non return, DN 20, PN 25.............. 2641087...................... 5-17
3C7,3C307.................. Stop valve, straight, DN 25, PN 25.............................. 2501088...................... 5-18
3C9, 3C10, 3C11.......... Stop valve, straight, DN 8, PN 160.............................. 6220000002................. 5-19
3C16........................... Gate valve, straight, 1 1/2".......................................... 2931116...................... 5-20
3C17........................... Water level gauge, left, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25................. 7010000431................. 5-21
3C18........................... Water level gauge, right, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25............... 7010000430................. 5-23
3C187, 3C487.............. Remote pull for water level gauge................................ K03_032122................ 5-25
3C198......................... Stop valve, gate straight, DN 50, PN 10........................ 2531005...................... 5-27
3M169,3M170............. Feed water pump CR 1-17.......................................... 5541002001................. 5-28
3M23.......................... Chemical dosing unit................................................. 9296006003................. 5-31
3H2, 3W32.................. LED indicator / limit switch........................................ 8001000002................. 5-33
3M25.......................... Sample cooler........................................................... 8750005...................... 5-35
Pneumatic control valve, DN 32, PN 25, with DP actuator
3N5............................. and I/P positioner....................................................... 6050000240................. 5-37
3N6............................. Filter regulator with automatic drain............................ 2915101...................... 5-39
................................... Steam injection system............................................... 64Z_064071................ 5-41
M82............................ Stop valve, straight, DN 15, PN 25.............................. 2501086...................... 5-43
M83............................ Filter, DN 15, PN 25.................................................. 7040000041................. 5-44
M84............................ Control valve, DN 15, PN 25...................................... 6050000458................. 5-45
M85............................ Temperature switch.................................................... 8070000023................. 5-46
M86............................ Check valve, DN 15, PN 40........................................ 6020000101................. 5-47
M87............................ Vacuum breaker, 1/2", PN 40...................................... 6000000121................. 5-48
M89............................ Steam injector, 1/2", PN 25......................................... 7000000085................. 5-49
M145.1........................ Ultrasonic sensor for oil detection equipment................ 8310000005................. 5-50
M145.2........................ Control unit for oil detection equipment....................... 8210000025................. 5-51
M146.1........................ Conductive electrode.................................................. 8620000104................. 5-52
M146.2........................ Control device, salinometer......................................... 8210000032................. 5-53
M146.3........................ T-piece for salinity alarm equipment............................ 8500000115................. 5-54
C191........................... Water washing hose with nozzle.................................. 2941001...................... 5-55
................................... Counter flange........................................................... K16_004096................ 5-57
Language UK 5-1 / 57
5-2 / 57 Language UK
X01_910020#A.2
P&I DIAGRAM-STEAM WATER SYSTEM
P&I diagram-Steam water system
LIST OF PARTS - STEAM/WATER
List of parts - steam/water

Boiler plant:.....................................................................................................................1 x Aalborg AQ-16
Request number:................................................................................................................................106591
Configuration number:.................................................................................................................................1
Hull number(s):.............................................................................................................................WZL1301
Project number(s):.........................................................................................................................106591-01
P&I diagram drawing number:...................................................................................................X01_910020
P&I diagram revision:..................................................................................................................................a
Date:.........................................................................................................................................04 June 2013
Reading guide:
List of Parts reflects parts delivered by Alfa Laval.
Tag Numbers are given without the index used on the P&I diagram. E.g. “C2" is found on the P&I Diagram
as "1C2" and "2C2" for boiler 1 and 2 respectively.
1 Aalborg AQ-16 boiler
Tag no. Qty. Dim (DN) Application Type Datasheet or draw-

ing
Composite boiler (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
C 1 N/A Aalborg OC - 46Y_068637
C1 1 32/50 Safety valve Safety 2611171
C301 1 32/50 Safety valve Safety 2611171
C184 1 50 Expansion joint for safety valve - 85Y_013421
C484 1 50 Expansion joint for safety valve - 85Y_013421
C186 1 N/A Remote pull for safety valve - K03_032121
C486 1 N/A Remote pull for safety valve - K03_032121
C2 1 65 Main steam valve Stop 2511092
C3 1 20 Feed water valve Stop 2501087
C303 1 20 Feed water valve Stop 2501087
C4 1 20 Feed water valve Stop SDNR 2641087
C304 1 20 Feed water valve Stop SDNR 2641087
C6 1 20 Scum valve Stop 2501087
C7 1 25 Blow down valve Stop 2501088
C307 1 25 Blow down valve Stop 2501088
C9 1 1/2" Sample valve Stop 6220000002
C10 1 1/2" Air escape valve Stop 6220000002
C11 1 1/2" Gauge board valve Stop 6220000002
C16 1 1 1/2" Furnace drain valve Gate 2931116
C17 1 25 / length Water level gauge left Reflective 7010000431
700
C18 1 25 / length Water level gauge right Reflective 7010000430

700
C187 1 N/A Remote pull for water level gauge - K03_032122
C487 1 N/A Remote pull for water level gauge - K03_032122
C198 1 50 Drain valve for exhaust gas part Gate 2531005
W33 1 100 Water level meas. electrode - 8125000010
Smoke outlet - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
C179 1 - Smoke outlet - -
Feed water pump - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
M169 1 32 Feed water pump CR1-17 5541002001
M170 1 32 Feed water pump CR1-17 5541002001
Chemical Dosing - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
M23 1 - Chemical dosing - 9296006003
Remote indication - Steam pressure and Water level - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
H2 1 N/A Remote indication of Steam pressure Digital 8001000002
W32 1 N/A Remote indication of Water level Digital 8001000002
Sample coolers - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
M25 1 N/A Sample cooler SCS20 8750005
Steam dump valve
N5 1 32 Steam dump control valve with pneumatic ac- Control 6050000240
tuator
N6 1 1/4" Filter regulator with auto. drain - 2915101
Gauge Board - Aalborg OC (Qty. gives the number of parts per boiler)
C30 1 - Gauge board (Specified on the fuel oil diagram - -
or connection"M"/"T" on the burner diagram -
therefore not shown on water/steam P&I-dia-
gram).
Control system - Aalborg OC
3L2 1 - Local control panel - 9306000025

ing
Hot well - steam injection (64Z_064071)
M82 1 15 Stop valve Stop 2501086
M83 1 15 Strainer Strainer 7040000041
M84 1 15 Control valve Control 6050000458
M85 1 Temperature controller with probe 8070000023
M86 1 15 Check valve Check 6020000101
M87 1 1/2" Vacuum breaker - 6000000121
M89 2 1/2" Steam injector - 7000000085
Hot well - oil detection
M145 1 - Oil detection equipment - -
M145.1 1 Sensor- 6 m cable - 8310000005
M145.2 1 Control unit - 8210000025
Salinity control
M146 1 - Salinity control - -
M146.1 1 N/A Salinity Electrode including wire SL 78 8620000104
M146.2 1 N/A Control device SL 700 8210000032
M146.3 1 25 T-piece - 8500000115
Water hose and spray gun
C191 1 - Water hose and spray gun (not shown on the di- - 2941001
agram)
Counter flanges
(c.fl.) 1 - Set of counter flanges (not shown on the P&I di- - K16:004096
agram)
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C1, 3C301
Type:
• Safety valve, full lift
Min. 200
• 25.912
Size:
• Nominal diameter: DN 32/50
Application:
• To blow off saturated steam, air or water
Material:
• Body: GGG 40.3
DIN-Material No.: 0.7043
• Seat: X6 Cr Ni Mo Ti 17122
330
• Disc: X35 Cr Mo 17
DIN-Material No.: 1.4122.05
Technical data:
• Nominal pressure: PN 40/16
• Weight: 14 kg
• Flanges according to DIN
• Inlet: DN 32, PN40
• Outlet: DN 50, PN16
ø125/ 4 x ø18
ø 165
ø 50
Disc
ø 29
115
Seat
Body
ø 32
ø 100 / 4 x ø 18
ø 140
110
Type No.: 6040

Version: A.2 Safety valve, DN 32/50, PN 40/16 2611171
85Y_013421#B.1
EXPANSION JOINT, DN 50
Expansion joint, DN 50
1 --- NO TITLE ---
85Y_013421#B.1
EXPANSION JOINT, DN 50
K03_032121#C.1
REMOTE PULL FOR SAFETY VALVE
Remote pull for safety valve
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C2
Type: Material:
• Stop globe valve, angle • Body: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
Size: DIN-materiale No: EN-JS1049
• Seat: X20Cr13+QT
• Nominal diameter: DN 65 DIN-materiale No: 1.4021+QT
Application: • Disc: X20Cr13+QT
• For steam and/or water flow DIN-materiale No: 1.4021+QT
Technical data:
• Nominal pressure: PN 25
• Weight: 17 kg
• Valve seat tightness according to DIN
EN 12266-1, leak rate A, standard
180
28
235
Disc
Seat
Body
145
ø 65
ø 145 / 8 x ø18
ø 185
145
Type No.: 6010

Version: C.1 Stop valve, angle, DN 65, PN 25 2511092
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C3,3C303,3C6
Type: Material:
• Stop globe valve, straight • Body: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
Technical data:
• Weight: 4.3 kg
ø 120
9
180
Disc
ø 75 / 4 x ø14
Seat
ø 105
ø 20
Body
150
Type No.: 6010

Version: D.1 Stop valve, straight, DN 20, PN 25 2501087
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C4,3C304
Type: Material:
• Stop check globe valve, screw down non • Body: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
return, straight DIN-materiale No: EN-JS1049
Size: • Seat: X20Cr13+QT
DIN-materiale No: 1.4021+QT
• Nominal diameter: DN 20 • Disc: X20Cr13+QT
Application: DIN-materiale No: 1.4021+QT
• For steam and/or water flow Technical data:
• Weight: 4.3 kg
ø 120
9
180
ø 75 / 4 x ø 14
Disc
ø 105
Seat
ø 20
Body
150
Type No.: 6030

Version: D.1 Stop valve, straight, non return, DN 20, PN 25 2641087
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C7,3C307
Type: Material:
Technical data:
• Weight: 5.4 kg
ø 140
13
190
Disc
ø 85 / 4 x ø14
Seat
ø 25
ø 115
Body
160
Type No.: 6010

Version: C.1 Stop valve, straight, DN 25, PN 25 2501088
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C9, 3C10, 3C11
Type: Material:
• Instrument stop cone valve, straight, with • Body: C 22.8
security plate DIN- Material No. 1.0460
Size:
• G ½" x ø 12 • Seat: X20 Cr13
• Nominal diameter: DN 8 DIN- Material No. 1.4021
Application:
• For steam, water and/or air • Needle tip: X35 CrMo17
DIN- Material No. 1.4122
Technical data:
• Inlet: G ½" male DIN
19207, form R
• Outlet: For steel tube ø 12

• Weight: 0.8 kg
Ø 75
115
1/2” BSP
Security plate
12
22
90
Type No.: 6220

Version: A.2 Stop valve, straight, DN 8, PN 160 6220000002
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C16
Type:
• Gate valve, straight
Size:
• Nominal diameter: 1 1/2"
Application:
• Water, steam and diesel oil
Material:
• Red brass
Technical data:
• Max. working pressure: 16 bar
• Max. temperature: 150°C
• Weight: 0.85 kg
Ø 70
Max. 126
53
1 ½"
23
57
Type No.: 6010

Version: A.2 Gate valve, straight, 1 1/2" 2931116
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C17
Type: Material:
• Reflective water level gauge • Body: Carbon steel 45#
• Orientation: left • Connection valve body: WCB
• Model size: 26 • Drain valve body: WCB
• 9020 Technical data
Size: • Connection valves type: PX
• Connection, nominal: DN 25 • Weight:16.3 kg
• Connection, drain: ø 10 Dimension:
Pressure rating: • H: 700
• Pressure of unit, nominal: PN 25 • H1: 530
• Pressure of connection valves, nominal: • H2:493
PN 40 • H3: 250
• Pressure of drain valve, nominal:PN 40 • H4:160
Connection type: • H5:115
• Connection type: Flanges according to • L: 84.5
DIN • W:125
Application: • W1:150
• For boiler water level indicator • D: ø 10
Type No.: 7010

Version: B.1 Water level gauge, left, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25 7010000431
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C17
W1
L
W
Visible length H2
H1
H
H3
H5
H4
Drain connection ø D
Type No.: 7010

Version: B.1 Water level gauge, left, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25 7010000431
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C18
Type: Material:
• Reflective water level gauge • Body: Carbon steel 45#
• Orientation: right • Connection valve body: WCB
• Model size: 26 • Drain valve body: WCB
• 9020 Technical data
Size: • Connection valves type: PX
• Connection, nominal: DN 25 • Weight:16.3 kg
• Connection, drain: ø 10 Dimension:
Pressure rating: • H: 700
• Pressure of unit, nominal: PN 25 • H1: 530
• Pressure of connection valves, nominal: • H2:493
PN 40 • H3: 250
• Pressure of drain valve, nominal:PN 40 • H4:160
Connection type: • H5:115
• Connection type: Flanges according to • L: 84.5
DIN • W:125
Application: • W1:150
• For boiler water level indicator • D: ø 10
Type No.: 7010

Version: B.1 Water level gauge, right, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25 7010000430
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C18
W1
L
W
Visible length H2
H1
H
H3
H5
H4
Drain connection ø D
Type No.: 7010

Version: B.1 Water level gauge, right, 2 x 6, DN 25, PN 25 7010000430
K03_032122#C.2
REMOTE PULL FOR WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Remote pull for water level gauge
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C198
Type:
• Stop valve, gate straight
Size:
• Nominal diameter: DN 50
Application:
• Sea water, fresh water, oil, steam etc.
Material:
• Body: GG 25
Technical data:
• Max. temperature: 150 °C
• Weight: 11.5 kg
Type No.: 6010

Version: A.2 Stop valve, gate straight, DN 50, PN 10 2531005
Technical data CR 1
DATA SHEET
Tag Dimensional
No(s): 3M169,3M170
sketches Dimensions and weights
Net weight
D2 Dimensions [mm]
Pump [kg]
D1
type Oval flange DIN flange
Oval
B2 D1 D2
DIN
B1 B1 + B2 B1 B1 + B2
CR 1-2 256 447 281 472 191 141 109 18.4 22.5
B2
CR 1-3 256 447 281 472 191 141 109 18.4 22.5
CR 1-4 274 465 299 490 191 141 109 18.7 22.8
CR 1-5 292 483 317 508 191 141 109 19.5 23.6
G 1/2 G 1/2 CR 1-6 310 501 335 526 191 141 109 19.7 23.8
CR 1-7 332 563 357 588 231 141 109 22.0 26.1
CR 1-8 350 581 375 606 231 141 109 22.8 26.9
CR 1-9 368 599 393 624 231 141 109 23.2 27.3
B1
CR 1-10 386 617 411 642 231 141 109 25.1 29.2
G 1/2 19 x 24.5 DIN CR 1-11 404 635 429 660 231 141 109 25.6 29.7
CR 1-12 422 653 447 678 231 141 109 26.1 30.2
ø100
ø140
ø89
CR 1-13 440 671 465 696 231 141 109 26.3 30.4
75
CR 1-15 492 773 517 798 281 178 110 32.8 36.9
20
100 ø35 4 x ø13.5

141 180 CR 1-17 528 809 553 834 281 178 110 33.3 37.4
250 220 CR 1-19 589 870 281 178 110 40.1
Oval CR 1-21 625 906 281 178 110 40.9
G 1/2 Rp 1
22 M10 x 40 CR 1-23 661 942 281 178 110 41.7
CR 1-25 697 978 281 178 110 42.9
TM02 0193 2501
50
CR 1-27 737 1072 335 178 110 48.9

20
100 75 4 x ø13.5
145 180
160 220
Electrical data 3 x 220-255/380-440 V, 60 Hz

Motor Full load current Power factor Motor efficiency I
Pump type start
Cos Ê1/1 ----------------
P2 [kW] I1/1 [A] Ë [%] I 1/1
CR 1-2 0.37 1.58-1.46/0.91-0.84 0.88-0.82 78.0-79.0 4.80-6.00

CR 1-3 0.37 1.58-1.46/0.91-0.84 0.88-0.82 78.0-79.0 4.80-6.00
CR 1-4 0.37 1.58-1.46/0.91-0.84 0.88-0.82 78.0-79.0 4.80-6.00
CR 1-5 0.55 2.40-2.18/1.38-1.26 0.88-0.82 80.5-82.0 4.80-6.00
CR 1-6 0.55 2.40-2.18/1.38-1.26 0.88-0.82 80.5-82.0 4.80-6.00
CR 1-7 0.75 3.15-2.85/1.82-1.64 0.89-0.84 82.0-84.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-8 0.75 3.15-2.85/1.82-1.64 0.89-0.84 82.0-84.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-9 0.75 3.15-2.85/1.82-1.64 0.89-0.84 82.0-84.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-10 1.1 4.50-4.00/2.60-2.32 0.89-0.84 82.0-85.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-11 1.1 4.50-4.00/2.60-2.32 0.89-0.84 82.0-85.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-12 1.1 4.50-4.00/2.60-2.32 0.89-0.84 82.0-85.0 5.10-6.50
CR 1-13 1.1 4.50-4.00/2.60-2.32 0.89-0.84 82.0-85.0 5.10-6.50
Electrical data 3 x 220-277/380-480 V, 60 Hz

Motor Full load current Power factor Motor efficiency I start
Pump type Cos Ê1/1 ----------------
P2 [kW] I1/1 [A] Ë [%] I
1/1
CR 1-15 1.5 5.70-5.00/3.30-2.90 0.89-0.78 80.5-82.0 5.90-8.40
CR 1-17 1.5 5.70-5.00/3.30-2.90 0.89-0.78 80.5-82.0 5.90-8.40
CR 1-19 2.2 8.05-6.95/4.65-4.00 0.90-0.81 83.0-84.5 6.50-9.50
CR 1-21 2.2 8.05-6.95/4.65-4.00 0.90-0.81 83.0-84.5 6.50-9.50
CR 1-23 2.2 8.05-6.95/4.65-4.00 0.90-0.81 83.0-84.5 6.50-9.50
CR 1-25 2.2 8.05-6.95/4.65-4.00 0.90-0.81 83.0-84.5 6.50-9.50
CR 1-27 3.0 10.6-9.00/6.10-5.20 0.90-0.83 85.0-86.0 7.40-11.0
Aalborg Industries Data sheet No. 5541 002001 1/3
Version: A.2 Feed water pump CR 1-17 5541002001
General data Vertical multistage centrifugal pumps
DATA SHEET
Tag
CR 1No(s): 3M169,3M170
10
4 6
TM02 1194 0601Materials: CR, CRI, CRN 1, 3 and 5

7
Materials: CR
Pos. Description Materials DIN W.-Nr. AISI/ASTM
Cast iron
1 Pump head EN-JL1030 ASTM 25B
EN-GJL-200
3 Shaft Stainless steel 1.4401 AISI 316
4 Impeller Stainless steel 1.4301 AISI 304
5 Chamber Stainless steel 1.4301 AISI 304
6 Outer sleeve Stainless steel 1.4301 AISI 304
O-ring for outer
7 EPDM or FKM
sleeve
Cast iron
8 Base EN-JL1030 ASTM 25B
EN-GJL-200
9 Neck ring PTFE
10 Shaft seal Type cartridge
Rubber parts EPDM or FKM
Performance curves CR 1
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3M169,3M170
p H
[kPa] [m]
-27
CR 1
240
60 Hz
-25 ISO 9906 Annex A
220
2000 -23
200
-21
180
-19
1600
160
-17
140
-15
1200 120
-13
-12
100 -11
-10
800 80 -9
-8
60 -7
-6
-5
400 40
-4
-3
20 -2
0 0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Q [m³/h]
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 Q [l/s]
P2 Eta
[kW] [%]
0.10 50
0.08 P2 40 Technical data CR 1
Eta
0.06 30
0.04 20
0.02 10
0.00 0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Q [m³/h]
H NPSH
[m] [m]
curves/
10 5
QH 3500 rpm
8 4
TM02 1504 1902Performance
6 3
4 2
NPSH
2 1
0 0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Q [m³/h]
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3M23
Type: Technical data:

• Dosing pump CNPA -1601 PPE2 with • Max. outlet pressure: 16 bar
chemical tank. • Max. inlet pressure: 8 bar
Application: • Capacity at 16 bar: 1.0 l/h
• For chemical dosing, on/off feed water • Stroke at 16 bar: 0.10 ml
regulation. • Capacity at 8 bar: 1.4 l/h
• For boiler with max. design pressure: 12 • Stroke at 8 bar: 0.13 ml
bar • Max. frequency: 180 stroke/min
Material: • Suction lift: 6 m WC
• Pump • Max. ambient temperature at max. coun-
ter pressure: 45°C
Liquid end: Polypropylene
Valves: Polypropylene • Wattage: 10 W
Seals: EPDM • Peak current: 0.5 A
Balls: Ceramic • Fuse (placed behind the control pan-
• Chemical tank: Polyethylene el): 0.16 AT
• Enclosure rating: IP 65
Feed line to boiler • Insulation class: F
Cooling neck 200 - 300 mm
Yard supply
• Motor: 1 phase AC
Dosing valve, spring loaded • Control supply: 230 V 50/60 Hz
ø 6/ø 4 x 5000 mm PE Hose • Weight: 8 kg
Air escape valve

159
Dosing pump, 5540 000313

incl. air escape valve,
hoses, dosing valve and
non return valve
Manual stirrer, item 8500 000716
60 l chemical tank, item 8500 000715

590
Pover connection
Non return valve
ø 410 Dosing valve

96
35
18
ø 30
Customer connection 1/2”
Type No.: 9296

Version: C.1 Chemical dosing unit 9296006003
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3M23
CNPa 1601 at medium back pressure

1,6
1,4
180 strokes/min
135 strokes/min
90 strokes/min
1,2 45 strokes/min
1
I/h
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Stroke length
Correction factor
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
1 2 3 4 8 11 13 16
Back pressure
Type No.: 9296

Version: C.1 Chemical dosing unit 9296006003
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3H2, 3W32
Type • Auxiliary voltages:

2-wire supply: 25…16 VDC / 0…20 mA
• LED indicator/limit switch • EMC immunity influence: < ± 0.5% of
• 5714B reading
Application: • Max. wire size: 1 x 2.5 mm²
• Relative air humidity:< 95% RH (non
condensing)
• Tightness (mounted in a panel): IP65
Voltage input:
• Measurement range: -20mV...12 VDC
• Program measurement range :
5714 OK
0…1/0,2…1/0…10/2…10VDC
• Input resistance: nominal 10 M
48
0
12
1 2
Current input:
• Measurement range: -1...25 mA
96
• Program, measurement range:
0…20 and 4…20mA
• Input resistance:
Nominal20  + PTC 25
• The 5714 with 2 relay outputs is designed • Sensor error detection: loop break
for digital readout of current / voltage or 4…20mA…..Yes
temperature signals.
Display:
Relay outputs:
• Display readout: -199…9999 (4 digits)
• Are selected as either a make or a break • Decimal point: programmable
function. The relays can be used as a trip
amplifier. • Digit height: 13.8 mm
• Two yellow front LEDs indicate the re- • Display updating: 2.2 times/s
lay status. The relays can be set up with • Input outside input range is indicated by:
either delayed on or off. Active relay can Explanatory text
be selected for either an increasing or de- Relay outputs:
creasing signal. The arrow keys can be
used for fast change of the set point. • Relay function: setpoint
Technical data: • Hysteresis, in % display counts:
0.1…25%/1…2999
• Panel cut out: 44.5 x 91.5 mm • On and Off delay: 0…3600s
• Weight: 230 g • Max. voltage: 250 VRMS
Electrical specifications: • Max. current: 2 A / AC
Common specifications: • Max. AC power: 500 VA
• Supply voltage: • Max. current at 24 VDC: 1A
Max. voltage: 24…230 VA C, ±10%50… • Sensor error action: Make / break/hold
60Hz
24…250 VDC ± 20%
• Internal consumption: 2.7W
Max. consumption: 3.0 W
Type No.: 8001

Version: E.1 LED indicator / limit switch 8001000002
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3H2, 3W32
Supply
Connections
Input:
RTD, 2-wir e RTD, 3-wire RTD, 4-wire
2-wire transmitter Current
Voltage Potentiometer
Output:
Relays
R1 R2
Block Diagram
Type No.: 8001

Version: E.1 LED indicator / limit switch 8001000002
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3M25
Type: Material:
• Sample cooler • Sample cooler: austenitic stainless steel
Size: grade 316L
• Cooling water inlet valve: stainless steel
• SCS 20 • Sample inlet valve: stainless steel.
Application: • Compression fitting: carbon steel
• The sample cooler is designed for taking Technical data:
manual samples of boiler water for anal-
ysis. The cooling water is turned on and • Coil design pressure: 32 bar g
the sample inlet valve is adjusted until a • Coil design temperature: 300°C
sample of boiler water is obtained at a • Body design pressure: 10 bar g
suitable temperature. For manual sam- • Body design temperature: 100°C
pling it is not normally necessary to
measure sample or cooling water flow • Weight: 4 kg
rates.
ø 90
Sample in ø 6 mm O/D
Customer supply
2. Sample inlet valve

1/4” BSP (each ends)
ø 13
3. Compression fittings
for sample in 1/4” BSP
Cooling water out 1/2” BSP

Customer supply
1. Sample cooler
4. Cooling water Sample out

inlet valve 1/2” BSP
Cooling water in1/2” BSP
Customer supply
Type No.: 7050

Version: D.1 Sample cooler 8750005
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3M25
Installation: • Allow the sample to run for a while be-

fore collection. This will ensure that a
• Fit the SCS 20 so that the bottom of the true sample is collected for analysis.
unit is accessible for the collection of the
cooled sample. • When enough liquid has been collected
close the sample inlet valve first and then
• Connect the cooling water inlet in ½” the cooling water inlet valve.
nominal bore pipe via an inlet valve.
• After closing the sample inlet valve the
• The cooling water outlet should be piped sample out connection may drip for a few
to an open drain or tundish. minutes while the coil drains.
• The sample inlet pipe should be in 6 mm Performance:
O/D tubes.
• The sample inlet to the cooler can be tak- • When it is required to predict the per-
en direct from a boiler or steam line iso- formance of the sample cooler system,
lating valve. the table below gives the sample outlet
temperature to be expected for two boiler
Operation: pressures an for two cooling water flow
• Sample pipe work will become very hot rates.
under normal working conditions, and Example
will cause burns if touched.
• Open the cooling water inlet valve first • A sample flow rate of 30 l/h is required
and ensure that a flow can be seen at the from a boiler operating at 10 barg. For a
cooling water outlet. cooling water flow rate of 0.4 l/s, from
the table the sample outlet temperature
• It is essential that cooling water is flow- would be 4K (4°C) above the cooling
ing before opening the sample inlet water inlet temperature. If the cooling
valve. water is 15°C, the sample temperatures
• Gradually open the samples inlet valve would be 19°C.
and regulate the flow to achieve a cooled
sample at about 25°C.
Sample flow rate Cooling water flow rate Cooling water flow rate
0.25 l/s (900 l/h) 0.4 l/s (1440 l/h)
Boiler pressure
10 barg 20 barg 10 barg 20 barg
l/h l/min Sample outlet temperature above cooling water inlet temperature K (°C)
10 0.17 3 3 1 1
20 0.33 5 5 2 3
30 0.50 7 9 4 5
40 0.67 8 10 5 7
50 0.83 10 12 6 8
60 1.00 11 13 7 10
80 1.33 12 16 8 12
100 1.67 15 19 9 14
120 2.00 17 22 10 16
Table 1
Type No.: 7050

Version: D.1 Sample cooler 8750005
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3N5
Type: Technical data unit:

• Control globe valve, straight with pneu- • Weight: 35 kg
matic actuator and I/P positioner
• 23.470, DP 32
Size:
• Nominal diameter: DN 32
Application:
• For cooling, water, steam, brine and/or
gas flow
Material valve:
• Body: EN-GSJ-400-18U-LT
Material No.: EN-JS1049
• Seat: X20 Cr13 + QT
Material No.: 1.4021 + QT
• Plug: X20 Cr13 + QT
Material No.: 1.4021 + QT
• Stuffing box: PTFE V-ring unit(-10°C to
+ 220°C)
Technical data, valve:
• Positioning ratio: 50:1
• Flow characteristic: Equal percentage
• Kvs value: 6.3 m³/h
• Travel: 20 mm
• Plug type: Parabolic shaft guided
Technical data, actuator:
• Spring range: 0.4 – 1.2 bar
• Closing pressure: 16.8 bar
• Diaphragm area: 250 cm²
• Filling volume:1.1 l
• Max air supply pressure: 6 bar
• Action: Spring closes valve on air failure
Technical data, I/P positioner:
• Air connection: G ¼”
• Inlet air supply: 1.4 to 6 bar, instrument
air
• Air inlet consumption in stable state:
0.036² Nm³/h
• Cable inlet: M20 x 1.5
• Input signal: 4-20 mA
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +80°C
• Protection: IP65
Type No.: 6050 Pneumatic control valve, DN 32, PN 25, with DP

Version: B.3 6050000240
actuator and I/P positioner
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3N5
Installation: Dimension:
• Only as shown in the picture • L = 180
• H = 473
O.D.2 • H1 = 270
• I.D. = 32
O.D.1
• n x I.D.1 = 4 x 18
Hand wheel • P.D.C. = 100
• O.D. = 140
Stroke indicator
• O.D.1 = 225
• O.D.2 = 250
H1
Actuator
I/P Positioner
H
Stuffing box
Body
P.D.C. n x I.D.1
Plug
O.D.
I.D.
Seat
Type No.: 6050 Pneumatic control valve, DN 32, PN 25, with DP

Version: B.3 6050000240
actuator and I/P positioner
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3N6
Type:
• Filter regulator with automatic drain 30
Size: H andle
Body
• Connections ports 1/4” BSP
Max. 6
• Gauge ports 1/8” BSP
Application:
66
• Instrument air for regulating pressure Fitting
28
Technical data:
• Medium: instrument air only
Gauge por ts
18
Di smantel length 138

• Max. inlet pressure: 17 bar
• Operating temp.: –20 °C to + 65 °C
99
23
• Filter element: 5 m
• Recommend pressure regulating range: 6
8
7.5
0.14-7.0 bar
2.5
• Pressure gauge: 0 – 10 bar
Bin
14
• Weight: 0.4 kg 7
Material:
44
Connections ports
• Body: Steel
• Bin: Steel R1
• Handle: Acetal 9
38
31
41 SW19
Flow characteristics
8
Inlet pressure 7 bar
7
Outlet pressure [bar]
5
4
3
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3
Air flow [dm /s]
Type No.: 8000

Version: B.1 Filter regulator with automatic drain 2915101
64Z_064071#D.1
STEAM INJECTION SYSTEM
Steam injection system
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M82
Type: Material:
Technical data:
• Weight: 3.9 kg
ø 120
9
180
Disc
ø 65 / 4 x ø14
Seat
ø 15
ø 95
Body
130
Type No.: 6010

Version: C.1 Stop valve, straight, DN 15, PN 25 2501086
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M83
Type Technical data:

• Filter • Nominal pressure: PN 25
Size: • Filtration: 1.0
• Nominal diameter: DN 15 • Flange according to DIN
• Weight: 3.5 kg
Application
Installation:
• For mechanical cleaning of different me-
dias in tube systems before control • The filter can be mounted in optional po-
valves, reduction valves, pumps, steam sitions with the flow following the direc-
traps and flow meters tion of the arrow.
For steam installations the filter basket
Material: should be installed horizontally with the
• Body: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT flow following the direction of the arrow.
Din-Material No. EN-JS1049 Dimension:
• Cover: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT • H: 90
Din-Material No. EN-JS1049
• Screen: X 5 CrNi 18-10 • H1: 135
Din-Material No. 1.4301 • L: 130
• L1: 10
• O.D: 95
• P.D.C: 65
• I.D: 15
• I.D.1: 14
• n: 4
L L1
Body
Screen
P.D.C / n x I.D.1
O.D
I.D
H1
Cover
Type No.: 7040

Version: B.1 Filter, DN 15, PN 25 7040000041
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M84
Type
• Thermal-closing valve, straight through L
with flanges and cooling spacer
P.D.C. / n x I.D.1
Size: Seat
• Connection nominal: DN 15
O.D.
I.D.
Body
Pressure rating:
• Pressure nominal: PN 25 Spindel unit
Connection type:
• Connection type: flanges according to
DIN en 1092-2
Application:
• For regulating temperature of fluids, air Cooling spacer
and steam
Material:
• Body: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
DIN material No. EN-JS1049
• Seat:X6CrNIiTi8-10 M 38 x 1.5
DIN material No: 1.7218
• Spindle unit: X6CrNiTi18-10
DIN material No: 1.4541
Technical data:
• Kvs-value: 4.0 m3/h
• Closing pressure: 16 bar
• Weight: 4.3 kg
Dimension:
• L = 130
• H = 305
• I.D. = 15
• O.D = 95
• P.D.C. = 65
• I.D.1: = 14
• n=4
Installation:
• Spindle and cooling spacer vertical
downwards
Type No.: 6050

Version: B.1 Control valve, DN 15, PN 25 6050000458
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M85
Type: Dimension:
• Temperature switch with 8 m capillary • H = 339
tube • H1 = 269
Temperature range: • H2 = 275
• Temperature range: 60°C to 130°C • L1 = 8000
Material: • O.D. = 23
• R min. = 50
• Actuator: CuZn37, CW614N
(nickel plated)
Technical data:
• Weight 1.8 kg
Indicator unit
Pipe
H1
L1
M38 x 1.5
Thermal sensor
Actuator
H2
O.D.
.
in
m
R
Type No.: 8070

Version: F.1 Temperature switch 8070000023
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M86
Type:
• Check valve
• Disc-spring
Size:
• Connection nominal: DN 15
Pressure rating:
• Pressure nominal: PN 40
Application:
• The check valves are designed to be
sandwiched between flanges. They are
suitable for use on a wide range of fluids Technical data:
for applications in process lines, hot wa-
ter systems, steam and condensate sys- • Weight: 0.14 kg
tems etc. • Kvs-value: 4.4 m³/h
Material:
• Set pressure: 0.02 bar(g)
Installation:
• Body: GX5CrNiMo19-11-2
DIN material No. 1.4408 • The Check valves must be fitted in ac-
• Spring: X10CrNi18-8 cordance with the direction of flow arrow
DIN material No. 1.4310 indicating correct fluid flow direction.
• Valve plate: X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 • The Check valves can be installed in any
DIN material No. 1.4571 position, except upside down.
• Spring plate: X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 • The ”cam” design of the body allows the
DIN material No. 1.4571 various flange types to be accommoda-
ted. The body is rotated to touch the
• Retaining ring: X39CrMo17-1+QT flange joint bolts ensuring that the valve
DIN material No. 1.4122+QT is centred in the pipeline.
• Disc check valves are not suitable for use
Retaining ring where heavily pulsating flow exists, such
Valve plate Spring plate as close to a compressor.
Dimension:
• I.D. = 13
• O.D. = 45
• O.D.1 = 95
• W = 16
O.D.
I.D.
Spring
Preparation for
eart connection
Type No.: 6020

Version: A.3 Check valve, DN 15, PN 40 6020000101
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M87
Type:
• Vacuum breaker
Size:
• Connection: G 1/2" BSPP
Pressure rating:
• Pressure, nominal: PN 40
Application:
• Ventilation valve for pipelines, condens-
ing vapour (steam) or liquid systems,
where the system pressure should not fall
below the atmospheric pressure.
Material:
• Body: X5CrNi18-10
DIN material No. 1.4301
Cap
• Ball: X20Cr13+QT
DIN material No. 1.4021+QT
• Cap: X17CrNi16-2
Technical data:
• Operating temperature: 220°C
• Operating pressure: 21 bar(g)
• Set pressure: 7 mbar
• Kvs-value: 0.55 m³/h
• Weight: 0.38 kg
Installation:
• The Vacuum Breaker must be installed
in a vertical position, cap on top. System
connection downwards.
Dimension:
• H = 57
• H1 = 10
• W = 42
• HEX = 36
• HEX1 = 32
Type No.: 6000

Version: A.5 Vacuum breaker, 1/2", PN 40 6000000121
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M89

• Steam injector • Operating pressure: 17 bar(g)
Size: • Operating temperature: 207 °C
• Connection, internal: G 1/2" BSPP • Weight: 0.4 kg
• Connection, external: G 1" BSPT Installation:
Pressure rating: • The steam injectors must be installed
horizontally.
• Pressure, nominal: PN 25 • The steam injectors are designed to op-
Application: erate with the minimum noise provided
• Steam injectors are designed to inject the installation is correct.
steam into water or process liquor to en- Dimension:
sure quiet and efficient heating of the liq-
uid. The injector draws in cold liquid, • HEX = 36 mm
mixes it with steam within the injector • O.D. = 29 mm
nozzle and distributes the hot liquid. In • L =200 mm
many applications the circulation in-
duced by the injector is an advantage en-
suring thorough mixing and avoiding
temperature stratification.
Material:
• Head: X5CrNi18-10
• Pipe: X5CrNi18-10
L
G 1/2" BSPP
O.D.
G 1" BSPT
Head Pipe
Type No.: 7000

Version: A.4 Steam injector, 1/2", PN 25 7000000085
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M145.1
Type: Material:
• Ultrasonic sensor for oil detection equip- • Sensor: Stainless steel
ment Technical data:
Application: • Temperature: -70ºC to 150ºC
• The ultrasonic sensor is operated togeth- • Design of duty: Chemical interface
er with a control unit. • Liquid type: Clean, viscous with solids
• The equipment provides for oil detection • Cable: 6 metre
in feed/make-up water.
258
10 20 25 152 26
11
ø 22
¾"
Type No.: 8310

Version: B.4 Ultrasonic sensor for oil detection equipment 8310000005
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M145.2

• Control unit for oil detection equipment • Power supply (selector switch):
Application: 110/120V or 220/240V AC
• Relay output: DPCO
• The control unit is operated together with • Enclosure: IP 65
an ultrasonic sensor.
• The equipment provides for oil detection • Holes for glands 3 of ø 16
in feed/make-up water.
Material:
• Control device cabinet: Polycarbonate
Normal
Alarm
Fault
120
88
188 Holes for mounting

75
60
40
Holes for glands

40
130
160
200
Type No.: 8210

Version: B.1 Control unit for oil detection equipment 8210000025
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M146.1
Type: Electrical:
• Conductive electrode • Connection to control device via junction
Application: box:
Sensor pin 1 to pin 11 (brown)
• The conductive electrode is used in com- Sensor pin 2 to pin 12 (blue)
bination with a control device to measure Sensor pin 3 to pin 13 (grey)
and supervise the salinity of feed water. Sensor pin 4 to pin 14 (shield)
Technical data: Sensor pin 5 to pin 15 (black)
Instrument: Installation:
• Salinity range: 0 to 100 ppm (sea salt) • The conductive electrode must be instal-
led in the supplied T-piece (item 8500
• Pressure range: 0 to 1 bar(g) 000115). The cable must be connected to
• Temperature range: 0 to 100°C the control device via a junction box (not
• Accuracy: +/- 10% Alfa Laval supply).
• Weight: 0.3 kg • Maximum pressure in line: 1 bar(g)
Note:
• The electrode is totally sealed and must
not be opened. The guarantee is void if
opening of the electrode is attempted.
Cable lenght: 2.5 metre
Blue top cap
Gasket
Gold-plated
electrodes
Type No.: 8620

Version: A.1 Conductive electrode 8620000104
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M146.2
Type: Electrical:
• Control device for salinometer • Mains supply: 98 – 122 VAC or
Application: 196 – 244 VAC, 50 – 60 Hz
• Mains current: mains supply must be se-
• The control device is used in combina- cured against over current externally by
tion with a conductive electrode to meas- using a fuse (max. 100 mA)
ure and supervise the salinity of feed wa-
ter. • Power: max. 3.5 W
• Cable connections:
Technical data: Terminal 1-4: mains supply
Instrument: Terminal 5-10: relay contacts for alarm
and solenoid
• Salinity range: 0 – 100 ppm (sea salt) Terminal 11-16: electrode unit
• Accuracy: +/- 10% of displayed value Terminal 17-18: 4-20 mA current loop
• Adjustable alarm range:1 – 100 ppm mA =(0.16 x ppm) + 4 mA)
• Display: LED indication bar • Relay contacts: 8 A / 24 VDC
86
105
Type No.: 8210

Version: D.1 Control device, salinometer 8210000032
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): M146.3

• T-piece for salinity alarm equipment • Pressure range: 0 to 1 bar(g)
Size: • Flanges according to DIN 2501
• DN 25 • Weight: 2.65 kg
Application:
• Housing for salinity electrode
Material:
• Housing: RG 5
• Nut for electrode: RG5
110
115
10
PCD 85
4 x ø 12
Type No.: 8500

Version: C.1 T-piece for salinity alarm equipment 8500000115
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): C191
Type:
• Water washing hose with nozzle Nozzle,
item No. 294 1101
Couplings (2” Storz) Hose,
item No. 294 1001
Size:
• V-nozzle: 12 mm
• Length: 15 metre (hose)
• Inner diameter: 52 mm (hose)
Application:
• For spraying of water
Material:
• Hose: full-synthetic material (polyester)
woven in 1/1 binding, with inner rubber
lining
Technical data: 2” BSP connection Couplings (2” Storz),
(male) item No. 294 1201
• Max allowable working pressure: 20 bar
• Water temperature area: -30ºC-+60ºC
• Weight: 5.5 kg
Water flow
I/min
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Bar
Type No.: 8615

Version: A.2 Water washing hose with nozzle 2941001
K16_004096#D.1
COUNTER FLANGE
Counter flange
1 --- NO TITLE ---
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Fuel Oil Supply Pressure Atomizing Burner

Tag Number
.
................................... P&I diagram-fuel oil supply system............................. 93X02_910021............. 6-3
................................... List of parts - fuel oil supply for Pressure Atomizing. . . . . 93X02_910021............. 6-5
3F1............................. Pressure atomising burner, modulating......................... 5560000009................. 6-7
3C331, 3C431, Parts of
G121........................... Needle valve, straight, ½" x ½", PN 400....................... 2541002...................... 6-8
3C35........................... Pressure switch RT30AW 1-10 Bar............................. 6310310...................... 6-9
3C33........................... Pressure gauge, ø 100................................................. 6632973...................... 6-11
3C225......................... Pressure transmitter 0 - 10 bar(g)................................. 8010000022................. 6-12
3G111......................... Ball valve, three-way, DN 25...................................... 6070000004................. 6-13
3G115......................... Three-way valve incl. micro switch.............................. 6070000005................. 6-15
3G147......................... Fuel oil supply unit, with filter, size 150....................... 9294002355................. 6-16
3G224......................... Remote start/stop box................................................. 8001000005................. 6-19
Parts of G121............... Stop valve, straight, ½".............................................. 6010000002................. 6-20
Parts of G121............... Stop valve, straight, 3/4"............................................. 6010000012................. 6-21
Parts of G121............... Heating device.......................................................... 4700100...................... 6-22
Parts of G121............... Pressure transmitter 0 - 10 barg................................... 8010000012................. 6-23
Parts of G121............... Pressure gauge, ø 100................................................. 6632971...................... 6-24
Parts of G121............... Flow meter, VZO 20.................................................. 7060000003................. 6-25
Parts of G121............... Needle valve, straight, ½" x ½", PN 400....................... 2541002...................... 6-26
Parts of G121............... Temperature gauge, ø 63............................................ 6200050...................... 6-27
Parts of G121............... Ball valve incl. micro switch....................................... 81K_008733................ 6-28
Parts of G121............... Control valve pressure regulating, 3/4", PN 25.............. 2750301...................... 6-29
................................... Counter flange........................................................... K16_004096................ 6-31
................................... Performance Curve DO.............................................. 106591........................ 6-32
................................... Performance Curve HFO............................................ 106591........................ 6-36
93X02_910021#A.2
P&I DIAGRAM-FUEL OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM
P&I diagram-fuel oil supply system
LIST OF PARTS - FUEL OIL SUPPLY FOR PRESSURE
ATOMIZING
List of parts - fuel oil supply for Pressure

Atomizing
Boiler plant:..........................................................................................................................1 x Aalborg OC
Request number:................................................................................................................................106591
Configuration number:.................................................................................................................................1
Hull number(s):.............................................................................................................................WZL1301
Project number(s):.........................................................................................................................106591-01
P&I diagram drawing number:...............................................................................................93X02_910021
P&I diagram revision:..................................................................................................................................a
Date:.........................................................................................................................................06 June 2013
Reading guide:
List of Parts reflects parts delivered by Alfa Laval.
Tag Numbers are given without the index used on the P&I diagram. E.g. “C2" is found on the P&I Diagram
as "1C2" and "2C2" for boiler 1 and 2 respectively.
1 Pressure jet burner

ing
Pressure Jet Burner
F1 1 RMS7 Burner unit WH 5560000009
F113 1 DN20 Flexible hose 8615000003
L=1300
F115 1 DN20 Flexible hose 8615000004
L=1000
Gauge Board
C30 1 - Gauge board - -
C331 1 1/2" Instrument stop valve for C35 Needle 2541002
C431 2 1/2" Instrument stop valve for C33 and C225 Needle 2541002
C33 1 ø100, BSP Pressure gauge 0-16 bar(g) 6632973
1/2"-m
C35 1 G 1/2"-m Pressure switch, max. steam 0-10 bar(g) 6310310
C225 1 G 1/2"-m Pressure transmitter 0-10 bar(g) 8010000022
Change over valve(s)
G111 1 25 Three-way valve - 6070000004
G111.1 1 Threaded rod incl. 2 ball connections 8500000360
G115 1 25 Three-way valve (incl. micro switches) - 6070000005
Gas & Air separator
G121 1 - Gas & Air separator incl. flowmeter - 81Y_045101
LIST OF PARTS - FUEL OIL SUPPLY FOR PRESSURE
ATOMIZING
Fuel oil supply pump

G147 1 N/A Fuel oil supply pump unit DS1/150 9294002355
G224 1 N/A Remote start/stop box - 8001000005
Control system
3L2 1 - Local control panel - -
Counter flanges
(c.fl.) 1 - Set of counter flanges (not shown on the P&I di- - K16:004096
agram)
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3F1
Type:
• RMS7 225
• Pressure atomising burner

• Modulating
Application:
556
• Diesel oil up to 40 cSt at 50°C
758
ø 200 for M6/1a or

• Heavy fuel oil up to 380 cSt at 50°C
ø 220 for M7/1a

245
Technical data:
• El pre-heater: 13.8 kW
• Insulation class: F 764
• Weight: 111 kg
Hinged flange:
• The burner can be hinged to the left or
330
right depending on the position of the
hinge pin and by releasing the locking
ø 200
355
730
nut.
Oil burner arrangement:
400
1 Pump without solenoid valve
2 Solenoid valve (normally closed)
3 Solenoid valve (normally open) 76
0
6 Solenoid valve (normally closed r=
7 Solenoid valve (normally closed)

12 Nozzle head
13 Restricting orifice 13 3 18 16 6 14
12 1
14 Filter
15 Oil regulator TS
16 Oil pre-heater
17 Pressure switch
18 Temperature switch
4 15 17 7
P
M
Type No.: 5560

Version: B.1 Pressure atomising burner, modulating 5560000009
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C331, 3C431, Parts of G121
Type:
• Pressure gauge valve needle straight.
Size:
• 1/2” x 1/2”
Application:
• For instrument connections
Material:
• Body: C22.8
• DIN-material No. 1.0460
Technical data:
• Test connection: M20 x 1.5 mm threaded
male
• Weight: 0.4 kg
Type No.: 6210

Version: C.1 Needle valve, straight, ½" x ½", PN 400 2541002
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C35
Version: B.2 Pressure switch RT30AW 1-10 Bar 6310310
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C35
Version: B.2 Pressure switch RT30AW 1-10 Bar 6310310
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C33

• Pressure gauge • Measuring unit: bar – Mpa - kg/cm²
Size: • Measuring range: 0 – 16 / 1.6 /16 with
mechanical stop
• ø 100 • Connection: BSP 1/2”-m
Application: • Operating temperature:
• For all gaseous and liquid media Ambient: -20to + 60°C
Medium, max.: + 60°C
Material:
• Protection: IP 65
• Case: Stainless steel
• Socket: Cu-alloy
• Liquid filling: Glycerine
ø 107 81.5
ø 100
30
0 bar 16
MPa=bar x 0.1
0 kg/cm² 16
BSP 1/2”-m
8
Type No.: 8050

Version: C.1 Pressure gauge, ø 100 6632973
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3C225
Type:
• Pressure transmitter 52
Range: 36
• 0 - 10 bar(g)
Application:
• The pressure transmitter converts pres-
sure to an electric signal. The units are
supplied as passive two wire transmit-
ters. The output current is linearly pro-
portional to the input pressure.
PG 11
Material:
• Housing: Stainless steel with piezoresis-
tive measuring cell and electronics mod-
ule.
106
• Process connection: Stainless steel

Technical data:
ø24
Electrical specification:
• Current output signal: 4 to 20 mA SW 24
• Power supply terminal voltage for cur-
55
rent output: 7 to 33VDC

Accuracy:
• Response time T99: < 5 ms
25
• Influence of ambient temperature at start

of scale: 0.25%/10K of full scale value
• Influence of ambient temperature at full
scale value: 0.25%/10K of full scale val-
ue G 1/2” -m
Mechanical:
• Process temperature: -30°C to +120°C Connection diagram:
• Ambient temperature: -25°C to +85°C
• Max pressure: 25 bar(g)
• Min pressure: -1 bar(g)
• Degree of protection to EN 60529: IP65
• Cable gland: PG11
(cable size ø5 to 10 mm)
• Weight: 0.09 kg
Type No.: 8010

Version: B.2 Pressure transmitter 0 - 10 bar(g) 8010000022
Kugleventil, tre-vejs
DATA SHEET Ball valve, three-way
Kugelhahn, Deriwege
Tag No(s): 3G111

Kugleventil
I 3-vejs udførelse i stål med materialer som type RA 55 eller i rustfrit stål med materialer som type
1 --- NO TITLE ---

RA 66, med horisontal eller vertikal midtergren og kugle med L- eller T-boring.
Ball valve
In three-way design made of carbon steel with materials like type RA 55 or in stainless steel with
materials like type RA 66, with horizontal or vertical center connection and ball with in L- or T-bore.
Kuglehahn
In Dreiweg-Ausführung aus Stahl mit Werkstoffe wie Typ RA 55 oder Edelstahl mit Werkstoffe wie
Typ RA 66, mit horizontalem oder vertikalem mittleren Anschluß und Kugel mit L- oder T-Bohrung.
Horisontal midtergren - set fra oven. Vertikal midtergren - set fra siden.
Horizontal center connection - top view. Vertical center connection - side view.
Mittlerer Anschluß horizontal - Draufsicht. Mittlerer Anschluß vertikal - Seitenansicht.
DN 10 - DN 50
Indvendig gevind.
Female threads.
Innengevinde.
DN 10 - DN 200
Sidegrene : Svejseender.
Midtergren : Flange PN 16.
Side connections : Butt weld ends.
Center connection : Flange PN 16.
Seitenanschlüße : Schweißenden.
Mittlerer Anschluß : Flansch PN 16.
DN 10 - DN 200
Alle tilslutninger : Flange PN 16.
All connections : Flange PN 16.
Alle Anschlüße : Flansch PN 16.
Kugleboring Indvendig diameter på midtergren

Ball bore Inside diameter of center connection
DN A A1 L2 L L1 Kugelbohrung Lichte Weite des mittleren Anschluß
10 50 90 140 65,0 130 11,1 10
15 50 90 140 65,0 130 11,1 10
20 60 95 140 72,5 150 14,2 12
25 60 100 180 85,4 160 21,0 18
32 75 105 180 99,3 180 25,4 25
40 80 115 200 110,4 200 31,7 30
50 90 125 200 126,3 230 38,0 35
65 145 250 143,0 290 50,0 45
80 155 480 170,0 310 62,0 55
100 175 480 214,0 350 83,0 70
125 Version: B.1 200 Ball valve, three-way, DN 25
480 277,0 400 100,0 6070000004 90
150 240 480 307,0 480 100,0 90
200 300 720 409,0 600 150,0 135
Language
Aalborg UK
Industries Data sheet No. 6070 000004 6-13 / 39 1/2
DATA SHEET
TagFlowdiagrammer
No(s): 3G111 Flow Diagrams Schaltschemata.
Kugle med L-boring og midterste gren horisontal.

Ball with L-bore and center connection horizontal.
Kugel mit L-Bohrung und mittlerer Anschluß horizontal.
Kugle med L-boring og midterste gren vertikal.

Ball with L-bore and center connection vertical.
Kugel mit L-Borhrung und mittlerer Anschluß vertikal.
Kugle med T-boring og midterste gren horisontal.

Ball with T-bore and center connection horizontal.
Kugel mit T-Borhrung und mittlerer Anschluß horizontal.
Kugle med T-boring og midterste gren vertikal.

Ball with T-bore and center connection vertical.
Kugel mit T-Borhrung und mittlerer Anschluß vertikal.
Bemærk venligst at kuglens midtergren er uden sædering.

I tilfælde af T-boring kan mediet strømme bag om kuglen og ud gennem midtergrenen (se
skitse).
Please note that the center connection of the ball is not sealed.
Thus, in the case of a T-bore, the medium can flow around the ball and escape through the
center connection (see figure).
Bitte beachten Sie, daß der mittlere Anschluß der Kugel nicht separat abgedichtet ist. Dadurch
kann bei der T-Bohrung das Medium die Kugle umströmen und am mittleren Abgang austreten
(siehe Skizze).
Ordreeksempel Ordering example Bestellbeispiel

3 5 LH4 1 1 .
Tilslutning venstre sidegren Connection left side Anschluß links Seite
Tilslutning højre sidegren Connection right side Anschluß rechts Seite
Tilslutning midtergren Connection center Anschluß Mitte
Position midtergren Position center connection Lage mittleren Anschluß
H=horisontal V=vertikal H=horizontal V=Vertical H=horizontal V=vertikal
Kugleboring Ball bore Kugelbohrung
L=L-boret T=T-boret L=L-bore T=T-bore L=L-Bohrung T=T-Bohrung
Materiale Material Werkstoff
5=stål 6=syrefast stål 5=carbon steel 6=stainless steel 5=Stahl 6=Edelstahl
Serie Series Serie
3=3-vejs 3=Three-way 3=Dreiweg
Kode for tilslutning Code for connection Code für Anschluß

1=Svejseender 1=Butt weld 1=Schweißenden
2=Indvendig gevind 2=Female thread 2=Innengewinde
4=Flange PN 16 4=Flange PN 16 4=Flansche PN 16
Version: B.1 Ball valve, three-way, DN 25 6070000004
6-14 / 39 Industries
Aalborg Data sheet No. 6070 000004 Language UK 2/2
G115, G116
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3G115
Version: A.1 Three-way valve incl. micro switch 6070000005
6070 000005
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3G147
Type: Electrical specification:

• Fuel oil supply pump unit, with filter • Rated output for motor: 0.21 kW
Size: • Starting method: Direct
• Pump: NE 5 • Starting current: 2.8 A
• Operating current (full load): 0.8 A
Connection type:
• Revolution: 1020 r.p.m.
• Connection inlet and outlet, pipe size in- • Heating element motor: Not included
side / outside diameter: 25/ 34
• Power supply: 3 x 440V
• Connection type: Flange according to • Frequency: 60 Hz
SAE, hole pattern 3.000PSI
• Cable connection: M 20 x 1.5 • Insulation class: F
• Degree of protection: IP55
Application:
• For handling Fuel oils - DMA, DMB,
DMZ and RMx according. to ISO 8217
Material:
Materiale for
• Station block, casing: EN-GJS-400-15
• Pump, casing: Silafont
• Pump, screw set: Steel 1.0726
Technical data:
• Ambient air temperature: 50°C
• Pressure, max. supply: 5.0 barg
• Pressure, relief design: 8 barg
• Pressure, discharge outlet: 5 barg
• Temperature max. fuel oil: 150°C
• Foundation bolts: M12
• Oil viscosity min.: 1.1 cSt
• Oil viscosity max.: 380 cSt
• Oil viscosity: 1.1 cSt
Oil capacity: 66 l/h
NPSH: 5.0 mWC
• Viscosity: 3 cSt
NPSH: 2.0 mWC
• Viscosity at 380 cSt:
NPSH: 2.0 mWC
• Filtration: 500µ
• Weight motor: 6 kg
• Weight: 40 kg
Type No.: 9294

Version: B.1 Fuel oil supply unit, with filter, size 150 9294002355
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3G147
H
H1
H2
H3
I.D.2
L2 L3
L4
L1
L
I.D.1, SAE 3000 PSI
cable gland cable gland

W5
W4
W
W1
W3
W2
W6
I.D.1, SAE 3000 PSI
Dimension: Dimension:
• L: 400 • H: 442
• L1: 310 • H1: 155
• L2: 280 • H2: 116
• L3: 400 • H3: 80
• L4: 423 • I.D.1: 25
• W: 425 • I.D.2: 10.5
• W1: 266
• W2: 90
• W3: 91
• W4: 80
• W5: 96
Type No.: 9294

DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3G147
Installation:
• The pump/motor assemblies are of a ver-
tical design and are delivered with
mounting feet and oil sump. For safety
purposes, the arrangement with “motor
downwards” is not admissible
Connections / flanges:
• Counter flanges according to SAE. Bolts
and gaskets will be included in the sup-
ply.
Connection diagram:
2 4
5
1 6
1 Three way ball valve

2 Filter
3 Reversing valve
4 Pump
5 Non return valve
6 Safety valve
7 Pressure gauge
Type No.: 9294

DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): 3G224

• Remote start/stop box • Nominal operating condition:
Application: U = 600 V and I = 1.2 A or
U = 240 V and I = 3 A or
• For start/operation and stop of fuel oil U = 120 V and I = 6 A
pumps • Protection: IP 65
Material: • Temperature: -25°C to +70°C
• House: Polycarbonate
• Colour: Grey
120
83 85
Fuel oil pumps

1 2
Start/operation
incl. lamp function
123
105
145
177
Stop
Cable glands M 32 (PG 29)
105
Ø 5.8
70
Ø 5.8
Type No.: 8001

Version: B.1 Remote start/stop box 8001000005
DATA SHEET
Tag No(s): Parts of G121
Type: Material:
• Stop ball valve, straight • Body: AISI 316
Size: Din material No. 1.4401
• ½" connection
Application: Technical data:
• Cold and hot water, low pressure steam, • Max. working pressure 16 bar
chemicals oil, air, gas
• Max. temperature 140C
• Weight 0.6 kg
120
49
21,3
66
Type No.: 6010

Version: A.2 Stop valve, straight, ½" 6010000002
DATA SHEET
Type: Material:
• Stop ball valve, straight • Body: AISI 316
Size: Din material No. 1.4401
• 3/4" connection
Application: Technical data:
• Cold and hot water, low pressure steam, • Max. working pressure 16 bar
chemicals oil, air, gas
• Max. temperature 140C
• Weight 0.85 kg
120
52
26.9
83
Type No.: 6010

Version: A.2 Stop valve, straight, 3/4" 6010000012
DATA SHEET
Version: A.2 Heating device 4700100
DATA SHEET
Type: Connection diagram:

• Pressure transmitter
Range: 50
• 0 – 10 barg
Application:
• The pressure transmitter converts pres-
sure to an electric signal. The units are
supplied as two wire transmitters with an
output signal of 4-20 mA. The output
current is linearly proportional to the in- PG 11
put pressure.
Material:
• Housing: Stainless steel with ceramic
measuring cell and electronics module.
The temperature-compensated ceramic
measuring cell has a thin-film strain
gauge which is mounted on a ceramic di- Ø 27
aphragm. 127
• Process connection: Stainless steel
• Gasket: Viton
Technical data:
SW 27
Electrical specification:
• Current output signal: 4 to 20 mA
• Voltage output signal (only measuring
range  1 bar: 0….10 VDC
20
• Power supply terminal voltage for cur-

rent output: 10….36VDC
Accuracy:
G 1/2” -m
• Response time T99: < 0.1 s
• Influence of ambient temperature at start
of scale: 0.25%/10K (0.25%/10K) of full
scale value I0 Output current
1+
• Influence of ambient temperature at full 2-
Io
+
UB
UB Power supply
RL Load
scale value: 0.25%/10K (0.25%/10K) of RL
full scale value
Connections:
Mechanical: 1 (+UB)
2 (-UB)
• Process temperature: 30°C to +120°C
• Ambient temperature: 25°C to +85°C
• Degree of protection to EN 60529: IP65
• Weight: 0.25 kg
Type No.: 8012

Version: A.2 Pressure transmitter 0 - 10 barg 8010000012
DATA SHEET

• Pressure gauge • Measuring unit: bar - MPa - kg/cm²
Size: • Measuring range: 0 – 10 / 1.0 / 10
• ø 100 • Connection: BSP3/8”-m
• Operating temperature:
Application: Ambient: 0 to + 60°C
• For all gaseous and liquid media Medium: 0 to + 70°C
The mean value of the maximum ambi-
Material: ent temperature and the medium temper-
• Case: Black enamelled steel ature must not exceed the maximum am-
• Socket: Brass bient temperature.
• Liquid filling:Glycerine • Weight: 0.6 kg
45
ø 108
0 bar 10
MPa=bar x 0.1
0 kg/cm² 10
83
16
BSP 3/8" -m
Type No.: 8050

Version: A.2 Pressure gauge, ø 100 6632971
DATA SHEET

• Flow meter • Nominal pressure: 16 bar
• VZO 20 • Installation length: 165 mm
Application: • Max. temperature: 130°C
• Measuring of oil consumption • Ambient temperature: -10 to +70°C
• Flow rate:
Maximum: 1500 l/h
Nominal: 1000 l/h
Minimum: 30 l/h
Approx. starting: 12 l/h
• Weight: 2.5 kg
115
165 54
260
Type No.: 7060

Version: A.2 Flow meter, VZO 20 7060000003
DATA SHEET
Type:
• Pressure gauge valve needle straight.
Size:
• 1/2” x 1/2”
Application:
• For instrument connections
Material:
• Body: C22.8
• DIN-material No. 1.0460
Technical data:
• Test connection: M20 x 1.5 mm threaded
male
• Weight: 0.4 kg
Type No.: 6210

Version: C.1 Needle valve, straight, ½" x ½", PN 400 2541002
DATA SHEET

• Temperature gauge • Measuring range:0 - 120ºC
Size: • Connection:G 1/2” BSP
• ø 63 • Weight:0.07 kg
Application:
• For liquid
Material:
• Case: Nickel plated steel
• Stem / pocket: Brass
23.5 63
G 1/2” BSP
Ø 12
Ø 63
°C
Type No.: 8080

Version: A.2 Temperature gauge, ø 63 6200050
DATA SHEET
Version: A.2 Ball valve incl. micro switch 81K_008733
DATA SHEET
Type:
• Control valve pressure regulating 75
Size
• Nominal diameter: 3/4"
Application:
25
• Pressure regulation
Material:
• Body: G-CuSn5ZnPb
• Seat: Stainless steel
• Balancing bellows: Stainless steel
DIN-Material No. 1.4571
165
• Positioning spring: Stainless steel
DIN-Material No. 1.4310
Technical data:
• Nominal pressure: PN25
• Pressure regulation range: 1 - 4 bar
• Max. liquid temperature: 150°C
• Weight: 1.1 kg
Installation:
• Install the excess pressure valve with the
actuator vertically suspended. The valve Ø 90
can be installed in any position provided
that the temperature does not exceed
60ºC. Make sure that the medium flow
corresponds with the direction by the ar-
row on the body.
Type No.: 6050

Version: B.1 Control valve pressure regulating, 3/4", PN 25 2750301
K16_004096#D.1
COUNTER FLANGE
Counter flange
1 --- NO TITLE ---
106591#A.2 ÿB()C,)84-D(ÿ>4ED?E45+,-ÿ
PERFORMANCE CURVE DO
ÿFGHIJÿ
ÿK54-L4)LÿK+M(/ÿNOPÿQR6Sÿ
ÿ>?*5,8()/ÿ ÿ@(A?(*5ÿ-,./ÿ ÿ>,-C+R.ÿ-,./ÿ
Performance Curve DO ÿ2TU2ÿ
ÿ1234ÿ5673ÿ ÿÿ ÿ334ÿ4ÿ
ÿ894
ÿ9423ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ!"#ÿ
ÿ
ÿ7323ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ$9ÿ#ÿ
ÿ133ÿ953ÿ53739523ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ%8#ÿ
ÿ'()*+,-ÿ-,./ÿÿ22ÿ ÿ<*()/ÿÿ4=ÿ
6-32 / 39
ÿ345(67+8(/ÿÿ9:9621ÿ;ÿ212Language
ÿ ÿ09UK3ÿ1ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
106591#A.2
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ?@-<ÿA7B-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿNE-J-<ÿOE<ÿ
ÿC+</DE0EFÿG+<@-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ.22%%ÿÿP=QR=,Sÿ
ÿH/D=EI,ÿBD-JJ@D-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ&1%ÿÿPT+Dÿ,Sÿ
ÿ?--KÿL+A-DÿA-MB-D+A@D-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUCSÿ
ÿ)7Language
835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&1$$1%2ÿ ÿ;3789ÿÿ<=>ÿ
UK
ÿ347!4679ÿÿ256+72%$8ÿ9ÿ$8:$&:%.ÿ ÿ*+6-33
,-ÿ/.39ÿ/0ÿ&ÿ
106591#A.2 ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ?@-<ÿA6B-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿNE-J-<ÿOE<ÿ
ÿC+<.DE/EFÿG+<@-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ:11%%ÿÿP=QR=,Sÿ
ÿH.D=EI,ÿBD-JJ@D-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&0%ÿÿPT+Dÿ,Sÿ
ÿ?--KÿL+A-DÿA-MB-D+A@D-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUCSÿ
ÿ)7835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&0$$0%1ÿ ÿ;3789ÿÿ<=>ÿ

6-34 / 39
ÿ247!3679ÿÿ145+61%$7ÿ8ÿ$79$&9%Language
:ÿ ÿ*+UK,-ÿ'ÿ./ÿ&ÿ
ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
106591#A.2
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ?@-<ÿA6B-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿNE-J-<ÿOE<ÿ
ÿC+<.DE/EFÿG+<@-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ:11%%ÿÿP=QR=,Sÿ
ÿH.D=EI,ÿBD-JJ@D-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&0%ÿÿPT+Dÿ,Sÿ
ÿ?--KÿL+A-DÿA-MB-D+A@D-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUCSÿ
ÿ)7Language
835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&0$$0%1ÿ ÿ;3789ÿÿ<=>ÿ
UK
ÿ247!3679ÿÿ145+61%$7ÿ8ÿ$79$&9%:ÿ ÿ*+6-35
,-ÿ/&39ÿ./ÿ&ÿ
106591#A.2
ÿC()D,)84-E(ÿ?4FE@F45+,-ÿ
PERFORMANCE CURVE HFO
ÿGHIJKÿ
ÿL54-M4)MÿL+N(/ÿOPQÿRS6Tÿ
Performance Curve HFO
ÿ?@*5,8()/ÿ ÿA(B@(*5ÿ-,./ÿ ÿ?,-D+S.ÿ-,./ÿ
ÿ2<U2ÿ
ÿ1234ÿ5673ÿ ÿÿ ÿ396ÿ1234ÿ4ÿ
ÿ894
ÿ9423ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ!"#ÿ
ÿ
ÿ7323ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ$9ÿ#ÿ
ÿ133ÿ953ÿ53739523ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ%8#ÿ
ÿ'()*+,-ÿ-,./ÿÿ22ÿ ÿ=*()/ÿÿ4>ÿ ÿ345(67+8(/ÿÿ9:9621ÿ;ÿ212<9ÿ ÿ093ÿ1ÿ

ÿÿ
106591#A.2
ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ?@-<ÿA7B-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿN-+G7ÿ?@-<ÿOE<ÿ
ÿC+</DE0EFÿG+<@-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ.%2%%ÿÿP=QR=,Sÿ
ÿH/D=EI,ÿBD-JJ@D-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ&1%ÿÿPT+Dÿ,Sÿ
ÿ?--KÿL+A-DÿA-MB-D+A@D-ÿ ÿ:ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUCSÿ
ÿ)7835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&1$$1%2ÿ ÿ;3789ÿÿ<=>ÿ ÿ347!4679ÿÿ256+72%$8ÿ9ÿ$8:$':25ÿ ÿ*+,-ÿ.ÿ/0ÿ&ÿ

106591#A.2
ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ>?-;ÿ@6A-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿM-+F6ÿ>?-;ÿND;ÿ
ÿB+;.CD/DEÿF+;?-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿO%1%%ÿÿP<QR<,Sÿ
ÿG.C<DH,ÿAC-II?C-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&0%ÿÿPT+Cÿ,Sÿ
ÿ>--JÿK+@-Cÿ@-LA-C+@?C-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUBSÿ
ÿ)7835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&0$$0%1ÿ ÿ:3789ÿÿ;<=ÿ ÿ247!3679ÿÿ145+61%$7ÿ8ÿ$79$'914ÿ ÿ*+,-ÿ'ÿ./ÿ&ÿ

106591#A.2
ÿ785867ÿ1245ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ48ÿ79ÿÿ !"ÿ
ÿ123456789ÿ ÿ
72734ÿ5 9ÿ ÿ15 ÿ5 9ÿ
ÿ$%&'($ÿ
ÿ>?-;ÿ@6A-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿM-+F6ÿ>?-;ÿND;ÿ
ÿB+;.CD/DEÿF+;?-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿO%1%%ÿÿP<QR<,Sÿ
ÿG.C<DH,ÿAC-II?C-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&0%ÿÿPT+Cÿ,Sÿ
ÿ>--JÿK+@-Cÿ@-LA-C+@?C-ÿ ÿ9ÿ ÿ&%ÿÿPUBSÿ
ÿ)7835ÿ5 9ÿÿ&0$$0%1ÿ ÿ:3789ÿÿ;<=ÿ ÿ247!3679ÿÿ145+61%$7ÿ8ÿ$79$'914ÿ ÿ*+,-ÿ&ÿ./ÿ&ÿ

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Electric drawing
.
Electric drawing for boiler control panel....................... 101X03_618319........... 7-2
Set point list.............................................................. 101X03_618319........... 7-63
Modbus list............................................................... 106591........................ 7-65
Menu Tree................................................................ 106591........................ 7-67
101X03_618319#A.2
ELECTRIC DRAWING FOR BOILER CONTROL PANEL
Electric drawing for boiler control panel
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
101X03_618319#A.2
SET POINT LIST
101X03_618319#A.3
6/5/2013 SET POINT LIST List of Indicators and Set Points for ON 106591 Page 1
Set point
Itemlist Units Range Default Type ITEM NO IN DRAWING Element Bnr Physical Remarks
Set point 1) Steam/water P/I diagram Terminal Trip Location
2) Oil flow diagram No. in
3) Burner drawing: wiring
4) Wiring diagram: 101X03:618319 diagram
1 2 3 4
Oil fired boiler / Burner
Safety Valve BAR 10.0 25.912 Mechanical
High Steam Pressure Switch BAR 1-10 9.0 RT30 C35 33S2F X2:222/223 X Boiler
Steam Pressure Transmitter Boiler BAR 0-10 MBS 5100 C48 30A1F X2:10/11 Boiler
High steam pressure BAR 0-10 9.0 - - - - X
Low steam pressure BAR 0-10 5 - - - -
Start/Stop Pressure BAR 0-10 7.2-8.0 - - - -
Steam pressure set point BAR 0-10 7 - - -
Steam pressure transmitter Common BAR 0-10 MBS 5100 50A5F

High steam pressure BAR 0-10 9.0 - - -
Steam dump set point BAR 0-10 8.5 - - -
Low steam pressure BAR 0-10 4 - - -
Water Level Transmitter (4-20mA) mA 4-20 GESTRA /CLT W33.4 30A11F X1:14/15/16/17 Boiler
Too high water level mm WG +180 - - - X
High Water Level mm WG +150 - - - Boiler
Normal Water Level mm WG 0 - - -
Stand by feed water pump mm WG -65 - - -
Low Water Level mm WG -135 - - - Boiler
Too Low Water Level 1 mm WG -180 GESTRA /CLT 15A1A component X Boiler
Oil Pressure Transmitter Burner (4-20mA) BAR 0-10 MBS 5100 F225 30A14F X1:18/19 Boiler
High oil pressure BAR 0-10 2.3 - - - - X
Low oil pressure BAR 0-10 0.8 - - - - X
Oil pressure set point BAR 0-10 1.8 - - - -
Stand by oil pump start BAR 0-10 1.2 - - - -
o
Oil temperature Transmitter Burner (4-20mA) C 0-150 F212 30A3F X1:12/13 Boiler
o
High oil temperature C 0-150 100 - -
o
Low oil temperature C 0-150 65 - -
o
Temp. Control Switch Heat Cable C 30-90 85 RAM 42.001 43S2D X1: 44-45 Burner
Low Com. Air Pressure Switch mBAR 2,5-50 5 GW 50 A4 R3 14S6B X1: 38-39 X Burner
Burner Swing Out / Burner Open Limit Sw. F224 33S3F X1: 32-33 X Panel
Flame Failure 1 RAR7/LAE10 F32 40P5D X Bnr. + Panel Cut Off Oil Supply
Flame Failure 2 RAR7/LAE10 F33 40P11D X1: 40-41 Bnr. + Panel Cut Off Oil Supply
o
High temperature in preheater C 0-160 125 F223 34S5F X
o
Temperature transmitter in preheater (for reg.) C PT100 F222 31A3E
Oil temperature set point (380cSt@50oC) o
C 0-150 125 - -
Language UK o 7-63 / 74
Fire in windbox C PT100 110 F36
101X03_618319#A.3
SET POINT LIST
6/5/2013 List of Indicators and Set Points for ON 106591 Page 2
Item Units Range Default Type ITEM NO IN DRAWING Element Bnr Physical Remarks
Set point 1) Steam/water P/I diagram Terminal Trip Location
2) Oil flow diagram No. in
3) Burner drawing: wiring
4) Wiring diagram: 101X03:618319 diagram
1 2 3 4
Oil oil
High fired boiler
pressure / Burner
in return line BAR F214
Oil Servo Motor Limit Switches: F184 See sheet 35 in wiring

Max. Position Degr. 0-90 90 To be set during commisioning - Burner diagram and burner
Min. Position Degr. 0-90 0 To be set during commisioning - Burner instruction manual
Air Servo Motor Limit Switches: F7 See sheet 36 in wiring
Servo Motor Limit Switches: F208 See sheet 35 in wiring

General signals
Thermal Overload Relays:
Burner Motor A 6.0-10 6.3A GV2-P14 07F6B X Panel
Oil transfer pump 1 A 0.63-1 0.7A GV2-P05 07F2B Panel
Oil transfer pump 2 A 0.63-1 0.7A GV2-P05 07F4B Panel
Feed water pump 1 - (Oil fired boiler) A 2.5-4.0 2.86A GV2-P08 12F2B Panel
Feed water pump 2 - (Oil fired boiler) A 2.5-4.0 2.86A GV2-P08 12F4B Panel
Preheater A 13.0-18.0 17.4A GV2-P20 07F10B Panel
Timers:
Delay Too Low Water Level 1 Sec. 3-60 15 GESTRA controller 15A1A Panel
Delay Low Combustion Air Press. Sec. 3-60 15 Brodersen Panel
Delay St.By Oil Transfer Pump Sec. 10 Software Panel
Fuel oil Flow meter P/liter 100 31A12F

Power Failure X Panel
High oil content MCU200 20A8D
High Salinity ppm 0-1000 8 SL700 20A3D
Hotwell too low stop feed water pumps Limit Sw. 53S11E
Feed water pump (oil fired) stby start BAR 1-10 3 RT30 53S12E
Differential pressure for Flow filter BAR G340
Flushing timer 1 Sec. 0-3600 Panel
Flushing timer2 Sec. 0-3600 Panel
Flushing
7-64 / 74timer 8 Sec. 0-3600 Panel Language UK
Modbus Address List
7.14 Rev 4418 (Released 2013-03-15) AI Drw
106591#A.2
Burner Type: WH-RMS
Please Reserve Address 40000 - 41999 to AI Modbus
Boiler Type: EGB
MODBUS LIST
Boiler Type: Aalborg AQ-16 Format: Decimal, Protocol: Master RTU
Oil System: 0 Start Adress: 0
Modbus Addr. Word no. Type Remarks Layer Code

40522.12 AI Unit of measurement (pressure values only) 0 = 1/10 bar; 1 = 1/10 kg/cm; 2 = 1/100 Mpa
Burner state 0 = STOPPED; 1 = SHUTDOWN; 2 = READY; 3 = PMS REQUEST;
4 = STARTING; 5 = PRE PURGE POSITION; 6 = PRE PURGE;
7 = IGNITION POSITION; 8 = IGNITION; 9 = SAFETY TIME;
10 = FLAME STBLE; 11 = MAN LOAD; 12 = LOW FIRING POSITION;
40890 13 = LOW FIRING; 14 = RISING; 15 = MODULATION FREE;
16 = NORMAL STOP; 17 = STEAM PURGE POSITION;
Analog I/O
Modbus list
18 = STEAM PURGE 1; 19 = STEAM PURGE 2 ;
20 = POST PURGE POSITION; 21 = POST PURGE; 22 = X-TRACKING; 23
AI = WHR BLOCK; 24 = SAFETYPURGE
40893 AI Partner burner state (Same as 40890 - Burner status) Option (Double plant)
40020 AI Burner Load %
40010 AI Steam pressure (boiler) Unit of measurement - See word 11
40022 AI Water level boiler mmWC
40077 AI Fuel Oil pressure Unit of measurement - See word 11
40063 AI Fuel Oil temperature 1/10 °C
40508.02 DO Fuel oil pump 1, start/stop 0 = Stopped; 1 = Running
Digital I/O
40508.03 DO Fuel oil pump 2, start/stop 0 = Stopped; 1 = Running

40508.05 DO Feed water pump 1 start/stop 0 = Stopped; 1 = Running Option
40508.06 DO Feed water pump 2 start/stop 0 = Stopped; 1 = Running Option
40502.10 DI DO/HFO operation 0 = DO; 1 = HFO
41005.00 FUEL PUMP 1 NO FEEDBACK
41005.01 FUEL PUMP 2 NO FEEDBACK
41005.02 WATER PUMP 1 NO FEEDBACK
41005.03 WATER PUMP 2 NO FEEDBACK
41005.08 OIL CONTENT HIGH
41005.09 SALINITY HIGH
41005.15 BOILER PRESSURE LOW
41006.01 WATER LEVEL HIGH
41006.02 WATER LEVEL LOW
Alarms
41006.03 HEAVY FUEL OIL PRESSURE LOW

41006.04 HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW
41006.08 FUEL PUMP 1 OVERLOAD
41006.09 FUEL PUMP 2 OVERLOAD
41006.10 WATER PUMP 1 OVERLOAD
41006.11 WATER PUMP 2 OVERLOAD
41007.01 ST. BY WATER PUMP STARTED
41007.08 HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH
41008.10 HOTWELL LOW (FEED PUMPS STOPPED)
41010.01 OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE LOW
41010.02 OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE HIGH
41000.05 FLAME OUT

41000.15 PHOTO CELL FAILURE
41001.00 QUICK CLOSING VALVE NOT OPEN
41001.05 BURNER SWING OUT
41001.08 HIGH OIL PRESSURE RETURN LINE
41001.10 HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW
41001.11 HEAVY FUEL OIL PRESSURE LOW
Shutdowns
41001.12 WATER LEVEL HIGH

41001.13 WATER LEVEL LOW
41001.14 BOILER PRESSURE HIGH
41002.02 LOW COMB AIR PRESS SWITCH
41002.03 BURNER MOTOR OVERLOAD
41003.13 HIGH OIL TEMP SW IN PREHEATER
41003.14 HEAVY FUEL OIL PRESSURE HIGH
41004.02 FLAME OUT SCANNER 2
41016.01 OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE LOW
41016.02 OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE HIGH
Default Config Telegram example

Connection: RS-485
Baudrate: 19200
Parity Even Modbus addres Modbus telegram
Databits: 8 Steam Pressure 40010 01 03 00 0A 00 01 A4 08
Stop bits: 1 Water level 40022 01 03 00 16 00 01 65 CE
FO Press. 40077 01 03 00 4D 00 01 14 1D
Start Adress: 0 CMD operation mode 40525 01 03 02 0D 00 01 14 71
Format: Decimal FO Temp 40924 01 03 03 9C 00 01 44 60
Protocol: Master RTU
MENU TREE
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
MENU TREE FOR BOILER PLANT (LOCAL PANEL)
Filter Workbook
Burner Type: WH-RMS Oil System: 0 I/O Config: MCT Boiler Type: All Platform: All Settings: All Boiler Option: All
Ver: 7.14 Rev 4418 (Released 2013-03-15) Sort columns Mod-
LINE NO. FRONT LOCK MAIN MENU SUB MENU LEVEL 1 SUB MENU LEVEL 2 Explanation SUB MENU LEVEL 3 SUB MENU LEVEL 4 [VAL] PASSW. LOWEST HIGHEST DEFAULT VALID BURNER TYPES BOILER TYPE I/O CFG PLATFORM OILSYSTEM bus addres Modbus R/W A/D Text
- < [SELECT 1] Displays a selected item. The items available for display can be N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
- [SELECT 2] Displays a selected item. N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
- [SELECT 3] Displays a selected item. The last selected item will be shown in the N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
- [STATE][LOA Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
- KEY Indicates the position of the key operation lock. The default position is N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Menu Tree
- REQUEST Unlocks the actual local panel and operation can take place from this N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
- [STATE] N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40975 tilstand T01
- [STATE][L Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40901 run_parm[BOILEGBR_PRESS].reg_output A
1 BOILER Menu for control of steam pressure and water level. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
1 1 BOILER PRES Menu for control of the boiler pressure. Please note that the N BAR 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40900 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].value R A BOILER PRESS
1 - 1 - 1 Set point for high steam pressure shut down (burner cut off). HI.SHT.DWN. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 8.5 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40011 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DWN.
1 - 1 - 2 Set point for high steam pressure alarm. HIGH ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 8.3 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40012 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
1 - 1 - 3 Set point for low steam pressure alarm. LOW ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 4 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40013 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
1 - 1 - 7 Displays the chosen set point which is selected in the setup/ctrl mode ACTUAL SP. N BAR np 1K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40014 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].actualSP R/W A ACTUAL SP.
1 - 1 - 8 Set point for boiler operation in low pressure mode. SETP. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 7 1K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40015 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].setp1 R/W A SETP.
1 - 1 - 9 Set point for boiler operation in low pressure mode. SETP.HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 16 1K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40016 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].setp2 R/W A SETP.HIGH
1 - 1 - 10 Proportional gain for the regulation. P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 5 1K, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40017 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].gain R/W A P
1 - 1 - 11 Time interval between reading output signals from the transmitter. T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 1 1K, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40018 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
1 - 1 - 12 Integral action time for the regulation. T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 10 1K, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40019 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].tint R/W A T.INT.
1 - 1 - 13 Derivative action time for the regulation. T.DIFF. N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40605 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].tdif R/W A T.DIFF.
1 - 1 - 14 Regulation output signal in %. In multi boiler plants the signal is REG OUTPUT N% np 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40901 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].reg_output R/W A REG OUTPUT
1 - 1 - 16 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator REMOTE CTRL N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40902 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL
1 - 2 WATER LEVEL Menu for control of the water level. N mm 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40902 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].value R A WATER LEVEL
1 - 2 - 1 Set point for high water level shut down (burner cut off). If this shut HI.SHT.DWN. N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: 250 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40023 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DWN.
1 - 2 - 2 Set point for high water level alarm. HIGH ALARM N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: 150 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40024 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
1 - 2 - 3 Set point for low water level alarm. LOW ALARM N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: -100 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40025 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
1 - 2 - 4 Set point for too low water level shut down (burner cut off). LO.SHT.DWN. N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: -150 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40026 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].alarmLOlim R/W A LO.SHT.DWN.
1 - 2 - 12 Displays the active set point for normal water level. ACTUAL SP. N mm np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40030 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].actualSP R/W A ACTUAL SP.
1 - 2 - 13 Displays the actual ramp function set point as a positive value when SETP.OFFSET N mm np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40031 setp_track[WATER_LEVEL]; R/W A SETP.OFFSET
1 - 2 - 14 Modulation Mode: Set point for normal water level when the burner not SETP. N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: -30 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40032 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].setp1 R/W A SETP.
1 - 2 - 15 Set point for normal water level during normal operation/buner on/oil SETP.HIGH N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40033 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].setp2 R/W A SETP.HIGH
1 - 2 - 9 Setting of dead zone for the water level regulation. The dead zone is DEADZONE N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40034 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].neutralzone R/W A DEADZONE
1 - 2 - 10 Limitation of the I-part for the PID water level regulation. When the low I-LOW LIMIT N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 1 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All ----
1 - 2 - 11 Limitation of the I-part for the PID water level regulation. When the I-HIGH LIMIT N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 1 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All ----
1 - 2 - 16 Proportional gain for the regulation. P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 3 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40037 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].gain R/W A P
1 - 2 - 17 Time interval between reading output signals from the transmitter. T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 0.5 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40038 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
1 - 2 - 18 Integral action time for the regulation. T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 130 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40039 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].tint R/W A T.INT.
1 - 2 - 19 Derivative action time for the regulation. T.DIFF. N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40040 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].tdiff R/W A T.DIFF.
1 - 2 - 20 Percentage value of the proportional part for the regulation. Used for P.PART N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].p_bidrag R/W A P.PART
1 - 2 - 21 Percentage value of the integral part for the regulation. Used for I.PART N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].i_bidrag R/W A I.PART
1 - 2 - 22 Percentage value of the derivative part for the regulation. Used for D.PART N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].d_bidrag R/W A D.PART
1 - 2 - 23 Regulation output signal in %. REG OUTPUT N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40903 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].reg_output R/W A REG OUTPUT
1 - 2 24 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator. REMOTE CTRL N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40042 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].menuflag.manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL
1 - 2 25 When on/off regulation it start and stops the water pump NORMAL LIMIT N mm np lo: -400 hi: 100 def: -50 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40711 dbasecfg[CFG_LEVEL_CONT_NORMAL_LIMIT] R/W A NORMAL LIMIT
1 - 2 - 26 Start the standby pump when level get below setpoint STBY LIMIT N mm np lo: -400 hi: 100 def: -70 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40712 dbasecfg[CFG_LEVEL_CONT_STBY_LIMIT] R/W A STBY LIMIT
1 - 4 COMMON PRES Menu for control of the common steam line pressure. Please note that N BAR 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40925 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].value R A ST.PRES.COM
1 - 4 - 1 Set point for high steam pressure shut down (cut off of burners). HI.SHT.DWN. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 8.5 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 40785 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DWN.
1 - 4 - 2 Set point for low steam pressure alarm. LOW ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 4 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 40786 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].warningHIlim R/W A LOW ALARM
1 - 4 - 3 Displays the chosen set point which is selected in the setup/ctrl mode ACTUAL SP. N BAR 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40787 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].actualSP R/W A ACTUAL SP.
1 - 4 - 4 Set point for boiler operation in low pressure mode. SETP. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 6 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40788 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].setp1 R/W A SETP.
1 - 4 - 5 Set point for boiler operation in high pressure mode. SETP.HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 15 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40789 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].setp2 R/W A SETP.HIGH
1 - 4 - 6 Set point for boiler operation in high pressure mode. P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 16 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40790 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].gain R/W A P
1 - 4 - 7 Time interval between reading output signals from the transmitter. T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 0.5 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40791 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
1 - 4 - 8 Integral action time for the regulation. T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 60 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40792 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].tint R/W A T.INT.
1 - 4 - 9 Derivative action time for the regulation. T.DIFF. N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40793 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].tdiff R/W A T.DIFF.
1 - 4 - 10 Derivative action time for the regulation. REG OUTPUT N% np 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40926 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].reg_output R/W A REG OUTPUT
1 - 4 - 11 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator. REMOTE CTRL N pw:cu 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40795 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].menuflag.manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL
- [STATE][LOAD%] Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
2 FUEL OIL Menu for control of the heavy fuel oil pressure, temperature, and flow. 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
2 - 1 HFO TEMP Menu for control of the heavy fuel oil temperature. In plants with two N ºC 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40908 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].value R A FUEL O.TEMP
2 - 1 - 2 Set point for high heavy fuel oil temperature alarm. HIGH ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 140 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 -X.14,-X.17 X 40065 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
2 - 1 - 3 Set point for low heavy fuel oil temperature alarm. LOW ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 110 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 -X.14,-X.17 X 40066 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
2 - 1 - 4 Set point for low heavy fuel oil temperature shut down (burner cut off). LO.SHT.DWN. N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 95 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 -X.14,-X.17 X 40067 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].alarmLOlim R/W A LO.SHT.DWN.
2 - 1 - 6 Set point for heavy fuel oil temperature. SETP. N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 130 1K, 2K, M, R, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40068 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].setp1 R/W A SETP.
2 - 1 - 8 Proportional gain for the regulation. P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40069 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].gain R/W A P
2 - 1 - 9 Time interval between reading output signals from the transmitter. T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 0.5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40070 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
2 - 1 - 10 Integral action time for the regulation. T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 160 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40071 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].tint R/W A T.INT.
2 - 1 - 11 Derivative action time for the regulation. T.DIFF. N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40072 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].tdiff R/W A T.DIFF.
2 - 1 - 12 Setting of the minimum pulse time. The signal time from the regulator MIN PULSE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.2 hi: 5 def: 0.5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40073 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].minpulse R/W A MIN PULSE
2 - 1 - 13 Setting of the regulator run time. The time to carry out a full valve RUN TIME N SEC pw:cu lo: 10 hi: 180 def: 35 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40074 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].actuatortime R/W A RUN TIME
2 - 1 - 14 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator. REMOTE CTRL N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40075 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].menuflag.manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL
2 - 1 - 15 Within the plus and minus value of the limit set in this menu the NEUTRALZONE N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10 def: 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X 40076 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_TEMP].neutralzone R/W A NEUTRALZONE
2 - 2 HFO PRES Menu for surveillance of HFO press. Control of HFO press for KBSD N BAR 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17, -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0 X 40909 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_PRESS].value R A FUEL O.PRES
2 - 3 DO TEMP Menu for surveillance of the diesel oil temperature. In plants with two N ºC 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X run_parm_lite[DIESEL_OIL_TEMP_LITE].value R A DO TEMP
2 - 3 - 1 Set point for high diesel oil temperature shut down (burner cut off). HI.SHT.DWN. N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 65 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X run_parm_lite[DIESEL_OIL_TEMP_LITE].alarmHIlim HI.SHT.DWN.
2 - 3 - 2 Set point for high diesel oil temperature alarm. HIGH ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 62 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X run_parm_lite[DIESEL_OIL_TEMP_LITE].warningHIlim HIGH ALARM
2 - 3 - 3 Set point for low diesel oil temperature alarm. LOW ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X run_parm_lite[DIESEL_OIL_TEMP_LITE].warningLOlim LOW ALARM
2 - 4 DO PRES Menu for surveillance of DO press. Control of DO press for KBSD N BAR 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X run_parm[DIESEL_OIL_PRESS].value R A FUEL O.PRES
2 - 4 - 3 Set point for high diesel oil pressure shut down (burner cut off). HI.SHT.DOWN N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 40 def: 4,0 M, R, KBP Win2000 X.0 X run_parm[DIESEL_OIL_PRESS].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DOWN
2 - 4 - 6 Set point for high diesel oil pressure alarm. HIGH ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 40 def: 3,9 M, R, KBP Win2000 X.0 X run_parm[DIESEL_OIL_PRESS].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
2 - 4 - 10 Set point for low diesel oil pressure alarm and start of the stand-by oil LOW ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 40 def: 1,5 M, R, KBP Win2000 X.0 X run_parm[DIESEL_OIL_PRESS].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
2 - 4 - 14 Set point for low diesel oil pressure shut down (burner cut off). LO.SHT.DWN. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 40 def: 1,0 M, R, KBP Win2000 X.0 X run_parm[DIESEL_OIL_PRESS].alarmLOlim R/W A LO.SHT.DWN.
2 - 8 OIL FLOW Menu for control of the oil flow. N% 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X run_parm[OIL_FLOW].value R/W A OIL FLOW
2 - 9 CMN OILFLOW Menu for monitoring the common oil flow. N% M, R, KBE, KBP All X 41291 run_parm_lite[COMMON_OIL_FLOW_LITE].value R/W A CMN OILFLOW
2 - 11 DO OILFLOW Menu for monitoring the diesel oil flow. N% -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All X 41293 run_parm_lite[DO_OIL_FLOW_LITE].value R/W A DO OILFLOW
- - - - - [STATE][LOAD%] Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N np 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
- - - - - [STATE][LOAD%] Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N np 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
4 SERVO Menu for control of the servo motor. M, R, KBE, KBP All
4 - 1 SERVO POS. Displays the actual position of the servo motor. N% M, R All X 40910 run_parm[SERVO_POSITION].value R A SERVO POS.
4 - 1 - 1 Start of the burner and operation of nozzle 1 are controlled by the ACTUAL SP. N% np M, R All X 40093 run_parm[SERVO_POSITION].actualSP R/W A ACTUAL SP.
4 - 1 - 2 Within the plus and minus value of the limit set in this menu the NEUTRALZONE N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 5 M, R All X 40094 run_parm[SERVO_POSITION].neutralzone R/W A NEUTRALZONE
4 - 1 - 3 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator. REMOTE CTRL N pw:cu M, R All X 40095 run_parm[SERVO_POSITION].menuflag.manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL
- - - - - [STATE][LOAD%] Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N np R All
5 - 2 - SMK. DENSIT Displays the smoke density measurement. This menu will not be N% 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40913 run_parm[SMOKE_DENSITY].value R A SMK. DENSIT
5 - 2 - 1 Set point for alarm of high smoke visibility contents in the flue gas. HIGH ALARM N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 40 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40106 run_parm[SMOKE_DENSITY].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
5 - 3 OXYGEN Displays the oxygen sensor measurement. This menu will not be N% 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40914 run_parm[OXYGEN_SENSOR].value R A OXYGEN
5 - 3 - 1 Set point for alarm of high oxygen contents in the flue gas. HIGH ALARM N% pw:cu lo: 0,0 hi: 100,0 def: 100,0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40108 run_parm[OXYGEN_SENSOR].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
5 - 4 TEMP. UPTAK Displays the uptake temperature measurement. This menu will not be N ºC 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40916 run_parm[TEMP_UPTAKE].value R A TEMP. UPTAK
5 - 4 - 1 Set point for shut down because of high temperature in uptake (burner HI.SHT.DWN. N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 500 def: 450 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40110 run_parm[TEMP_UPTAKE].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DWN.
5 - 4 - 2 Set point for alarm of high temperature in uptake. HIGH ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 500 def: 450 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40111 run_parm[TEMP_UPTAKE].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
- - - - - - - [STATE][LOAD%] Displays the burner state (starting, rising, modulation free, etc.), mode N np 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
7 CMN CTRL Menu for common control of pumps, smoke blower, steam dump 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 PUMP CTRL Menu for common control of pumps. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 1 - OIL PUMP Menu for control and display of the fuel oil pumps. np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 1 - 1 Selection of operation mode for fuel oil pump 1 (stop, auto, stand-by). PUMP 1-1 MODE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40112 pump_1_state R/W T02 PUMP 1-1 MODE
7 - 1 - 1 - 2 Displays the state of fuel oil pump 1 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP_1_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 1 - 3 Selection of operation mode for fuel oil pump 2 (stop, auto, stand-by). PUMP 1-2 MODE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40113 pump_2_state R/W T02 PUMP 1-2 MODE
7 - 1 - 1 - 4 Displays the state of fuel oil pump 2 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP_2_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 1 - 9 Status for remote start of fuel oil pump 1. If provided, the remote start F.PMP1 REM START N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP1_REM_START] R D F.PMP1 REM START
7 - 1 - 1 - 10 Status for remote stop of fuel oil pump 1. If provided, the remote stop F.PMP1 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP1_REM_NOT_STOP] R D F.PMP1 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 1 - 11 Status for remote start of fuel oil pump 2. If provided, the remote start F.PMP2 REM START N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP2_REM_START] R D F.PMP2 REM START
7 - 1 - 1 - 12 Status for remote stop of fuel oil pump 2. If provided, the remote stop F.PMP2 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X T15 dig_i[DI_FUEL_PUMP2_REM_NOT_STOP] R D F.PMP2 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 2 CHEM PMP Menu for control of the chemical pumps. This menu will not be np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 2 - 1 Chem pump1: Selection of operation mode for chemical pump 1 CHEM PUMP 1 N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40114 pump_state_chm1 R/W T05 CHEM PUMP 1
7 - 1 - 2 - 2 Chem pump2/EGB chem pump: Selection of operation mode for CHEM PUMP 2 / EGB N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All X 40115 pump_state_chm2 R/W D CHEM PUMP 2 / EGB
7 - 1 - 3 - FEED PUMP np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 3 - 1 Menu for control and display of the feed water pumps. FEED PUMP np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
7 - 1 - 3 - 2 Selection of operation mode for feed water pump 1 (stop, start, auto, F.W.PMP1 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40116 feed_state[PUMP1] R/W T03 F.W.PMP1 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 3 Selection of operation type for feed water pump 1 (main, service). MODE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40117 feed_mode[PUMP1] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 4 Displays the state of feed water pump 1 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_1_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 5 Selection of operation mode for feed water pump 2 (stop, start, auto, F.W.PMP2 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40118 feed_state[PUMP2] R/W T03 F.W.PMP2 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 6 Selection of operation type for feed water pump 2 (main, service). MODE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40119 feed_mode[PUMP2] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 7 Displays the state of feed water pump 2 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_2_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 8 Selection of operation mode for feed water pump 3 (stop, start, auto, F.W.PMP3 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40120 feed_state[PUMP3] R/W T03 F.W.PMP3 SEL.
106591 IOAlarmShutdownModbus_7.14_rev4418_a
M = MS+KBO-H; R = RMS; KBP = KBO-E+KBP; KBE = KBE ,EGB = Stand Alone EGB
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
7 - 1 - 3 - 9 Selection of operation type for feed water pump 3 (main, service). MODE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40121 feed_mode[PUMP3] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 10 Displays the state of feed water pump 3 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_3_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 11 Selection of operation mode for feed water pump 4 (stop, start, auto, F.W.PMP4 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40122 feed_state[PUMP4] R/W T03 F.W.PMP4 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 12 Selection of operation type for feed water pump 4 (main, service). MODE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40123 feed_mode[PUMP4] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 13 Displays the state of feed water pump 4 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_4_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 14 Status for remote start of feed water pump 1. If provided, the remote F.PMP1 REM START N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_PUMP1_REM_START] R D F.PMP1 REM START
7 - 1 - 3 - 15 Status for remote stop of feed water pump 1. If provided, the remote F.PMP1 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_PUMP1_REM_NOT_STOP] R D F.PMP1 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 3 - 16 Status for remote start of feed water pump 2. If provided, the remote F.PMP2 REM START N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_PUMP2_REM_START] R D F.PMP2 REM START
7 - 1 - 3 - 17 Status for remote stop of feed water pump 2. If provided, the remote F.PMP2 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R Steam All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_PUMP2_REM_NOT_STOP] R D F.PMP2 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 3 - 22 Menu for control and display of the circulation pumps. CIRCULATION PUMP np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 3 - 23 Selection of operation mode for circulation pump 1 (stop, start, stand- C.PMP1 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40124 circ_pump_1_state R/W T02 C.PMP1 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 24 Displays the state of circulation pump 1 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRCULATION_PUMP_1_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 25 Selection of operation mode for circulation pump 2 (stop, start, stand- C.PMP2 SEL. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40125 circ_pump_2_state R/W T02 C.PMP2 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 26 Displays the state of circulation pump 2 (on/off). STATE N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRCULATION_PUMP_2_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 27 Status for remote start of circulation pump 1. If provided, the remote C.PMP1 REM START N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRC_PUMP1_REM_START] R D C.PMP1 REM START
7 - 1 - 3 - 28 Status for remote stop of circulation pump 1. If provided, the remote C.PMP1 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRC_PUMP1_REM_NOT_STOP] R D C.PMP1 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 3 - 29 Status for remote start of circulation pump 2. If provided, the remote C.PMP2 REM START N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRC_PUMP2_REM_START] R D C.PMP2 REM START
7 - 1 - 3 - 30 Status for remote stop of circulation pump 2. If provided, the remote C.PMP2 REM STOP N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All X T15 dig_i[DI_CIRC_PUMP2_REM_NOT_STOP] R D C.PMP2 REM STOP
7 - 1 - 3 - 22 Menu for control and display of the EGB feed water pumps. FEED PUMP EGB np M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 1 - 3 - 23 Selection of operation mode for EGB feed water pump 1(stop, start, EGB FWP1 SEL. N np M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40698 feed_state[PUMP5] R/W T03 EGB FWP1 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 24 Selection of operation type for EGB feed water pump 1 (main, MODE N np M, R, KBE, KBP All 40699 feed_mode[PUMP5] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 25 Displays the state of EGB feed water pump 1 (on/off). STATE N np M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_5_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 1 - 3 - 26 Selection of operation mode for EGB feed water pump 2 (stop, start, EGB FWP2 SEL. N np M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40700 feed_state[PUMP6] R/W T03 EGB FWP2 SEL.
7 - 1 - 3 - 27 Selection of operation type for EGB feed water pump 2 (main, MODE N np M, R, KBE, KBP All 40701 feed_mode[PUMP6] R/W T03 MODE
7 - 1 - 3 - 28 Displays the state of EGB feed water pump 2 (on/off). STATE N np M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15 dig_i[DI_FEED_WATER_PUMP_6_FEEDBACK] R D STATE
7 - 2 SMOKE BLOW Menu for control and display of the smoke blower for the smoke np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 2 - 1 Displays the state and start/stop of the smoke blower for the smoke SMOKE BLOWER 1 N np def: ON 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40721 dig_o[DO_START_1_SMOKE_DENSITY_MONITOR] R D SMOKE BLOWER 1
7 - 3 STEAM DUMP Menu for control of the steam dump equipment. In plants with two 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
7 - 3 - 1 STEAM DUMP Menu for control and display of the steam dump equipment. N BAR 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40917 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].value R A STEAM DUMP
7 - 3 - 1 - 4 Set point for the steam dump pressure. SETP. N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 8 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40130 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].setp1 R/W A SETP.
7 - 3 - 1 - 6 Proportional gain for the regulation. P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 5 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40132 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].gain R/W A P
7 - 3 - 1 - 7 Time interval between reading output signals from the transmitter. T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 0.5 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40133 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
7 - 3 - 1 - 8 Integral action time for the regulation. T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 3 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40134 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].tint R/W A T.INT.
7 - 3 - 1 - 9 Derivative action time for the regulation. T.DIFF N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40135 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].tdiff R/W A T.DIFF
7 - 3 - 1 - 10 Regulation output signal in %. REG OUTPUT N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40918 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].reg_output R/W A REG OUTPUT
7 - 3 - 1 - 11 Selection between automatic (0) or manual (1) control of the regulator. REMOTE CTRL. N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40137 run_parm[STEAM_DUMP].menuflag.manCONTROL R/W T18 REMOTE CTRL.
7 - 4 SALINITY Menu for control of the salinity alarm equipment. This menu will not be 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 4 - 1 - SALINITY Menu for control and display of the salinity alarm equipment. N ppm 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40919 run_parm[SALINITY].value R A SALINITY
7 - 4 - 1 - 1 Set point for shut down because of high salinity contents in feed water HI.SHT.DWN. N ppm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 25 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40139 run_parm[SALINITY].alarmHIlim R/W A HI.SHT.DWN.
7 - 4 - 1 - 2 Set point for alarm of high salinity contents in feed water. HIGH ALARM N ppm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40140 run_parm[SALINITY].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
7 - 5 INERT GAS Menu for control of the inert gas mode. 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 5 - 1 The minimum load for operation in inert gas mode. If changed to a MIN LOAD N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 40 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40141 dbasecfg[CFG_INERT_GAS_LAST] R/W A MIN LOAD
7 - 5 - 2 Forces the boiler "ON" or "OFF" in inert gas mode from the local FORCE N pw:cu 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40142 dbasecfg[CFG_INERT_GAS_FORCE] R/W A FORCE
- - - - - - - [OIL OPERATION] Indicates the fuel choice (diesel oil operation, gas oil operation or np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40143 dig_i[DI_HEAVY_FUEL_OPERATION]
7 - 10 - EGE, EGB Menu for control of the EGB /EGEfunctions. (MCT) M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 10 - 1 WATER EGB Menu for control of the EGB water level control. N mm M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40920 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].value R A WATER LEVEL
7 - 10 - 1 - 1 Set point for high water level alarm. HIGH ALARM N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: 150 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40529 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
7 - 10 - 1 - 2 Set point for low water level alarm. LOW ALARM N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: -100 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40530 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
7 - 10 - 1 - 3 The actual water level setpoint. Actual setpoint N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40547 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].actualSP R/W A ACTUAL SP.
7 - 10 - 1 - 4 Set point for normal water level when the ME LOAD is below SETP SETP. N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: -30 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40531 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].setp1 R/W A SETP.
7 - 10 - 1 - 5 Set point for normal water level when the ME LOAD is above SETP.HIGH N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 1500 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40532 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].setp2 R/W A SETP.HIGH
7 - 10 - 1 - 6 Proportional gain for the water level PID regulation part when three P N pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 5 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40533 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].gain R/W A P
7 - 10 - 1 - 7 Time interval between reading output signals from the water level PID T.SAMPLE N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.1 hi: 10 def: 1 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40534 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].tsample R/W A T.SAMPLE
7 - 10 - 1 - 8 Integral action time for the water level PID regulation part when three T.INT. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 999.9 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40535 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].tint R/W A T.INT.
7 - 10 - 1 - 9 Derivative action time for the water level PID regulation part when T.DIFF. N SEC pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40536 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].tdif R/W A T.DIFF.
7 - 10 - 1 - 10 Regulation output signal in %. REG OUTPUT N% np M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40921 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].reg_output R/W A REG OUTPUT
7 10 - 1 - 11 Within the plus and minus value of the limit set in this menu the NEUTRALZONE N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 5 def: 0,5 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40538 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].neutralzone R/W A NEUTRALZONE
7 10 - 1 - 12 When on/off regulation it starts the water pump selected for auto NORMAL LI N mm pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: -50 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40680 dbasecfg[CFG_LEVEL_CONT_NORMAL_LIMIT_EGB] R/W A NORMAL LI
7 - 10 - 1 - 13 Start the standby pump when level get below setpoint STBY LIMIT N mm pw:cu lo: -100 hi: 100 def: -70 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40681 dbasecfg[CFG_LEVEL_CONT_STBY_LIMIT_EGB] R/W A STBY LIMIT
7 - 10 - 2 BOILER EGB Menu for surveillance of the EGB boiler pressure. Please note that the N BAR M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40922 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS_XS_2V].value R A BOILER PRES
7 - 10 - 2 - 1 Set point for high steam pressure alarm. HIGH ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 8.3 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40540 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS_XS_2V].warningHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
7 - 10 - 2 - 1 Set point for low steam pressure alarm. LOW ALARM N BAR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 4 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40541 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS_XS_2V].warningLOlim R/W A LOW ALARM
7 - 10 - 3 TEMP. INLET Menu for Temp inlet N ºC M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40043 run_parm[TEMP_INLET].value R A TEMP.INLET
7 - 10 - 3 - 1 Setpoint for high temperature inlet HIGH ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 600 def: 450 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40044 run_parm[TEMP_INLET].alarmHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
7 - 10 - 4 TEMP. OUTLET Menu for Temp outlet N ºC M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40048 run_parm[TEMP_OUTLET].value R A TEMP.OUTLET
7 - 10 - 4 - 1 Setpoint for high temperature outlet HIGH ALARM N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 600 def: 450 M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40049 run_parm[TEMP_OUTLET].alarmHIlim R/W A HIGH ALARM
7 - 10 - 5 ME LOAD Menu for main engine load N% M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40058 run_parm[ME_LOAD].value R A WATER LEVEL
7 - 10 - 5 - 1 Setpoint for Main engine load for change of EGB Water Level Set SETP. N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 50 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40604 run_parm[ME_LOAD].setp1 R/W A SETP.
7 - 10 - 5 - 2 Setpoint for Main engine load high for change of EGB Water Level Set SETP. HIGH N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 50 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40548 run_parm[ME_LOAD].setp2 R/W A SETP.HIGH
7 - 11 ALARM GROUPS Menu for Alarm Groups 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
7 - 11 - 6 SHUTDOWN Menu for Shutdowns 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 2 1 Alarm group configuration HIGH STEAM PRESSURE SWITCH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 6 - 3 2 Alarm group configuration TOO LOW WATER LEVEL SWITCH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 4 3 Alarm group configuration BURNER NOT READY 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 5 4 Alarm group configuration MOTOR OVERLOAD ERROR COMB.AIR FAN 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 6 5 Alarm group configuration FLAME OUT 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 7 6 Alarm group configuration AIR SERVO ERROR 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 8 7 Alarm group configuration NO FUEL PUMPS AVAILABLE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 9 8 Alarm group configuration NO START PERMISSION FROM PMS 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 10 9 Alarm group configuration POWER PANEL1 OFFLINE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 11 10 Alarm group configuration BURNER SERVO ERROR 1 EGB, M, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 12 11 Alarm group configuration OIL SERVO ERROR 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 13 12 Alarm group configuration IGNITER INSERTED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 14 13 Alarm group configuration OIL VALVE NOT CLOSED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 15 14 Alarm group configuration START SEQUENCE MAX TIME EXPIRED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 16 15 Alarm group configuration PHOTO CELL FAILURE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 17 16 Alarm group configuration QUICK CLOSING VALVE NOT OPEN 1 EGB, M, R, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 18 17 Alarm group configuration POWER PANEL2 OFFLINE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 19 18 Alarm group configuration HIGH TEMPERATURE UPTAKE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 20 19 Alarm group configuration FIRE IN WINDBOX 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 21 20 Alarm group configuration LANCE REDRAWN 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 22 21 Alarm group configuration BURNER SWING OUT 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 23 22 Alarm group configuration OIL TEMPERATURE LOW SWITCH 1 EGB, R -X.14
23 Alarm group configuration OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH SWITCH EGB, R -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 24 24 Alarm group configuration HIGH OIL PRESSURE RETURN LINE 1 EGB, M, R, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 25 25 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R, KBE -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 26 26 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 27 27 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL PRESSURE LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 28 28 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 6 - 29 29 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 6 - 30 30 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESSURE HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 6 - 31 31 Alarm group configuration ATOM STEAM PRESSURE LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 32 32 Alarm group configuration STEAM PRESSURE COMMON HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 33 33 Alarm group configuration LANCE REDRAWN 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 34 34 Alarm group configuration LOW COMB AIR PRESS SWITCH 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 35 35 Alarm group configuration BURNER MOTOR OVERLOAD 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 36 36 Alarm group configuration LOW OIL TEMP. NOZZLE SUPPLY SWITCH 1 EGB, M, R -X.14
7 - 11 - 6 - 37 37 Alarm group configuration SALINITY HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 38 38 Alarm group configuration TEMP. UPTAKE HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 39 39 Alarm group configuration IGNITER NOT INSERTED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 40 40 Alarm group configuration EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 1 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 41 41 Alarm group configuration AIR FLOW LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 42 42 Alarm group configuration TEMP. INLET HIGH 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 43 43 Alarm group configuration TEMP. INLET LOW 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 44 44 Alarm group configuration TEMP. OUTLET HIGH 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 45 45 Alarm group configuration TEMP. OUTLET LOW 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 46 46 Alarm group configuration DIFF. PRESS. HIGH 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 47 47 Alarm group configuration DIFF. PRESS. LOW 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 48 48 Alarm group configuration ME LOAD HIGH 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 49 49 Alarm group configuration ME LOAD LOW 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 50 50 Alarm group configuration ME SLOW DOWN 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 51 51 Alarm group configuration LOW OIL PRESSURE NOZZLE SUPPLY SWITCH 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 52 52 Alarm group configuration IGNITION FLAME OUT 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 53 53 Alarm group configuration IGNITION PHOTO CELL FAILURE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 54 54 Alarm group configuration EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 2 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 55 55 Alarm group configuration BOOSTER PUMP NO FEEDBACK 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 56 56 Alarm group configuration BOOSTER PUMP OVERLOAD 1 EGB, R
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
7 - 11 - 6 - 57 57 Alarm group configuration LOW ATM. AIR PRESSURE 1 EGB, R, KBE
7 - 11 - 6 - 58 58 Alarm group configuration OIL CONTENT HIGH 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 6 - 59 59 Alarm group configuration HIGH OIL PRESSURE ON BURNER 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 60 60 Alarm group configuration COMB. AIR FAN MOTOR OVERLOAD 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R, KBE
7 11 6 61 61 Alarm group configuration HIGH OIL TEMP SW IN PREHEATER 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 11 6 62 62 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL PRESSURE HIGH 1 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 11 6 63 63 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH IN BURNER 1 EGB, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 11 6 64 64 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW IN BURNER 1 EGB, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 11 6 65 65 Alarm group configuration TEMPERATURE IN WINDBOX HIGH 1 EGB, R, KBE
7 11 6 66 66 Alarm group configuration NOT USED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 67 67 Alarm group configuration OIL TYPE CHANGED WHILE FLUSHING 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 68 68 Alarm group configuration EXTENDED IO COMMUNICATION ERROR 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 69 69 Alarm group configuration FLUSH STARTED WHILE RUNNING 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 70 70 Alarm group configuration COOLER ENABLED ON HFO 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 71 71 Alarm group configuration FEEDBACK ERROR ON VALVE 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 11 6 76 76 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL PRESSURE LOW 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 11 6 77 77 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL PRESSURE HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 11 6 78 78 Alarm group configuration HIGH DP MGO SUCTION FILTER 1 EGB, M, R, KBP
7 11 6 79 79 Alarm group configuration HIGH DP HFO SUCTION FILTER 1 EGB, M, R, KBP
7 11 6 80 80 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 11 6 81 81 Alarm group configuration OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE LOW 1 EGB, M, R
7 11 6 82 82 Alarm group configuration OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE HIGH 1 EGB, M, R, KBE
7 11 6 83 83 Alarm group configuration HIGH OIL PRESSURE PUMP RETURN 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 11 6 84 84 Alarm group configuration COOLER NOT BYPASSED 1 1K, 2K, EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 86 85 Alarm group configuration G115 NOT IN HFO POSITION 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 87 86 Alarm group configuration G115 NOT IN MGO POSITION 1 EGB, R
7 - 11 - 6 - 88 87 Alarm group configuration BOILER TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Hotwater
7 - 11 - 6 - 89 88 Alarm group configuration BOILER TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH SWITCH 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Hotwater
7 - 11 - 7 ALARMS Menu for Alarms 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 1 0 Alarm group configuration FUEL PUMP 1 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 2 1 Alarm group configuration FUEL PUMP 2 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 3 2 Alarm group configuration WATER PUMP 1 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 4 3 Alarm group configuration WATER PUMP 2 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 7 6 Alarm group configuration CIRC. PUMP 1 NO FEEDBACK 4 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 8 7 Alarm group configuration CIRC. PUMP 2 NO FEEDBACK 4 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 9 8 Alarm group configuration OIL CONTENT HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 10 9 Alarm group configuration SALINITY HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 11 10 Alarm group configuration PARTNER OFFLINE 2 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 12 11 Alarm group configuration PARTNER NOT IN AUTO 2 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 13 12 Alarm group configuration HIGH EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE AT EGB 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 14 13 Alarm group configuration CIRCULATION PUMP LOW FLOW 4 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 16 15 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESSURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 18 17 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL HIGH 3 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 19 18 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL LOW 4 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 20 19 Alarm group configuration HEAVY FUEL OIL PRESSURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 21 20 Alarm group configuration HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 22 21 Alarm group configuration STEAM PRESSURE COMMON LOW 2 1K, 2K, EGB, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 23 22 Alarm group configuration SMOKE DENSITY HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 24 23 Alarm group configuration OXYGEN CONTENT HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 25 24 Alarm group configuration FUEL PUMP 1 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 26 25 Alarm group configuration FUEL PUMP 2 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 27 26 Alarm group configuration WATER PUMP 1 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 28 27 Alarm group configuration WATER PUMP 2 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 31 30 Alarm group configuration CIRC. PUMP 1 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 32 31 Alarm group configuration CIRC. PUMP 2 OVERLOAD 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 33 32 Alarm group configuration ST. BY FUEL PUMP STARTED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 34 33 Alarm group configuration ST. BY WATER PUMP STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 35 34 Alarm group configuration ST. BY CIRC. PUMP STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 36 35 Alarm group configuration SALINITY HIGH ANALOG 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 37 36 Alarm group configuration TEMP. UPTAKE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 38 37 Alarm group configuration EXTERNAL STOP 1 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 39 38 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESS. HIGH 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 40 39 Alarm group configuration BOOTED WITHOUT PARTNER 2 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 41 40 Alarm group configuration HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 42 41 Alarm group configuration TEMP. INLET HIGH 4 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 44 43 Alarm group configuration TEMP. OUTLET HIGH 4 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 46 45 Alarm group configuration EGB DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE HIGH 4 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 48 47 Alarm group configuration ME LOAD HIGH 4 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 54 53 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESS. HIGH EGB 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 55 54 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESSURE LOW EGB 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 56 55 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL HIGH EGB 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 57 56 Alarm group configuration WATER LEVEL LOW EGB 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 58 57 Alarm group configuration HIGH STEAM PRESS SW EGB 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 59 58 Alarm group configuration HOTWELL LOW (FEED PUMPS STOPPED) 2 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 60 59 Alarm group configuration EGB F. WATER PUMP 1 OVERLOAD 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 61 60 Alarm group configuration EGB F. WATER PUMP 2 OVERLOAD 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 62 61 Alarm group configuration EGB F. WATER PUMP 1 NO FB. 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 63 62 Alarm group configuration EGB F. WATER PUMP 2 NO FB. 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 64 63 Alarm group configuration ST. BY WATER PUMP EGB STARTED 4 M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 67 66 Alarm group configuration BOILER PRESSURE LOW WHR MODE 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 68 67 Alarm group configuration ST. BY GAS OIL PUMP STARTED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 69 68 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL TEMPERATURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 - 11 - 7 - 77 76 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL PRESSURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 - 11 - 7 - 78 77 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL PRESSURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8
7 - 11 - 7 - 79 78 Alarm group configuration HEAVY FUEL OIL PRESSURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP -X.14
7 - 11 - 7 - 80 79 Alarm group configuration GAS OIL PRESSURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 81 80 Alarm group configuration DIESEL OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 82 81 Alarm group configuration OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE LOW 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 83 82 Alarm group configuration OIL PRESSURE RINGLINE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 84 83 Alarm group configuration FUEL OIL PUMP NOT RUNNING 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 88 87 Alarm group configuration FEEDBACK ERROR ON VALVE G111 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 91 90 Alarm group configuration FEEDBACK ERROR ON VALVE F250 B1 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 96 95 Alarm group configuration LOW HFO CIRCULATION TEMPERATURE 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 97 96 Alarm group configuration LOW HFO CIRCULATION PRESSURE 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 98 97 Alarm group configuration HIGH HFO CIRCULATION PRESSURE 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 99 98 Alarm group configuration OIL TEMPERATURE NOT REACHED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 102 101 Alarm group configuration COOLER BYPASSED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 108 107 Alarm group configuration FEEDBACK ERROR ON VALVE G460 B2 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 109 108 Alarm group configuration FEEDBACK ERROR ON VALVE G461 B2 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 110 109 Alarm group configuration FW PUMPS STOPPED OIL DETECTED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 111 110 Alarm group configuration FW PUMPS STOPPED SALINITY DETECTED 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 116 115 Alarm group configuration POWER SUPPLY 1 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 117 116 Alarm group configuration POWER SUPPLY 2 NO FEEDBACK 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 118 117 Alarm group configuration CIRCULATION PUMP AUTO STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP
7 - 11 - 7 - 119 118 Alarm group configuration FEED WATER PUMP AUTO STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 120 119 Alarm group configuration ST. BY WATER PUMP B1 STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 121 120 Alarm group configuration ST. BY WATER PUMP B2 STARTED 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam
7 - 11 - 7 - 122 121 Alarm group configuration BOILER TEMPERATURE HIGH 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Hotwater
7 - 11 - 7 - 123 122 Alarm group configuration BOILER TEMPERATURE LOW 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Hotwater
8 - SURVEIL Menu for display of shut downs and alarms. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
8 - 1 SHT.DWN. Menu for display of the first arising shut down out of the complete np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
8 - 1 - 1 Displays shut down number. [SHT.DWN. NUM] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
8 - 1 - 2 Displays shut down text. [SHT.DWN. TEXT] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
8 - 2 ALARM INSPECTION Menu for display of the first arising alarm out of the complete number 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
8 - 2 - 1 Displays alarm number. [ALARM NUM] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
8 - 2 - 2 Displays alarm text. [ALARM TEXT] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
9 SETUP Menu for set-up of control mode, timers, settings, diagnoses, 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
9 - 1 CTRL MODE Menu for selection of burner mode and pressure mode. np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 1 - 1 Selection of burner control mode (stopped, auto, manual). If auto BURNER CTRL MODE N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40144 driftform T17
9 - 1 - 3 Selection of pressure mode (low, high). If the boiler plant is not SETPOINT SELECT N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40146 setp_select T19
9 - 2 - 1 TIMERS Menu for readout and set-up of timers to sequences, surveillance, 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 1 TIMERS SETUP Menu for sequence timer readout. SEQUENCE 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 2 Timer countdown for the minimum running time of the combustion air 0 START START N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 3600 def: 1200 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40147 timer[TI_START_START].setpunkt R/W A START START
9 - 2 - 1 - 7 Timer countdown for the pre-purge period. 5 PRE-PURGE N SEC pw:su lo: 22 hi: 3600 def: 32 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40152 timer[TI_PREPURGE].setpunkt R/W A PRE-PURGE
9 - 2 - 1 - 8 Timer countdown for the ignition period. 6 IGNITION N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 30 def: 5 M, R, KBP All X 40156 timer[TI_PREIGNITION].setpunkt R/W A IGNITION
9 - 2 - 1 - 9 Timer countdown for the safety time period. 7 SAFETY TIME N SEC pw:su lo: 2 hi: 15 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40157 timer[TI_SAFETY_TIME].setpunkt R/W A SAFETY TIME
9 - 2 - 1 - 10 Timer countdown for the maximum permissible starting time of the 8 START SEQ N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 180 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40158 timer[TI_START_SEQ_MAX].setpunkt R/W A START SEQ
9 - 2 - 1 - 11 Timer countdown for the flame stabilising period. 9 FLAME STAB. N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40159 timer[TI_FLAME_STABLE].setpunkt R/W A FLAME STAB.
9 - 2 - 1 - 12 Timer countdown for the low firing period. 10 LOW FIRING N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40160 timer[TI_LOW_FIRING].setpunkt R/W A LOW FIRING
9 - 2 - 1 - 13 Timer countdown for the rising period. 11 RISING TIME N SEC pw:cu lo: 300 hi: 3600 def: 600 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40161 timer[TI_RISING_TIME].setpunkt R/W A RISING TIME
9 - 2 - 1 - 14 Timer countdown for regulator positioning to steam purge position. 12 STEAM PG.PO N SEC pw:cu lo: 5 hi: 120 def: 20 1K, 2K, M, R All X 40162 timer[TI_STEAM_PURGE_POS].setpunkt R/W A STEAM PG.PO
9 - 2 - 1 - 15 Timer countdown for the steam purge 1 period. Oil valves close and 13 STEAM PURG1 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 30 1K, 2K, M, R All X 40163 timer[TI_STEAM_PURGE1].setpunkt R/W A STEAM PURG1
9 - 2 - 1 - 16 Timer countdown for the steam purge 2 period. Atomising steam valve 14 STEAM PURG2 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 1200 def: 20 1K, 2K, M, R All X 40164 timer[TI_STEAM_PURGE2].setpunkt R/W A STEAM PURG2
9 - 2 1 17 Timer countdown for the post purge period. 15 POSTPURGE N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 3600 def: 32 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40165 timer[TI_POSTPURGE].setpunkt R/W A POSTPURGE
9 - 2 1 19 Timer countdown for the oil circulation timer. 17 OIL CIRC T. N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 300 def: 60 M, R, KBP All X 40225 timer[TI_OIL_CIRC_TEMP].setpunkt R/W A OIL CIRC T.
9 - 2 1 20 Timer countdown for SAFETY purge 18 SAFETY PURGE N SEC pw:su lo: 20 hi: 3600 def: 32 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40226 timer[TI_SAFETY_PURGE].setpunkt R/W A SAFETY PURGE
9 - 2 1 21 Timer countdown for Booster pump start, delay start in relation to 19 BST PMP ON N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 M, R All X 40227 timer[TI_BOOSTER_PUMP_ON].setpunkt R/W A BST PMP ON
9 - 2 - 1 - 23 Menu for readout of surveillance timers. SURVEILLANCE 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 25 Timer countdown for delay of the high water level shut down (burner 1 WATER HI.SD N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 120 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40170 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_HIGH_ALARM].setpunkt R/W A WATER HI.SD
9 - 2 - 1 - 26 Timer countdown for delay of the high water level alarm. 2 WATER HI.AL N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 120 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40171 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_HIGH_WARN].setpunkt R/W A WATER HI.AL
9 - 2 - 1 - 27 Timer countdown for delay of the low water level alarm. 3 WATER.LO.AL N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 120 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40172 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_LOW_WARN].setpunkt R/W A WATER.LO.AL
9 - 2 - 1 - 28 Timer countdown for delay of the low water level shut down (burner 4 WATER LO.SD N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam Win2000 X 40173 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_LOW_ALARM].setpunkt R/W A WATER LO.SD
9 - 2 - 1 - 29 Timer countdown for delay of the low water level shut down (burner 5 WATER SW LO N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40174 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_SWITCH_LOW].setpunkt
9 - 2 - 1 - 32 Timer countdown for maximum feedback signal time from the ships 8 PMS FEEDBAC N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 1200 def: 160 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40177 timer[TI_PMS_FEEDBACK].setpunkt R/W A PMS FEEDBAC
9 - 2 - 1 - 33 Timer countdown for feedback signal from servo motor. 9 SERVO POS N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 1200 def: 120 M, R All X 40178 timer[TI_SERVO_POS].setpunkt R/W A SERVO POS
9 - 2 - 1 - 34 Timer countdown for maximum feedback signal time from the burner 10 B.MOT.STAR N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 30 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40179 timer[TI_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A B.MOT.STAR
9 - 2 - 1 - 35 Timer countdown for signal to start/stop of feed water pumps in boiler 11 W. REG OUT N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40180 timer[TI_FEED_REG_OUT].setpunkt R/W A W. REG OUT
9 - 2 - 1 - 36 Timer countdown for delay of high alarm from the smoke density 12 SMOKE HI.AL N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 20 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40181 timer[TI_SMOKE_HIGH_WARN].setpunkt R/W A SMOKE HI.AL
9 - 2 - 1 - 37 Timer countdown for delay of high alarm from the uptake temperature 13 TEMP HI.AL. N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40182 timer[TI_TEMP_UPTAKE_HIGH_WARN].setpunkt R/W A TEMP HI.AL.
9 - 2 - 1 - 38 Timer countdown for delay of high shut down (burner cut off) from the 14 TEMP.HI.SD. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40183 timer[TI_TEMP_UPTAKE_HIGH_ALARM].setpunkt R/W A TEMP.HI.SD.
9 - 2 - 1 - 39 Delay timer from last operation of an unlocked panel to the key is 15 KEY HOLD N SEC pw:su lo: 60 hi: 3600 def: 60 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40184 timer[TI_AUTO_RELEASE_KEY].setpunkt
9 - 2 - 1 - 41 Timer countdown for delay of alarm for low circulation water flow 17 CIRC LO.FLOW N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40685 timer[TI_CIRC_LOW_FLOW].setpunkt
9 - 2 - 1 - 42 Timer countdown for feedback signal from booster pump motor. 18 BOOST.M.ST N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 30 def: 10 R All X 40686 timer[TI_BOOSTER_START].setpunkt
9 - 2 - 1 - 43 Timer countdown for delay of the low combustion air pressure shut 19 L. COMB AIR N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40622 timer[TI_LOW_COMB_AIR_PRESS_SWITCH].setpunkt R/W A L. COMB AIR
9 - 2 - 1 - 46 Timer countdown for delay of EGB low water level alarm. 22 EGB LO.LE N SEC ½ lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 5 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40709 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V_LOW].setpunkt R/W A EGB LO.LE
9 - 2 - 1 - 47 Timer countdown for delay of EGB high water level alarm. 23 EGB HI.LE N SEC ½ lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 5 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40710 timer[TI_WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V_HIGH].setpunkt R/W A EGB HI.LE
9 - 2 - 1 - 49 Delay timer concerning start and stop, respectively, of water pumps 25 W.L.C.NO N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 2 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40714 timer[TI_WATER_CONT_ON_OFF_NORMAL].setpunkt R/W A W.L.C.NO
9 - 2 - 1 - 50 Delay timer concerning start of standby water pumps according to the 26 W.L.C.STBY N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 2 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40115 timer[TI_WATER_CONT_ON_OFF_STBY].setpunkt R/W A W.L.C.STBY
9 - 2 - 1 - 51 Timer countdown for delay of the difference pressure high alarm. 27 DF.PR.HI.AL N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40233 timer[TI_DIFF_PRESS_HIGH_WARN].setpunkt R/W A DF.PR.HI.AL
9 - 2 1 52 Timer countdown for main engine load high. 28 ME LOAD HIGH N SEC pw:su lo: 60 hi: 3600 def: 30 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40810 timer[TI_ME_LOAD_SETPOINT_HIGH].setpunkt R/W A ME LOAD HIGH
9 - 2 1 53 Timer countdown for main engine load low 29 ME LOAD LOW N SEC pw:su lo: 60 hi: 3600 def: 30 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40811 timer[TI_ME_LOAD_SETPOINT_LOW].setpunkt R/W A ME LOAD LOW
9 - 2 - 1 - 55 Menu for readout of shared timers. SHARED 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 56 Timer countdown for delay of high alarm from the salinity alarm 0 SAL HI.AL. N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40186 timer[TI_SALINITY_HIGH_WARN].setpunkt R/W A SAL HI.AL.
9 - 2 - 1 - 57 Timer countdown for delay of high shut down (burner cut off) from the 1 SAL HI.SD. N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X 40187 timer[TI_SALINITY_HIGH_ALARM].setpunkt R/W A SAL HI.SD.
9 - 2 - 1 - 58 Timer period in which a low HFO pressure alarm is suppressed. If the 2 HFO P.LO:AL N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 -X.14,-X.17, -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0 X 40188 timer[TI_FUEL_OIL_PRESS_LOW_WARN].setpunkt R/W A HFO P.LO:AL
9 - 2 - 1 - 60 Timer period in which a low DO pressure alarm is suppressed. If the 4 DO P.LO:AL N SEC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 60 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X 40188 timer[TI_FUEL_OIL_PRESS_LOW_WARN].setpunkt R/W A DO P.LO:AL
9 - 2 - 1 - 62 Menu for readout of power panel 1 timers. POWER PANEL 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 63 Timer countdown for feedback signal from fuel oil pump 1. 0 F.OIL PUMP 1 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40189 timer[TI_FUEL_PUMP_1_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A F.OIL PUMP 1
9 - 2 - 1 - 64 Timer countdown for feedback signal from fuel oil pump 2. 1 F.OIL PUMP 2 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40190 timer[TI_FUEL_PUMP_2_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A F.OIL PUMP 2
9 - 2 - 1 - 65 Timer countdown for feedback signal from start stand-by fuel oil 2 FUEL PRESS N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 30 def: 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40191 timer[TI_FUEL_OIL_PRESS].setpunkt R/W A FUEL PRESS
9 - 2 - 1 - 67 Timer countdown for feedback signal from shut down and cut off 4 F.O.PMP DEL N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40192 timer[TI_PUMP_START].setpunkt R/W A F.O.PMP DEL
9 - 2 - 1 - 69 Timer for flushing from 3-way valve (tank selection) to Tank 6 FLUSH TIMER 2 N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 300 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 -X.S, -X.14, -X.17 X 41092 timer[TI_FLUSH_TIMER_2].setpunkt FLUSH TIMER 2
9 - 2 - 1 - 72 Flushing from 3-way valve (tank selection) to FO. pumps or steam preheater 9 FLUSH TIMER 5 N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 300 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.0, 1.X, 2.2, 2.4, 6.2, 6.4 X 41095 timer[TI_FLUSH_TIMER_5].setpunkt FLUSH TIMER 5
9 - 2 - 1 - 78 Delay timer from when the communication signal is lost between 15 KEY TIMEOUT N SEC pw:cu lo: 15 hi: 100 def: 45 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40193 timer[TI_RELEASE_KEY].setpunkt R/W A KEY TIMEOUT
9 - 2 - 1 - 79 Timer countdown for feedback signal from feedwater pump 1. 16 F.W.PMP 1 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 20 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40196 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_1_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A F.W.PMP 1
9 - 2 - 1 - 81 Delay timer concerning start of stand-by feed water pump in case of 18 F.W. DELAY N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 60 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40200 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_START].setpunkt R/W A F.W. DELAY
9 - 2 - 1 - 82 Timer countdown for change of feed water pump (main/service pump) 19 F.W. M. RUN N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 60 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40201 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_STOP].setpunkt R/W A F.W. M. RUN
9 - 2 - 1 - 83 Delay timer concerning start of stand-by feed water pump in case of 20 F.W. DELAY2 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 60 M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40202 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_START_2].setpunkt R/W A F.W. DELAY2
9 - 2 - 1 - 84 Timer countdown for feedback signal from circulation pump 1. 21 C.PUMP 1 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 20 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40203 timer[TI_CIRC_PUMP_1_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A C.PUMP 1
9 - 2 1 85 Timer countdown for feedback signal from circulation pump 2. 22 C.PUMP 2 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 20 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40204 timer[TI_CIRC_PUMP_2_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A C.PUMP 2
9 - 2 - 1 - 87 Timer countdown for feedback signal from feedwater pump 5. 23 F.W.PMP 5 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40683 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_5_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A F.W.PMP 5
9 - 2 - 1 - 88 Timer countdown for feedback signal from feedwater pump 6. 24 F.W.PMP 6 N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 15 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40684 timer[TI_FEED_PUMP_6_MOTOR_START].setpunkt R/W A F.W.PMP 6
9 - 2 1 89 Delay timer concerning start and stop, respectively, of water pumps 25 W.L.C NO EGB N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 2 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40716 timer[TI_WATER_CONT_ON_OFF_NORMAL_EGB].setpunkt R/W A W.L.C NO EGB
9 - 2 1 90 Delay timer concerning start of standby water pumps according to the 26 W.L.C STBY EGB N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 2 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40674 timer[TI_WATER_CONT_ON_OFF_STBY_EGB].setpunkt R/W A W.L.C STBY EGB
9 - 2 1 91 Timer countdown for signal to start/stop of feed water pumps on EGB. 27 W. REG OUT EGB N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 120 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40682 timer[TI_FEED_REG_OUT_EGB].setpunkt R/W A W. REG OUT EGB
9 - 2 1 92 Timer is started when the limit of heavy fuel oil pressure low shutdown 33 HFO P.LO.SD N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 5 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17, -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0 X 40801 timer[TI_FUEL_OIL_PRESS_LOW_ALARM].setpunkt R/W A HFO P.LO.SD
9 - 2 1 86 Timer is started when the limit of heavy fuel oil pressure high 34 HFO P.HI.SD N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 5 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17, -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0 X 40702 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_PRESS].timer.high_alarm R/W A HFO P.HI.SD
9 - 2 - 1 - 101 Timer is started when the limit of diesel oil pressure low shutdown is 35 DO P.LO.SD N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 5 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17
9 - 2 - 1 - 102 Timer is started when the limit of diesel oil pressure high shutdown is 36 DO P.HI.SD N SEC pw:su lo: 0 hi: 5 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17
9 - 2 - 1 - 105 Timer used to delay Auto start of FW and Circ. Pumps after blackout. 41 CIRC.P.STAR N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 60 def: 30 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 106 Timer used to delay the activation/deactivation of chemical pump no. 42 CHM.PMP1 DL N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All timer[TI_CHEM_PUMP1_START_DELAY].setpunkt R/W A CHEM.PMP DL
9 - 2 - 1 - 107 Timer used to delay the activation/deactivation of chemical pump no. 2 43 CHM.PMP2 DL N SEC pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 3600 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All timer[TI_CHEM_PUMP2_START_DELAY].setpunkt R/W A CHEM.PMP DL
9 - 2 - 1 - 120 Menu for readout of communication timers. The timers continuously COMMUNICATION 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 1 - 121 Timer countdown for communication feedback signal from local panel 0 PANEL1 OFFL N SEC pw:su lo: 1 hi: 30 def: 10 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40203 timer[TI_PANEL1_OFFLINE].setpunkt R/W A PANEL1 OFFL
9 - 2 - 2 DATE/TIME The date/time is used to indicate time for the event and alarm system. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 1 Must be adjusted as a 24 hour watch. HOUR N pw:no lo: 0 hi: 23 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 2 Adjustment of minutes. MIN N pw:no lo: 0 hi: 59 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 3 Adjustment of seconds. SEC N pw:no lo: 0 hi: 59 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 4 Adjustment of date. DAY N pw:no lo: 1 hi: 31 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 5 Adjustment of month. MONTH N pw:no lo: 1 hi: 12 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 2 - 6 Adjustment of year (4 digits). YEAR N pw:no lo: 1992 hi: 2091 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 HOUR/START CNT Main menu for hour counters. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 15 Hour counter menu for burner load above 25% LOAD >25% 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 16 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set LOAD >25% 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 17 Counts and displays the total running hours for the burner at operation TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40252 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_25].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 18 Counts and displays accumulated running hours above 25% since the SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40253 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_25].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 19 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40254 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_25].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 20 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 21 Hour counter menu for burner load above 50% LOAD >50% 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 24 Counts and displays accumulated running hours above 50% load SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40256 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_50].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 27 Hour counter menu for burner load below 75% (from 50% to 100%). LOAD >75% 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 30 Counts and displays accumulated running hours above 75% load SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40259 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_75].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 33 Hour counter menu for burner when in operation LOAD 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 34 Hour counter menu for burner when in operation LOAD 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 35 Counts and displays the total running hours TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40261 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_100].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 36 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40262 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_100].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 39 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the burner. TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40264 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_100].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 40 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, R, KBE, KBP All X 40265 hour_cnt[CNT_LOAD_100].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 41 Hour counter menu for smoke density blower. SMOKE BLOW 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 42 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set SMOKE BLOW 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 43 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40266 hour_cnt[CNT_SMOKE].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 44 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40267 hour_cnt[CNT_SMOKE].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 45 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40268 hour_cnt[CNT_SMOKE].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 46 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 47 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40269 hour_cnt[CNT_SMOKE].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 48 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40270 hour_cnt[CNT_SMOKE].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 49 Hour counter menu for booster pump. Note only used for large BOOST PUMP M,R All
9 - 2 - 3 - 50 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set BOOST PUMP M,R All
9 - 2 - 3 - 51 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M,R All X 40271 hour_cnt[CNT_BOOSTER_PUMP].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 52 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M,R All X 40272 hour_cnt[CNT_BOOSTER_PUMP].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 53 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R All X 40273 hour_cnt[CNT_BOOSTER_PUMP].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 54 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu M,R All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 55 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M,R All X 40274 hour_cnt[CNT_BOOSTER_PUMP].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
9 - 2 - 3 - 56 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M,R All X 40275 hour_cnt[CNT_BOOSTER_PUMP].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 65 Hour counter menu for burner motor. BURN.MOTOR M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 66 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set BURN.MOTOR M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 67 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected motor. TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40281 hour_cnt[CNT_BURN_MOTOR].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 68 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40282 hour_cnt[CNT_BURN_MOTOR].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 69 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40283 hour_cnt[CNT_BURN_MOTOR].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 70 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu M, R, KBE, KBP All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 71 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40284 hour_cnt[CNT_BURN_MOTOR].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 72 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40285 hour_cnt[CNT_BURN_MOTOR].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 73 Hour counter menu for ignition oil pump. IGNI.MOTOR 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 74 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set IGNI.MOTOR 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 75 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40286 hour_cnt[CNT_IGNI_MOTOR].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 76 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40287 hour_cnt[CNT_IGNI_MOTOR].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 77 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40288 hour_cnt[CNT_IGNI_MOTOR].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 79 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40289 hour_cnt[CNT_IGNI_MOTOR].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 80 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40290 hour_cnt[CNT_IGNI_MOTOR].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 81 Hour counter menu for fuel oil pump 1. F.OIL PUMP 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14
9 - 2 - 3 - 82 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set F.OIL PUMP 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14
9 - 2 - 3 - 83 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40291 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_1].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 84 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40292 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_1].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 85 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40293 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_1].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 86 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 87 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40294 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_1].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 88 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40295 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_1].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 89 Hour counter menu for fuel oil pump 2. F.OIL PUMP 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14
9 - 2 - 3 - 90 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set F.OIL PUMP 2 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14
9 - 2 - 3 - 91 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40296 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_2].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 92 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40297 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_2].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 93 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40298 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_2].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 94 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 95 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40299 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_2].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 96 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14 X 40300 hour_cnt[CNT_FUEL_PUMP_2].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 113 Hour counter menu for circulation pump 1. CIRC.PUMP 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 114 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set CIRC.PUMP 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 115 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40301 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_1].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 116 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40302 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_1].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 117 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40303 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_1].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 118 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 119 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40304 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_1].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 120 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40305 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_1].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 121 Hour counter menu for circulation pump 2. CIRC.PUMP 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 122 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set CIRC.PUMP 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 123 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40306 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_2].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 124 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40307 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_2].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 125 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40308 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_2].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 126 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 127 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40309 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_2].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 128 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40310 hour_cnt[CNT_CIRC_PUMP_2].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 129 Hour counter menu for chemical pump 1. CHEM PUMP 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 130 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set CHEM PUMP 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 131 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40306 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_1].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 132 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40307 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_1].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 133 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40308 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_1].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 135 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40309 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_1].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 136 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40310 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_1].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 129 Hour counter menu for chemical pump 2/ EGB Chemical pump. CHEM PUMP 2 / EGB CHEM PUMP 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 130 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set CHEM PUMP 2 / EGB 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 2 - 3 - 131 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40311 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_2].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 132 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40312 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_2].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 133 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40313 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_2].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 135 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40314 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_2].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 136 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40315 hour_cnt[CNT_CHEM_PUMP_2].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 145 Hour counter menu for feed water pump 1. F.W. PUMP 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 2 - 3 - 146 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set F.W. PUMP 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 2 - 3 - 147 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40321 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_1].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 148 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40322 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_1].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 149 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40323 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_1].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 150 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 151 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40324 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_1].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 152 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40325 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_1].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 153 Hour counter menu for feed water pump 2. F.W. PUMP 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 2 - 3 - 154 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set F.W. PUMP 2 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 2 - 3 - 155 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40326 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_2].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 156 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40327 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_2].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 157 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40328 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_2].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 158 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 159 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40329 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_2].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 160 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40330 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_2].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 177 Hour counter menu for EGB feed water pump 1. EGB F.W. PUMP 1 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All
9 - 2 - 3 - 178 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set EGB F.W. PUMP 1 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All
9 - 2 - 3 - 179 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40687 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_5].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 180 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40688 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_5].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 181 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40689 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_5].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 182 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 183 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40690 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_5].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 184 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40691 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_5].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 185 Hour counter menu for EGB feed water pump 2. EGB F.W. PUMP 2 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All
9 - 2 - 3 - 186 Hour counter sub menu. When the service hours exceed the set EGB F.W. PUMP 2 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All
9 - 2 - 3 - 187 Counts and displays the total running hours for the connected TOT.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40692 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_6].total R/W A TOT.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 188 Counts and displays accumulated running hours since the last reset SRV.HOUR N HOUR pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40693 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_6].serv R/W A SRV.HOUR
9 - 2 - 3 - 189 Setting of the service interval in hours. SRV.VAL N HOUR pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40694 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_6].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL
9 - 2 - 3 - 190 Reset of the service counters RESET N pw:cu M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All R/W D RESET
9 - 2 - 3 - 191 Counts and displays the total number of starts for the connected TOT.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40695 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_6].starts.total R/W A TOT.START
9 - 2 - 3 - 192 Counts and displays accumulated number of starts since the last SRV.START N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X 40696 hour_cnt[CNT_FW_PUMP_6].starts.serv R/W A SRV.START
9 - 3 - SETTINGS Menu for setting start/stop limits, oil/air flow in different states, oil-air 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 1 - START/STOP Menu for start and stop set points for the master/slave boilers. 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 1 - 1 Setpoint for Master boiler start at low pressure mode M.START LOW N BAR pw:no lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 5 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All, X 40341 dbasecfg[CFG_START_MASTER] R/W A M.START LOW
9 - 3 - 1 - 2 Setpoint for Master boiler stop at low pressure mode M.STOP LOW N BAR pw:no lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 6 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40342 dbasecfg[CFG_STOP_MASTER] R/W A M.STOP LOW
9 - 3 - 1 - 3 Setpoint for Master boiler start at high pressure mode M.START HIGH N BAR pw:no lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 15 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40608 dbasecfg[CFG_START_MASTER_HIGH] R/W A M.START HIGH
9 - 3 - 1 - 4 Setpoint for Master boiler stop at high pressure mode M.STOP HIGH N BAR pw:no lo: 0 hi: 27 def: 16 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X 40609 dbasecfg[CFG_STOP_MASTER_HIGH] R/W A M.STOP HIGH
9 - 3 - 2 - MIN.FIRING Menu for setting the oil servo/flow and air servo/flow when the burner 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 2 1 HFO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17
9 - 3 - 2 - 1 - 3 Setting of the servomotor position SERVO POS. N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 30 M, R All -X.14,-X.17 X 40353 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_POS_MINIMUM_HFO] R/W A SERVO POS.
9 - 3 - 2 2 DO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17
9 - 3 - 2 - 2 - 3 Setting of the servomotor position SERVO POS. N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 30 M, R All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X 40353 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_POS_MINIMUM_DO] R/W A SERVO POS.
9 - 3 - 3 PRE-PURGE Menu for setting the oil servo/flow and air servo/flow when the burner 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 3 - 5 Setting of the servomotor position SERVO POS. N% pw:cu lo: 50 hi: 100 def: 70 M, R All X 40358 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_POS_PURGE] R/W A SERVO POS.
9 - 3 - 4 IGNITION POSITION Menu for setting the oil servo/flow and air servo/flow when the burner 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 2 1 HFO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17
9 - 3 - 4 - 1 - 3 Setting of the servomotor position SERVO POS. N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 30 M, R All -X.14,-X.17 X 40363 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_POS_NOZZLE_1_IGNITE_HFO] R/W A SERVO POS.
9 - 3 - 2 2 DO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17
9 - 3 - 4 - 2 - 3 Setting of the servomotor position SERVO POS. N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 30 M, R All X.0, X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, X.17 X 40430 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_POS_NOZZLE_1_IGNITE_DO] R/W A SERVO POS.
9 - 3 - 21 - 1 Temperature limit that allows DO to enter the oil system when the fuel HFO-DO TMP N CEL pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 60 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 X.2, X.5, X.6, X.8, -X.14, -X.17
9 - 3 - 28 CHEMICAL PUMPS Menu for setting chemical pumps starting conditions, when using a 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 3 - 28 - 1 This value determines at what feed water regulator output level the CHM PMP N% np lo: 0 hi: 20 def: 10 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All dbasecfg[CFG_CHEM_PUMP_START] R/W
9 - 3 - 28 - 2 This value determines at what feed water regulator output level the CHM PMP EGB N% np lo: 0 hi: 20 def: 10 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All dbasecfg[CFG_CHEM_PUMP_START_EGB] R/W
9 - 4 DIAGNOSES Menu for viewing software information, digital input/output status, 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 1 SOFTWARE Menu for general system information. np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 1 - 1 Displays panel type. [PANEL TYPE] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 1 - 2 Displays date and time for installation and software version number. [VERSION] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 1 - 3 Displays information text. [INFO 1] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 1 - 4 Displays information text. [INFO 2] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 2 DIGITAL INPUT Menu for viewing the status of the digital inputs (0/1). np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 2 - 1 Status for digital input DI 1 N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
9 - 4 - 2 - 63 DIGITAL OUTPUT Menu for viewing the status of the digital outputs (0/1). np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15
9 - 4 - 2 - 64 Status for digital output DO 1 N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T15
9 - 4 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT Menu for testing the digital outputs (0/1). 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T16
9 - 4 3 1 Status for digital output DO 1 N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X T16
ANALOG INPUT Menu for testing the analog inputs. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Value for analog input AI 1 N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Value for analog input AI 5 (PT100) N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Vaule for tacho input TACHO N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
ANALOG OUTPUT Menu for testing the analog outputs. (read) 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Analog out put value AO 1 N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
ANALOG OUTPUT Menu for testing the analog outputs. (set) 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
Analog output test AO 1 N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 4 SUPERUSER Menu for display of latest use of super user password. np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 4 - 1 Display the date and time for the latest entering of the super user [USED] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 5 SERIAL NUMBER Menu for software information. np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 5 - 1 Displays the EPROM serial number. The number must not be 0. SERIAL NO N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 5 - 2 Displays the commissioning date for the EPROM. COMMISSIONED N np 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 5 - 3 Erases the EEPROM. If the EEPROM is erased the original factory ERASE EEPROM N pw:cu 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 6 NO OF SHT.DWN. Menu for displays of the total number of shut downs since np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All
9 - 4 - 6 - 1 Displays of the total number of shut downs since commissioning. NO OF SHT.DWN. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R All
9 - 4 - 8 NEW PASSWORD Menu for change and reset of password. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 8 - 1 Password 1234 can be changed. The change will only be effective for NEW PASSWORD N pw:cu 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 4 - 8 - 2 This feature will reset the user password to default. The reset requires RESET PASSWORDS N pw:special 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 5 LOGGINGS Menu for shut down log and oil flow counter. 1K, 2K. EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 5 - 1 INSPECT SHT.DWN. Menu for display of the last 20 shut downs. np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
9 - 5 - 1 - 1 Date and time for the shut down. [SHT.DWN. NUM] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
9 - 5 - 1 - 2 Displays shut down text. [SHT.DWN. TEXT] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000
9 - 5 - 3 COMM. OIL Menu for display, service setting, and reset of the accumulated 1K, 2K, KBE, KBP, M, R All
9 - 5 - 3 - 1 Sub menu for accumulated common oil flow. When the service value OIL FLOW SUMMARIZED N KBE, KBP, M, R All
9 - 5 - 3 - 2 Counts and displays the total accumulated common oil flow in litre. TOTAL NL pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R All X 41287 hour_cnt[CNT_COMMON_OIL_SUM].total R/W A TOTAL
9 - 5 - 3 - 3 Counts and displays accumulated common oil flow in litre since the SERVICE NL pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R All X 41289 hour_cnt[CNT_COMMON_OIL_SUM].serv R/W A SERVICE
9 - 5 - 3 - 4 Setting of the service value in 1000 litres. SRV.VAL(1000L) NL pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R All X 41290 hour_cnt[CNT_COMMON_OIL_SUM].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL(1000L)
9 - 5 - 3 - 5 Reset of the accumulated service oil flow. RESET N pw:cu KBE, KBP, M, R All 40756 reset_common_oil_summarizer R/W D RESET
9 - 5 - 5 DO OIL Menu for display, service setting, and reset of the accumulated diesel -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All
9 - 5 - 5 - 1 Sub menu for accumulated diesel oil flow. When the service value OIL FLOW SUMMARIZED N -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All
9 - 5 - 5 - 2 Counts and displays the total accumulated diesel oil flow in litre. TOTAL NL pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All X 41483 hour_cnt[CNT_DO_OIL_SUM].total R/W A TOTAL
9 - 5 - 5 - 3 Counts and displays accumulated diesel oil flow in litre since the last SERVICE NL pw:su lo: 0 hi: 30000 def: 0 -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All X 41485 hour_cnt[CNT_DO_OIL_SUM].serv R/W A SERVICE
9 - 5 - 5 - 4 Setting of the service value in 1000 litres. SRV.VAL(1000L) NL pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22760 def: 0 -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All X 41486 hour_cnt[CNT_DO_OIL_SUM].serv_val R/W A SRV.VAL(1000L)
9 - 5 - 5 - 5 Reset of the accumulated service oil flow. RESET N pw:cu -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB All 41477 reset_do_oil_summarizer R/W D RESET
9 - 6 - CALIBRATE Menu for calibrating operating ranges for transmitters, oil flow meter, 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 1 WATER LEVEL Menu for setting the water level transmitter operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 6 - 1 - 1 Actual value of the water level in mm. WATER LEVEL N mm np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40902 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL].value R
9 - 6 - 1 - 2 The high water level point (in mm) set during commission should be RANGE HIGH N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 1500 def: 260 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41408 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 1 - 3 The low water level (in mm) set during commission should be used as RANGE LOW N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 0 def: -265 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41409 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 1 - 4 Calculation resolution for the water level controller. RND.1/10MM N pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 100 def: 10 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41410 dbasecfg[CFG_FW_ROUND] R/W
9 - 6 - 6 BOILER PRES Menu for setting the boiler pressure transmitter operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 6 - 6 - 1 Actual value of the boiler pressure in bar. BOILER PRES N BAR np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40900 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS].value R
9 - 6 - 6 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the local panel. RANGE HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 25 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41415 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_PRESS_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 6 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the local panel. RANGE LOW N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41416 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_PRESS_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 8 FUEL O.PRES Menu for setting the fuel oil pressure transmitter operating range. 1K, 2K, KBE, KBP, M, R All -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0, -13.14, -14.17
9 - 6 - 8 - 1 Actual value of the fuel oil pressure in bar. FUEL O.PRES N BAR np 1K, 2K, KBE, KBP, M, R All -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0, -13.14, -14.17 40909 run_parm[FUEL_OIL_PRESS].value R
9 - 6 - 8 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def:40 1K, 2K, KBE, KBP, M, R All -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0, -13.14, -14.17 41419 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PRESS_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 8 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE LOW N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 30 def: 0 1K, 2K, KBE, KBP, M, R All -3.0, -4.0, -5.0, -8.0, -13.14, -14.17 41420 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PRESS_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 10 OXYGEN SENS Menu for setting the oxygen sensor operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 10 - 1 Actual value of the oxygen content in %. OXYGEN SENS N% np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40914 run_parm[OXYGEN_SENSOR].value R
9 - 6 - 10 - 2 Should be calibrated according to configuration of the oxygen sensor. RANGE HIGH N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 10 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41423 dbasecfg[CFG_OXYGEN_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 10 - 3 Should be calibrated according to configuration of the oxygen sensor. RANGE LOW N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41424 dbasecfg[CFG_OXYGEN_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 11 SMOKE DENS. Menu for setting the smoke density operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 11 - 1 Actual value of the smoke density in %. SMOKE DENS. N% 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40913 run_parm[SMOKE_DENSITY].value R
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
9 - 6 - 11 - 2 Should be calibrated according to configuration of the smoke density RANGE HIGH N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 100 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41425 dbasecfg[CFG_SMOKE_DENSITY_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 11 - 3 Should be calibrated according to configuration of the smoke density RANGE LOW N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41426 dbasecfg[CFG_SMOKE_DENSITY_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 12 SALINITY Menu for setting the salinity equipment operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 12 - 1 Actual value of the salinity equipment. SALINITY N ppm np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 40919 run_parm[SALINITY].value R
9 - 6 - 12 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE HIGH N ppm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 20 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 41427 dbasecfg[CFG_SALINITY_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 12 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE LOW N ppm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Win2000 41428 dbasecfg[CFG_SALINITY_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 14 ST.PRES.COM Menu for setting the common pressure transmitter operating range. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 6 - 14 - 1 Actual value of the common steam pressure in bar. ST.PRES.COM N BAR np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 40784 run_parm[STEAM_PRESS_COMMON].value R
9 - 6 - 14 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 25 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41431 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_STEAM_PRESS_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 14 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE LOW N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All 41432 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_STEAM_PRESS_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 15 SERVO MOTOR Menu for setting the servo motor operating range. M, R All
9 - 6 - 15 - 1 Actual value of the servo motor position in percent. SERVO MOTOR N% np M, R All 40910 run_parm[SERVO_POSITION].value R
9 - 6 - 15 - 2 Actual value of the servo motor position indicated as a resistance RAW DATA N np M, R All 41444 PRESS_VALS[2] R
9 - 6 - 15 - 3 Setting of the resistance signal value when the air dampers are fully RANGE HIGH N pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10000 def: 8000 M, R All 41445 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 15 - 4 Setting of the resistance signal value when the air dampers are fully RANGE LOW N pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10000 def: 1500 M, R All 41446 dbasecfg[CFG_SERVO_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 17 TEMP.INLET Menu for setting the operating range of the exhaust gas inlet EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 17 - 1 Actual value of the exhaust gas inlet temperature in °C. TEMP.INLET N ºC pw:cu EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40904 run_parm_lite[TEMP_INLET_LITE].value R
9 - 6 - 17 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE HIGH N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 700 def: 600 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41447 dbasecfg[CFG_TEMP_INLET_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 17 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE LOW N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 700 def: 0 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41448 dbasecfg[CFG_TEMP_INLET_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 18 TEMP. OUTLET Menu for setting the operating range of the exhaust gas outlet EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 18 - 1 Actual value of the exhaust gas outlet temperature in °C. TEMP.OUTLET N ºC EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40905 run_parm_lite[TEMP_OUTLET_LITE].value R
9 - 6 - 18 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE HIGH N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 700 def: 600 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41449 dbasecfg[CFG_TEMP_OUTLET_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 18 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE LOW N ºC pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 700 def: 0 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41450 dbasecfg[CFG_TEMP_OUTLET_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 19 DIFF.PRESS. Menu for setting the operating range of the exhaust gas differential EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 19 - 1 Actual value of the differential pressure in mm H2O. DIFF.PRESS. N mm EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40906 run_parm[DIFF_PRESS].value R
9 - 6 - 19 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE HIGH N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 250 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41451 dbasecfg[CFG_DIFF_PRESS_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 19 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the panel. RANGE LOW N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 250 def: 0 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41452 dbasecfg[CFG_DIFF_PRESS_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 20 ME. LOAD Menu for setting the operating range of the main engine load. EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 20 - 1 Actual value of the main engine load in %. ME.LOAD N% EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 40907 run_parm[ME_LOAD].value R
9 - 6 - 20 - 2 Range for the max setting RANGE HIGH N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 100 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41453 dbasecfg[CFG_ME_LOAD_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 20 - 3 Range for the minimum setting RANGE LOW N% pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 100 def: 0 EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All 41454 dbasecfg[CFG_ME_LOAD_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 22 OIL FLOW Menu for setting the oil flow transmitter operating range. KBE, KBP, M, R All
9 - 6 - 22 - 1 Menu for setting the oil flow transmitter operating range. OIL FLOW N% np KBE, KBP, M, R All 40923 run_parm[OIL_FLOW].value R
9 - 6 - 22 - 2 The maximum oil flow to the burner appears from the set point MAX FLOW N L/H pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R All 41413 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_FLOW_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 22 - 3 The number of beats per 10 litre. Number of beats/litre appears from BEATS/(10L) N pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R All 41414 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PULS_PR_LITER] R/W
9 - 6 - 23 WATER LEVEL Menu for setting the water level transmitter operating range. M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 23 - 1 Actual value of the water level in mm. WATER LEVEL N mm np M, R, KBE, KBP All 40920 run_parm[WATER_LEVEL_XS_2V].value R
9 - 6 - 23 - 2 The high water level point (in mm) set during commission should be RANGE HIGH N mm pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 1500 def: 260 M, R, KBE, KBP All 41457 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_MAX_VALUE_XS_2V] R/W
9 - 6 - 23 - 3 The low water level (in mm) set during commission should be used as RANGE LOW N mm pw:cu lo: -1000 hi: 0 def: -265 M, R, KBE, KBP All 41458 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_MIN_VALUE_XS_2V] R/W
9 - 6 - 23 - 4 Calculation resolution for the water level controller. RND.1/10MM N pw:cu lo: 1 hi: 100 def: 10 M, R, KBE, KBP All 41459 dbasecfg[CFG_FW_ROUND_XS_2V] R/W
9 - 6 - 24 BOILER PRES XS2V Menu for setting the boiler pressure transmitter operating range. M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 6 - 24 - 1 Actual value of the boiler pressure in bar. BOILER PRES N BAR np M, R, KBE, KBP All 40922 run_parm[BOILER_PRESS_XS_2V].value R
9 - 6 - 24 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the local panel. RANGE HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 25 M, R, KBE, KBP All 41460 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_PRESS_MAX_VALUE_XS_2V] R/W
9 - 6 - 24 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the local panel. RANGE LOW N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All 41461 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_PRESS_MIN_VALUE_XS_2V] R/W
9 - 6 - 28 OIL PRESSURE Menu for setting the booster pump pressure operating range. M, R, KBE, KBP All X.2, X.4, 3.0, 3.S, 3.3, 3.3.1, 3.6, 3.9, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6,
9 - 6 - 28 - 1 Actual value of the booster pump pressure in celcius. OIL PRS RL. N BAR np M, R, KBE, KBP All X.2, X.4, 3.0, 3.S, 3.3, 3.3.1, 3.6, 3.9, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 41035 run_parm_lite[OIL_PRESS_RL_LITE].value R
9 - 6 - 28 - 2 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE HIGH N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 50 def: 40 M, R, KBE, KBP All X.2, X.4, 3.0, 3.S, 3.3, 3.3.1, 3.6, 3.9, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 41464 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PRESS_RL_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 28 - 3 Appears from the set point diagram for the power panel. RANGE LOW N BAR pw:cu lo: -1 hi: 30 def: 0 M, R, KBE, KBP All X.2, X.4, 3.0, 3.S, 3.3, 3.3.1, 3.6, 3.9, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 41465 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PRESS_RL_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 22 COMMON OIL Menu for setting the common oil flow transmitter operating range. KBE, KBP, M, R MCT All
9 - 6 - 22 - 1 Actual value of the common oil flow in %. OIL FLOW N% np KBE, KBP, M, R MCT All 41291 run_parm_lite[COMMON_OIL_FLOW_LITE].value R
9 - 6 - 22 - 2 The maximum common oil flow to the burner appears from the MAX FLOW N L/H pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R MCT All 41468 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_OIL_FLOW_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 22 - 3 The number of beats per 10 litre. Number of beats/litre appears from BEATS/(10L) N pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22000 def: 0 KBE, KBP, M, R MCT All 41469 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_OIL_FLOW_MIN_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 26 DO OIL FLOW Menu for setting the diesel oil flow transmitter operating range. -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB MCT All
9 - 6 - 26 - 1 Actual value of the diesel oil flow in %. OIL FLOW N% np -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB MCT All 41293 run_parm_lite[DO_OIL_FLOW_LITE].value R
9 - 6 - 26 - 2 The maximum diesel oil flow to the burner appears from the technical MAX FLOW N L/H pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 10000 def: 0 -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB MCT All 41472 dbasecfg[CFG_DO_OIL_FLOW_MAX_VALUE] R/W
9 - 6 - 26 - 3 The number of beats per 10 litre. Number of beats/litre appears from BEATS/(10L) N pw:cu lo: 0 hi: 22000 def: 0 -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB MCT All 41473 dbasecfg[CFG_DO_OIL_PULS_PR_LITER] R/W
9 - 7 - 1 PANEL SYSTEM Menu for set-up of panel type, burner type, and communication. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 1 - 1 Selection choices: LOCAL 1, LOCAL 2, POWER 1, POWER 2, PANEL TYPE N pw:su def: not 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X #REF! dbasecfg[CFG_PANEL_TYPE] R T08 PANEL TYPE
9 - 7 - 1 - 10 Menu for set-up of boiler type. Selection choices: STEAM, BOILER TYPE N pw:su def: steam 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All BOILER TYPE
9 - 7 - 1 - 2 Selection choices: KBSD, KBO-E, KBO-M, WH-RMS, WH-MSZ, BURNER TYPE N pw:su def: not 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X #REF! dbasecfg[CFG_BURNER_TYPE_MENU] R T07 BURNER TYPE
9 - 7 - 1 - 3 Selection choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 3.1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, S, 13, 14 or 17. F.O. SYSTEM N pw:su lo: 0 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 1 - 4 Software ID is a non-edit line configured to display the corresponding SOFTWARE ID N 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 1 - 5 Selection choices: MC or MCT. Regarding input/output, the MISSION IO CFG N pw:su def: not 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 1 - 6 Selection choices: MULTI or ALONE. If the boiler is part of a double BURNER FAMILY N pw:su def: multi 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X #REF! dbasecfg[CFG_FAMILY] R T09 BURNER FAMILY
9 - 7 - 1 - 7 Setting of the communication signal between panels. All included NODE NO.OFFSET N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 125 def: 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X #REF! dbasecfg[CFG_NODE_NUMBER_OFFSET] R A NODE NO.OFFSET
9 - 7 - 1 - 8 The node No.offset of the partner boiler panels in a multi boiler plant PART NO OFFSET N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 125 def: 1 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40414 dbasecfg[CFG_PARTNER_NODE_OFFSET] R A NODE NO.OFFSET
9 - 7 - 1 - 9 Speed of the signal transmission. The baud rate should be set as high BAUD RATE N pw:su lo: 600 hi: 38400 def: 38400 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40415 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMUNICATIONS_SPEED] R T20 BAUD RATE
9 - 7 - 1 - 10 Defines what extenal I/O's is selected: Selection choices: OFF, JCI, MODBUS IO N pw:su 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40592 dbasecfg[CFG_MODBUS_IO_TYPE] R MODBUS IO
9 - 7 - 2 BURNER SYSTEM Menu for setting additional regulation parameters. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 2 - 4 Defines the step size for the ramp function for the in/decrease button MAN STEP N% pw:cu lo: 0.5 hi: 2 def: 1 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 2 - 10 Makes an average value of the number of measurements which are TAU W.LEVEL N pw:no lo: 0 hi: 20 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All
9 - 7 - 3 - 12 Defines how many times per second the control system measures the OIL SAMPLING N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 10 def: 1 1K, 2K, M, R All
9 - 7 - 3 BURNER OPTIONS Menu for additional choice of equipment and pressure units. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 3 - 1 Selection of pressure units (bar, Mpa, or kg/cm2). 0 PRESS UNIT N BAR pw:cu def: bar 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 40977 dbasecfg[CFG_PRESS_UNIT] R T21 PRESS UNIT
9 - 7 - 3 - 2 If the system is configured with equipment to surveil the oxygen 1 OXYGEN N pw:su def: no 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C00 dbasecfg[CFG_O2_MONITOR] R T24 OXYGEN
9 - 7 - 3 - 3 If the system is configured with equipment to surveil the smoke 2 SMOKE MONITOR N pw:su def: no 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C01 dbasecfg[CFG_SMOKE_MONITOR] R T24 SMOKE MONITOR
9 - 7 - 3 - 4 If the system is configured with steam dump equipment, e.g. to 3 STEAM DUMP N pw:su def: no 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C02 dbasecfg[CFG_STEAM_DUMP] R T24 STEAM DUMP
9 - 7 - 3 - 5 If the system is configured with integrated feed water pumps (no 4 FW.PUMP CTRL N pw:su def: no 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C03 dbasecfg[CFG_MODULATING_FEED_WATER] R T10 FW.PUMP CTRL
9 - 7 - 3 - 6 Selection between modulating or on/off feedwater regulation 5 WATER L. CONT N pw.su mod on/off mod M, R, KBE, KBP Steam C29 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_CONT] R T31 WATER L. CONT
9 - 7 - 3 - 7 Selection between modulating or on/off feedwater regulation 6 WATER L. CONT EGB N pw.su mod on/off mod M, R, KBE, KBP C30 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_CONT_EGB] R T31 WATER L. CONT EGB
9 - 7 - 3 - 8 Selection of I/P positioner for the feed water regulation. Some boiler 7 FW.OUTPUT.CFG N pw:su def: off 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C04 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_IP_CTRL] R T25 FW.OUTPUT.CFG
9 - 7 - 3 - 9 Selection of feed water regulation type between PID (ordinary 8 FW.REG.TYPE N pw:su def: PID 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C05 dbasecfg[CFG_FWREG_SEL] R T11 FW.REG.TYPE
9 - 7 - 3 - 10 Additional choice of water circulation pumps by selecting number of 9 W.CIRC.PUMPS N pw:su lo: 0 hi: 2 def: 0 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C06 dbasecfg[CFG_NO_OF_WATER_CIRC_PUMPS] R T30 W.CIRC.PUMPS
9 - 7 - 3 - 11 Additional choice of EGB water pumps 10 EGB WATER PUMPS N pw:su def: No M, R, KBE, KBP All EGB WATER PUMPS
9 - 7 - 3 - 12 Additional choice of chemical pumps. [NO]: No chemical pumps 11 CHEM. PUMPS N pw:su def: No 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C07 dbasecfg[CFG_CHEM_PUMPS] R T30 CHEM. PUMPS
9 - 7 - 3 - 13 Additional choice of an exhaust gas boiler. This will effect the menu 12 EXHAUST GAS N pw:su def: no M, R, KBE, KBP All X C08 dbasecfg[CFG_EXHAUST_GAS] R T24 EXHAUST GAS
9 - 7 - 3 - 14 Additional choice of analogue salinity alarm equipment. Selection can 13 SALINITY N pw:su def: off 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C09 dbasecfg[CFG_SALINITY] R T26 SALINITY
9 - 7 - 3 - 15 Additional choice of uptake temperature measurement. Selection 14 TEMP. UPTAKE N pw:su def: off 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C10 dbasecfg[CFG_TEMP_UPTAKE] R T26 TEMP. UPTAKE
9 - 7 - 3 - 17 Disable the key operation lock. Operation can take place from all 16 KEY DISABLE N pw:su def: off 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C12 dbasecfg[CFG_KEY_DISABLE] R T24 KEY DISABLE
9 - 7 - 3 - 20 Selection of on/off or PWR (pulse wide reg.) temperature regulation 19 F.OIL T.CTRL N pw:su def:on/off 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X C15 dbasecfg[CFG_FUEL_OIL_TEMP_CTRL] R T29 F.OIL T.CTRL
9 - 7 - 3 - 21 Activation of hour/start counters. 20 HOUR/START CNT N pw.su def:off 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C17 dbasecfg[CFG_HOUR_CNT_ENABLE] R T24 HOUR/START CNT
9 - 7 - 3 - 22 No= booster pump on burner motor shaft. Yes = booster pump 21 BOOSTER PUMP N pw:su def:no M, R All X C18 dbasecfg[CFG_BOOSTER_PUMP] R T24 BOOSTER PUMP
9 - 7 - 3 - 23 This option determines how high salinity and oil content are affecting 22 SAL/OIL N pw.su def:AL 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C19 dbasecfg[CFG_SALINITY_OIL_ALARM_MODE] R T24 SAL/OIL
9 - 7 - 3 - 28 Prioritisation of the modbus communication speed (baud rate). Hereby 28 MODBUS EXT. PRIO N pw:su lo:300 hi:19200 def:19200 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C44 dbasecfg[CFG_MODBUS_CHANNEL_2_SPEED] R T32 MODBUS EXT. PRIO
9 - 7 - 3 - 29 This option gives an opportunity to block any alarm/shutdown 29 BLOCK ALARMGRP N pw:su def:yes 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C45 dbasecfg[CFG_ALARM_GROUP_4_BLOCK] R T24 BLOCK ALARMGRP
9 - 7 - 3 - 31 Option to configure SAFETY Purge. If [OFF] is selected, Safety purge 31 SAFETY PURGE N pw:su def:On 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_SAFETY_PURGE] SAFETY PURGE
9 - 7 - 3 - 32 Option to configure POST Purge. If [OFF] is selected, Post purge will 32 POST PURGE N pw:su def:Off 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_POST_PURGE] POST PURGE
9 - 7 - 3 - 33 Option to choose whether a 3-way cooler bypass valve operated by the 33 COOLER N pw:su def:NO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_COOLER] COOLER
9 - 7 - 3 - 34 If the system is configured with differential pressure switch equipment 34 FUEL DPS N pw:su def:NO M,R,KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_FUEL_DPS] FUEL DPS
9 - 7 - 3 - 35 Option to enable standby start of the fuel and gas oil pumps. If [NO] is 35 FO.P STBY START N pw:su def:NO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_PUMP_STANDBY_START] FO.P STBY START
9 - 7 - 3 - 36 If NO, reset of flame out shutdown from SCADA or slave HMI is 36 REMOTE RESET N pw:su def:NO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X dbasecfg[CFG_REMOTE_RESET] REMOTE RESET
9 - 7 - 3 - 38 This option provides extended information about which oil temperature 38 OIL MENU DISPLAY N pw:cu def:ALL 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X 41227 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_MENU_DISPLAY] R OIL MENU DISPLAY
9 - 7 - 3 - 39 This option is intended for use on systems including fuel flush 39 BST PMP/BURN MOT N pw:su def:NO R All dbasecfg[CFG_BST_PMP_BURN_MOT] BST PMP/BURN MOT
9 - 7 - 3 - 40 40 AUTOSTARTCIRCPMP N pw:su def:NO 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All dbasecfg[CFG_AUTO_START_CIRC_PUMPS] AUTOSTARTCIRCPMP
9 - 7 - 3 - 41 41 MODBUS REMAP N pw:su def:NONE M, R, KBE, KBP All dbasecfg[CFG_MODBUS_REMAP] MODBUS REMAP
9 - 7 - 4 ANALOG OPTIONS Menu for setting analogue inputs. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 4 - 1 Activates or deactivates the analogue input for the boiler pressure 0 BOILER PRES N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C20 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_PRESS_EXIST] R T24 BOILER PRES
9 - 7 - 4 - 4 Activates or deactivates the analogue input for the water level 3 WATER LEVEL N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C22 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_LEVEL_EXIST] R T24 WATER LEVEL
9 - 7 - 4 - 5 Activates or deactivates the analogue input for the differential 4 DIFF. PRES. N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C23 dbasecfg[CFG_DIFF_PRESS_EXIST] R T24 DIFF. PRES.
9 - 7 - 4 - 6 Activates or deactivates the analogue input for main engine load if the 5 ME LOAD N pw:su def: yes EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C24 dbasecfg[CFG_ME_LOAD_EXIST] R T24 ME LOAD
9 - 7 - 4 - 7 Activates or deactivates the analogue input for heavy fuel oil 6 HFO TEMP N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All -X.14,-X.17 X C25 dbasecfg[CFG_FUEL_TEMP_EXIST] R T24 HFO TEMP
9 - 7 - 4 - 8 Activates or deactivates the oil flow measurement connected to the 7 OIL FLOW N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C26 dbasecfg[CFG_OIL_FLOW_EXIST] R T24 OIL FLOW
9 - 7 - 4 - 9 Activates or deactivates the EGB water level measurement 8 WATER EGB N pw:su def: yes M, R, KBE, KBP All X C31 dbasecfg[CFG_WATER_XS_2V_EGB_EXIST] R T24 WATER EGB
9 - 7 - 4 - 10 Activates or deactivates the EGB boiler pressure measurement 9 BOILER EGB N pw:su def: yes M, R, KBE, KBP All X C32 dbasecfg[CFG_BOILER_XS_2V_EGB_EXIST] R T24 BOILER EGB
9 - 7 - 4 - 11 Activates or deactivates the EGB temperature inlet measurement 10 TEMP.INLET N pw:su def: yes EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C33 dbasecfg[CFG_INLET_XS_2V_EGB_EGE_EXIST] R T24 TEMP.INLET
9 - 7 - 4 - 12 Activates or deactivates the EGB temperature inlet measurement 11 TEMP.OUTLET N pw:su def: yes EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All X C33 dbasecfg[CFG_OUTLET_XS_2V_EGB_EGE_EXIST] R T24 TEMP.OUTLET
9 - 7 - 4 - 13 Activates or deactivates the Common steam pressure measurement. 12 COM. STM. PRES N pw:su def: yes 1K, 2K, M, R, KBE, KBP Steam All X C47 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_STEAM_PRESS_ACTIVE] R T24 Comm. STM. PRES
9 - 7 - 4 - 14 Activates or deactivates the common oil flow measurement connected 13 COMMON OIL FLOW N pw:su def: no M, R, KBE, KBP MCT All X C26 dbasecfg[CFG_COMMON_OIL_FLOW_EXIST] R T24 COMMON OIL FLOW
9 - 7 - 4 - 17 Activates or deactivates the diesel oil flow measurement connected to 16 DO OIL FLOW N pw:su def: no -1K, -2K, -M, -R, -KBE, -KBP, -EGB MCT All X 40497.12 dbasecfg[CFG_DO_OIL_FLOW_EXIST] R T24 DO OIL FLOW
9 - 7 - 5 EDIT TEXT Menu for assigning new texts to existing alarms and shut downs. In pw:su 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 5 - 1 Indication of which editable text is currently edited (free text #xx). It is FREE TEXT # XX 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 5 - 2 Selected text _ 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 5 - 3 Text selector ABCDEFGHIJKLMN <^DEL 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 5 - 4 Text selector OPQRSTUVWXYZ./ >vEND 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 6 LINK TEXT Menu for linking and clearing new alarm/shut down texts. The new 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 7 - 6 - 1 Setting of link info (alarm link, shut down link, or no link) and number #01FREETEXT NO 00 pw:su def: NO 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
106591#A.3
Printed: 5/31/2013 5:39 PM
MENU TREE Local
9 - 7 - 6 - 11 Clearing of texts, link info, or both. CLEAR NONE pw:su 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 8 LANGUAGE Menu for language and LCD display contrast selection. 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 8 - 1 Setting of the light contrast in the LCD display. CONTRAST N pw:cu lo: 20 hi: 80 def: 20 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
9 - 8 - 2 It is only possible to choose GB (English). LANGUAGE N pw:cu def: GB 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 MENU 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 1 EXAMINE MEMORY 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 1 - 1 [ADR][CONTENT] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 2 EDIT MEMORY 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 2 - 1 [ADR][CONTENT][VALUE] N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 3 SCAN TIME 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 3 - 1 MIN N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 3 - 2 MAX N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 3 - 3 VAL N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 4 TASK DIAGNOSES 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 4 - 1 [NUM][NAME] np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 4 - 2 PTR:[VALUE] STK:[VALUE] np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 4 - 3 SEM:[VALUE] TIM:[VALUE] np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 4 - 4 CNT:[VALUE] MAX:[VALUE] np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
10 - 5 SHOW F.OIL TEMP. N np 1K, 2K, EGB, M, R, KBE, KBP All
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Drawings
.
General arrangement drawing for AQ-16...................... 46Y_068637................ 8-3
Gneneal arrangement drawing for RMS7...................... 93Z_056836................ 8-5
Gauge board............................................................. 61Z_056759................ 8-7
Gas air separator unit with filter.................................. 81Y_045101................ 8-9
Change over arrangement DN25.................................. 71Z_024719................ 8-11
46Y_068637#A.2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR AQ-16
General arrangement drawing for AQ-16
93Z_056836#A.2
GNENEAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR RMS7
Gneneal arrangement drawing for RMS7
61Z_056759#A.2
GAUGE BOARD
Gauge board
81Y_045101#E.1
GAS AIR SEPARATOR UNIT WITH FILTER
Gas air separator unit with filter
GAS AIR SEPARATOR UNIT WITH FILTER
71Z_024719#B.1
CHANGE OVER ARRANGEMENT DN25
Change over arrangement DN25
CHANGE OVER ARRANGEMENT DN25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Spare Parts
.
Spare parts for Aalborg AQ-16.................................... 106591........................ 9-2
Spare parts for Pressure atomizing burner..................... 106591........................ 9-3
Language UK 9-1 / 3
106591#A.2
SPARE PARTS FOR AALBORG AQ-16
Spare parts for Aalborg AQ-16

Boiler plant:.....................................................................................................................1 x Aalborg AQ-16
Request No.:...................................................................................................................................... 106591
Configuration No.:.......................................................................................................................................1
Hull No./Nos.:...............................................................................................................................WZL1301
Project No./Nos:.................................................................................................................................106591
Date:.........................................................................................................................................04 June 2013
The spare parts supplied in the scope of delivery for includedAalborg AQ-16 boilers are listed
in the table below.
1 Spare parts
Tag No. Qty. Application Spare part N o.

Spare parts for the b oiler
S-C1-3 1 Spring for safety valve, OD32 8580000001
S-C17-1/S-C18-1 2 Water level glass, Size 16, Dim. 250x30x17 mm 8590000019
S-C17-2/S-C18-2 6 Gasket for water gauge stud 2163719
S-C-1 4 Gasket for manhole 2158320
S-C-2 16 Gasket for handhole 2158609
S-C-7 12 Plug for smoke tube 6494108
S-C-8 1 Moulding Powder 2118236
S-C-13 1 Test gag for safety valve OD 32 7000000053
S-C33-1 1 Pressure gauge ø100 6632973
S-C-17 1 Inspection mirror 8500000362
S-C17+C18-6 1 Inst., maintenance and operation manual 8500001056
Spare part s for commissioning
S-C-5 2 Gasket for manhole 2158320
S-C-6 8 Gasket for handhole 2158609
9-2 / 3 Language UK
106591#A.3
SPARE PARTS FOR PRESSURE ATOMIZING BURNER
Spare parts for Pressure atomizing burner

- Weishaupt
Boiler plant:..........................................................................................................................1 x Aalborg OC

Request No.:...................................................................................................................................... 106591
Configuration No.:.......................................................................................................................................1
Hull No./Nos.:...............................................................................................................................WZL1301
Project No./Nos.:................................................................................................................................106591
Date:.........................................................................................................................................06 June 2013
The spare parts included in the scope of delivery of a standard Modulating pressure atomizing burner are
listed in the table below.
1 Spare parts
Tag No. Qty. Application Spare part N o.

Spare parts for the burner
S-F1-1 1 Pressure gauge 6633122
S-F1-2 1 Nozzlehead for burner 8600000002
S-F1-3 1 Nozzle for burner 8610000059
S-F1-5 1 Ignition electrode 8620000005
S-F1-6 1 Ignition electrode 8620000006
S-F1-8 1 Photo cell 6310720
S-F1-8.1 1 Rubber cover for photo cell 8500001086
Spare parts for the oil pumps
S-G147-1 2 O-ring for Filter cover 3520000081
CS-G147-9 2 O-ring for mechanical seal – inner 8500000486
CS-G147-10 2 O-ring for mechanical seal – outer 8500000608
Tools
F121 1 Hooking device for oil burner 8500000011
Language UK 9-3 / 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Operation and maintenance

.
Operation and maintenance......................................... ................................ 10-2
Erection of AQ-16 boiler............................................ ................................ 10-12
Water level control.................................................... SD9230_10................ 10-18
Gauge board............................................................. SD9240_14................ 10-19
A.2
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
ERECTION OF AQ-16 BOILER
Erection of AQ-16 boiler
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
A.2
SD9230_10#A.2
WATER LEVEL CONTROL
Water level control
1 Description
The water level control is an on/off regulating system at this type of boiler. The system
is illustrated in Figure 1. The system consists of one independent safety device elec-
trode for too low water level shut down and burner stop. For measuring and control of
the water level, one capacitance level electrode is provided, and it is used to give water
level alarms/shut downs and start/stop of the feed water pumps.
Water level control system

Compact system
(level transmitter
and level electrode)

Feed water Flange
valves
Safety device
HW
Boiler NW
Control
system
(panel) LW
Protection tube
Electrode stand
Vent hole
Feed water pumps
Figure 1 sd9230_10_ges_1_x0063930en.wmf
SD9240_14#B.1
GAUGE BOARD
Gauge board
1 Description
The function of the gauge board is to control the burner and to give alarm and shut
down for low and high steam pressure.
• A pressure gauge is fitted for analogous reading of the actual steam pressure in the
boiler.
• A pressure switch "high steam pressure" gives shut down and burner cut-off when
the steam pressure rises above the pre-adjusted set point. The pressure switch locks
the burner in stop mode. Operation of the burner is only possible when the steam
pressure falls below the differential set point of the pressure switch and the shut
down function is reset.
• A pressure transmitter connected directly on the boiler converts the actual steam
pressure of the boiler into corresponding electric signals. The signals are used to
give alarms for low/high steam pressure and shut down/burner cut-off for high
steam pressure. The signals also control start/stop and modulation set point of the
burner. Furthermore, the pressure transmitter can be used for remote steam pres-
sure indication.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Feed and boiler water

.
Feed and boiler water................................................. OM9210_99............... 11-2
OM9210_99#D.1
FEED AND BOILER WATER
Feed and boiler water
1 General
Note: The recommended feed and boiler water characteristics are only valid for
boilers with a working pressure below 20 barg.
There is a number of ways to produce good quality feed water for boiler plants. Methods
such as e.g. reverse osmosis plants or ion exchange plants produce good quality dis-
tillate. Also evaporators generally produce good distillate. The important thing is that
the distillate used should be clean and without foreign salt contamination.
In practice most distillates used contain minor parts of various salt combinations which
can and must be chemically treated away. Furthermore, the distillate may contain dis-
solved gases like for example oxygen (O2) and carbon dioxide (CO2) which may lead
to corrosion in the boiler, steam, and condensate system.
Important: Boiler and feed water must be chemically treated in order to avoid
corrosion and scaling in the boiler.
2 Layout of the treatment system

The condition of the feed and boiler water is an essential part of the boiler operation
and operation philosophy. The design and construction of the treatment system should
therefore be considered carefully during layout of the plant. Alfa Laval gives some
general requirements and recommendations regarding the conditions of the feed and
boiler water. However, there is several ways to obtain this results, or similar, by using
different treatment systems. The following should therefore be considered already at
the layout stage:
- Choose the treatment system that should be used.

- Present the condensate and feed water system to the supplier of the treatment sys-
tem and inform about the operation philosophy of the plant.
- Let the supplier indicate where the injection points should be located and also
inform if special equipment is required.
- Let the supplier inform about which test facilities is needed.
- Purchase the recommended equipment and install it in the correct way.
- Use the treatment system as soon as the boiler is taken into operation.
OM9210_99#D.1
3 Feed and boiler water characteristics

The following text regarding feed and boiler water treatment is the normal recom-
mendations given by Alfa Laval. These recommendations should be followed strictly
in order to have the best working conditions for the boiler plant and to extend the
working life of the plant. The requirements/recommendations of the various values for
feed and boiler water are listed in Table 1 below.
Requirements for feed and boiler water

Unit Feed water Boiler water
Appearance - Clear and free of mud Clear and free of mud
Hardness ppm CaCO3 0-5 -
Chloride content ppm Cl- 15 100
"P" alkalinity ppm CaCO3 - 100 - 150
Total (T) alkalinity ppm CaCO3 - 2 x "P" - Alkalinity
PH-value at 25C - 8.5 - 9.5 10.5 - 11.5
Hydrazine excess ppm N2H4 - 0.1 - 0.2
Phosphate excess ppm PO4 - 20 - 50
Specific density at 20C Kg/m3 - 1.003
Conductivity at 25C S/cm - 2000
Oil content - NIL NIL
Copper content ppm <0.02 <0.3
Table 1
If hydrazine (N2H4) is not used, sodium sulphate (Na2SO3) can be used instead, and
the excess should be 30 - 60 ppm.
In cases where other kinds of oxygen binding agents are used, it is recommended that
an excess of oxygen binding agents can be measured and indicates that no oxygen has
been dissolved in the boiler water.
If it is requested to measure the content of dissolved oxygen directly, it is recommended

to keep the value  0.02 ppm.
In addition to the above values, the various water treatment companies will add further
demands, depending on the method used for treatment of feed and boiler water.
However, the most important point is that the above values or their equivalents are
observed and that a regular (daily) test of feed and boiler water is carried out.
3.1 Units of measurement
Concentrations are usually expressed in "ppm" i.e. parts solute per million. Concen-
trations for parts solution by weight are the same as "mg/litre".
OM9210_99#D.1
3.1.1 Specific gravity

As guidance the following conversion can be used:
• 1 Be = 10.000 mg/l total dissolved solids (TDS)

• 1 mg/l total dissolved solids = 2 S/cm
• 1 S/cm = 1 mho
4 Feed and boiler water maintenance

The following are recommended water maintenance instructions. More exact details
concerning analyses and blow downs should be set up together with the supplier of
chemicals for water treatment.
4.1 Recommended water maintenance
4.1.1 Daily
Step A: Analyses of feed and boiler water.
4.1.2 Weekly
Step A: Skimming (surface blow down) according to analyses, but at least once per
week (2 minutes with fully open valve).
Step B: Blow down (bottom blow down) according to analyses, but at least once per
week (each blow down valve 1 minute in low load condition).
If the copper content is on a stable level below the value in table 1, the analyse frequence
can be reduced to once per week.
4.1.3 Monthly
Step A: Check the functions for salinity and oil detection systems.
4.1.4 Every six months
Step A: The boiler water side (interior) must be carefully inspected at least twice a
year.
4.1.5 Yearly
Step A: Check of the water side of the boiler and hotwell/deaerator for corrosion and
scaling.
Step B: Check the chemical pump unit.
5 Treatment systems / injection points

In the following tables and illustrations a number of different feed and boiler water
treatment systems are shown together with the recommended location for the injection
point of the individual chemicals as stated by the manufacturer. The general informa-
tion regarding the injection point principle can be used as guidelines for the most
common systems. But should there be any doubt for a specific system the manufacturer/
supplier should be consulted in order to obtain the correct result.
OM9210_99#D.1
Notes for tables/illustrations:

• Note No. 1: the preferred injection point of chemicals stated by the manufacturer/
supplier.
• Note No. 2: the alternate injection point of chemicals stated by the manufacturer/
supplier.
• Note No. 3: Valid for modulating feed water systems.
• Note No. 4: valid for on/off operating feed water systems. The chemical pump
starts/stops together with the feed water pump.
• Note No. 5: valid for two boiler installation. Control of the chemicals in question
work properly at an equal load condition (feed water flow) on the two boilers.
How to use the tables:
The tables can be used in different ways but the main idea is to do following:
Step A: Discover which manufacturer and type of chemicals that should be used for
the actual boiler plant.
Step B: Use the name of the manufacturer and type of chemicals to select which
tables that can be used.
Step C: Check the flow diagrams (Figure 1, Figure 2, or Figure 3) to find a diagram
that matches the actual boiler plant.
Step D: Find in the selected tables the table which includes the matching diagram.
Step E: If more than one table is found to match the actual boiler plant in question
it is recommended to use the method/table which includes note No. 1.
Step F: If no table is found to match the actual boiler plant in question it is recom-
mended to seek assistance by the chemical manufacturer/supplier.
OM9210_99#D.1
Chemical injection points

Table No. 1
Manufacturer / supplier: Ashland Chemical / Drew Marine Division
Product name / method: Standard with Drewplex OX
Chemical name Injection point No. Continuous Batch Note No. Valid flow diagram No.
Adjunct B 3, 3a, 3b X 1
GC 3, 3a, 3b X 1
1, 2, 3
SLCC-A 3, 3a, 3b X 1
Drewplex OX 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
Chemical injection points (continued)

Table No. 2
Product name / method: Standard with Amerzine
Adjunct B 3, 3a, 3b X 1
GC 3, 3a, 3b X 1
1, 2, 3
SLCC-A 3, 3a, 3b X 1
Amerzine 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 3
Adjunct B 3 X
GC 3 X
1
SLCC-A 3 X
Amerzine 1 X 2, 3, 4

Table No. 4
Adjunct B 3a, 3b X
GC 3a, 3b X
2, 3
SLCC-A 3a, 3b X
Amerzine 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5

Table No. 5
Product name / method: Drewplex AT / OX
Drewplex AT 3, 3a, 3b X 1
Drewplex OX 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 6
Product name / method: Drewplex AT / OX
Drewplex AT 2, 2a, 2b X 2, 3, 4
Drewplex OX 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 7
Product name / method: Drewplex AT with Amerzine
Amerzine 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 8
Amerzine 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 9
Amerzine 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
1, 2, 3

Table No. 10
Product name / method: AGK-100 with Amerzine
AGK-100 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
Amerzine 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 11
AGK-100 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
Amerzine 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
1, 2, 3

Table No. 12
AGK-100 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
Amerzine 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
1, 2, 3

Table No. 13
Manufacturer / supplier: Marichem
Product name / method: Standard
Alkalinity control 3, 3a, 3b X 1, 3, 4
Phosphate 3, 3a, 3b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
Oxycontrol 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
Marichem CCI 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 14
Product name / method: Standard
Alkalinity control 1 X 2, 3, 4
Phosphate 1 X 2, 3, 4
1
Oxycontrol 2 X 3, 4
Marichem CCI 2 X 3, 4

Table No. 15
Product name / method: BWT new formula
BWT new formula 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 16
Product name / method: BWT new formula
BWT new formula 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
Marichem CCI 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 17
Product name / method: BWT
BWT powder 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 18
Product name / method: BWT
BWT powder 1 X 2, 3, 4, 5
Marichem CCI 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1, 2, 3

Table No. 19
Product name / method: I
Hardness control 3, 3a, 3b X 1
Alkalinity control 3, 3a, 3b X 1
1, 2, 3
Oxygen control 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
Condensate control 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 20
Manufacturer / supplier: Unitor Chemicals
Hardness control 1 X 2
Alkalinity control 1 X 2
1
Oxygen control 2 X 3, 4
Condensate control 2 X 3, 4
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 21
Product name / method: II
1, 2, 3
Cat sulphite L (CSL) 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 22
1
Cat sulphite L (CSL) 2 X 3, 4

Table No. 23
Product name / method: Liquitreat
Liquitreat 3, 3a, 3b X 1
1, 2, 3
(Oxygen control) 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 24
Product name / method: Liquitreat
Liquitreat 1 X 2
Condensate control 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1
(Oxygen control) 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4

Table No. 25
Product name / method: Combitreat
Combitreat 3, 3a, 3b X 1
1, 2, 3
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 26
Product name / method: Combitreat
Combitreat 1 X 2
1

Table No. 27
1, 2, 3
Hydrazine 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 28
Manufacturer / supplier: Uniservice Group
1
Hydrazine 2 X 3, 4

Table No. 29
1, 2, 3

Table No. 30
1
OM9210_99#D.1

Table No. 31
Product name / method: One Shot
BWT One Shot 3, 3a, 3b X 1
Alkalinity control 3, 3a, 3b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
(Hydrazine) 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4

Table No. 32
Product name / method: One Shot
BWT One Shot 1 X 2
Alkalinity control 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4
1
(Hydrazine) 2, 2a, 2b X 3, 4

Table No. 33
Product name / method: Organic Treatment
OBWT 3 3, 3a, 3b X 1
OBWT 4 2, 2a, 2b X 1, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
Table 2
OM9210_99#D.1
Flow diagram No.: 1

Service
steam
3 PT
Steam
dump
valve
Cooling
Condenser
water
Condensate
Make-up
Boiler
Overflow
Hot well
Drain
2
PI PI
PS
Feed water
pumps
Single boiler operation with or without PI PI
forced circulation exhaust gas boiler
Figure 1 om9210_99_flowdix0060010en.wmf
OM9210_99#D.1
Flow diagram No.: 2

Service
steam
3b 3a PT
Steam
dump
valve
Cooling
Condenser
water
Condensate
Make-up
Boiler Boiler
Overflow
Hot well
Drain
1
2a
PI PI
PS
Feed water
2b PI PI PI PI
pumps
PS
Feed water
pumps
Double boiler operation with separate feed water pumps PI PI
with or without forced circulation exhaust gas boiler
OM9210_99#D.1
Flow diagram No.: 3

Service
steam
3b 3a PT
Steam
dump
valve
Cooling
Condenser
water
Condensate
Make-up
Boiler Boiler
Overflow
Hot well
Drain
1
2a
PS PI PI
Feed water
pumps
2b PS PI PI
PS PI PI
Double boiler operation with common feed water pumps

with or without forced circulation exhaust gas boiler
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Water level gauge

.
Water level gauge...................................................... OM7010_03............... 12-2
OM7010_03#A.2
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Water level gauge
1 Maintenance and service instructions

This section describes the maintenance and service instructions for the water level
gauge.
Illustration of the water level gauge
1 - Nut
2 - Box heads S
3 - Joint rings
4 - Box heads
5 - Tubes
6 - Screws
7 - Screws
8 - Cock plug
D - Drain cocks 6
G - Gauge body
S - Cocks
W - Cocks
G
Figure 1 om7010_03_kli_01x0057060en.wmf
1.1 Maintenance
The item nos. mentioned in the following maintenance instructions refer to Figure 1.
OM7010_03#A.2
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
When out of service with the gauge body in cool and depressurised condition the hex-
agon screws (6) can be re-tightened.
Illustration of tightening sequence
Figure 2 om7010_03_level1x0057090en.wmf
Step A: Start at the top, working to opposite sides alternately. Max torque: 35 Nm.
1.1.1 Maintenance during service check-up
Step A: Tighten the nuts (1).
Step B: Bolts on boiler flanges.
Step C: Union nuts (4).
Step D: Bolt form screws (7) with cocks in open positions.If a leak cannot be stopped
by tightening the bottom screws (7), the sealing surface of the cock plug (8)
may be damaged or corroded. It can also be necessary to change the packing
(3).
1.2 Blowing down
The item nos. mentioned in this following blowing down procedures refers to Fig-
ure 1.
Step A: The gauge should be blown down before lighting up the boiler and just before
closing down the boiler.
1.2.1 Cleaning the water side:
Step A: Shut the cock S and open the cock W.
Step B: Open the drain cock D for a short time. This sucks the water out of the glass
without, however, totally depressurising the gauge body.
Step C: Shut the cock D and then water is forced upwards into the glass again.
Step D: Repeat this procedure several times, opening and shutting the cock D. The
water level in glass rises and falls.
1.2.2 Cleaning the steam side:
Step A: Shut the cock W.
Step B: Open the cock S.
Step C: Blow through the steam side and gauge body by opening the drain cock D
for 1-2 seconds.
OM7010_03#A.2
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Step D: A steam blowing of longer duration is not advisable considering the service
life of glass.
Step E: Turn the cocks to operating position.
1.3 Dismantling
The following dismantling instructions refer to Figure 1 and Figure 3.
Sectional view of the water level gauge
6
6 - Screws
9 - Wedge piece
10 - Centre piece 9
11 - Reflex
12 - Sealing gasket 14
13 - Cushion gasket
14 - Cover plate
10
12
11
13
Step A: Shut the cocks S and W.

Step B: The drain cock D to be opened until the glass is completely emptied.
Step C: Remove nuts (1) and lift off stuffing box heads (2) together with the gauge
body from the cocks S and W.
Step D: Slacken the union nuts (4) and pull off the stuffing box head (2).
Step E: Place the gauge body (G) horizontally with the screws (6) turning upwards
and loosen the screws.
Step F: Move the wedge piece (9) length wise and lift upwards.
Step G: Lift off centre piece (10) reflex glass (11) and gaskets (12 and 13).
Step H: Clean sealing surface of cover plate (14) and centre piece (10) and examine
for through going scars.
1.4 Assembling
The following assembling instructions refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3.
Step A: Insert following items into the centre piece (10): sealing gasket (12) reflex
glass (11) cushion gasket (13).
Step B: Place cover plate (14) on top.
Step C: Insert wedge piece (9) and move length wise for correct position.
Step D: Tighten screws (6) evenly starting at top, working to opposite sides alter-
nately. Max torque: 35 Nm
OM7010_03#A.2
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Step E: When the boiler is started again and normal working pressure has been
reached re-tighten the screws (6) once again.
1.5 Maintenance of the straight-through cock
1.5.1 Operation principle and maintenance

The following assembling instructions refer to Figure 4.
Detail drawing of the straight-through cock
15
15 - Screw
16 - Split ring
17 - Packing sleeve
18 - Plug
19 - Bottom screw
16
17
18
19
The cylindrical plug (18) is sealed with a resilient packing sleeve (17).
Should leakage arise during service the packing sleeve must be further compressed by
tightening the bottom screw (19) until the leakage is stopped. This must only be done
with the cock in open position.
1.5.2 Dismantling
Step A: Remove bottom screw (19).
Step B: Remove screw (15), washer and handle.
Step C: Knock the plug (18) together with split ring (16) and packing sleeve (3) out
of the cock body by means of a soft mandrel.
Step D: Remove split ring and knock plug out of the packing sleeve.
Step E: Clean all sealing surfaces carefully and lubricate threads with a high tem-
perature grease before installation.
1.5.3 Assembly
Step A: Place the split ring (16) in the recess of the plug (18).
Step B: Push new packing sleeve onto plug.
Step C: Press the complete unit into cock body.
Note: Turn the packing sleeve until the ridge fits with the groove in the cock body.
The eyelets of the packing sleeve must neither protrude nor be tilted.
OM7010_03#A.2
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Step D: Screw in bottom screw (19).

Step E: Place the handle and washer on the plug and fit screw (15).
Step F: Tighten the bottom screw (19) and check if the plug can be turned.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Safety valves
.
Safety valves............................................................. OM6040_01............... 13-2
Temporary locking of a safety valve............................ OM6040_02............... 13-6
OM6040_01#A.2
SAFETY VALVES
Safety valves
1 General
In the following the measures required to achieve a safe and reliable operation as well
asmaintenance of the safety valves will be described, together with adjustment and
dismantling instructions.An installation example of the safety valve is shown in Fig-
ure 1.
Mounting of safety valves, example
Waste steam pipe

Support
Drain
Expansion joint
with sealing ring
Drain
Drain
If safety valve = DN50/80

drain connection is G1/4" BSP
If safety valve = DN65/100
drain connection is G3/8" BSP
Figure 1 om6040_01_safe_0x0056591en.wmf
2 Maintenance and start-up of boiler

A regular inspection of the safety valve is recommended at least once a year. Some
media and appliances require a more frequent inspections, this is according to the
experience of the supplier.
OM6040_01#A.2
SAFETY VALVES
Warning: Prior to any handling and dismantling of the safety valve ensure that
the system is depressurised.
Before lighting-up the boiler, pipe connections must be thoroughly cleaned for dirt and
foreign bodies.If the valve is not completely tight, which often is the case after start
up of the plant, this is usually caused by impurities between the seat and the cone. In
order to remove these impurities the valve must be heavily blown out by means of the
lifting device. If the valve is not tight after several blows, it may be due to the fact that
a hard foreign body has got stuck between the cone and the seat, and it will then be
necessary to dismount the valve for overhaul.
Warning: In case of a leaking safety valve the valve must be inspected and over-
hauled as soon as possible. It must be ensured that the boiler is totally
depressurised before dismounting the valve.
Note: Before dismantling the safety valve in the workshop the position of the
adjusting screw must be measured and noted which will facilitate the ad-
justment later when the valve is to be adjusted when in service.
In case the facings between the cone and the seat have been damaged, they must be
grinded.
Step A: The cone can be grinded against a cast iron plate, using a fine grained car-
borundom stirred in kerosene.
Step B: The seat in the valve body can be grinded in the same way by using a cast
iron punch of suitable size.
Note: Never use the cone itself when grinding the seat.
Warning: The spindle and the valve cone must always be secured against turning
as the seat and the cone may thus be damaged.
Step C: Before assembly the valve must be thoroughly cleaned, and all traces of
grinding material and impurities must be removed.
Step D: When the valve has been mounted and the boiler is commissioned, the valve
must be checked for leakage and adjusted to the set pressure.
Step E: The adjustment screw is secured by means of its lock nut, and the valve is
sealed.
2.1 Routine check
The following should be regarded as recommendations of routine checks on the safety

valves, in order to secure a correct function:
OM6040_01#A.2
SAFETY VALVES
Monthly
Step A: Examine the safety valves for any leaking, such as:
- Is water seeping from the drain plug at the valve body?
- Is the escape pipe hot due to seeping steam from the valve seat?
Step B: Examine the drain and expansion device at the escape pipe.
Step C: Examine the lifting gear device, i.e. clean up and grease all sliding parts.
Yearly
Step A: The safety valve should be tested in operation by raising the boiler pressure.
Step B: Expansion and exhaust pipe should be examined at the same time.
3 Adjustment and dismantling

Safety valves are delivered with the required spring setting and sealed against unau-
thorised adjustment.Adjustments are only allowed in the spring margins. Outside the
margin a new spring is required. The pressure in a system should not exceed 90% of
the set pressure.
All item numbers mentioned in the following sections refer to Figure 2.
3.1 Dismantling of lifting device
Safety valve with open cap:
Step A: Remove bolt(39) and remove lift lever (41)
3.2 Set pressure change without spring change
Note: Pay attention to spring range.
Step A: Spindle (14) must be held fast by all alterations.

Step B: Loosen lock nut (21).
Step C: Turn the adjusting screw (17) clockwise for higher and anticlockwise for
low set pressures.
Step D: Secure the new setting with the lock nut (21) and reassemble lifting device.
3.3 Spring change
Step A: Spindle (14) must be held fast by all alterations.

Step B: Loosen lock nut (21) and turn adjusting screw (17) anticlockwise, then the
spring (37) is not under tension.
Step C: Loosen the nuts (8) and remove the bonnet (42).
Step D: Remove the upper spring plate (26), spring (37), spindle (14) with disc (12),
guide plate (4), and lower spring plate (26).
Step E: Clean the seat (2) and disc (12).
Step F: Remount the spindle unit with the new spring and upper spring plate.As-
semble bonnet (42) and adjust to the spring range.
Step G: Secure the spring setting through the lock nut (21) and remount lifting de-
vice.
OM6040_01#A.2
SAFETY VALVES
Assembling drawing of safety valve
47 Ball
42 Bonnet 39, 40
41 Lifting lever
40 Split pin 41
39 Bolt 17
38 Screw 21
37 Spring
29 Cap
27 Gasket 29
26 Springplate
23 Lead seal 23 38, 47
22 Drain screw
21 Lock nut 26
18 Ball
17 Adjusting screw 27
16 Slotted pin
15 Gasket
14 Spindle 37
13 Lift aid
12 Disc 42
10/25 Split cotters 14
9 Lift limitation ring
8 Hex. nut 10, 25
7 Gasket
4 Spindle guide 8
3 Stud
2 Seat
1 Body
16
18
12
13
15, 22
2
1
OM6040_02#A.2
TEMPORARY LOCKING OF A SAFETY VALVE
Temporary locking of a safety valve
1 General
During commissioning work or later tests of the opening pressure for the safety valves,
only one safety valve should be checked at a time. This means that the other safety
valve must be locked. The following instruction describes the temporary locking of a
safety valve.
1.1 Procedure for locking of a safety valve
Step A:
Remove the bolt (39) and split pin (40), see Figure 1.
Step B:
Remove the lifting lever (41).
Step C:
Unscrew the screw (38) and break the lead seal (23), if provided.
Step D:
Unscrew the cap (29).
Step E:
Place one or two bolts (48) on top of the spindle. The height of the bolts
should be approximately 1-2 mm higher than the normal distance between
the top of the spindle and the inside top of the cap (29).
Step F: Carefully screw on the cap until the spindle and bolts are locked. The safety
valve will be completely locked when the bolts cannot be moved anymore.
Step G: The other safety valve can now be tested without any interference from the
locked safety valve.
1.2 Procedure for unlocking of a safety valve
Warning: As soon as the test procedure for the safety valve has been carried out
the locked safety valve must be unlocked.
Step A: Unscrew the cap (29) and remove the bolts (48).
Step B: Mount the cap (29) again and screw in the screw (38).
Step C: Mount the lifting lever (41), bolt (39), and split pin (40).
Step D: Provide the safety valve with a lead seal (23), if necessary. This depends on
the local rules of the classification society.
OM6040_02#A.2
TEMPORARY LOCKING OF A SAFETY VALVE
Temporary locking of a safety valve
48
39, 40
41
29
23 38
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Feed water system

.
Water level control.................................................... SD9230_10................ 14-2
Safety device............................................................. OM8210_04............... 14-3
Water level control system.......................................... OM8210_13............... 14-9
SD9230_10#A.2
WATER LEVEL CONTROL
Water level control
1 Description
The water level control is an on/off regulating system at this type of boiler. The system
is illustrated in Figure 1. The system consists of one independent safety device elec-
trode for too low water level shut down and burner stop. For measuring and control of
the water level, one capacitance level electrode is provided, and it is used to give water
level alarms/shut downs and start/stop of the feed water pumps.

Compact system
(level transmitter
and level electrode)

Feed water Flange
valves
Safety device
HW
Boiler NW
Control
system
(panel) LW
Protection tube
Electrode stand
Vent hole
Feed water pumps
Figure 1 sd9230_10_ges_1_x0063930en.wmf
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
Safety device
1 General
The safety device consists of a level electrode and a level switch. The level electrode
is mounted in an electrode stand on top of the boiler, and the level switch is placed
inside the control system. Depending on the rules of the classification society, the boiler
can be provided with one or two sets of safety devices. The function of the safety device
is to continuously supervise the water level in the boiler and subsequently give a shut
down and cut out of the burner if the water level is too low.
The combination of a level electrode NRG 16-11 and a level switch NRS 1-7b provides
a fail-safe protection against a first fault, i.e. the system will still continue to provide
the safety function even after a first fault.
The self-monitoring design ensures an interruption of the burner circuit in case of a

failure of the electrode, supply cables, level switch, or in the power supply.
The safety device has a built-in response delay, which is indicated on the name plate.
This eliminates unintentional cut-out of the burner circuit caused by interference from
splash, level fluctuations, etc.
2 Level electrode
2.1 Operation
The too low level electrode operates on the conductive measuring principle using the
electrical conductivity of the boiler water for level signalling. An illustration of the
level electrode type NRG 16-11 is shown in Figure 1. The length of the electrode is
adjusted to the correct length before mounting in the electrode stand.
In normal operation the electrode tip is submerged in the water, and the imbalance of
the bridge circuit is positive. If the water level is below the electrode tip or in case of
a fault, the electrode produces a negative imbalance of the bridge circuit provided in
the level switch (NRS 1-7b). This produces the too low level shut down signal and
consequent cut-out of the burner circuit.
The level electrode consists of two single electrodes (measuring electrode and com-
pensating electrode), which are concentrically arranged and insulated from each other
by special insulating seals. The electric connection of the two electrodes is effected
coaxially with a tube, contact ring, and stud. A system of compression springs in the
electrode body ensures sufficient sealing forces at the insulating seals, even if the
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
temperatures vary. The stud is insulated by a Teflon foil. PTFE insulated wires connect
the contact ring and body to the terminal block.
If the insulating seals placed between the electrodes and body are no longer tight due
to deterioration caused by mechanical or chemical breakdown, liquid will penetrate
into the cavities between the body, tube, and stud. This produces a strong negative
imbalance of the bridge circuit, which causes a too low level shut down signal. But in
this case the signal is due to a malfunction. This means that the water level in the boiler
must be checked in the water level gauges if the level switch signals an shut down.
Level electrode type NRG 16-11
Figure 1 om8210_04_nrg16-x0058280en.wmf
2.2 Cleaning/exchanging the electrode
The following work procedures must be carried out if the level electrode is cleaned or
replaced:
Dismantling:
Step A: Stop the boiler plant according to the separate instructions for start/stop of
the boiler.
Warning: When the level electrode is loosen, steam or hot water might escape.
This presents the danger of severe injury. It is therefore essential not
to dismantle the level electrode unless the boiler pressure is zero.
Step B: Disconnect the wires for the compact system and safety device.
Step C: Unscrew the bolts on the flange for the compact system and safety device.
Step D: Pull out the flange including the compact system and safety device from the
electrode stand.
Step E: Unscrew the locking screw, which locks the level electrode to the flange.
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
Step F: Unscrew the level electrode from the flange by means of a 36 mm ring
spanner.
Step G: Pull out the level electrode from the flange and electrode holders.
Cleaning:
Note: The interval for cleaning of the electrode rod depends on the present boiler
water conditions. Therefore an exact time interval cannot be given.
Step A: Clean the rod of the level electrode with a wet cloth.
Replacing the level electrode:
Step A: Exchange the defect level electrode.
Replacing the electrode tip:
Step A: Screw the electrode tip "D" into the measuring electrode "A", see Figure 2.
Step B: Carefully determine the required measuring length and mark the length of
the electrode tip "D".
Step C: Unscrew the electrode tip "D" from the measuring electrode "A" and cut the
tip. If provided with a PTFE insulation this must be cut min. 150 mm above
the electrode tip and fixed with a starlock washer.
Step D: Screw the electrode tip "D" into the measuring electrode "A" and tighten.
Slide the spring "C" along the electrode tip "D" so that its bend end com-
pletely enters into the small bore "B".
Assembling:
Step A: Check the seating surfaces of the level electrode thread and flange, see
Figure 1.
Step B: Place the joint ring "K" onto the seating surface "J" of the level electrode.
Use only a joint ring (stainless steel) D 27 x 32.
Step C: Apply a light smear of silicone grease (e.g., DOW Corning 111 compound)
to the level electrode thread "I".
Attention: Do not insulate the electrode thread with hemp or PTFE tape.
Step D: Screw the level electrode into the flange and electrode holders. The torque
required is 160 Nm (when cold).
Step E: Screw the locking screw into the level electrode.
Step F: Check the seating surfaces of the electrode stand flange and level electrode
flange. Place a flat gasket on the electrode stand flange.
Step G: Place the flange including the compact system and safety device onto the
electrode stand flange. Fix the flanges with bolts and tighten the bolts in
diagonally opposite pairs.
Step H: Connect the wires for the compact system and safety device.
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
Assembling of the NRG 16-11 level electrode
Figure 2 om8210_04_nrg16-x0058290en.wmf
3 Level switch
3.1 Operation
The level switch is a two-channel unit provided with an automatically self-checking

circuitry. The level switch of type NRS 1-7b is illustrated in Figure 3, and the wiring
diagram can be seen in Figure 4.
The green LED indicates mains on. Two red LEDs indicate the shut down states too
low level or malfunction of the system. A single red LED signals the failure of one
channel (loss of redundancy).
The self-checking circuitry is effected periodically. The test includes the checking of
the cable between the level electrode and level switch and also of the self-checking
circuitry (redundancy). The output relays are not influenced by the internal tests.
As the circuit of the relay contacts is normally closed, a shut down will also be signalled
in the event of a mains failure. The level switch can signal the following three operating
conditions:
- Normal operation: correct level

- Shut down: too low level
- Shut down: defect in the level switch or electrode
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
Level switch type NRS 1-7b
Figure 3 om8210_04_nrs1-7x0058300en.wmf
3.2 Performance tests
Live test:
Step A: Decrease the water level in the boiler by means of the blow-down valves
until the water level has fallen below the too low level mark.
Step B: After the response delay indicated on the name plate, the two red LEDs on
the level switch must light up. If the burner is running, it will immediately
be stopped or if it is stopped, it will be blocked from operation.
Note: Should the too low level point be reached during a self-checking cycle, this
cycle must first be completed. Only then the alarm system will enter its
own delay period. Thus the total maximum delay of twice the nominal delay
period may occur.
Test 1:
A too low level shut down can be simulated by pushing the button "TEST 1" whilst
the electrode tip is submerged in water. This test should be carried out with frequent
intervals.
Step A: Push the button "TEST 1" until the response delay has expired. Both red
LEDs must light up.
Test 2/inspection:
The checking circuitry of the level switch can also be checked. This test must, as a
minimum be carried out at least once every year.
Step A: Operate the switch "TEST 2/INSPECTION" in the direction of the arrow
with the electrode tip submerged in water (above the too low level mark).
Step B: After maximum two minutes the two red LEDs must signal too low level
shut down.
OM8210_04#A.2
SAFETY DEVICE
Note: The button "TEST 1" must not be operated during this test nor must the
water level fall below the too low level mark.
Step C: Return the switch into its original position after the test. After the response
delay the two red LEDs must extinguish.
3.3 Fault finding
Fault finding scheme

Fault Remedy
The level switch signals too low level shut down Measure the conductivity of the boiler water.
before the water level in the boiler has fallen below Check the wiring of the level switch and electrode.
the too low level mark. Check the length of the electrode tip.
After raising the water level above the too low Check whether a vent hole has been provided in
level mark, the two red LEDs on the level switch the electrode stand.
are not extinguished or only after a considerable
period.
One or both red LEDs on the level switch light up This means that an electronic failure within the
without the water level has fallen below the too level switch has occurred, i.e. failure of one or two
low level mark. of the channels. In this case replace the level
switch.
The test with the switch "TEST 2/ INSPECTION" Replace the level switch.
was not successful, i.e. only one red LED or none
of the two red LEDs lighted up two minutes after
the start of the test.
Table 1
Wiring diagram
Figure 4 om8210_04_nrs1-7x0058310en.wmf
OM8210_13#A.2
WATER LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM
1 General
The compact system of type NRGT 26-1 consists of a level electrode, protection tube,
and level transmitter. Via a flange the level electrode is inserted in an electrode stand
mounted on top of the boiler. Inside the electrode stand the protection tube is connected
to the flange and surrounds the level electrode. The integrated level transmitter is
placed on top of the level electrode. Figure 1 illustrates the compact system of type
NRGT 26-1. In the first illustration the compact system is shown without the protection
tube and flange. The flange shown in the second illustration can be of a different type.
The compact system works according to the capacitance measurement principle and
is used for signalling different water levels in the boiler. The electrode rod and pro-
tection tube form a capacitor. If the level of the dielectric (boiler water) located between
the two capacitor plates changes, the current which flows through the plates changes
proportionally to the level. The level transmitter produces a standard analogue output
of 4-20 mA, which is sent to the control system. Figure 2 illustrates the level transmitter.
Compact system type NRGT 26-1
Figure 1 om8210_13_nrgt26x0058440en.wmf
OM8210_13#A.2
Compact system type NRGT 26-1 (level transmitter)
Table for position numbers illustrated in Figure 1 and Figure 2

A Electrode thread 3/4" BSP, DIN 228 J Measuring range switch
B Sealing surface K Potentiometer for lower measuring point
Joint ring (of stainless steel) D 27 x 32 to L Red LED "level 0%"
C
DIN 7603 M Green LED "level > 0%, < 100%"
D Flange (different ones are used) N Red LED "level 100%"
E Protection tube O Potentiometer for upper measuring point
F Spacer disc P Thermal fuse Tmax 102C
G Housing screw M 4 Q Terminal strip
H Cable entry PG 9 / PG 16 R PE connection
I Housing cover S Screw
Table 1
OM8210_13#A.2
2 Cleaning/exchanging the electrode

The following work procedures must be carried out if the level electrode is cleaned or
replaced:
Dismantling:
Step A: Stop the boiler plant according to the separate instructions for start/stop of
the boiler.
Warning: When the level electrode is loosen, steam or hot water might escape.
This presents the danger of severe injury. It is therefore essential not
to dismantle the level electrode unless the boiler pressure is zero.
Step B: Disconnect the wires for the compact system and safety device.
Warning: The terminal strip and the electronic components of the NRGT 26-1
are live during operation. This presents the danger of electric shock.
Cut off the power supply before fixing or removing the housing cover.
During commissioning use only completely insulated spanner for ad-
justing the measuring points.
Step C: Unscrew the bolts on the flange for the compact system and safety device.
Step D: Pull out the flange including the compact system and safety device from the
electrode stand.
Step E: Unscrew the locking screw, which locks the level electrode to the flange.
Step F: Unscrew the level electrode from the flange by means of a 41 mm open-end
spanner.
Step G: Pull out the level electrode from the flange and protection tube.
Cleaning:
Note: The interval for cleaning of the electrode rod depends on the present boiler
water conditions. Therefore an exact time interval cannot be given.
Step A: Clean the rod of the level electrode with a wet cloth.
Replacing:
Step A: Exchange the defect level electrode including the level transmitter.
Assembling:
Step A: Check the seating surfaces of the level electrode thread and flange.
Step B: Place the joint ring "C" onto the seating surface "B" of the level electrode
(see Figure 1). Use only a joint ring (stainless steel) D 27 x 32.
Step C: Apply a light smear of silicone grease (e.g., DOW Corning 111 compound)
to the level electrode thread "A".
Attention: Do not insulate the electrode thread with hemp or PTFE tape.
OM8210_13#A.2
Step D: Screw the level electrode into the flange and protection tube. The torque
required is 160 Nm (when cold).
Step E: Screw the locking screw into the level electrode.
Step F: Check the seating surfaces of the electrode stand flange and level electrode
flange. Place a flat gasket on the electrode stand flange.
Step G: Place the flange including the compact system and safety device onto the
electrode stand flange.
Step H: Fix the flanges with bolts and tighten the bolts in diagonally opposite pairs.
Step I: Connect the wires for the compact system and safety device. A wiring dia-
gram for the compact system can be seen in Figure 3.
Wiring diagram
24 V
230 V
115 V
or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-20 mA PE L N
Mains
3 Standard setting
The purpose of the switch "J" is to set the optimal frequency band for the internal
measurement inside the compact system. To obtain the best measuring conditions, the
switch "J" is set to a position determined by the active measuring length of the level
electrode. The compact system is delivered with the following factory settings:
- Measuring range 275 mm: switch "J" position 3, water  20 S/cm

- Measuring range 375 mm to 675 mm: switch "J" position 4, water  20 S/cm
4 Commissioning
Wiring check:
Step A: Check that the system has been wired according to the wiring diagram (see
Figure 3 and the electrical drawings).
Step B: Check that the mains supply corresponds to the value shown on the label of
the equipment.
OM8210_13#A.2
Application of mains voltage:

Step A: Unscrew the screws "G" and remove the housing cover "I".
Step B: Apply mains voltage. The LED "L" will light up (see the position in Fig-
ure 2).
Adjustment of the lower measuring point:
Step A: Fill the boiler with water until the lower measuring point is reached.
Step B: Start the boiler according to the separate instructions for start/stop of the
boiler.
Step C: Raise the boiler pressure till normal working pressure.
Step D: Turn the potentiometer "K" to the left. The red LED "L" lights up.
Step E: Turn the potentiometer "K" to the right until only the green LED "M" lights
up.The lower measuring point is now adjusted.
Adjustment of the upper measuring point:
Step A: Fill the boiler with water until the upper measuring point is reached.
Step B: Operate the burner until the boiler pressure has reached normal working
pressure.
Step C: Turn the potentiometer "O" to the right until only the red LED "N" lights
up.
Step D: Turn the potentiometer "O" to the left until the green LED "M" lights up.
Step E: Turn the potentiometer "O" to the right until the green LED "M" extin-
guishes.
Step F: Mount the housing cover "I" and screw in the screws "G".The upper meas-
uring point is now adjusted.
Note: When adjusting the measuring points of the electrode in a cold boiler, the
measuring points will shift with rising temperature as a result of the lon-
gitudinal expansion of the electrode rod. The adjustment must be corrected
proportionally.
OM8210_13#A.2
5 Fault finding
Fault finding chart

Fault Remedy
The equipment does not work
Mains voltage has not been applied. Apply mains voltage. Wire the equipment according to the wir-
ing diagram.
The thermal fuse has failed. In the case of a defective thermal fuse, the mains voltage has not
been connected to terminal "Q". Replace the defective thermal
fuse.
The ambient temperature must not exceed 70C.
The electrode housing does not have earth connection to the Clean the seating surfaces and insert the metal joint ring (of
boiler. stainless steel) 27 x 32 to DIN 7605.
Do not insulate the compact system with hemp or PTFE tape.
The electronic board is defective. Replace the board.
The equipment does not work accurately
The electrode has been installed without the protection tube. The Install the protection tube.
protection tube serves as reference electrode.
The vent hole in the protection tube does not exist, is obstructed, Check the protection tube and, if necessary, provide a vent hole.
or flooded.
The desired zero point does not lie within the measuring range Replace the compact system. Choose an adequate electrode
of the electrode. The electrode is too short. length.
The adjustment of the measuring range is wrong. Adjust switch "J" correctly (see the instructions).
Dirt deposits have been accumulated on the electrode rod. Remove the compact system and clean the electrode rod with a
wet cloth.
The gasket of the electrode rod is damaged. Measure the current Replace the compact system.
at terminal 1 and 2 (20 mA).
Table 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Feed water pump unit

.
Pumps, type CR, CRN................................................ OM5540_20............... 15-2
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Pumps, type CR, CRN
1 General
The multistage in-line centrifugal pumps are used as condensate, make-up, and feed
water pumps in boiler plants. To have a proper functioning of the centrifugal pumps it
is essential that the pumped liquid does not contain any steam, air, solid particles or
fibres. Furthermore the liquid must not attack the pump material chemically.
1.1 Technical data
• Electrical data: see motor nameplate.

• Ambient temperature: Max. 45°C.
• Minimum inlet pressure: see section 2.
• Maximum inlet pressure: see Table 1. However, the actual inlet pressure + pressure
when the pump is running against a closed valve must always be lower than the
“maximum permissible operating pressure".
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Maximum inlet pressure

50 Hz 60 Hz
CR, CRN 1
CR, CRN 1s-2 → CR, CRN 1s-36 10 bar CR, CRN 1s-2 → CR, CRN 1s-27 10 bar
CR, CRN 1-2 → CR, CRN 1-36 10 bar CR, CRN 1-2 → CR, CRN 1-25 10 bar
CR, CRN 1-27 15 bar
CR, CRN 3
CR, CRN 5
CR, CRN 10
CR, CRN 15
CR, CRN 20
CR, CRN 20-1 → CR, CRN 20-3 8 bar CR, CRN 20-1 8 bar
CR, CRN 32
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-4 4 bar CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-2 4 bar
CR, CRN 32-11-2 → CR, CRN 32-14 15 bar CR,CRN 32-7-2 → CR,CRN 15 bar
32-10-2
CR, CRN 45
CR,CRN 45-6-2 → CR,CRN 45-13-2 15 bar CR, CRN 45-4-2 → CR, CRN 45-7 15 bar
CR, CRN 64
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-2 4 bar CR, CRN 64-1-1 4 bar
CR, CRN 64-2-1 → CR, CRN 64-4-2 10 bar CR, CRN 64-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 64-4-1 → CR, CRN 64-8-1 15 bar CR, CRN 64-2 → CR, CRN 64-5-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 90
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-1 4 bar CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-2-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 90-2-2 → CR, CRN 90-3-2 10 bar CR, CRN 90-2-2 → CR, CRN 90-4-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 90-3 → CR, CRN 90-6 15 bar
Table 1
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
• Maximum permissible operating pressure: see Table 2.
Maximum permissible operating pressure

Frequency Pump type Temperature range Operating pressure
CR, CRN 1s, 1 25 bar
CR, CRN 3 25 bar
CR, CRN 5 25 bar
CR, CRN 10-1 → CR, CRN 10-22 25 bar
CR, CRN 15-1 → CR, CRN 15-17 25 bar
CR, CRN 20-1 → CR, CRN 20-17 25 bar
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-7 16 bar
CR, CRN 32-8-2 → CR, CRN 32-12 25 bar
50 Hz -20°C to +120°C
CR, CRN 32-13-2 → CR, CRN 32-14 30 bar
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-5 16 bar
CR, CRN 45-6-2 → CR, CRN 45-9 25 bar
CR, CRN 45-10-2 → CR, CRN 45-10 33 bar
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → CR, CRN 64-5 16 bar
CR, CRN 64-6-2 → CR, CRN 64-7-1 25 bar
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-4 16 bar
CR, CRN 90-5-2 → CR, CRN 90-6 25 bar
CR, CRN 1s, 1 25 bar
CR, CRN 3 25 bar
CR, CRN 5 25 bar
CR, CRN 10-1 → CR, CRN 10-17 25 bar
CR, CRN 15-1 → CR, CRN 15-12 25 bar
CR, CRN 20-8 → CR, CRN 20-10 25 bar
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-5 16 bar
60 Hz CR, CRN 32-6-2 → CR, CRN 32-8 -20°C to +120°C 25 bar
CR, CRN 32-9-2 → CR, CRN 32-10-2 40 bar
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-4 16 bar
CR, CRN 45-5-2 → CR, CRN 45-6 25 bar
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → CR, CRN 64-3 16 bar
CR, CRN 64-4-2 → CR, CRN 64-4-1 25 bar
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-3 16 bar
CR, CRN 90-4-2 25 bar
Table 2
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
• Minimum flow rates: See Table 3.
Minimum flow rates

Liquid temperature
Pump type
Up to + 80ºC + 80ºC to + 120ºC
CR, CRN 1s 0.1 m3/h 0.2 m3/h
CR, CRN 1 0.1 m3/h 0.3 m3/h
CR, CRN 3 0.4 m3/h 0.8 m3/h
CR, CRN 5 0.6 m3/h 1.3 m3/h
CR, CRN 10 1.2 m3/h 2.6 m3/h
CR, CRN 15 1.8 m3/h 3.8 m3/h
CR, CRN 20
2.4 m3/h 5.0 m3/h
CR, CRN 32 3.8 m3/h 7.6 m3/h
CR, CRN 45 5.4 m3/h 11.0 m3/h
CR, CRN 64 7.7 m3/h 16.0 m3/h
CR, CRN 90 11.0 m3/h 24.0 m3/h
Table 3
• Liquid temperature: -20°C to 120°C. See also Table 2 which indicates the rela-
tionship between liquid temperature and maximum permissible operating pressure.
Note: In condensate and feed water systems where an open hot-well is used it is
recommended to keep a temperature in the hot-well of 85-95ºC.
• Further technical data can be found on the data sheet related to the pumps.
2 Calculation of minimum inlet pressure

The minimum inlet pressure "H" in metres head required to avoid cavitation in the
pump is calculated as follows:
H = pb x 10.2 - NPSH - Hf - Hv - Hs
• pb = barometric pressure in bar (barometric pressure can be set to 1.0 bar). In closed
systems pb indicates the system pressure in bar.
• NPSH = net positive suction head in metres head (to be read from the NPSH curves
in Figure 2and Figure 3at the highest flow the pump will be delivering).
• Hf = friction loss in suction pipe in metres head at the highest flow.
• Hv = vapour pressure in metres head, see Figure 1. Tm = liquid temperature
• Hs = safety margin = 0.5 metres head.
If the calculated “H” is positive, the pump can operate at a suction lift of maximum
“H” metres head. If the calculated “H” is negative, an inlet pressure of minimum “H”
metres head is required. There must be a pressure equal to the calculated “H” during
operation.
Example:
Pump type = CR 20 - 60 Hz, flow rate = 24 m3/h, pb = 1.0 bar.
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Hf = 3.0 metres head, liquid temperature = + 90ºC.
Hv (from Figure 1) = 7.5 metres head.
NPSH (from Figure 2) = 2.5 metres head.
H = pb x 10.2 - NPSH - Hf - Hv - Hs
H = 1 x 10.2 - 2.5 - 3.0 - 7.5 - 0.5 = -3.3 metres head.
This means that an inlet pressure of minimum 3.3 metres head is required.
Relationship between Hv and Tm
Figure 1 om5540_20_cr02ax0054100en.wmf
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
NPSH curves
Figure 2 om5540_20_cr03bx0054110en.wmf
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
NPSH curves, continued
Figure 3 om5540_20_cr07ax0054130en.wmf
3 Start-up
Note: The pump is not allowed to run against a closed discharge valve as this will
cause an increase in temperature/formation of steam in the pump which
may cause damage to the pump.
If there is any danger of the pump running against a closed discharge valve, a minimum
liquid flow through the pump should be ensured by connecting a by-pass / drain to the
discharge pipe. The drain can for instance be connected to a hot-well / tank.
Warning: Do not start the pump until it is filled with liquid and has been primed
and vented.
3.1 Priming
Note: The following does only apply to systems where the liquid level is above
the pump inlet
Step A: Close the discharge isolating valve and loosen the vent screw in the pump
head, see Figure 4.
Note: Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and take care to ensure that
the escaping water does not cause injury to persons or damage to the motor
or other components. In hot water installations, special attention should
be paid to the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water.
Step B: Slowly open the isolating valve in the suction pipe until a steady stream of
liquid runs out the vent hole.
Step C: Tighten the vent screw and completely open the isolating valve(s).
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Illustration of the centrifugal pumps
Figure 4 om5540_20_cr06x0054120en.wmf
3.2 Checking direction of rotation
Do not start the pump to check direction of rotation until it has been filled with liquid.
Note: The direction of rotation should not be checked with the motor alone, as
an adjustment of the shaft position is required when the coupling has been
removed.
The correct direction of rotation is shown by arrows on the pump head and/or on the
motor fan cover. When seen from the fan, the pump should rotate counter-clockwise.
3.3 Starting
Before starting the pump:
Step A: Open the isolating valve completely on the suction side of the pump and
leave the discharge isolating valve almost closed.
Step B: Start the pump.
Step C: Vent the pump during starting by loosening the vent screw in the pump head
until a steady stream of liquid runs out the vent hole, see Figure 4.
Warning: Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and take care to ensure
that the escaping water does not cause injury to persons or damage to
the motor or other components. In hot water installations, special at-
tention should be paid to the risk of injury caused by scalding hot
water.
When the piping system has been filled with liquid:
Step D: Slowly open the discharge isolating valve until it is completely open.When
pumping liquids containing air, it is advisable to vent the pump regularly.
To vent the pump:
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Step E: Loosen the vent screw in the pump head during operation.
3.4 Frequency of starts and stops
Motors smaller than 4 kW should not start more than 100 times per hour.
Other motors should not start more than 20 times per hour.
4 Maintenance
Caution: Before starting work on the pump, make sure that no power is supplied
to the pump and that it cannot be accidentally switched on. Before re-
moving the cover of the electrical terminal box and before any removal/
dismantling of the pump, make sure that the electricity supply has been
switched off.
Pump bearings and shaft seal are maintenance-free.
If the pump is to be drained for a long period of inactivity then:
Step A: Remove one of the coupling guards to inject a few drops of silicone oil on
the shaft between the pump head and the coupling.
This will prevent the shaft seal faces from sticking. When fitting the coupling guards,
make sure that they are centred vertically in the recesses in the pump head.
4.1 Motor bearings
Motors which are not fitted with grease nipples are maintenance-free.
Motors fitted with grease nipples should be lubricated with a high-temperature lithium-
based grease.
In the case of seasonal operation (motor is idle for more than 6 months of the year), it
is recommended to grease the motor when the pump is taken out of operation.
5 Frost protection
Pumps which are not used during periods of frost should be drained to avoid damage.
Step A: Drain the pump by loosening the vent screw in the pump head and by re-
moving the drain plug from the base.
Warning: Care must be taken to ensure that the escaping water does not cause
injury to persons or damage to the motor or other components. In hot
water installations, special attention should be paid to the risk of injury
caused by scalding hot water.
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
Do not tighten the vent screw and replace the drain plug until the pump is to be used
again.
Step B: Before replacing the drain plug in the base, screw the by-pass valve out
against the stop, see Figure 4.
Step C: Fit the drain plug by tightening the large union nut followed by the bypass
valve.
OM5540_20#C.1
PUMPS, TYPE CR, CRN
6 Fault finding chart

Before removing the terminal box cover and before any removal/dismantling of the
pump, make sure that the electricity supply has been switched off.
Fault finding chart

Fault Cause Remedy
1. Motor does not run when a) Supply failure. Connect the electrical supply.
started. b) Fuses blown. Replace fuse.
c) Motor starter overload has tripped out. Reactivate the motor protection.
d) Main contacts in motor starter are not making contact
or the coil is faulty. Replace contacts or magnetic coil.
e) Control circuit fuses are defective. Repair the control circuit.
f) Motor is defective. Replace the motor.
2. Motor starter overload trips a) One fuse is blown/automatic circuit breaker is blown. Cut the fuse.
out immediately when supply is b) Contacts in motor starter overload are faulty. Replace motor starter contacts.
switched on. c) Cable connection is loose or faulty. Fasten/replace the cable connection.
d) Motor winding is defective. Replace the motor.
e) Pump mechanically blocked. Remove blocking of the pump.
f) Overload setting too low. Set the motor starter correctly.
3. Motor starter overload trips a) Overload setting too low. Set the motor starter correctly.
out occasionally. b) Low voltage at peak times. Check the electrical supply.
4. Motor starter has not tripped
a) Check 1 a), b), d) and e). -
out but the pump does not run.
5. Pump capacity not constant. a) Pump inlet pressure is too low (cavitation). Check the suction conditions.
b) Suction pipe/pump partly blocked by impurities. Clean the pump or suction side.
c) Pump draws in air. Check the suction conditions.
6. Pump runs but gives no wa- a) Suction pipe/pump blocked by impurities. Clean the pump or suction side.
ter. b) Foot or non-return valve blocked in closed position. Repair the foot or non-return valve.
c) Leakage in suction pipe. Repair the suction pipe.
d) Air in suction pipe or pump. Check the suction conditions.
e) Motor rotates in the wrong direction. Change the direction of rotation of
the motor.
7. Pump runs backwards when a) Leakage in suction pipe. Repair the suction pipe.
switched off. b) Foot or non-return valve defective. Repair the foot or non-return valve.
8. Leakage in shaft seal. a) Shaft seal is defective. Replace the shaft seal.
9. Noise. a) Cavitation occurs in the pump. Check the suction conditions.
b) Pump does not rotate freely (frictional resistance) be-
cause of incorrect pump shaft position. Adjust the pump shaft.
Table 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Chemical dosing pump

.
Chemical dosing pump............................................... OM5540_07............... 16-2
Relief valve.............................................................. OM6000_01............... 16-14
OM5540_07#B.1
CHEMICAL DOSING PUMP
Chemical dosing pump
1 General
The chemical dosing pump is a microprocessor controlled solenoid metering pump.
The pump offers highly accurate reproducible metering in the dosing of liquid chem-
icals in pressurised pipe systems, and into open and closed containers. The main com-
ponents of the chemical dosing pump are the operating panel, power end, and liquid
end Figure 1 illustrates the chemical dosing pump.
The working principle of the pump is that chemical feed occurs as a result of pulsed
deflections of the dosing diaphragm within the liquid end, which causes pressure dif-
ferentiation between the suction side, liquid end cavity, and discharge side. The pres-
sure differentiation causes the suction and discharge self-acting valves to open and
close, resulting in chemical feed. The dosing diaphragm is driven by an electromagnet,
which is stimulated and controlled by a microprocessor.
Regulation of the required dose is variable via the stroke length in the range of10-100
% in steps of 10% or can be set at 1 of the 4 settings via the stroke frequency. This
gives an adjustment ratio of 1:40. Optimum dosing reproducibility is achieved by set-
ting the stroke length between 30% and 100%. For external actuation a retrofit kit is
needed in addition.
Illustration of the chemical dosing pump
Figure 1 om5540_07_chem_0x0200520en.wmf
OM5540_07#B.1
2 Safety
The following guidelines describe correct use of the equipment and how to avoid po-
tentially dangerous situations and must always be observed during installation, com-
missioning, operation, maintenance, and repair.
• The pump may be used only for metering liquid media!

• All other uses or modifications are prohibited!
• The pump is not suitable for metering gaseous media or solids!
• The pump must be operated by appropriately trained and authorised personnel!
The personnel must be familiar with metering pumps and their operation!
• The pump may start to operate as soon as it connected to the mains power supply!
Ensure that no hazardous metering chemical can leak out! If you have not done so,
set the multifunction switch to STOP or disconnect the pump from the mains im-
mediately.
• The pump cannot be switched off! In the case of an electrical failure, disconnect
the mains cable from the power supply.
• Disconnect the power cable from the mains before working on the pump.
• Risk of electric shock - This pump is supplied with a grounding conductor and
grounding-type attachment plug. To reduce the risk of electric shock, be certain
that it is connected only to a properly grounding-type receptacle.
• Always depressurise liquid end before working on the pump.
• Always empty and rinse the liquid end before working on the pump if used with
hazardous or unknown feed chemicals.
• Wear safety equipment appropriate to the metering chemical when working on the
liquid end.
• Never let the pump work against a significantly increased operating pressure or a
closed stop tap on the discharge-side. This can cause lines to burst.
• Avoid overfeed due to positive pressure difference between intake and discharge
sides. E.g. use a ball check valve with at least 1.5 bar opening pressure with an
atmospheric pressure outlet.
• Assembly and installation of this metering pump with non original parts, which
have not been checked and recommended by supplier is not allowed and can lead
to harm to persons or property for which no liability can be accepted.
• Note all national directives which apply to the installation.
OM5540_07#B.1
3 Installation
The chemical dosing pump is normally pre-mounted on a chemical tank. However, in
case that the pump must be mounted elsewhere or replaced please observe the following
general installation notes:
• The chemical dosing pump must be located in an environment with ambient tem-
perature between -10C to +45C and a maximum permissible relative humidity
of 92% non-condensing.
• The pump must be mounted with the pump foot resting on a firm horizontal base.
Ensure that it is fastened into place firmly, and will not vibrate in operation.
• The maximum permissible priming and operating pressures must not be exceeded.
For this type of pump the maximum priming lift is 2 mm WC and the maximum
operating pressure is 16 barg. In case that the operating pressure is exceeded, e.g.
due to the position of the chemical feed into the feed water system, the discharge
side must be provided with a relief valve. The surplus chemicals should be led
back to the chemical tank.
• Suction and discharge valves must be installed in a vertical position.
• The tubing should be attached in such a way that it allows lateral detachment of
the pump and liquid end, if necessary. The tubing must be free from stress and
bends when fitted. Only original hoses with the correct dimensions should be used.
• The suction tubing should be as short as possible and rising in order to prevent air
bubbles forming.
• The foot valve should be installed so that it hangs just above the bottom of the
chemical tank. For chemicals with impurities or sedimentation at the bottom, the
foot valve should be positioned well above this layer.
• The check valve, which connects the discharge line to the feed water system, must
be tightened properly.
3.1 Assembling of the tubing to plastic valves
3.1.1 Assembling of the tubing to plastic valves

When assembling the suction and discharge tubing to the plastic valves of the liquid
end carry out the following work procedures (see figure 2).
Step A:
Cut the hose ends straight across.
Step B:
Push the union nut and clamping ring onto the hose.
Step C:
Push the hose end over the grommet to the stop (widen if necessary).
Step D:
Ensure that the O-ring is sitting correctly onto the intake connector.
Step E:
Clamp the connector hose by tightening the union nut while pressing in the
hose.
Step F: Retighten the hose connector by pulling the hose connected to the liquid end
briefly and then retighten the union nut.
OM5540_07#B.1
Assembling of the tubing to plastic valves
Hose
Union nut
(Section)
Clamping
ring
Grommet
O-Ring
Intake
connector
Figure 2 om5540_07_chemicx0053980en.wmf
3.2 Electrical installation
The pump is connected to the mains power supply by using the mains lead. If the pump
is connected to the mains in parallel with inductive power consumers (e.g. solenoid
valves, motors) it must be electrically isolated. This prevents damage caused by in-
duction and voltage surges when switching off.
4 Commissioning
Step A: Check that the connections for the pump are completed properly.
Step B: Open the bleed valve by rotating the knob anticlockwise (see Figure 3)
Step C: Switch on the pump and allow it to run at maximum stroke length and rate
until the liquid end is full and free from air bubbles (the feed chemical is
visible at the bleed valve). The stroke length should only be set while the
pump is running (see Figure 3).
Note: The pump should prime at 100% stroke length as the suction lift is de-
pendent upon the lift volume when the liquid end is empty. If the pump is
required to prime at less than 100% stroke length, and fails to do so, then
select a correspondingly smaller suction lift.
Step D: Close the bleed valve (turn clockwise).

Step E: Switch off the pump.
Step F: The pump is ready to operate. Retighten screws in the liquid end after 24
hours operation time. Tightening torque for liquid end screws: 4.5 to 5 Nm.
OM5540_07#B.1
Illustration of liquid end
Discharge
valve
Liquid end
Bleed
valve
Suction
valve
Figure 3 om5540_07_chem_px0053970en.wmf
4.1 Determining the feed capacity
When the necessary chemical dosing feed is known, e.g. by means of feed and boiler
water analysis, the feed capacity of the pump can be set. Figure 4 shows the feed rate
setting diagram for the pump. The measurements for determining the feed rate from
the diagram were carried out using water as medium. In order to find the feed capacity
the correction factor must be found and subsequently the stroke rate and stroke length
should be set. For determination of the feed capacity carry out the following proce-
dures:
Step A: Mark the operating pressure for the chemical dosing pump in the lower di-
agram. The operating pressure is equal to the pressure in the feed water
system at the point of dosing.
Step B: Trace a line from this value vertically up to the curve and then horizontally
left. Read off the correction factor.
Step C: Divide the required feed rate by the determined correction. Mark this value
(l/h) on the "l/h" axis in the upper diagram.
Step D: Trace a horizontally line from this value to the left. Trace a line from the
intersection with the straight line for the adjustable stroke frequencies ver-
tically downwards the "stroke length" axis.
Step E: Set the pump to one of the stroke frequencies determined in this way, and
the corresponding stroke length.
OM5540_07#B.1
Feed rate setting diagram

CNPa 1601 at medium back pressure
1,6
1,4
180 strokes/min
135 strokes/min
90 strokes/min
1,2 45 strokes/min
0,8
I/h
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Stroke length
Correction factor
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
1 2 3 4 8 11 13 16
Back pressure`
Figure 4 om5540_07_chem_gx0053960en.wmf
5 Operation
The operation panel of the chemical dosing pump is equipped with operation knobs/
switches, connection terminals, and indicators, which support the operation and setting
of the pump. Figure 5illustrates the operation panel of the chemical dosing pump.
OM5540_07#B.1
The pump can be operated through manual control or external control. If the pump is
intended only to operate in manual mode it will not be provided with the optional socket
connection for "external control”. When the pump is intended to operate via "external
control" and/or "float switch", a “external connection” retrofit kit and/or “float switch”
retrofit kit must be provided.
The "Float switch" option provides information on the liquid level in the feed chemical
tank, which is transmitted to the pump. This option requires the installation of a one-
stage float switch and connection to the "float switch" socket.
The following instruction for pump operation is described as a complete instruction.

If the chemical dosing pump includes parts or features, which are not provided for the
actual dosing unit, the specified instructions should be disregarded.
Illustration of the operating panel for the chemical dosing pump
8
1. Stroke lenght adjustment knob
2. Error / operating indicator (error - red / operation -
green)
3. Multifunction switch (stroke rates (in % of
180 strokes / min), stop operating mode
“external” (Retrofit kit))
4. Power cable
5. “External actuation” socket (actuation via contact
signal in “external” operating mode; Retrofit kit)
7. Suction valve
8. Disharge valve
1 The leakage bore is between the suction valve and

the drive housing.
2 7
5 6
Figure 5 om5540_07_chemx0053950en.wmf
5.1 Basic information for the pump
5.1.1 Stroke length adjustment knob

The stroke length is continuously adjustable between 0% and 100% via the stroke
length adjustment knob. Reproducibility is only technically practicable in the adjust-
ment range 30% to 100%.
OM5540_07#B.1
5.1.2 Multifunction switch

The multifunction switch is used to select the operating mode and to set the stroking
rate. The following operating modes are selected using the multifunction switch:
• Stop.
• External.
• Manual (to set stroking rate in 10% steps).
Stop
- The "Stop" function allows the pump to be deactivated without disconnecting from
the power supply.
External
- The "External" operating mode allows adjustment of individual strokes via the
external operating mode terminal by means of contact or semi-conductor devices.
- The "Auxiliary frequency" operating mode enables activation of optionally se-
lectable and programmable stroking rate, controlled via the external operating
mode terminal. This stroking rate overrides "Manual" and "External" operating
modes. In the standard version the "Auxiliary frequency" function is programmed
to 100% stroking rate.
- The "Pause" function can be used to operate a remote pump stop function via the
external operating terminal.
Manual
- In the "Manual" operating mode the stroking rate is manually adjustable in 10%
steps via the multifunction switch.
5.1.3 Error/operating Indicator
The operating and error status are shown via the error/operating indicator on the op-
erating panel:
• Green indicator: During operation the indicator is green.

• Red indicator: If an error occurs the indicator is red.
OM5540_07#B.1
6 Maintenance
To ensure a safe and reliable function of the chemical dosing pump maintenance work
must be performed with regular intervals. The normal maintenance interval is three
months. This is based on approximately 30% operation time. But in case of heavier
use (e.g. continuous operation) the intervals should be shortened. Carry out the fol-
lowing maintenance work:
• Check for the correct feed rate by running the pump for a short period.
• Check that the discharge tubing is connected firmly the liquid end.
• Check that the discharge and suction valves are firmly fixed.
• Check that the liquid end is generally watertight, in particular leakage opening
between suction value and drive housing.
• Check the diaphragm for damage.
• Check that the liquid end screws are fastened tightly. The screw fastening torque
should be 4.5 to 5.0 Nm.
• Check that the bleed valve is firmly fixed in place (see Figure 6).
• Check that the bleed function is working correctly (see Figure6).
• Check the electrical connections for wear.
7 Repair
Repair work should only be carried out by qualified personnel. Suitable precautions
must always be taken when using hazardous chemicals. Furthermore, is must be en-
sured that the pump and suction/discharge lines are de-pressurised. Figure 6 illustrates
the discharge valve, suction valve, and exchanging of the diaphragm.
Illustration of discharge valve, suction valve, and exchanging of diaphragm
1 Screws
2 Liquid end
3 Diaphragm
4 Top plate
5 Safety diaphragm
Discharge valve Suction valve 6 Pump housing
Figure 6 om5540_07_chemicx0053990en.wmf
7.1 Cleaning valves
7.1.1 Cleaning the discharge valve

Step A: Loosen the discharge line from the valve.
Step B: Unscrew the discharge valve from the liquid end and rinse thoroughly.
OM5540_07#B.1
Step C: Remove the O-ring from the liquid end with a small screwdriver.
Step D: Insert an Allen key or similar into the smaller hole of the pressure connector
and push out the valve inserts.
Step E: Remove the valve seats with a small screwdriver and allow the valve balls
to drop out.
Step F: Clean all parts.
Step G: Drop the valve balls into the valve seats and push them on the valve inserts.
Step H: Press the valve seats into the pressure connector with their smaller hole in
the direction of the flow (see the direction of the arrows on the fluting of the
pressure connector).
Step I: Insert the O-ring into the liquid end.
Step J: Screw the valve in as far as it will go.
Step K: Secure the discharge line onto the valve.
Step L: Reset the pump after replacing a valve.
7.1.2 Cleaning the suction valve
Dismantling, cleaning, and reassembling of the suction valve is practically the same
as for the discharge valve. Take care, however, that:
- Both valve inserts are actually identical.

- An additional spacer is found under the valve inserts.
- In the liquid end a shaped seal is used instead of an O-ring.
- The flow direction of the suction connection is reversed as for the pressure con-
nector.
7.1.3 Change diaphragm
Step A: When the pump is running set the stroke length to 0% (the drive axis is then
set). Switch off the pump.
Step B: Unscrew the connectors from the discharge and suction side.
Step C: Pull out the fine bleed (knob) and lift off the cover from the liquid end using
a screwdriver.
Step D: Empty the liquid end (turn the unit upside down and let the feed chemical
run out, rinse with a suitable material).
Step E: Remove the screws.
Step F: Loosen (only loosen) the liquid end and the top plate from the pump housing.
Step G: Hold the housing in one hand and with the other, clamp the diaphragm be-
tween the liquid end and the top plate. Release the diaphragm from the drive
spindle with a light anticlockwise turn of the liquid end and top plate.
Step H: Unscrew the diaphragm completely from the drive spindle.
Step I: Remove the top plate from the housing. Please note the position.
Step J: Check the condition of the safety diaphragm and replace if necessary.
Step K: Push the safety diaphragm only as far onto the drive axis until it just lies flat
on the pump housing.
Step L: Screw the new diaphragm carefully up to the stop on the drive axis - this
must be exact to ensure correct metering.
Step M: Screw the diaphragm tight once more.
Step N: Position the top plate on the pump housing. The top plate must be positioned
correctly. Do not distort the top plate on the pump housing, otherwise the
safety diaphragm will not fit.
OM5540_07#B.1
Step O: Lay the diaphragm onto the top plate.

Step P: Hold the top plate and screw the diaphragm in a clockwise direction until it
is firmly in position (the resistance of the return spring can be felt). Do not
over-tighten the diaphragm.
Note: The top plate must remain in position to prevent the safety diaphragm from
distorting.
Step Q: Place the liquid end with the screws on the diaphragm and the top plate. The
priming connector must point downwards once the pump is fully assembled.
Step R: Screw on the screws lightly and tighten. The torque should be 4.5 to 5.0 Nm.
Step S: Ensure that the liquid end cover engages in the liquid end and push the bleed
vent (knob) into the liquid end.
Step T: Check the screw torque after 24 hours operation time.
OM5540_07#B.1
8 Trouble shooting
The trouble shooting list is based on a proper set-up of the chemical dosing pump
during commissioning and/or service. The list can be seen in Table 1.
Please note that the trouble shooting list is general for chemical dosing pumps and has
not been made for any particular plant, but is based on several years of experience.
Therefore, the cause of the specific problem may not be mentioned and vice versa. You
are always welcome, however, to contact our service department for advice or service
assistance.
Fault finding chart

Fault Possible cause Remedy
Pump does not prime despite full Crystalline deposits on the ball seat because valves Remove suction sleeve from chemical
stroke and venting. have dried out. supply and rinse out liquid end through-
ly.
If still unsuccessful, dismantle valves
and clean.
Fluid is leaking from the head The liquid end is leaking at the pump diaphragm. Screw in the liquid end anti-clockwise
washer. (torque: 4.5 to 5.0Nm). If unsuccessful,
replace the diaphragm.
Error/operating indicator not lit. No or incorrect mains voltage. Use the recommended mains voltage as
given in the voltage specification on the
name plate.
Fuse defective. Contact Alfa Laval.
Error/operating indicator lit red. Liquid level in the supply tank has reached “low Fill the chemical storage tank.
liquid level”. (if “float switch” retrofit kit provided).
Electronic failure. The pump needs repair. Contact Alfa

Laval.
Table 1
9 Decommissioning
When dismantling a pump, clean thoroughly, paying particular attention to the liquid
end in order to remove all traces of chemicals and dirt. When disposing of a pump it
must be broken down into separate material types. All parts must be sent for recycling
or for correct disposal according to currently legal waste disposal requirements.
OM6000_01#A.2
RELIEF VALVE
Relief valve
1 Description
The purpose of the relief valve is to protect the delivery line from impermissible over-
pressure caused by the chemical dosing pump. It features a pressure relief mechanism
for both the pressure retaining function as well as for the pressure relief function. The
valve functions are affected by means of a spring-loaded diaphragm. Figure 1 illustrates
the multi-function relief valve. The relief valve has an overflow opening pressure of
16 bar. But depending on the pump type, the pressure may be up to 50% higher until
the valve is completely opened.
Illustration of the relief valve
Delivery line
connection
Black knob Red knob
By-pass
connection
Pressure connection
of the pump
Figure 1 om6000_01_reliefx0056540en.wmf
1.1 Functional description
• Producing a defined back pressure for chemical dosing with respect to free outlet.
The function can be cancelled by turning the black knob in clockwise direction.
• Prevents lift-through from the feed water system in case of vacuum at the dosing
point. The function can be cancelled by turning the black knob in clockwise di-
rection.
• Intake aid to prevent pressure when starting up the pump. It is not necessary to
release the delivery line. The function can be achieved by turning the red knob.
• Depressurising the delivery line when the feed water system is at a standstill (e.g.
repair). The function can be achieved by turning both the red knob and black knob.
• Overflow valve to protect the system from impermissible overpressure caused by
the chemical dosing pump. The return flow is via a by-pass line. This function
takes place automatically.
OM6000_01#A.2
RELIEF VALVE
Note: The relief valve must not be used as a shut-off element and the by-pass line
must always be connected.
1.2 Mounting and installation
The relief valve is screwed directly onto the pressure connection of the pump and can
be turned or aligned through 360. The delivery line or hose is secured on the valve
outlet end by means of a connection set or GF screw fitting. An EPDM O-ring is fitted
at the factory in the O-ring groove at the outlet. For applications in which EPDM is
not suitable, it is advisable to fit a Viton B O-ring. This O-ring (brown) is supplied
together with the valve.
The by-pass line is routed into the chemical tank and secured by means of a hose
grommet and union nut. The by-pass line must always be connected since a minimum
overflow into the by-pass line can occur during operation of the valve close to the
pressure relief function.
Attention: A non-return valve must be installed at the dosing point since the
entire contents of the system can flow back via the by-pass when the
valve is operated.
1.3 Operation
Operation and setting the intake aid

The route to the by-pass line is cleared by means of the red knob by turning it in the
direction indicated by the arrow (clockwise). The liquid flows back into the chemical
tank. In this case, the delivery line is partly depressurised and the liquid can flow out
of the by-pass. The chemical dosing pump must now be set to "intake" until the liquid
can be seen in the by-pass line. The pump is now primed and can be placed into op-
eration. After being released, the red rotary knob reverts of its own accord back to its
initial position.
Depressurising the delivery line

The passage from the delivery line to the by-pass can be cleared by means of the red
knob and the black knob by turning them in the direction indicated by the arrows
(clockwise). The pressure drops in the line to approximately 1.5 bar if only the red
knob is turned. Both knobs must remain unscrewed until no more liquid flows out of
the by-pass line or no more liquid flows back into the chemical tank. The delivery line
is now depressurised. Once released, both rotary knobs revert of their own accord back
to their initial position.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Salinity alarm equipment

.
Salinometer............................................................... OM8210_41............... 17-2
OM8210_41#G.1
SALINOMETER
Salinometer
1 Description
The salinometer is used in combination with a conductive electrode to measure and
supervise the salinity of feed water. Figure 1 illustrates the control device and electrode.
The control device is provided with indication LED’s for monitoring the salinity level
and two LED’s for alarm purpose. The measuring range as well as the adjustable alarm
range is 0 – 100 ppm (sea salt). The alarm limit can be adjusted by means of the set
screw located on the front panel. The alarm limit is indicated by a flashing LED in the
indication LED row. If the salinity level exceeds the alarm limit the alarm LED’s start
flashing.
During commissioning it is not necessary to carry out any adjustments of the equipment
except setting the alarm limit. When the power is turned on, the salinometer will per-
form a self test. This calibration will take approximately 5 sec.
Illustration of the control device

Control
device
Indication
PG 13.5
LEDs
Gasket
Gold-plated
electrodes
Terminals
Figure 1 sl700g_bx3194020en.wmf
Note: The electrode is totally sealed and must not be opened. The guarantee is
void if opening of the electrode is attempted.
OM8210_41#G.1
SALINOMETER
2 Installation
The conductive electrode may be installed vertically, horizontally, or radial inclined.
However, the electrodes must be constantly submerged in feed water. Figure 2 illus-
trates the salinity system.
Illustration of the salinity system

Make-up
Condensate
Hot well
T-piece
Electrode
Cable lenght 2.5 m
Junction box
(not Alfa Laval supply)
Cable lenght max. 200 m
PI PI
Salinometer
PS (mounted in
power panel)
To boiler Feed water
PI PI
pumps
Figure 2 sl700d_bx3198720en.wmf
OM8210_41#G.1
SALINOMETER
2.1 Wiring
The wiring should be carried out in accordance with the diagram shown in Figure 3.
Wiring diagram
Brown
Shield
Black
Grey
Blue
Junction box
Brown
Shield
Black
Grey
Blue
Figure 3 sl700i_ax3115920en.wmf
The mains supply of the control device is 98-122 VAC or 196-244 VAC, 50-60 Hz.En-
sure that the mains supply is secured against over current by a fuse (max.100mA).
The recommended cable for the conductive electrode is a multi-screened twin twisted,
where the screen is connected to connector 14, one pair is used for connector 11+12,
and the other pair is used for connector 13+15. The length of the cable must not exceed
200 m.
Important: The cable may not be placed together with power cables, as this will
cause damage to the gold plating on the electrodes.
3 Maintenance
The accuracy of the salinometer equipment is very dependent on the electrodes are
kept clean. The electrodes should be taken out and cleaned at least once a week. Use
only a clean and soft cloth. When cleaning the electrodes it is important that oil or other
chemicals do not pollute the electrodes. Any pollution will immediately result in an
inaccurate measurement of the salinometer.
Note: Avoid damaging the gold plating.If the gold plating is damaged, the con-
ductive electrode must be replaced.
The expected longevity of the conductive electrode is approximately 1.2 – 2.2 years.
OM8210_41#G.1
SALINOMETER
4 Troubleshooting
Step Problem Description Posible causes

1 No lights in Check external fuse. Salinometer has no power.
Salinometer Check AC power on Salinometer terminal’s .Check the cable
(1) connections to the Salinometer.
2 No lights in Check voltage between pin 12 and 14. Electrode unit is defective or cable
Salinometer Voltage from electrode shall be approx. 2 VDC. failure (reference voltage from
(2) If the voltage is low (near 0 Vdc), disconnect the electrode unit electrode unit is missing).
and check that the light in the salinometer is on again.
3 Wrong reading Disconnect the connector to the electrode unit. Salinity level If no reaction: The salinometer is
of salinity. shall increase to approx. 100 PPM and the alarm will be flash- defective.
ing.
4 Wrong reading Remove Electrode unit and inspect/clean the electrodes. Use a Electrodes dirty or damaged.
of salinity. clean and dry rag. Avoid touching the electrodes with the fin- We recommend replacement of the
gers. Check that the gold plating not is damaged. This should electrode unit every 18 months de-
be done at least once a week. pending on the condition of the
gold plating.
5 Wrong reading This test has to be done with electrode in open air (not in water). Cable failure: Check connections.
of salinity. a) Check voltage between pin 11 and 14
(Voltage from electrode: 0 VDC).
b) Check voltage between pin 12 and 14
(Voltage from electrode: 2 VDC).
c) Check voltage between pin 13 and 14
(Voltage from salinometer: +12 to 15 VDC).
d) Check voltage between pin 15 and 14
(Voltage from salinometer: -12 to 15 VDC).
e) Disconnect electrode unit and check voltage between pin 11
and 14
(Voltage from electrode more than: 2 VDC).
6 Corrosion of Check that the sensor cable is mounted at far as possible from The cable to the Salinometer sen-
electrodes. high power cables. sor is mounted near some high
power cables. The induction from
the high power cables gives a high
voltage on the sensor cable and the
sensor. A high voltage on the sen-
sor will cause corrosion faster than
normal.
Table 1
OM8210_41#G.1
SALINOMETER
No. Picture Description What to do

1 Electrode unit in good condi- The unit is ready for installation.
tion. No visible damages.
2 Electrode unit with damaged The unit is ready for exchange. We recommend replacement of
gold platin the electrode unit every 18 months depending on the condition of
the gold plating.
Send a request for a new sparepart.
3 Electrode unit with serious The cable to the Salinometer sensor is mounted near some high
corrosion/erosion. power cables. The induction from the high power cables gives a
One of the sensors has almost high voltage on the sensor cable and the sensor. A high voltage
disappeared. on the sensor will cause corrosion faster than normal.
Relocate the cables and send a request for a new sparepart.
4 Electrode unit with crack in Under normal circumstances the electrode unit is covered by war-
the white moulding. ranty (as long as the electrode unit is not tampered with). When
The gold platin is in good discovering an electrode units with this fault please send following
condition. information to your supplier:
1. Serial number of the salinometer
2. Photos of the electrode unit, showing the crack and the golden
plated electrodes
3. Name of the vessel
4. Your reference no.
5 Warning: Send a request for a new sparepart.

Do not try to open the elec-
trode unit. Warranty will be
void if the electrode unit is
open or damaged.
Table 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Oil detection equipment

.
Oil detection equipment.............................................. OM9410_01............... 18-2
OM9410_01#C.1
OIL DETECTION EQUIPMENT
Oil detection equipment
1 General
This chapter contains installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for the ul-
trasonic interface detection system, Mobrey type 402 SD, using control unit type
MCU200.
Each Mobrey ultrasonic control system requires a sensor to suit the specific application,
plus a control unit. These instructions cover the control units in the MCU200 series.
2 Sensor installation
2.1 General description
The ultrasonic sensor contains two piezoelectric crystals. A high frequency signal (3.7
MHz) generated by the control unit is transmitted to one piezoelectric crystal by coaxial
cable. This crystal converts the electrical signal into an ultrasonic oscillation.The sen-
sor design allows the ultrasonic oscillation to pass from the transmitter crystal to the
receiver piezoelectric crystal. The sensors of type 402 are “gap” type sensors, where
the two piezoelectric crystals are separated by a gap. When the gap is in liquid the
signal reaches the receiver, because of the low ultrasonic attenuation of the liquid.
When the gap is filled with air, no ultrasonic signal can pass from transmitter to re-
ceiver. See Figure 1.
Working principle of the oil detection equipment
Figure 1 om9410_01_mobreyx0063070en.wmf
OM9410_01#C.1
When the gap is filled with liquid, the piezoelectric receiver crystal converts the ul-
trasonic wave into an electrical signal, which is transmitted back to the control unit
using a second coaxial cable. Usually the two coaxial cables to the sensor are in one
overall sheath. The control unit circuitry is a feedback amplifier, which oscillates when
the sensor is wet, and is quiescent for the sensor dry. The “oscillating” or “non-oscil-
lating” sensor states dictate the output relay states of the MCU200.
For interface detection the sensor “oscillates” in a clear liquid, and is “non-oscillating”
at the interface.
2.2 Switching levels and orientation
The gap sensors should normally be mounted with the gap vertical, to avoid build up
of solids on the sensor faces on either side of the gap. In this condition the switching
level will be half way up the face: if the sensor is mounted from the side of the tank
this is normally on the centreline of the cylindrical body.
Occasionally such sensors are mounted with the sensor faces horizontal, either to avoid
air bubbles passing through the gap or for convenience of installation. In this case the
switching level will be at the sensor face at the top of the gap.
2.3 Installation of sensor
The sensor must be handled with care - it is a measuring instrument. Before installation,
check that sensor, cable and control unit have not been damaged in transit. Drill and
tap a hole with a suitable thread. It is advisable to use a boss or similar on thin walls.
The sensor has a tapered thread. Use Ptfe tape or similar to seal the thread. Mark the
sensor hexagon to identify the gap orientation of the sensor, if appropriate. Take care
not to damage the sensor cable during tightening.
The cable should be laid on cable trays and separated from any high voltage or mains
cables. The normal cable termination is a plastic gland (to fit the MCU200 control box
drilled hole) and crimped terminal pins to suit the MCU200 terminals.
2.4 Extensions cables
Extension cables up to 50 metres long can be fitted to most Mobrey ultrasonic sensors
in the factory to special order but a better site arrangement is to have a separate ex-
tension cable. Table 1 shows a list of suitable extension cables.
Suitable extension cables

50 m 50 - 100 m Above 100 m
RG174 URM76
Consult Alfa Laval
RG178 RG58
Table 1
OM9410_01#C.1
When double coaxial cable needs to be extended, two sets of coaxial plugs and sockets
will be needed, one set for transmit and one receive. Care must be taken that the con-
nectors are not connected to earth or shorted together in any way, to prevent cross-talk
or pick-up. The coaxial connections must be made in a waterproof junction box. Ter-
minal blocks should not be used.
The extension cable needs to be of 50 Ohm characteristic impedance. Suitable dual

coaxial extension cables can be purchased from Alfa Laval. For extensions over 50
metres it is recommended two runs of single coaxial low loss cable is used, with the
transmit and return cable runs separated by 0.15 metres to minimise cross-talk.
If several sensor cables are being run together then all the transmit cables (those con-
nected to E2) should be grouped together and all receive cables (those connected to
1E) grouped together maintaining the separation specified above.
Two cables are required per sensor. The RG178 should be used where the cable itself
is subject to temperatures exceeding 74°C.
3 Control unit installation
3.1 Mechanical
The control unit is supplied with three holes drilled in the bottom (longer) side of the
box. Two glands are supplied for the power input cable and relay output cable. The
sensor is normally supplied fitted with a suitable gland on the cable. Two further holes
can be drilled in the bottom side of the box should these be needed: it is recommended
that the circuit board is removed whilst drilling extra gland holes.
Figure 2 shows the dimensions of the MCU200 housing box.
OM9410_01#C.1
MCU200 Housing dimensions
All cable connections are made to the terminal blocks along the bottom edge of the
pcb, see Figure 3. Release the terminal screw before inserting the wire.
MCU201 PC board
OM9410_01#C.1
3.2 External connections
3.2.1 AC mains
AC mains is connected between the “N” terminal for neutral and one of the “115V”
or “230V” terminals depending on the voltage supply available - BEWARE - the ter-
minal not connected externally will be “live” once the transformer is powered via the
other terminals.
3.2.2 Mains earth

Mains earth should be connected to the terminal marked “E”. This provides an earth
contact for the pcb mounting pints.
3.2.3 The relay

The relay output connections are labelled:
• NC - Normally closed (relay de-energised)

• C - Common
• NO - Normally open (relay de-energised)
There are also two sets of contacts for DPCO relay, labelled 1 & 2.
3.2.4 The sensor

The sensor connections are labelled "1", "E" for the receiver crystal and "2", "E" for
the coax cable to the transmitter crystal. The screens of these coax cables are connected
to the terminals marked "E".
3.2.5 The auxiliary input

The auxiliary input is a terminal which can be connected to a "push to reset" button to
achieve a latching alarm, or to another Mobrey Control unit, to give a pump control
from the MCU200 unit relay output. If a short circuit is connected between terminals
3 & 4, the MCU200 relay, once de-energised, is held de-energised. Even if the sensor
attached to the MCU200 changes state, to that which should energise the output relay,
this relay will not energise until the link between terminals 3 & 4 is broken in the circuit
external to the MCU200.
3.3 Switch settings in MCU200 series
3.3.1 Gain switch and potentiometer

See section 4.
3.3.2 Frequency selection

This slide switch is labelled "FREQ" and is located between the sensor terminal block
E2, and the Aux. input terminals. This selects the operating frequency of the MCU200
oscillator, which for the present installation must be set to 3.7 MHz (switch in the “up”
position). The setting required is dictated by the sensor type connected to the control
unit.
OM9410_01#C.1
3.3.3 Cable check option selection

This slide switch is located directly above the sensor terminal block E2. It is labelled
"Cable Check" and the ex factory setting is "OUT" with the slide switch to the right.
By sliding this switch to the left, the cable check circuitry is brought into action. This
circuitry monitors the continuity of the screens of the two coaxial cables attached to
the sensors: normally these are linked at the sensor to the metal body of the fitting (or
to each other in the case of non metallic sensors). If this continuity is broken, the
"FAULT” LED" will illuminate giving an indication that the sensor cable is damaged,
and the MCU200 will give the "ALARM" output relay state (see Figure 4).
3.3.4 Relay output and LED logic selection

The bank of six slide switches towards the top of the pcb sets the relay output state
logic relative to the sensor state, associated time delays and the LEDs. These are slide
switches, best adjusted with a pencil, and the ex factory wetting is with all switches to
the right.
Each switch is colour coded as shown in Figure 4, and the PC board labels give brief
function information.
Relay output and LED logic switch
Note: At Figure 4 OSC means sensor oscillating. E means relay energised, NE

means de-energised.
Set the switches in the following order, starting at the bottom and working upwards:
BLUE:
If the MCU200 relay is to be energised (E) when the sensor is oscillating (OSC) then
set the No 6 blue switch to the right (OSC=E). This is the preferred setting, to give a
de-energised relay in the ALARM state for a gap sensor as a low level alarm.
OM9410_01#C.1
GREEN:
This selects the relay change which is subject to the time delay selected on the top
switches. When the No.5 green switch is set to the right, the delay occurs between the
sensor changing state and the relay de-energising or becoming “not energised” (NE).
This time delay is a minimum of 0.l5 seconds, (achieved by switching the top BROWN
switch to the right) and is used to prevent relay chatter at the changeover point. Longer
time delays are selected on the top three slide switches as shown in Figure 5.
The relay change in the opposite direction is immediate (within 50 milliseconds).
The top three slide switches
YELLOW:
Only one of the GREEN or RED LEDs will be illuminated at any one time. These
LEDs show the state of the MCU200 output relay. The RED LED is labelled "ALARM"
and the GREEN LED is labelled "NORMAL". The yellow slide switch (Number 4)
determines which LED will be illuminated when the relay is energised (E). It is usual
to have the GREEN/NORMAL condition occur with the relay energised, i.e. with
switch Number 4 to the right (E=GREEN).
4 Applications
4.1 Gain adjustment
Correct adjustment of the gain (HI/LO switch and potentiometer) is essential for proper
operation of any ultrasonic sensor system. This adjusts the gain of the feedback am-
plifier in the control unit, which produces oscillation of the sensor when the coupling
between the ultrasonic crystals is sufficient. Therefore the higher the gain setting, the
lower the coupling needed to produce an oscillating sensor.
The universal control unit of the MCU200 operates with many sensors, so the correct
setting for the particular sensor and application should be found on site by experiment,
if possible. This will take account of particular site conditions like RF coupling between
extension cables, which can affect the maximum allowed gain. Other liquid charac-
teristics, such as presence of suspended solids, or air bubbles, can mean that for reliable
operation the MCU200 gain must be set as high as possible, to overcome future solids
OM9410_01#C.1
build up, but at least one potentiometer division below the maximum allowed level, to
ensure temperature and component ageing stability.
The particular procedures outlined below for gain adjustments give the mid point gain
settings, which may need to be adjusted to meet specific site/sensor future requirements
as indicated above.
4.2 Interface detection
4.2.1 Interface detection between two dissimilar liquids

Viscous liquids, emulsions and liquids containing solid particles have a greater ultra-
sonic attenuation than clear liquids. This technique is used to detect which liquid is
present at the sensor, for example for the separation of oil and water. For this duty
Mobrey 402 sensors are used, operating at 3.7 MHz to produce the maximum ultrasonic
difference between two liquids monitored.
The gain is adjusted so that the sensor oscillates only in the liquid with the lower
ultrasonic attenuation: this is usually the clearer liquid (water in the example of Fig-
ure 6). Note that the signal when oil is present in the sensor gap will be the same as
that for air in the gasp, and that emulsion layers give a very high attenuation.
Mobrey 402 Sensor as oil/water interface
Step A: Reduce the gain potentiometer with the sensor immersed in one of the liquids
until a "false dry" indication is obtained. Note the position of the pot.
Step B: Repeat for the sensor immersed in the other liquid.
OM9410_01#C.1
Step C: Set the potentiometer half way between these two values. Correct perform-
ance requires a total difference between the two set points of at least 3 di-
visions.
Interface detection between two immiscible similar liquidsWhen liquids are

ultrasonically very similar - as happens for example with paraffin or oil and
water - the procedure in section 4.2.1. produces very little difference between
the two "false dry" points. In this case the "reflection" method of interface
detection is used. An illustration of this method is shown in Figure 7.
Note: The Mobrey 402 sensor in the hot well tank is installed as shown in Fig-
ure 7.
If an ultrasonic beam is transmitted from one liquid to another at a suitable angle (10%)
it is split at the interface into a reflected and a refracted beam, so that it does not reach
the receiver crystal. If there is no interference in the gap, but only one liquid, the beam
is received and the sensor oscillates.
Interface detector by reflection method
The gain adjustment is made so that the gain is 3 divisions higher than the highest false
dry position obtained, as in section 4.2.1. Performance at the interface should then be
checked.
Note: That the non oscillating state of the sensor, at the interface, also occurs
throughout any emulsion layer at the interface, and also when the sensor
is in air.
OM9410_01#C.1
5 Spares and fault finding
5.1 Spares
The following parts are suitable for replacements on the MCU201:
• Main pcb complete: K2641

• LED indicator pcb: K2643
• LED pcb spacers: K2623
• LED pcb connector: K2624/50
• Box assembly: K2662
• Gland Assembly: K746/K747/K748
There are no consumable items such as fuses.
5.2 Fault finding
Step A: At least one LED should be illuminated. If not check the power supply to
the unit.
Step B: If the "Fault" LED is on, check the coax cable to the sensor for incorrect
wiring or damage. Particularly check continuity of extension cables, con-
nection of crimped connectors on cable ends. The pcb board can be checked
by linking the two terminals labelled E on the sensor terminals - this should
cancel the fault indication LED.
Step C: If the sensor is giving incorrect indications check the gain adjustment (see
section 4.0).
Check for correct sensor operation whenever the gain is adjusted away from the normal
set point. Assume an overlap of 2 divisions between the "LO" and "HI" gain ranges.
Step D: Check that the incorrect operation has not been produced by incorrect setting
of the frequency selection switch, or an external short circuit on the Auxiliary
input terminals.
Step E: The circuit board can be checked by linking the sensor terminals 1 and 2
with a wire, to simulate an oscillating sensor.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Steam dump equipment

.
Steam dump equipment.............................................. OM6050_03............... 19-2
Control valves, type 470/471....................................... OM6010_02............... 19-11
Pneumatic actuator, type dp........................................ OM5520_01............... 19-15
Positioner, SIPART PS2 6DR5000.............................. OM5510_05............... 19-22
OM6050_03#C.1
STEAM DUMP EQUIPMENT
Steam dump equipment
1 General description
The steam dump equipment is designed for dumping excess steam generated by the
exhaust gas boiler from the steam system to an atmospheric dump condenser.
This chapter contains some general instructions, which should be taken into consid-
eration before installing and during operation of the steam dump equipment. More
detailed instructions related to the components of the equipment can be found in other
sections.
Note: It is essential that the condenser is dimensioned to be able to absorb the

amount of steam generated in the exhaust gas boiler(s). Or if a composite
boiler is installed the amount of steam generated by the exhaust gas part
of the composite boiler(s).
Schematic illustration of the steam dump system for exhaust gas operation
Service steam line
1 - Steam dump valve
2 - I/P positioner 6
4 - 20 mA
3 - Pneumatic actuator
4 - Air reducing set
5 - Process controller/local panel
6 - Pressure transmitter Boiler/
7 - Steam trap steam drum
Control panel
1
2 5
3
I
P
7 4
AIR inlet
(max. 17 bar)
Steam/condensate line
Control air (instrument air)
To atmospheric dump condenser Electrical signal
Figure 1 om6050_03_1ax0756600en.wmf
Figure 1 shows a schematically illustration of the system, which consists of the fol-
lowing components:
OM6050_03#C.1
• Control valve with pneumatic actuator.

• I/P positioner.
• Air reduction set.
• Process controller or local panel.
• Pressure transmitter.
• Steam trap.
The equipment is working by measuring the steam pressure (e.g. in the boiler, the steam
drum or the main steam pipe) with a pressure transmitter (6). The transmitter sends an
electrical signal (4-20 mA DC) to the process controller/local panel (5). In the control
system the signal is compared with a pre-set adjustable value.
The steam pressure is then regulated when the control system sends an electrical signal
to the I/P positioner (2). It converts the signal and via the pneumatic actuator (3) con-
trols the position of the steam dump valve (1), through which the excess steam is lead
to the atmospheric dump condenser.
The control valve will automatically close in case of air or power failure. A hand wheel
enables manual operation of the valve. Figure 2 shows a complete control valve ar-
rangement consisting of valve, I/P positioner and actuator.
Arrangement of control valve, positioner and actuator
Figure 2 om6050_03_k7462_x0056760en.wmf
Under normal circumstances the control valve, actuator and I/P positioner is delivered
as a complete unit already assembled.
OM6050_03#C.1
The air supply to the actuator is controlled by the air reduction set (4). The compressed
air at the inlet of the air filter must have a max. pressure of 17 bar and a temperature
laying in the interval from -20 to +65°C. Furthermore, the supplied air must be instru-
ment air.
Any adjustment of the system must be carried out on the process controller/local panel
(5).
Note: All pipes must be thoroughly cleaned before commissioning
2 Steam dump valve

The system is designed to be able to dump the amount for the control valve type 23.470
DP.
The construction of the valve can be seen on Figure 3.

The steam dump valve together with actuator and positioner are suitable for installation
in dry or damp locations, and in order to avoid damage to the drives it is recommended
to install the components in an right position.
Ambient temperatures on the valve drive should not fall below -15°C or rise above
50°C. Precautions should however be taken when using the equipment where the am-
bient temperature are likely to drop below 0°C to prevent condensation of water in the
instrument air.
Drawing of of control valves

23.470 DP
1 - Body
2 - Seatring
3 - Mounting bonnet
4 - Guiding bush
5 - Plug
6 - Spindle
7 - Gland flange
8 - Spindle guiding
10 - Stuffing box
14 - Gasket
15 - Studs
17 - Hexagon nut
19 - Spring-type straight pin
Figure 3 om6050_03_3ax0756610en.wmf
OM6050_03#C.1
2.1 Fitting instructions
The installation point should allow sufficient space to ensure correct maintenance of
the valve and actuator. The valve should be inserted so that the spindle has a vertical
position and the actuator being up above. The valve can also be tilted to a maximum
horizontal position if the installation point does not allow any better condition. If
painting is necessary, ensure that valve and actuator spindle as well as mechanical links
are free from paint. The flow direction is signalled through an arrow on the valve body.
The valves should be insulated against high temperatures to guard the actuator. Suffi-
cient space must be left to undertake maintenance on the spindle-sealing.
To guarantee a disturbance free function of the control valve, the inlet and outlet
stretches of the piping should be of straight piping length min. 2 times pipe diameter
by inlet and 6 times by outlet. The piping must be aligned to prevent any strain on the
valve. Precautions to restrict strain on the piping should be regarded. In no case sup-
porting must be fitted to the valve to hold the piping system.
The piping should be rinsed to clear out any pollution, welding beads, rust etc. before
inserting the control valves. A strainer should be fitted in front of the control valve to
catch remaining particles. Bolts should be re-tightened after taking into operation.
When the piping system is filled and set under pressure, the spindle sealing should be
checked for leakage, and if necessary be carefully tightened until the leakage is stopped.
The PTFE-V-ring unit does not require any re-tightening, the spring tension maintains
the necessary force.
The bolts must be tightened gradually in steps, diametrically in pairs but not tighter
than it is necessary for sealing.
Flange connections bolts should never be loosened or tightened when the valve is under
temperature or pressure, even if a leakage may arise.
3 Actuator
Select the site of installation so that the actuator is readily accessible and that there is
adequate room for later maintenance work.
The mounting position is preferably with the actuator and valve spindle in the vertical
position. For assembly onto the valve please see the separate instructions described in
the sections for valve and actuator (see also Figure 4).
The instrument air supply should be dry for low temperature service. A heat-guard
should be installed for high temperature service.
Note: Please observe the maintenance instructions for valves.
OM6050_03#C.1
3.1 Pneumatic connection
The pneumatic supply tube must be connected to the diaphragm housing.
The thread connection for the actuators DP 32 and DP 33 is R 1/4" and for the actuator
DP 34 is R 3/8".
Warning: The actuator diaphragm may only be pressure loaded on the side op-
posite of the springs. The vent hole in the other connection must stay
free.
Assembling of the actuator on valve
Figure 4 om6050_03_acu_06x0056730en.wmf
4 I/P positioner
The positioner must be installed and commissioned in exactly the same sequence as
described in the section for the positioner. It is essential that the warnings in the relevant
sections are heeded during this process.
Warning: This instrument must only be installed and commissioned by qualified

personnel. The degree of electrical safety is determined solely by the
devices supplying the power.
OM6050_03#C.1
Warning: Pneumatic drives generate considerable positioning forces. Safety pre-

cautions must therefore be scrupulously observed during installation
and commissioning in order to prevent injuries. Your attention is
drawn, if applicable, to the relevant regulations regarding operation
in hazardous areas.
5 Steam pipe connections to dump valve

Referring to the diagram in Figure 1, some remarks have to be made on the piping
system before and after the dump valve. This is due to the fact that a proper functioning
of the steam dump equipment (i.e. the equipment is able to blow off the required amount
of steam) requires as low a resistance in the piping system as possible.
In order to obtain this low resistance the following topics should be considered:
• The dump valve should be placed as near the dump condenser as possible.
• According to the amount of steam that the system is dimensioned to dump the
diameter of the pipe before and after the dump valve must be of a certain size,
which can be deduced from Table 1.
• It is essential the transitions from pipes to the dump valve both before and after
the valve are smooth and without any sudden contractions or expansions.
• Furthermore should the pipe section be as short as possible and preferably without
bends.
• If there are valves placed in the system before and/or after the dump valve these
should be of the straightway type and of the same size as the pipes.
Amount of dumped steam related to min. pipe diameter

Operating pressure 6 bar(g) / Dump pressure: 7.3bar(g)
Size of dump valve, DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125
Max. steam amount, kg/h 380 598 949 1519 2373 3797 5980 9492
Pipe size before valve, DN 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200
Pipe size after valve, DN 50 65 80 100 125 200 200 250
Operating pressure 7 bar(g) / Dump pressure: 8.3 bar(g)
Operating pressure 8 bar(g) / Dump pressure: 9.3 bar(g)
Table 1
OM6050_03#C.1
6 Process controller/local panel

The process controller or local panel are installed in the boiler control panel. For in-
structions regarding one or the other please see the specified instructions in the control
system sections.
Warning: This is an electrically-operated device. Certain parts in electrical de-

vices carry dangerous voltages during operation. Severe injury or
damage to property could therefore occur if the warnings are not ob-
served. Staff working with this device should be suitably qualified.
Reliable and safe operation of these devices depend on correct trans-
port, storage, assembly and operation.
7 Pressure transmitter
The pressure transmitter converts the steam pressure to an electrical signal proportional
with the pressure. The unit is supplied as two-wire transmitters with an output signal
of 4-20 mA.
7.1 Installation conditions
The zero point is factory-set with the pressure connector pointing downwards. If the
unit is installed in another position the zero point will be displaced approx. 1% as far
as the lowest pressure range is concerned, decreasing in the higher pressure ranges.
The displacement can be eliminated by using a zero-point potentiometer.
To protect the pressure element against temperatures higher than the maximum per-
missible temperature of the element (100°C), it is recommended to insert a water-filled
loop. An example of such an installation is shown on Figure 5, which also shows an
example of insulation against radiant heat.
OM6050_03#C.1
Example of installation/connection of transmitter
Thin (= Low heat co nductivity) uninsulated tube Max. 70 °C
Steam
e.g. 170 °C
Insulation
against radiant heat
Condensed liquid
reliable, good convection
Figure 5 om6050_03_emp2_2x0056750en.wmf
There are facilities for adjusting zero point and span. Zero point adjustment is necessary
to equalise pressure arising from any differences in level between the pressure trans-
mitter and the medium being measured. Zero point adjustment results in a parallel
adjustment of span.
8 Air reducing set
8.1 Installation
Before installation the operating conditions of temperature and pressure must be

checked.The unit should be mounted securely in an accessible and visible location
upstream from lubricators and near components being served. Strain on pipe work and
fittings should be avoided and directional flow arrows observed.
With cyclic demand systems the filter-regulator should be installed upstream of di-
rectional control valves. Airline piping should be the same size as unit ports with air-
flow in the direction of the arrow.A pressure gauge may be connected to the appropriate
1/8 port after removing the plug and should have a range exceeding the maximum
proposed outlet setting.Figure 6 shows an illustration of the filter-regulator.
OM6050_03#C.1
Filter-regulator
Figure 6 om6050_03_b07_fx0056740en.wmf
8.2 Adjustment
With the regulator adjustment completely backed-off the air supply can be turned on.
The adjusting knob can be rotated clockwise to increase the spring load and the pressure
increase observed on the gauge.
Minor adjustment after setting changes can be avoided by always approaching the
desired setting from the lower level. When a lower setting is required, firstly reduce
to a lower level and then increase to the desired setting.
Decreasing the pressure setting on a relieving type regulator will cause air to exhaust
through the bonnet vent hole.
The non rising adjusting knob includes a locking feature;
• Push knob in after setting to lock and prevent adjustment.

• To release pull knob out.
If the adjustment knob is fitted with the tamper resistant screw option, the screw must
be removed to enable the knob to be unlocked.
Auto drain units should have a 1/4" (6 mm) bore flexible tube pushed over the bottom
protrusion to pipe away expelled liquid. Avoid restricting the drain pipe.
Manual drain units must be drained before the contaminant level reaches the element.
Should this occur then liquid contaminant will be carried downstream.
OM6010_02#B.1
CONTROL VALVES, TYPE 470/471
Control valves, type 470/471
1 General
This type of control valve is suited to regulate fluids, gases and steams. The valve plug
is normally a parabolic plug, but can also be supplied in a perforated design. Both types
of plugs can have either linear or equal percentage flow characteristic.
The flow direction for parabolic plugs is always against the closing direction. However,
with perforated plugs for feed water, it is in the closing direction. If a valve with a
perforated plug is operated by means of a pneumatic actuator with the flow in the
closing direction, the pneumatic actuator should have a stronger thrust force. This is
necessary to prevent thumping near to the closing position.
All control valves can be fitted alternately with manual-, pneumatic-, electric- or hy-
draulic operation devices.
Illustration of control valves type 470 and 471
Figure 1 om6010_02_val47xx0056570en..wmf
OM6010_02#B.1
Table of position numbers in Figure 1

Part Designation Part Designation Part Designation
1 Body 7 Gland flange 15.1 Studs
2 Seat ring 7.1 Screw joint 17 Hexagon nuts
3 Mounting bonnet 8 Spindle guiding 17.1 Hexagon nuts
3.1 Mounting bonnet 10 Stuffing box 19 Spring-type straight pin
4 Guiding bush 10.1 Stuffing-box packing 21 Set-pin
5 Plug 14 Gasket 25 Bellow housing
6 Spindle 14.1 Gasket 26 Bellow unit
6.1 Spindle 15 Studs
Table 1
2 Operation
2.1 Fitting instructions
The valve should be inserted so that the spindle has a vertical position together with
the actuator. The valve can also be tilted to a maximum horizontal position if the
installation point does not allow any better condition.
To guarantee a disturbance free function of the control valve, the inlet and outlet
stretches of the piping should be of straight piping length (min. two times the pipe
diameter by inlet and six times by outlet). The piping should be rinsed to clear out any
pollution, welding beads, rust, etc. before inserting the control valves. A strainer should
be fitted in front of the control valve to catch the remaining particles. Bolts should be
tightened after taking into operation.
The flow direction is signalled by an arrow on the valve body. The valves should be
insulated against high temperatures to guard the actuator.
2.2 Actuator assembly
The control valves are normally delivered with actuators already fitted. For alternations
or maintenance of actuator, the assembly should occur in accordance with the operation
instructions for the actuator.
2.3 Setting into operation
When the piping system is filled, the spindle sealing should be checked for leakage
and, if necessary, tightened. A PTFE-V-ring unit does not require any tightening as
the spring tension maintains the necessary force.
The bolts must be tightened gradually in steps, diametrically in pairs, but not tighter
than it is necessary for the sealing. Flange connection bolts should never be loosened
or tightened when the valve is under temperature or pressure even if a leakage may
arise.
OM6010_02#B.1
For actuators please see to the appropriate actuator operation instructions.
3 Maintenance
Before any maintenance of the control valve is carried out, the piping system must be
shut off and pressure free.
3.1 Exchange of the stuffing-box packing
A leak stuffing-box packing should initially be carefully tightened to stop the leakage.
If this does not help, a new layer should be inserted, or the complete packing should
be replaced.
3.1.1 Additional packing layer

Step A: Open the valve fully and unscrew the hexagon nuts (17).
Step B: Lift the gland flange (7) and the spindle guiding (8) upwards.
Step C: Insert adequate quantity of packing rings (split ring-displacement, splitting
at 180° to avoid overlapping).
Step D: Fix the hexagon nuts (17) properly.
3.1.2 Exchange
Step A: Drive the actuator into middle position and dismantle the actuator.
Step B: Unscrew the hexagon nuts (17) from the studs (15).
Step C: Remove the gland flange (7), the spindle guiding (8) and the old stuffing
box (10) and clean the packing compartment.
Step D: Clean the valve spindle and check for damage and if necessary replace. If
the damaged spindle is not replaced, the new packing will leak after a short
period.
Step E: Insert the new packing rings (split ring-displacement, splitting at 180° to
avoid overlapping).
Step F: Fix the hexagon nuts (17) properly.
Note: Strenuous tightening will prevent leakage, but will also have a brake effect
on the spindle which aggravates the movement of the spindle.
3.2 Exchange of a PTFE-V-ring sealing unit
A PTFE-V-ring unit is spring loaded and has enough set pressure to ensure a good seal
even by low operation pressures. It is replaced as mentioned above.
The PTFE-V-ring sealing unit should be lubricated before it is inserted. The sealing
lips must face against the pressure direction.
Note: Special care should be given to the spindle surface. Rough surfaces wear
the sealing lips enormously and can be due to failure of the packing unit.
OM6010_02#B.1
3.3 Exchange of the bellow unit
Step B: Unscrew the screw joint (7.1).
Step C: Unscrew the hexagon nuts (17) and remove the bellow housing (25). Dis-
mantle the plug as described in the next section.
Step D: Unscrew the hexagon nuts (17.1) and dismantle the mounting bonnet (3.1).
Step E: The bellow unit (26) is removed from the bellow housing (25).
Step F: Replace the two gaskets (14.1) and the gasket (14).
Step G: When the bellow unit (26) is replaced, the proper position of the anti-twisting
device must be observed.
Step H: The set pins (21) have to drive within the slots of the anti-twisting device.
Check for friction-free movement.
Step I: Replace mounting bonnet (3.1) and screw down the hexagon nuts (17.1)
crosswise.
3.4 Exchange of the plug-spindle unit
Step B: Unscrew the gland flange (7).
3.4.1 Control valve type 470
Step A: Unscrew the hexagon nuts (17) and dismantle the mounting bonnet (3).
Step B: Pull out the plug with the spindle and exchange this unit.
Step C: Remove the spring-type straight pin (19) and unscrew the spindle (6).
Step D: Replace the old parts and assemble it.
Step E: Drill a hole through the plug shaft and insert a new pin.
Step F: Replace the gasket (14) and assemble the mounting bonnet (3).
Step G: Tighten the nuts (17) evenly, crosswise.
3.4.2 Control valve type 471
Step A: Unscrew the hexagon nuts (17) and dismantle the bellow housing (25) with
plug (5).
Step B: Drive the spindle in the bottom position and remove the spring-type straight
pin (19).
Step C: Unscrew the plug.
Step D: Screw a new plug at the spindle and drill through the shaft. Drive the spring-
type straight pin (19) into the hole.
Step E: Replace the gasket (14).
Step F: Assemble the bellow housing (25) with plug (5) together with the body (1)
and fix it by screwing the hexagon nuts (17) crosswise.The spindle can only
be completely replaced together with the bellow.
3.5 Changing the seat ring
The seat ring is screwed into the valve body. The seat ring can be obtained after re-
moving the bonnet and can then be refinished or replaced as required.
Step A: Clean and lubricate the thread and conical sealing surface before insertion.
OM5520_01#B.1
PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, TYPE DP
Pneumatic actuator, type dp
1 General
The pneumatic linear actuator is designed to be mounted directly on a control valve.
The pneumatic actuator converts positioning command signals into stem thrust forces.
The required back setting force is produced by the spring arrangement inside the ac-
tuator. The rolling-diaphragm produces linear spindle movements over the complete
stroke.
The preferred mounting position is with the actuator and valve spindle in vertical po-
sition.
The mode of operation for the actuator depends on how the springs are inserted when
the actuator is assembled. Even when the actuator is fitted in a piping system, the mode
of operation can be changed.
The pneumatic actuator can be operated as:
• Spring opens valve/air closes valve operation mode

• Air opens valve/spring closes valve operation mode
OM5520_01#B.1
Illustration of a pneumatic actuator
Figure 1 om5520_01_dpactux0053610en.wmf
Table 1 below shows a list of the position numbers in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Table of position numbers in Figure 1

Part Denomination Part Denomination
1 Rolling diaphragm 15 Stroke indicator
2 Diaphragm housing 16 Hexagon nut
3 Diaphragm lid 17 Mounting rod
4 Diaphragm plate 18 Bellow
5 Spindle 19 Collar nut
7 Spring 21 O-ring (spindle)
10 Coupling flange 22 O-ring (bushing)
11 Guide flange 26 Slotted guide bearing
12 Rotation guard 27 Spindle guide
13 Socket screw 30 Hexagon nut
14 Threaded bushing 31 Hexagon nut
Table 1
1.1 Pneumatic connection
The air supply should be dry and at a low service temperature. A heat-guard should be
installed to prevent high service temperature.
OM5520_01#B.1
The pneumatic supply tube must be connected to the diaphragm housing (2) by oper-
ation mode “spring closes" and to the diaphragm lid (3) by operation mode “spring
opens”.
By air failure the stem automatically returns into the original position caused by the
inserted springs.
Warning: The actuator diaphragm may only be pressure loaded on the side op-
posite of the springs. The vent hole in the other connection must remain
open.
1.2 Assembly of the actuator on the valve
The assembling of the actuator on the valve is shown in Figure 2. For both “spring
closes” and “spring opens” operation modes the following assembling procedure
should be followed:
Step A: If the actuator and the valve are separated, press the plug and spindle unit
(5) into the closed position for operation mode “spring closes” or into the
open position for operation mode “spring opens”.
Warning: Make sure that the plug does not turn while pressing on the seat during
assembly.
Step B: Loosen the socket screws (13), remove the rotation guard (12) and the guide
flange (11). The threaded bushing (14) is now free.
Step C: Turn the locking hexagon nut (30) onto the valve spindle. Place the rotation
guard (12) and the guide flange (11) over the valve spindle and then turn the
threaded bushing (14) onto the valve spindle.
Step D: Check the actuator for proper operation mode and connect the pneumatic
supply to the connection piece in the diaphragm housing (2) for operation
mode “spring closes” or in the diaphragm lid (3) for operation mode “spring
opens”.
Step E: Drive the actuator into approximately mid-stroke position over the air supply
and mount it onto the valve (read the value from the pressure gauge - middle
of the spring range).
Step F: Tighten the hexagon nuts (31).
OM5520_01#B.1
Assembly of the actuator on the valve
Figure 2 om5520_01_dpactsx0053600en.wmf
1.3 Adjustment of the starting pressure signal
Step A: Drive the actuator to the required spring-starting point over the air supply.
Step B: Turn the threaded bushing (14) up against the coupling flange (l0) so that
the collar enters into the flange and presses against it. Make sure that the
plug is lying on the valve seat.
Attention: Note that sufficient thread of the valve spindle is inside the threaded
bushing (14). If not, turn the coupling flange (10) downwards from
the actuator spindle and pull the threaded bushing (14) against it.
Step C: For operation mode: “spring closes”:

- Attach the guide flange (11) and the rotation guard (12) with the socket
screws (13) to the coupling flange (10).
- Check that the plug lifts off the seat at the required spring starting point.
Step D: For operation mode: “spring opens”:
- Check that the plug leaves the end position at the required spring starting
point, and finishes the valve stroke at the spring-range end value.
- The plug must then also press on the valve seat.
Step E: After the test operation set the stroke indicators (15) into the end positions.
Step F: Lock the hexagon nuts (16 + 30) at the valve mid-stroke.
Step G: Do not turn the plug on the seat when it is under force.
OM5520_01#B.1
2 Reversal of the actuator action

The actuator action can be reversed even when the valve is installed in a piping system.
The position numbers mentioned in this section refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Step A: Drive the actuator into approximately mid-stroke position with the air sup-
ply.
Step B: Loosen and remove the socket screws (13) from the coupling flange (10)
and drop the rotation guard (12) over the valve spindle.
Step C: Remove the hexagon nuts (31) from the actuator and lift off the valve.
Step D: Reduce the air supply until the chamber is pressure free.
Step E: Loosen and remove the diaphragm lid screws.
Step F: Remove the diaphragm lid (3).
Warning: The actuators DP 32 and DP 33 have two longer screws when fitted
with stronger spring ranges. The actuator DP 34 has four. These
screws should be the last screws to be loosened, and must be loosened
evenly to reduce the high spring tension.
Step G: For reversal from “spring closes” into “spring opens”:

- Remove the springs (7) and the diaphragm plate (4) with the diaphragm
(1) and the spindle (5).
- Loosen and remove the seal lock nut (19) and remove the spindle (5).
Turn over the diaphragm plate (4) with the diaphragm (1) and the dia-
phragm clamping flange, and place it over the spindle (5).
- Tighten with the seal lock nut (19). Make sure that the spindle surface
is not damaged.
- Grease the spindle surface and the 0-ring.
- Place the diaphragm plate (4) with the diaphragm (1) into the diaphragm
lid (3).
- Arrange the springs (7) onto the moulds pressed into the diaphragm plate
(4).
- Place the diaphragm housing with the spindle sealing unit over the spin-
dle, and screw it together. Make sure that the springs stay properly ar-
ranged.
- Turn the hexagon nut (16) and the coupling flange (10) onto the spindle
(5).
- Mount the actuator as described previously, and connect the air supply
tube to the diaphragm lid (3).
OM5520_01#B.1
Step H: For reversal from “spring opens” into “spring closes”:

- Remove the diaphragm (1) and the diaphragm plate (4) with the spindle
(5) and the springs (7).
- Loosen and remove the seal lock nut (19) from the spindle (5). Turn over
the diaphragm plate (4) with the diaphragm (1) and the diaphragm
clamping flange, and place it on the spindle (5).
- Tighten with the seal lock nut (19). Make sure that the spindle surface
is not damaged.
- Grease the spindle surface and the 0-ring.
- Stick the diaphragm plate (4) with the diaphragm (1) and the spindle (5)
into the diaphragm housing (2).
- Arrange the springs (7) onto the moulds pressed into the diaphragm plate
(4).Place the diaphragm lid (3) on the top, and screw it together. Make
sure that the springs (7) stay properly arranged.
- Turn the hexagon nut (16) and the coupling flange (10) onto the spindle
(5).
- Mount the actuator as described previously, and connect the air supply
tube to the diaphragm housing (2).
3 Manual operation device

Some actuators are fitted with a manual operation device. The device is connected to
the actuator by means of a new diaphragm lid, a spindle extension with a USIT-ring
and a spindle sealing unit.
The manual operation device is equipped with stroke indicators. The stroke indicators
of both the actuator and the manual operation device must be in the same end positions
when the actuator is pressure free.
The manual operation device must be set into neutral position when the actuator is
running automatically.
The locking device of the manual operation device must be unlocked before operating.
The locking device prevents an unwanted disarrangement of the setting during oper-
ation, e.g. due to vibration, etc.
4 Maintenance
The pneumatic actuator is maintenance free. To maintain a disturbance free operation,
the air should be supplied by an air-supply station.
The diaphragm, spindle sealing unit and springs are wear parts and should be replaced
when necessary.
OM5520_01#B.1
4.1 Exchange of spindle sealing
When the spindle sealing is changed, the slotted PTFE-guide bearing and the 0-ring
should be replaced. The spindle surface must be clean and undamaged. Before the
actuator is assembled, the spindle unit and the spindle must be greased.
OM5510_05#B.1
POSITIONER, SIPART PS2 6DR5000
Positioner, SIPART PS2 6DR5000
1 General
The following instruction is a general description of SIPART positioners and covers
the complete range in the PS2 6DR5000 series.
The electronic pneumatic positioner is used as the final control element of a pneumatic
linear actuator or a part-turn actuator (rotary movements). The positioner converts a
current output signal (4 to 20 mA) from a process controller or control system to a set
point value and into a corresponding movement. The positioner changes the pressure
in a pneumatic actuator chamber or cylinder until the position corresponds to the set
point value.
The positioner can be set up either as a single-action positioner or a double-action

positioner. The single-action positioner is mainly used together with a control valve.
The opposite movement for the control valve is supplied by means of springs. The
double-action positioner is mainly used to control an air damper via a pneumatic cyl-
inder (actuator). All movements of the pneumatic cylinder are supplied by the posi-
tioner. An illustration of the function diagram for the positioner is shown in Figure 1.
The function diagram is shown with option modules.
1.1 Mode of operation
Comparison of the set point and the actual value takes place electronically in a micro
controller. If the micro controller detects a deviation, it uses a 5-way switch procedure
to control the piezoelectric valves, which in turn regulate the flow of air into the ac-
tuating chambers. When connected in a two-wire system, the SIPART PS2 draws its
power exclusively from the 4 to 20 mA set point signal.
The piezoelectric valve converts the command into a pneumatic positional increment.
The positioner outputs a continuous signal in the area where there is a large control
deviation (high-speed zone). In areas of moderate control deviation (slow-speed zone)
it outputs a sequence of pulses. No positioning signals are output in the case of a small
control deviation (adaptive or variable dead zone).
Commissioning (initialisation) is carried out automatically to a large extend. During

initialisation, the micro controller automatically determines the zero, full-scale value,
direction of action, and positioning speed of the actuator. It uses these to determine the
minimum pulse time and dead zone, thus optimising the control.
The positioner can also be operated manually by the pushbuttons and the LCD of the
SIPART PS2.
OM5510_05#B.1
The installation of the positioner must be carried out in the following order:
• Mechanic connection
• Electric connection
• Pneumatic connection
• Commissioning
Illustration of a function diagram
Figure 1 om5510_05_sips2_x0053470en.wmf
2 Mechanic connection of the positioner

Normally the positioner is pre-mounted on the actuator or cylinder. If not, follow the
installation guide lines below.
2.1 Mechanic connection to an actuator
Figure 2 shows the mechanic connection of the positioner to an actuator for a control
valve.
OM5510_05#B.1
Step A: Mount clamping assembly (3) with hexagon socket cap screws (17) and lock
washers (16) on the actuator spindle.
Step B: Insert the pick-up bracket (2) into the recesses of the clamping assembly.
Set the necessary length and tighten the screws so that the pick-up bracket
can still be shifted.
Step C: Push the roll (5), spring (13), and guide washer (22) onto the pin (4).
Step D: Insert the pin in the lever (6) and assemble with nut (18), spring washer (14),
and U-washer (12).
Step E: The value of the stroke range specified on the actuator should be set or if
this does not exist as a scaling value, the next greatest scaling value should
be set. The centre of the pin must be in line with the scaling value. The same
value can be set later under parameter “3.YWAY” in commissioning to dis-
play the way in [mm] after initialisation.
Step F: Assemble the hexagon socket cap screw (17), spring washer (16), washer
(12), and square nut (19) on the lever.
Step G: Push the pre-mounted lever onto the positioner axis up to the stop and fix
with the hexagon socket cap screw (17).
Step H: Fit the mounting bracket (1) with two hexagon head screws (9), lock washer
(10), and flat washer (11) on the rear of the positioner.
Step I: Selection of the row of holes depends on the width of the actuator yoke. The
roll (5) should engage in the pick-up bracket (2) as close as possible to the
spindle but may not touch the clamping assembly.
Step J: Hold the positioner with the mounting bracket on the actuator so that the pin
(4) is guided within the pick-up bracket (2).
Step K: Tighten the pick-up bracket.
Step L: Position the mounting parts according to the type of actuator.
- Actuator with ledge: hexagon head screw (8), flat washer (11), and lock
washer (10).
- Actuator with plane surface: four hexagon head screws (8), flat washer
(11), and lock washer (10).
- Actuator with columns: two U-bolts (7), four hexagon nuts (21) with
flat washer (11), and lock washer (10).
Step M: Secure the positioner onto the yoke using the previously positioned mount-
ing parts.
Note: Set the height of the positioner so that the horizontal lever position is
reached as close to the stroke centre as possible. The lever scale can be used
as orientation. It must be guaranteed that the horizontal lever position is
passed through within the stroke range.
OM5510_05#B.1
Mechanic connection of the positioner (linear actuator)
2.2 Mechanic connection to a pneumatic cylinder
The positioner is connected to a pneumatic cylinder by means of fixing bracket, lever

arm with Allen screw, extension arm, and roller.
OM5510_05#B.1
The pneumatic piston is connected to a guide rail with an oblique angle via a linkage.
The guide rail moves together with the piston, and the roller/lever connection senses
the position of the piston. By operating both sides of the pneumatic cylinder, the set
point is reached. A spring inserted between the fixing bracket and the lever arm secures
that the roller is pressed down against the guide rail.
2.3 Mechanic connection to a rotary actuator
Figure 3 shows the mechanic connection of the positioner to a rotary actuator.
Step A: Attach the mounting console (9, actuator specific) onto the rear of the po-
sitioner and secure using the hexagon head screws (14) and lock washers
(15).
Step B: Adhere pointer (4.2) onto the mounting console in the centre of the centring
hole.
Step C: Push coupling wheel (2) onto the positioner axis, pull back by about 1 mm
and tighten the hexagon socket head screw (18) with the Allen key provided.
Step D: Place the carrier (3) onto the end of the actuator and secure using Fillister
head screw (16) and washer (17).
Step E: Carefully place the positioner with mounting console onto the actuator such
that the pin of the coupling wheel engages in the driver.
Step F: Align the positioner/mounting console assembly in the centre of the actuator
and screw tight (screws are not included in the delivery, they are part of the
actuator mounting console).
Step G: Follow the start-up sequence as described later. Drive the actuator to the end
position and adhere the scale (4.1) onto the coupling wheel (2) according to
the direction of rotation and rotaryactuator. The scale is self-adhesive.
OM5510_05#B.1
Mechanic connection of the positioner (rotary actuator)
OM5510_05#B.1
3 Electric connection of the positioner

When the positioner is connected in a two-wire system, the positioner draws its power
exclusively from the 4 to 20 mA set point signal. Figure 4 indicates the input circuits
for the positioner.
View of the controls and connections
4 Pneumatic connection
Ensure that the air quality is suitable. Grease-free instrumental air with a solid content
<30 µm and a pressure dew point 20 K below the lowest ambient temperature must be
supplied.
Warning: For reasons of safety, pneumatic power may only be supplied after
assembly when the positioner is switched to operating level “P man-
ual” operation with electrical signal applied.
4.1 Selection of P manual mode
OM5510_05#B.1
4.1.1 Selection of P manual mode

Before pneumatic power is connected, the positioner must be in P manual mode. The
display must show “NOINIT” in the bottom line.
4.1.2 Pneumatic connections

Figure 4 shows a view of the positioner controls and connections.
Step A: If required, connect a manometer block for supply air and actuating pressure.
Step B: The silencer in the exhaust output can be removed if necessary.
Step C: Connect actuating pressure Y1 and/or Y2 (Y2*) is only used with double-
acting actuators) according to the desired safety position.
Step D: Connect the supply air (1). The pressure should be between 1.4 to 7 bar.
Note: In order for spring-loaded pneumatic actuators to be able to reliably ex-

ploit the maximum possible actuating path, the supply pressure must be
sufficiently greater than the maximum required final pressure of the ac-
tuator.
4.1.3 Safety positionwhen the electric power supply fails

For a single-action actuator is Y1 deaerated. For a double-action actuator is Y1 equal
to the supply air pressure and Y2 is deaerated.
4.1.4 Restrictors
To increase the positioning times for fast actuators when necessary, the air flow can
be reduced with the restrictors Y1 and Y2 (only for double-action valves). Turning the
restrictors in the clockwise direction reduces the air flow until it is shut off. To set the
restrictors it is recommended to first close them and then open them again slowly (see
initialisation process RUN 3).
4.1.5 Purging air switchover

The purging air changeover switch located above the pneumatic terminal block on the
valve manifold can be accessed when the housing is open. When the switch is in po-
sition “IN” the interior of the housing is purged with very small quantities of clean and
dry instrument air. In position “OUT” the purging air is led directly out of the instru-
ment.
5 Commissioning
Commissioning (initialisation) is carried out automatically to a large extend. During
initialisation, the micro controller automatically determines the zero value, full-scale
value, direction of action and positioning speed of the actuator. It uses these to deter-
mine the minimum pulse time and dead zone, hereby optimising the control.
The positioner can also be operated manually by the pushbuttons and the LCD of the
SIPART PS2.
OM5510_05#B.1
The commissioning of the positioner can be divided into the following steps:
• Preparation for initialisation

• Start the automatic initialisation procedure
• Set additional parameters if required
• Select automatic mode
Figure 5 shows the possible operation modes for the positioner and gives an overview
of how to change between them. The levels are P-manual mode, configuration and
initialisation, manual mode, automatic mode, and diagnostic display. From these
modes it is possible to select operation mode, set operation parameters, restore to fac-
tory setting, run an automatic initialisation, etc.
Operation levels
5.1 Preparation for initialisation
Step A: Check and set the gear transmission switch to the correct position. Fig-
ure 4(position 8) indicates the location of the switch. For linear actuators the
gear transmission switch is set according to the stroke range as described in
Table 2 for the parameter “3.YWAY”. For part-turn actuators 90° must be
selected.
OM5510_05#B.1
Step B: Check that the pneumatic supply power (inlet air) is present. The operating
pressure should be at least one bar greater than is necessary for closing/
opening the valve during initialisation.
Step C: Without initialisation the positioner is in “P manual mode” and “NOINIT”
flashes in the display. This level can also be reached by using
“55.PRST”function (see Table 2).
Step D: Check the free running of the mechanics in the whole actuating range by
moving the actuator with the keys “↑” and “↓” and driving to the respective
end position.
Step E: With linear actuators drive the actuator to horizontal lever position. The
display must indicate 48% to 52%. If necessary, correct the value by ad-
justing the sliding clutch. After the check is completed, the actuator must be
approximately half way along its stroke. This is due to establishment of the
action direction during automatic initialisation.
5.2 Automatic initialisation
Figure 6 shows the configuration modeincluding the operation in this mode and Ta-
ble 2 shows the parameter/configuration list. Figure 7 shows the initialisation process
of the positioner. The initialisation process is stored in the microprocessor. This means
that an additional initialisation only is necessary if any parts of the unit have been
changed.
Note: The numerical values used in Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7 are examples.
Step A: Call the configuration mode by pressing the hand symbol key for longer than
5 seconds.
Step B: Set the actuator type, linear or part-turn, in the menuitem line “1.YFCT”.
Step C: Switch to the second parameter by pressing the hand symbol key briefly.
Step D: Set the rated angle of rotation for feedback in the menu item line “2.YAGL”.
It is vital that this value corresponds to the setting of the gear transmission
ratio selector (Figure 4, position 8), 33° or 90°.
Step E: Switch to the next parameter by pressing the hand symbol key briefly.
Step F: This parameter (“3.YWAY”) is only set for linear actuators and if the total
stroke in mm should be displayed at the end of the initialisation phase. To
do this, select the same value in the display to which the carrier pin to the
scale on the lever is set to.
Step G: Switch to the following parameter by pressing the hand symbol key briefly.
Step H: Start the initialisation (“4.INITA”) by pressing the “↑” key for longer than
5 seconds.
Step I: During the initialisation phase “RUN1” to “RUN5” appear one after another
in the bottom of the display. Please note that the initialisation process may
last up to 15 minutes depending on the actuator.
Note: The ongoing initialisation can be aborted at any time by pressing the hand
symbol key. The previous settings are retained. All the parameters are reset
to the factory setting only after performing a preset “55.PRST”.
Step J: If problems occur, carry out the measures as described in the table “Possible
messages” shown in Figure 7.
OM5510_05#B.1
Step K: The initialisation is completed when “FINSH” appears in the bottom of the
display.
Step L: When pressing the hand symbol key briefly the menu item line “4.INITA”
is displayed.
Step M: To exit the configuration operating mode, press the hand symbol key for
longer than 5 seconds. The software version is displayed after about 5 sec-
onds. The instrument is in manual operationafter releasing the key.
Step N: The positioner can be changed to automatic mode by pressing the “↓”key
once as indicated in Figure 5.
Step O: The automatic mode is the normal mode. In this mode the positioner com-
pares the set point current with the current position and moves the actuator
until the control deviation reaches the dead zone.
Operation in the configuration mode
OM5510_05#B.1
Initialisation process
Automatic initi al start-up (starting with factory setting) Possible messages
Step Me aning Display Me aning Me asures
1.) O Acknowled ge message

Part-t urn turn 90 using the hand symbol key
actuator 1 YF CT 2 YAGL P 32.4 Actuator does
RU N 1 not move Check restr ictor (6) and open
O
Linear WAY 33 Strt if necessar y
actuator 1 YF CT 2 YAGL 3 YWAY P 32.4 Drive actuator to working range
ERR OR using the up and down keys
Strt Press the up key for > 5 sec. Restart initi alisation
2.)
4 INITA Remaining steps are carried out automatically
Change gea ring (7)
P 32.4 Continue us ing up key

3.) Direction of action is determined
R UN 1
P 88.4 Down tolerance Or adjust sliding clutch up
band violated to display
Checking of travel and adjustment of
d u IU P 6.4
4.) P 92.4 d 0 IU
R UN 2 zero and s troke (from stop to stop)
Determina tion and display of positioning time Then only

5.) P 82.4 down (dxx .x), up (uxx.x). Stop with the down key Continue us ing the down key
R UN 3
Pressing t he up key initiates leakage measurement Linear actuator: set pick-up
Once the slipp ing lever into ho rizontal position
S Et clutch has bee n using the up and down keys
6.) P 32.4 Determina tion of minimum incre ment length MID DL
R UN 4 adjusted
Continue us ing hand symbol key
7.)
P 52.4 Optimisati on of transient respon se Acknowled ge message
R UN 5 using the hand symbol key
P 98.3 Up tolerance b and
Initialisation terminated success fully UP > violated Set the nex t highest travel
value on the lever
8.) 32.4 (travel in m m for linear actuators )
F INSH (angle of r otation for part-turn ac tuators)
Restart initi alisation
Continue u sing hand symbol ke y
Additionally possible with rotary
actuators:
Adjust using up and down keys
up to displa y:
P 92.8
90_9 5
Continue u sing hand symbol key
Acknowledge message
using the ha nd symbol key
P 19.8 Up/down span
Set the nex t lowest travel
U-d < violated
value on the lever
Restart initi alisation
Adjust positioning time using

U 1.3 Actuator does restrictor(s)
NO ZZL not move.
Positioning Continue us ing the
time is possibl e up or down key
d 1.8 to adjust
NO ZZL
5.3 Parameters
Table 2 shows the parameter list for the positioner. The parameter name is written in
plain text in the “menu line” column. The function of the parameter is described briefly
in the “Function column”. In addition, the possible parameter values, the physical unit
and the factory setting of the parameters are shown.
After the initialisation process, the positioner can be configured to meet the require-
ments of a specified task. The factory settings correspond to the requirements for a
typical application. This means that normally only a few parameters will need to be
changed.
The positioner can be installed and configured to fit linear and part-turn actuators with
reverse action. E.g. linear actuators with the set point in the falling direction or part-
turn actuators for counter clockwise operation direction. In this case the parameters
“7.SDIR” and 38.”YDIR” should be set to “FALL”.
OM5510_05#B.1
Parameter list
Factory set- Customer
Menu line Function Parameter values Unit
ting setting
turn (part-turn actua-
tor)
WAY (linear actuator)
LWAY (linear actuator
without sine correc-
1.YFCT Type of actuator WAY
tion)
ncSt (part-turn actuator
with NCS)
-ncSt (part-turn actua-
tor with NCS, inverted)
Rated angle of rotation for feedback 90
2.YAGL1) Degrees 33
(must correspond to gear ratio) 33
OFF
Stroke range (optional setting)
5 , 10 , 15 , 20
When used, the value must correspond
(short lever 33)
with the set of the leverage ratio on the ac-
25 , 30 , 35
3.YWAY2) tuator mm OFF
(short lever 90)
Driver pin must be set to the value of the
40 , 50 , 60 , 70 ,
actuator travel or, if this value is not
90 , 110 , 130
scaled, to the next lager scale value
(long lever 90)
4.INITA Initialisation (automatically) noini / no / ###.# / Strt no
5.INITM Initialisation (manually) noini / ###.# / Strt no
0 to 20 mA 0 MA
6.SCUR Current range of set point 4 MA
4 to 20 mA 4 MA
rising riSE
7.SDIR Set point direction riSE
falling FALL
8.SPRA Set point for start of split range 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0
9.SPRE Set point for end of split range 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0
Auto
10.TSUP Set point ramp up s 0
0 to 400
11.TSDO Set point ramp down 0 to 400 s 0
Set point function Lin
Linear 1–25 , 1–33 , 1–50
12.SFCT Equal-percentage 1:25, 1:33, 1:50 n1–25 , n1–33 , n1–50 Lin
Inverse equal-percentage 1:25, 1:33, 1:50 FrEE
Freely adjustable
13.SL03) Set point turning point at 0% 0.0
14.SL1 5% 5.0
to to 0.0 to 100.0 % to
32.SL19 95% 95.0
33.SL20 100% 100.0
Auto
34.DEBA Dead zone of controller % Auto
0.1 to 10.0
35.YA Start of manipulated variable limiting 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0
36.YE End of manipulated variable limiting 0.0 to 100.0 % 100.0
Standardisation of To mech. travel MPOS
37.YNRM MPOS
manipulated variable To flow FLOW
38.YDIR Direction of manipulated Rising riSE riSE
OM5510_05#B.1
Parameter list
variable for display Falling FALL
Without no
Tight closing with Top only uP
39.YCLS no
manipulated variable Bottom only do
Top and bottom uPdo
Table 1
OM5510_05#B.1
Parameter list continued

Factory set- Customer
Menu line Function Parameter values Unit
ting setting
40.YCDO Value for tight closing, bottom 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.5
41.YCUP Value for tight closing, top 0.0 to 100.0 % 99.5
Function of BI 1:
None OFF
Only message (NO/NC contact) on / -on
Block configuring (NO contact) bLoc1
42.BIN14) Block configuring and manual (NO con- bLoc2 OFF
tact) uP / -uP
Drive valve to pos. up (NO/NC contact) doWn / -doWn
Drive valve to pos. down (NO/NC contact) StoP / - StoP
Block movement (NO/NC contact)
Function of BI 2:
OFF
None
on / -on
Only message (NO/NC contact)
43.BIN24) uP / -uP OFF
Drive valve to pos. up (NO/NC contact)
doWn / -doWn
Drive valve to pos. down (NO/NC contact)
StoP / -StoP
Block movement (NO/NC contact)
Without oFF
A1=min. A2=max. N , NA
44.AFCT5) Alarm function OFF
A1=min. A2=min. N,N
A1=max. A2=max. NA , NA
45.A1 Response threshold of alarm 1 0.0 to 100.0 % 10.0
46.A2 Response threshold of alarm 2 0.0 to 100.0 % 90.0
Function of alarm output
On fault └┐
47.└┐FCT
6)
Fault + not automatic └┐nA └┐
Fault + not automatic + BI └┐nAb
(“+” means logical OR operation)
Monitoring time for fault message Auto
48.└┐TIM s Auto
“control deviation” 0 to 100
Response threshold for fault message Auto
49.└┐LIM % Auto
“control deviation” 0.0 to 100.0
50.└┐STR OFF
Limit for stroke integral OFF
K 1 to 1.00E9
51.└┐DCH OFF
Limit for direction change OFF
G 1 to 1.00E9
52.└┐ZER OFF
Limit for end stop monitoring, bottom % OFF
O 0.0 to 100.0
53.└┐OPE OFF
Limit for end stop monitoring, top % OFF
N 0.0 to 100.0
54.└┐DE- OFF
Limit for dead zone monitoring % OFF
BA 0.0 to 100.0
Preset (factory setting)
“no” nothing activated
“Strt” start of factory setting after pressing no
55.PRST key for 5 sec. Strt
“oCAY” display following successful fac- oCAY
tory setting
CAUTION: preset results in “NO INIT”
OM5510_05#B.1
Parameter list continued

1) If turn is selected it is not possible to set 33.
2) Parameter does not appear if 1.YFCT = turn has been selected.
3) Turning points only appear with selection 12.SFCT = FrEE.
4) Alternatively “no” if initialisation has not yet been carried out.
5) NC contact means; action with opened switch or low level. NO contact means; action with closed switch or high level.
6)Normal means: high level without fault. Inverted means: low level without fault.
Table 2
6 Diagnosis
In the diagnostic mode the current operating data (such as number of strokes, number
of changes in direction, number of fault messages, etc.) can be displayed.From the
automatic or manual modes the diagnostic mode can be reached by simultaneously
pressing all three keys for at least 2 seconds.
Table 3 shows an overview of the displayable values. The diagnostic display has a
similar structure as the parameter menu displays. The respective next diagnostic value
can be selected with the hand symbol key. Certain values can be set to zero by pressing
the “↑” key for at least 5 seconds. These are menu item line “1, 2, 3, and 4”. Some
diagnostic values may be greater than 99999. In this case the display switches to ex-
ponential display.
Diagnostic list
No.: Abbreviation Meaning Displayable Unit
value
1 STRKS Number of strokes 0 to 4.29E9 -
2 CHDIR Changes of direction 0 to 4.29E9 -
3 └┐CNT Fault counter 0 to 4.29E9 -
4 A1CNT Alarm counter 1 0 to 4.29E9 -
5 A2CNT Alarm counter 2 0 to 4.29E9
6 HOURS Operating hours 0 to 4.29E9 Hours
7 WAY Determined actuating path 0 to 130 mm or °
8 TUP Travel time up 0 to 1000 s
9 TDOWN Travel time down 0 to 1000 s
10 LEAK Leakage 0.0 to 100.0 %
11 P0 Potentiometer value below stop (0%) 0.0 to 100.0 %
12 P100 Potentiometer value bottom stop (100%) 0.0 to 100.0 %
13 IMPUP Impulse length up 2 to 100 ms
14 IMPDN Impulse length down 2 to 100 ms
15 DBOP Dead zone up 0.1 to 100.0 %
16 DBDN Dead zone down 0.1 to 100.0 %
17 SSUP Short step zone up 0.1 to 100.0 %
18 SSDN Short step zone down 0.1 to 100.0 %
19 TEMP Current temperature -45 to 85 °C
20 TMIN Minimum temperature -45 to 85 °C
OM5510_05#B.1
Diagnostic list
21 TMAX Maximum temperature -45 to 85 °C
22 T1 Number of operating hours in Temperature range 1 0 to 4.29E9 Hours
31 VENT1 Number of cycles pre-control valve 1 0 to 4.29E9 -
32 VENT2 Number of cycles pre-control valve 2 0 to 4.29E9 -
Store current values as “last maintenance”
33 STORE - -
Press the up key for at least 5 seconds (store)
Table 3
7 Service and maintenance

The positioner is largely maintenance-free. The positioner is fitted with filters in the
pneumatic connection as protection against coarse particles of dirt. If the pneumatic
energy supply contains particles of dirt, the filters may be clog and impair the function
of the positioner. In this case the filters can be cleaned as follows:
Step A:
Switch off the pneumatic power supply and remove the pipes.
Step B:
Unscrew the cover.
Step C:
Remove the three screws from the pneumatic connector strip.
Step D:
Remove the filters and O-rings behind the connector strip.
Step E:
Clean the filters (e.g. with compressed air).
Step F:
After cleaning first insert the filters in the recesses in the housing and then
place the O-rings on the filters.
Step G: Align the pneumatic connector strip on the two lugs and screw tight with
the three self-tapping screws.
Note: Make sure that the same thread is used. To do this, turn the screws anti-
clockwise until they snap into the thread audibly. Only then should the
screws be tightened.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Descriptions
.
Modulating pressure atomizing burner......................... SD5560_04................ 20-2
Gas/air separator and filter unit.................................... SD9290_08................ 20-4
SD5560_04#B.1
MODULATING PRESSURE ATOMIZING BURNER
Modulating pressure atomizing burner
1 Burner description
The burner is a pressure atomizing burner with one nozzle for modulating operation.
It is capable of burning both diesel oil (DO) and heavy fuel oil (HFO).
The design of the burner makes installation, adjustment and servicing easy. The burner
housing is mounted on the boiler front with side hinges, enabling the burner to be swung
out. In this case a switch immediately stops the burner.
The electric fan motor is fitted on the side of the housing and is directly connected to
the fan wheel. Via coupling the same motor is connected to the oil pump which is a
gear-wheel pump providing an operating pressure up to 30 bar.
Illustration of a modulating pressure atomizing burner

Flame tube incl. diffuser,
ignition electrodes and nozzle
Safety valves Solenoid valves

Oil pump
Sight glass
Fan house
incl. motor
Servomotor for
oil / air regulation
Oil preheater
Air damper intake
Figure 1 sd5560_04_wh_burx0063350en.wmf
The oil pipes leading the oil from the gas/air separator and the filter to and from the
burner fuel oil pump are made of flexible hoses.
SD5560_04#B.1
MODULATING PRESSURE ATOMIZING BURNER
An oil regulator regulates the oil flow through the nozzle by increasing or decreasing
the flow resistance. This causes that more or less oil is pressed through the nozzle as
the supply pressure from the oil pump is constant. The pressure in the return line is
checked by a pressure switch. If the pressure is too high, the burner shuts down because
it has reached the minimum load for operation.
To ignite the oil, two ignition electrodes are mounted just above the nozzle. In case of
flame failure in the starting and running mode, a photo cell immediately stops the
burner.
Electric signals corresponding to the pressure gauge board signals operate a servo
motor which drives a compound mechanism in a continuous movement from partial
load to full load, regulating the air quantity in proportion to the oil quantity fired. The
cam has an adjustable spring band on the side which is moved by means of adjustable
socket screws.
The setting of the spring band is determined of various load positions by flue gas
measurements.
A diffuser and a combustion head are placed in front of the nozzle with the purpose of
mixing air and oil mist to a suitable mixture.
The burner is controlled by a control unit which controls all start/stop sequences, and
in the event of fault conditions the oil supply is always interrupted immediately.
The burner unit is equipped with a fuel heating system consisting of an oil pre-heater
and heating cartridges. One of the heating cartridges is placed in the nozzle head in
order to keep a sufficiently high temperature close to the nozzle. The nozzle head is of
the re-circulating type which means that fuel oil is circulated in the nozzle head from
the time where the burner is released for start until it begins operation.
SD9290_08#B.1
GAS/AIR SEPARATOR AND FILTER UNIT
Gas/air separator and filter unit
1 Description
The gas/air separator and filter unit is mounted on the boiler foundation next to the
burner. The unit is placed in the fuel oil ring line to remove gas or air from the oil and
to avoid abrasive materials to enter the oil pump and burner nozzle(s). A sketch of the
unit is shown in Figure 1.
Sketch of the gas/air separator and filter unit

5 3 4 2
Burner return
Burner inlet
1
Air escape
AUTO STAND-BY
Ring line return
LOW OIL PRESS.
REMOTE
Ring line inlet
14 12
10
8
01 Filter basket 04 Thermometer 12 Pressure transmitter
02 Pressure regulating valve 05 Pressure gauge 14 Drain valve
03 Ball valve including 08 Heating cartridge
micro switch 10 Needle valve
Figure 1 sd9290_08_gasairx0064640en.wmf
The pressure regulating valve (2) is used when adjusting the pressure set point of the
fuel oil system. The pressure transmitter (12) is for start of the stand-by fuel oil supply
pump and safety shut down in case of low oil pressure.
The quick closing valve (3) is equipped with an interlock micro switch used for stop-
ping the burner, thereby preventing the burner fuel oil pump from sucking oil when
the valve is closed, which will cause cavitation damages in the burner oil pump. The
valve also serves as an emergency quick closing valve.
The temperature and pressure of the fuel oil ring line can be read on the unit via the
mounted instruments. Furthermore, the pressure transmitter (12) can be used for remote
indication of the fuel oil pressure.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents

.
Modulating oil burner................................................ OM5560_03............... 21-2
Handling fuel oil........................................................ OM9280_02............... 21-4
Burner fuel oil pump.................................................. OM5560_11............... 21-6
Electric oil pre-heater................................................. OM5560_15............... 21-10
Heating cartridges...................................................... OM5560_18............... 21-12
Oil/air regulation....................................................... OM5560_20............... 21-13
Ignition electrodes..................................................... OM5560_23............... 21-15
Combustion head....................................................... OM5560_25............... 21-16
Servomotor............................................................... OM5560_26............... 21-18
Oil/air regulation....................................................... OM5560_27............... 21-21
Photo cell................................................................. OM8630_01............... 21-22
Burner housing.......................................................... OM5560_28............... 21-23
Nozzle head.............................................................. OM5560_31............... 21-25
Nozzle selection........................................................ OM5560_35............... 21-27
Nozzles.................................................................... OM5560_37............... 21-29
Pre-service................................................................ OM5560_51............... 21-30
Commissioning......................................................... OM5560_52............... 21-33
Operating instructions................................................ OM5560_53............... 21-45
Start of the burner...................................................... OM5560_56............... 21-49
Start on diesel oil....................................................... OM5560_62............... 21-52
Change to heavy fuel oil............................................. OM5560_65............... 21-54
Viscosity - temperature chart....................................... OM9280_01............... 21-56
Oil system................................................................ OM5560_41............... 21-58
Manual operation....................................................... OM5560_74............... 21-59
Emergency operation................................................. OM5560_75............... 21-61
Faults and rectifying faults.......................................... OM5560_91............... 21-63
OM5560_03#E.1
MODULATING OIL BURNER
Modulating oil burner
1 General
The modulating oil burner is a pressure atomizing burner capable of burning marine
gas oil MGO, marine diesel oil MDO and heavy fuel oil HFO.
MGO and MDO with properties according to ISO 8217:2010 type DMA, DMZ and
DMB. HFO with properties according to ISO 8217:2010 type RMA 10, RMB 30, RMD
80, RME/RMG 180, RMG/RMK 380, 500, 700.
For burners only operating with MGO no fuel oil heaters are fitted and limited fuel oil
viscosity range to burner is to be observed.
As the burner is a very vital component of the boiler plant, the operating staff should
be thoroughly instructed with regard to the operation of the equipment and the safety
regulations. This is due to the fact that burner problems are often caused by incorrect
burner operation. With frequently occurring burner faults, the nearest service centre
should be consulted.
To ensure a safe and reliable function of the burner it must be inspected at least once
a year by a representative of the supplier or by another competent and qualified person.
1.1 Safety regulations
Caution: To ensure safe burner operation, the burner has to be installed and
commissioned by qualified personnel, and all guidelines in these in-
structions have to be followed.
All safety equipment such as flame sensor equipment and correcting elements may
only be replaced by qualified personnel, which can be ordered by contacting Alfa
Laval.
Warning: Repair of any of the safety components is NOT permitted. Failure to

comply may result in serious injury or death and may cause consid-
erable damages to the boiler plant.
1.2 Qualified personnel
Qualified personnel according to these operating instructions are persons, who are
confident in installing, regulating and commissioning the burner, and who have qual-
ifications to carry out this work i.e.:
OM5560_03#E.1
MODULATING OIL BURNER
• Persons who are trained to operate electric circuits and units according to the safety
standards.
• Persons who are qualified in the use of dangerous fuel according to the relevant
laws and regulations.
OM9280_02#F.1
HANDLING FUEL OIL
Handling fuel oil
1 Precautions to be taken with fuel oil

Marine gas oil MGO and marine diesel oil MDO are distillates of crude oil. Heavy fuel
HFO is the residual of the crude oil after the removal of distillates.
Liquid oil is very difficult to ignite in bulk and not capable of spontaneous combustion.
However both the distillates and the residuals are capable of forming vapours which
are explosive when mixed with air. As the vapours can be heavier that air, it tends to
accumulate in low levels such as bilges and bottoms of tanks where it may remain
undiscovered until ignited by a naked light or spark. It is always present in a partly
filled oil tank or in a tank which has contained fuel oil and is given off through the
vents from tanks in the process of being filled.
If allowed to continue, a leak in any part of the oil burning system may result in an
accumulation of this explosive vapour.
Ignition of the vapour can be caused by an open light, electric spark, smoking, spark
caused by striking metal, heat from the filament of a broken electric lamp, sparks from
funnel or can be communicated from galley or fires under boilers.
Note: An oil fire cannot be extinguished by water, but may be extinguished by

sand, steam or chemical fire extinguishers.
An intelligent appreciation of the properties of fuel oil as described above is a better

prevention of accident than adherence to any set of rules that may be pre-described.
OM9280_02#F.1
HANDLING FUEL OIL
However, the following detailed precautions should be rigidly enforced:
• When oil is being received, no naked light or electric apparatus liable to spark
should be permitted within 20 meters of the oil hose, tank or compartment, con-
taining the tank or the vent from the tank, except when special arrangements are
carried out.
• While receiving fuel oil, the storage tank must be closely watched for leaks, and
care must be taken that all outlets from the tank, except the vents, are closed.
• No naked lights or electric apparatus liable to spark should be permitted at any
time in a compartment containing a fuel oil tank. Electric lamps used in such com-
partments should have a wire protector around the bulb or be of a type that will
ensure the breaking of a circuit through the lamp in the event of the lamp being
broken.
• No one should be allowed to enter a fuel oil tank until it has been gas-freed, and
any person then entering the tank must have a properly tended life-line around his
body in order to be hauled out if overcome by gas.
• Electric fuses and switches, unless the enclosed type, should not be permitted in
compartments containing fuel oil pumps or piping.
• Care must be taken that the wire-gauze protectors in vent pipes from fuel oil tanks
are intact at all times.
• Dampers, where fitted in the uptakes of the boilers, must be kept fully open while
burning oil. Otherwise, this may result in dangerous accumulation of gas in the
furnace with a resultant blowing out into the boiler or engine room.
• The valves on glass gauges in fuel oil storage or service tanks should be kept
habitually shut. When a reading of the gauge is desired, the valves may be opened,
but must be shut again at once.
• In each boiler or engine room fitted for oil burning there should be fire extin-
guishing apparatus in accordance with the requirements/rules from the authorities
and classification societies in question such as, e.g.: Fire hose, permanently cou-
pled and of sufficient length to reach all parts of the boiler or engine room, and
either:
- (a) a box containing at least 85 litres (2 cubic ft) of dry sand with a large scoop
- (b) a chemical fire extinguisher of the tank type
• When the fuel oil system has not been in use for a long period, or after joints in
the piping have been re-made, the system should be tested “cold” under a pressure
at least equal to the working pressure before fires are ignited. During the test a
careful inspection for leaks should be carried out.
• Fuel oil should not be habitually heated above 60°C for marine gas oil / diesel oil
and 120°C for heavy oils and never above its flash point in any part of the system
except in the burners.
• Care must be taken to prevent accumulation of oil or vapour in any place outside
the system and in ships particularly in bilges under the furnace. This can be ac-
complished by rigid cleanliness.
OM5560_11#B.1
BURNER FUEL OIL PUMP
Burner fuel oil pump
1 Fuel oil pump

The fuel oil pump is a gear-wheel pump which provides an operating pressure up to
30 bar. The fuel oil pump is equipped with a built-in pressure regulator with a fast
working valve to keep a constant pressure. In order to protect the pump against im-
purities in the oil a filter is built-in. An illustration of the burner fuel oil pump is shown
in Figure 1.
Attention: Please note that the pump is not of the self-priming type. During com-
missioning the fuel oil pump and oil lines must be filled with oil and
properly vented before the burner motor is started. Failure to comply
may cause cavitation damage to the fuel oil pump.
Illustration of the burner fuel oil pump
1 Suction line connection

2 Oil to nozzle
3 Return line connection
4 Pressure regulation
5 Protective cap
6 Oil inlet pressure, measuring connection
7 Oil pressure gauge port to nozzle/air venting
Figure 1 om5560_11_oilburx0055230en.wmf
1.1 Commissioning of the fuel oil pump
The oil line on the suction side of the pump must be primed and the pump vented before
commissioning, otherwise the pump will be damaged due to cavitation.For oil pump
venting, loosen the gauge connection/venting plug (7) after which the burner should
operate for a while. Air comes out of the hole in bubbles. Retighten the plug carefully
when there areno more bubbles (do not remove the plug from the hole).
The viscosity of the oil to the pump should be between 4 – 70 cSt. The diagram in
Figure 2 shows the required oil inlet pressure and temperature to the pump.
OM5560_11#B.1
Diagram for oil inlet pressure and temperature
1.1.1 Testing the suction pressure

Step A: Insert a pressure gauge into the suction gauge connection (6) to measure the
supply pressure.
1.1.2 Adjust the fuel oil pump pressure
In order to make the final adjustment of the oil pressure the burner must be running in
normal operation.
Step A: A pressure gauge must be connected into the pressure gauge connection (7)
to measure the oil pump pressure. Do not use hemp or oakum as sealing
material.
Step B: Remove the protective cap (5) and set the required oil pressure on the pres-
sure regulating screw (4).
Step C: Adjust the oil pressure by turning the pressure regulating screw. The pressure
increases by turning the screw clockwise and decreases counter-clockwise.
Step D: When firing diesel oil (DO) the oil must be atomized at a pressure of 20 –
25 bar and on heavy fuel oil (HFO) at a pressure of 25 – 30 bar.
Step E: The final pressure setting can be seen in the “Technical data” section.
1.1.3 Restart after prolonged burner stop
If the boiler plant has been shut down for a period of time and the plant is started from
cold conditions the following procedures must be taken into consideration:
Step A: The fuel oil transfer pump should be started in order to circulate oil in the
ring-line system.
Step B: Remove the pressure gauge connection (6) and add some oil to protect the
fuel oil pump from cavitating.
Step C: Start the burner and wait until air-free oil appears. Remount the pressure
gauge connection again.
1.1.4 Filter
The pump filter requires cleaning at intervals, depending on the condition of the oil.
In the event of the filter becoming blocked, excessive vacuum will be the result.
OM5560_11#B.1
Step A: To remove the filter for cleaning extract the eight screws on the fuel oil pump
cover.
Note: After replacing the filter ensure that the pump cover is tightly sealed.
1.1.5 Pump coupling

A flexible coupling is fitted between the fan rotor and oil pump.When adjusting the
coupling, ensure that there is no axial tension on the pump drive shaft.The coupling
element on the pump should have an axial play of 1 – 2 mm. Figure 3 illustrates the
pump coupling.
Illustration of the oil pump coupling
1.1.6 Exchange of the fuel oil pump

If the fuel oil pump breaks down, it should be exchanged with a new fuel oil pump
alternatively with an overhauled spare pump. Alfa Laval cannot recommend that the
user repairs it. The defective pump should be sent for repair. However, it is possible
to exchange the shaft seal locally by performing the following work steps:
Step A: Purchase a seal kit consisting of seal assembly with O-ring (3), seal face (4)
and secondary seal (5), see Figure 4.
Step B: Remove the shaft key (1) and securing ring (2).
Step C: Remove the seal (3), using levers in the groove.
Step D: Remove the seal face (4) and secondary seal (5).
Step E: Thoroughly clean the shaft and seal chamber with soft clean cloths.
Note: Cleanness is essential and it is preferable not to touch the areas of contact
between the seal and carbon face.
Step F: Lubricate the O-ring of the seal (3) with oil.

Step G: Refit in reverse order.
OM5560_11#B.1
Illustration of the shaft seal
2
3
1
4
5
Figure 4 om5560_11_oilpumx0055240en.wmf
Exchanging the fuel oil pump:

Step A: Close the quick closing valve.
Step B: Disconnect the oil hoses and other oil pipes on the fuel oil pump.
Step C: Remove the plastic cover of the observation hole which is found above the
air intake over the fuel oil pump.
Step D: Unscrew the two bolts in the fuel oil pump flange.
Note: The coupling centre piece, between the fuel oil pump and fan wheel is loose
and may be taken out through the air intake for inspection.
Step E: Place the coupling crosses into the coupling centre piece and draw out the
fuel oil pump. The flexible coupling crosses must be renewed if necessary.
Step F: Remount the coupling part from the fuel oil pump shaft, and place the cou-
pling part on the new fuel oil pump shaft.
Step G: Remount the pressure gauge with cock on the new fuel oil pump.
Step H: Mount the new fuel oil pump together with the coupling centre piece. Ensure
that the engagement of the two coupling crosses is done correctly.
Step I: Screw in the two bolts in the fuel oil pump flange and adjust the tolerance
(gab) between the coupling parts to approximately 1.5 mm.
Step J: Remount pipe and hose connections and open the quick closing valve. Fill
the system with oil and vent it before starting up.
OM5560_15#B.1
ELECTRIC OIL PRE-HEATER
Electric oil pre-heater
1 Electric oil pre-heater

The electric oil pre-heater, illustrated in Figure 1, is located on the burner housing or
placed separately on a drip tray and is used for preheating the fuel oil.
The fuel oil supply pipe coils are cast integral in an aluminium alloy plate. The heat
energy is transferred by the electric heating element via the aluminium casting and the
pipe coils to the fuel oil for heating. This ensures an even and rapid transfer of heat
thus preventing local overheating of the heating element and the exchanger surface to
the oil.
Fluctuations in oil temperature are minimized by a Pt 100 resistance temperature sensor

placed directly on the heating plate.
The pre-heater is suited for handling HFO with viscosity up to 700 cSt. at 50°C for
modulating burners and HFO with viscosity up to 570 cSt. at 50°C for two stage burn-
ers. The oil throughput should be minimum 100 kg/h for the two stage burner.
The maximum obtainable oil temperature is approx. 180°C. Please note that this tem-
perature depends on the throughput and the supply temperature of the fuel oil. At a
viscosity of the fuel oil above 380 cSt. all oil pipes at the burner and the flexible hoses
must be traced.
Illustration of the electric oil pre-heater
Figure 1 om5560_15_wev2x0055290en.wmf
OM5560_15#B.1
ELECTRIC OIL PRE-HEATER
1.1 Setting the pre-heater set point
The desired fuel oil temperature can be set in the control system together with alarmset
points and shut down set points. The fuel oil temperature in the pre-heater is registered
by the Pt 100 resistance temperature sensor and supplied to the control system.
Please note that the temperature set point has to be set 10-15°C higher than the desired
preheating temperature on account of the heat loss between the oil pre-heater and the
nozzle head.
If the oil temperature becomes too low or too high during operation, e.g. if the heater
elements are faulty, the control systemstops the burner and actuates a shut down indi-
cation.
1.2 Temperature limit thermostat
The pre-heater is equipped with a temperature limit thermostat with a fixed temperature
limit. If the oil temperature becomes too high, the temperature limit thermostat stops
the burner.The shut down is indicated in the control system.
In case of failure, the fault has to be repaired. Before the pre-heater can be taken into
service again, the reset button on the temperature limit thermostat must be activated
and the shut down in the control system must be reset.
1.3 Test of the functions
The function of the temperature limit thermostat can be tested by dismantling one of
the wires at the terminals to the temperature limit thermostat. The burner stops imme-
diately.
The low oil temperature shut down can be tested by disconnecting the electric power
to the pre-heater. When the oil temperature drops below the shut downlimit the burner
stops.
OM5560_18#B.1
HEATING CARTRIDGES
Heating cartridges
1 Heating units
The burner is provided with a number of heating cartridges used to ensure a sufficiently
low viscosity.
The heating cartridges are placed in the fuel oil pump, on the supply and return solenoid
valves, on the solenoid valve block and in the nozzle head.
A heating cartridge is also fitted on the oil quantity regulator for modulating oil burners.
1.1 Nozzle head heating
The nozzle head heating system consists of a heating cartridge placed in the nozzle
head, a thermostat also placed in the nozzle head and an electronic P type controller.
The controller is a ROB regulator which can be set between 65°C and 130°C. The ROB
regulator is placed behind the terminal box inside the burner housing.
The ROB regulator sends a signal to the control system and the burner is only allowed
to start after the selected nozzle head temperature has been reached.
OM5560_20#B.1
OIL/AIR REGULATION
Oil/air regulation
1 Oil/air compound regulator

The oil/air compound mechanism is driven by the servomotor in a continuous move-
ment from partial load to full load regulating the air quantity in proportion to the oil
quantity fired. An illustration of the oil/air compound mechanism is shown in Fig-
ure 1.
The cam has an adjustable spring band on the side which is adjusted by means of
adjustable socket screws. The spring band is mechanically linked to the air damper.
The cam segment is driven clockwise and as the movement progresses, the air damper
is opened, and the oil control valve is closed. This reduces the oil return quantity and
increases the nozzle throughput.
Through flue gas measurements the air quantity is compared to the oil throughput at
various load positions, and the oil/air ratio is adjusted on the spring band.
The outer scale on the cam shaft serves as a position indicator. With a lever fitted on
the gear box the cam shaft can be disengaged from the drive. This makes it possible to
manually turn the cam to any position required. When the lever is in the vertical po-
sition, the drive is engaged.
Illustration of the oil/air regulation
Figure 1 om5560_20_compoux0055310en.wmf
OM5560_20#B.1
OIL/AIR REGULATION
2 Servomotor
The limit switches and auxiliary switches are set manually on the adjustable cams. The
cams have a small pointer which indicates the appropriate switching point on a scale
between the cam discs. The cam switches and the connection diagram are shown in
Figure 2.
The servomotors are supplied with standard switch settings which must be reset, during
commissioning to the requirements of the installation. The outer scale on the cam shaft
serves as a position indicator.
Cam switches and connection diagram
OM5560_23#B.1
IGNITION ELECTRODES
Ignition electrodes
1 Ignition electrode settings

The ignition electrodes are shown in Figure 1 together with the adjustment dimensions.
As the conditions may vary from boiler to boiler, the indicated dimensions should only
be considered as guidelines. If ignition problems emerge, a more favourable adjustment
of the electrodes, suitable for the present conditions, must be found by experiments.
Illustration of the ignition electrode settings

3.5 - 4.0 mm
Ignition electrodes
3 - 5 mm
spray angle: 50 °
0 - 3 mm
Figure 1 om5560_23_ignitix0055350en.wmf
When the ignition electrodes are adjusted, the following must be observed:
• The distance of the ignition electrodes to the nozzle and diffuser should be checked.
• The ignition electrodes must not be touched by the atomizing oil spray.
• The distance of the ignition electrodes to the diffuser and the nozzle must always
be lager than the distance of the spark gap.
If a nozzle with a larger spray angle is fitted, the electrodes must be adjusted backwards,
or perhaps be bend slightly upwards.
OM5560_25#C.1
COMBUSTION HEAD
Combustion head
1 Adjustment of the combustion head and the

diffuser
The combustion head and the diffuser are marked with their type designation. The
identification of the flame tube is stamped on the neck, and the external diameter of
the diffuser is stamped on the side towards the burner.
The oil burner is delivered with a combustion head and an air diffuser disc that suit the
specified boiler type and oil quantity in the best way.
If further adjustment is needed to obtain the best possible combustion performance,

this is done by moving the combustion head and/or the air diffuser disc. Doing this,
make sure not to change the position of the ignition electrodes and thereby disturbing
a proper spark formation. It should also be noted that it is important that the air diffuser
disc is placed in a small distance in front of the nozzle(s) in order to keep a sufficient
cooling on the nozzle(s).
Figure 1 and Table 1 shows the different combustion heads, types, dimensions and
measurements.
Illustration of the combustion heads
Figure 1 om5560_25_comheax0055380en.wmf
OM5560_25#C.1
COMBUSTION HEAD
Combustion heads
Combustion head type Diffuser disc L D
M5/2a 125 x 40 50 160
M5/1a 125 x 40 65 180
M5/1a 145 x 40 65 180
M6/1a 155 x 50 90 200
M6/1a 165 x 50 90 200
M6/1a 175 x 50 90 200
M7/1a 155 x 50 100 220
M7/1a 165 x 50 100 220
M7/1a 175 x 50 100 220
M8/1a 155 x 50 110 240
M8/1a 165 x 50 110 240
M8/1a 175 x 50 110 240
M9/1a 165 x 50 90 240
M9/1a 185 x 50 90 240
M10/2 185 x 50 140 265
M10/2 200 x 50 140 265
M11/1 245 x 70 170 325
M11/1 260 x 70 170 325
G7/2a 165 x 50 120 265
G7/2a 175 x 50 120 265
U2/1 145 x 40 85 220
U2/1 155 x 50 85 220
U2/1 165 x 50 85 220
Table 1
OM5560_26#B.1
SERVOMOTOR
Servomotor
1 Air quantity regulation

The purpose of the servomotor is to operate the two interconnected air dampers. In this
way the air quantity necessary for the combustion can be controlled. The servomotor
is equipped with a number of cam switches and a potentiometer. Furthermore, the outer
scale on the camshaft serves as a position indicator. Figure 1 shows an illustration of
the servomotor.
switches and connection diagram
Setting the cam switches Disengaging the drive
Potentiometer
Cam switch No.: I: purge/full load in emergency operation and

maximum limit in automatic operation
Cam switch No.: II: closed position in automatic operation
Cam switch No.: III: ignition position in emergency operation
Cam switch No.: IV: not used
Cam switch No.: V: not used
Cam switch No.: VI: not used
Cam switch No.: VII: not used
In automatic operation of the burner, signals are sent from the control system to the
servomotor for positioning the air dampers dependent on the sequence step for the
OM5560_26#B.1
SERVOMOTOR
burner. The potentiometer provides feedback signals to the control system when the
burner operates in this mode.
In emergency operation of the burner, the servomotor is operated by pressing the in-
crease and decrease buttons located inside the boiler control panel.
Cam switches No. 1 and No. 2, which are the switches for purge/full load position and
closed position respectively, are active in automatic operation mode. Therefore, the
servomotor cannot open or close the air dampers beyond the setting of the switches
regardless of the signals sent from the control system. By this, an extra control of the
combustion process is added to the burner operation.Please note that cam switch No.
1 is also active in emergency operation mode.
All other cam switches will not have any function in automatic operation mode because
they are activated by the emergency operation switch.
1.1 Calibration of the servomotor range
During commissioning, the servomotor range must be calibrated. The low and high
range should be set to 0º and 90º opening of the air dampers respectively.
When the calibration process is performed, the camshaft should be disengaged from
the drive by means of a lever fitted to the gear box (see Figure 1). This makes it possible
to manually adjust the camshaft to any position required. When the lever is in the
vertical position, the drive is engaged.
The output signal from the potentiometer is a voltage signal, which is converted into
a resistance signal in the control system. On the local panel the resistance signal is
displayed in the menu setup/calibrate/servo motor/raw data. When the position of the
servomotor is set to 0º, which can be seen on the outer scale, the raw data line displays
a numerical value. This value must be entered in low range menu line.
After calibration of the low range position, the servomotor should be set to 90º. The
new numerical value, which is displayed in raw data line, should be entered as the high
range. In this way the operation range of the servomotor is calibrated for an operating
range between 0º and 90º corresponding to 0-100%.
The position of the servomotor will be handled and displayed as a percentage value in
all other menus.
Furthermore, the time to operate the servomotor from 0º to 90º and the accepted re-
sponse threshold can be set on the local control panel.
OM5560_26#B.1
SERVOMOTOR
1.2 Pre-adjustment of the servomotor settings
The following servomotor positions for operation should be set as preliminary settings
on the local control panel in the menu setup/settings:
• Stand-by position (burner stopped): 0% (0º)

• Ignition position: 22% (20º)
• Minimum firing position: 33% (30º)
• Purge and full load position: 67% (60º)
Please consider the proposed settings as guidelines only as the final settings should be
performed after measuring the flue gas (CO2/O2 content).
1.3 Pre-adjustment of the mechanical cam switches
The setting of the cam switches is described below. Please consider the proposed set-
tings as guidelines only as the final settings should be performed after measuring the
flue gas (CO2/O2 content).
Cam switch No. 1

Cam switch No. 1 controls the position of the air dampers when the burner operates in
purge position. The switch should be set between 20°-90° depending on the burner
size, furnace pressure, etc. Cam switch No. 1 should be set to 60° as a preliminary
setting. Please note that the position of the air dampers is limited by this setting when
the burner operates in automatic mode.
Cam switch No. 2

Cam switch No. 2 controls the position of the air dampers when the burner is stopped.
The switch should be set to 0°. This will prevent the boiler from unnecessary cooling.
Cam switch No. 3

Cam switch No. 3 controls the position of the air dampers when the burner operates in
ignition position in emergency operation mode. The switch should be set between
0°-50° depending on the burner size, furnace pressure, etc. Cam switch No. 3 should
be set to 20° as a preliminary setting.
OM5560_27#B.1
OIL/AIR REGULATION
Oil/air regulation
1 Oil/air compound regulator

The oil/air compound mechanism is driven by the servomotor in a continuous move-
ment from minimum firing load to full load regulating the air quantity in proportion
to the oil quantity fired. An illustration of the oil/air compound mechanism is shown
in Figure 1.
The cam has an adjustable spring band on the side which is adjusted by means of
adjustable socket screws. The spring band is mechanically linked to the air damper.
The cam segment is driven clockwise and as the movement progresses, the air damper
is opened, and the oil control valve is closed. This reduces the oil return quantity and
increases the nozzle throughput.
Through flue gas measurements the air quantity is compared to the oil throughput at
various load positions, and the oil/air ratio is adjusted on the spring band.
The outer scale on the cam shaft serves as a position indicator. With a lever fitted on
the gear box the cam shaft can be disengaged from the drive. This makes it possible to
manually turn the cam to any position required. When the lever is in the vertical po-
sition, the drive is engaged.
Illustration of the oil/air regulation
OM8630_01#C.1
PHOTO CELL
Photo cell
1 Description
The RAR detector is used for supervision of yellow burning oil flames. If the photo
cell detects a missing flame, the burner stops instantaneously. It is not possible to start
the burner before the control system has been reset.
With this type of detector, the radiation of the oil flame in the visible band of the light
spectrum is used to generate a flame signal. The light-sensitive element is a photo cell.
When illuminated, it generates DC voltage which causes a current to flow to the input
of the flame signal amplifier in the control unit. Hence, the photo cell is an active
detector.
The cell is insensitive to infrared radiation. If the burner is started with an illuminated
combustion chamber, the start sequence of the burner breaks, and an alarm for flame
failure will be indicated.
The number of photo cells for automatic operation and emergency operation depend
on the classification society.
1.1 Commissioning
The intensity of the light radiation can be checked by measuring the detector current
by means of a DC ampere meter (internal resistance 5000 ohm). Figure 1 shows the
measuring circuit.
Note: If the wiring of the photo cell is connected incorrectly, it is not possible to
start the oil burner.
Measuring circuit
-22 24 LAL2.../LAL3...
22 24 LOK16...
9 10 LAE10...
M - + 14 13 LAE1...
A
-
RAR
+
Figure 1 photcircax0460930en.wmf
OM5560_28#C.1
BURNER HOUSING
Burner housing
1 Burner swing out

The burner swing out switch breaks the interlock circuit to the burner if the burner is
opened at the hinged flange. Before the burner can be started, the burner control system
must be reset.
Attention: Whenever work is performed during burner swing out ensure that
hooking device is inserted as below to lock burner in open position!!
Hooking device
Figure 1 om5560_28-1x1076560en.wmf
Failure to use hooking device can cause severe personal injury as well as damage
mechanical parts.
2 Inspection of the burner housing

A cover for inspection and cleaning of the air duct is fitted on the top of the burner
housing. The electric terminals and the ignition transformer are located on the left side
behind the cover
OM5560_28#C.1
BURNER HOUSING
3 Inspection of the oil flame

The boiler is provided with an inspection hole for manual supervision of the oil flame.
The sight glass is air-cooled. The fan motor on the burner supplies the sight glass with
the necessary cooling air through a tapping in the air duct.
OM5560_31#B.1
NOZZLE HEAD
Nozzle head
1 Re-circulating nozzle head

A basic piping diagram of the fuel oil system at the nozzle head is shown in Figure 1.
The system is constructed with a return line and a re-circulating nozzle head.
When the fuel oil has been heated to the minimum oil temperature, the burner start is
released and the oil system at the nozzle head is filled with oil. The shut-off device in
the nozzle head remains closed preventing the fuel oil from flowing through the nozzle.
Basic piping diagram of the oil system at the nozzle head
10
Nozzle
1 - Oil pump
2 - Oil pre-heater
3 - Filter
4 - Safety solenoid valve (normal closed) 6
4a - Safety solenoid valve (normal closed) 13
5 - Solenoid valve (normal open)
P
6 - Solenoid valve (normal closed)
7 - Pressure switch
2
10 - Nozzle head with shut-off device
12 - Oil regulator
12
M
13 - Cold/warm start thermostat 5

4
3 7
P
1
4a
Inlet Outlet
Figure 1 om5560_31_noz_syx0055430en.wmf
During shut down of the burner and during the pre-purge period, the shut-off devices
(4), (4a) and 6 are closed, and the solenoid valve (5) is open.
After pre-purge the solenoid valves (4), (4a) and (6) will open, and the solenoid valve
(5) in the return line from the nozzle is closed. The pressure in the nozzle shut-off
device is hereby raised, and at a pressure of approx. 12 bar the shut-off device opens
to commence burner operation.
OM5560_31#B.1
NOZZLE HEAD
The oil regulator (12) regulates the oil flow through the nozzle by increasing or de-
creasing the flow resistance. This causes that more or less oil is pressed through the
nozzle as the supply pressure from the oil pump is constant.
The pressure in the return line is checked by the pressure switch (7). If the pressure is
too high, the burner shuts down. Shut-off devices (4), (4a) and (6) will close, and at
the same time the solenoid valve (5) will open.
The closure around the nozzle shut-off device prevents oil from dripping from the
nozzle.
OM5560_35#B.1
NOZZLE SELECTION
Nozzle selection
1 Description
The selection of a nozzle to a modulating oil burner can be done on the basis of the
chart shown in Figure 1. The chart shows the throughput of the spill type nozzle in
relation to the supply pressure. The supply pressure should be between 25 - 30 bar
when running on both DO and HFO. If the burner only operates on DO, the supply
pressure should be between 20 - 30 bar.
Note: Ensure that the supply pressure does not fall below the above mentioned
settings. The burner can only operate if the pressure is sufficiently high in
order to withdraw the spring inside the nozzle head.
The nozzle is a spill type nozzle W with a spray angle of 50°. The regulating range for
this type of nozzle is between 30 - 100% of the total oil throughput. The nozzle return
pressure must be measured during commissioning. The pressure should not be set
below 10 bar for partial load.
1.1 Selecting a nozzle size
When a nozzle is selected the required oil throughput must be known. The selection
should be made with regard to the above mentioned supply pressure settings.
If the gap between two nozzle sizes results in a lower supply pressure than required,
the pressure must be increased to minimum 25 bar for HFO and 20 bar for DO. The
higher oil throughput caused by an increase of the supply pressure can be reduced by
limiting the oil regulator movement. This is done by adjusting the full load limit switch
in the servomotor to an appropriate lower position. The range of regulation is reduced
by this action.
1.2 Example
Known:
Required oil throughput: 230 kg/h HFO
Required:
The nozzle size and the supply pressure
Procedure to be followed:
Follow the 20 bar reference pressure line vertically up to the intersection with the 230
kg/h oil throughput line. From this point move horizontally to the intersection with a
nozzle size line and read the nozzle size. When this is done, move vertically down to
OM5560_35#B.1
NOZZLE SELECTION
the pressure line and read the required supply pressure. If the appearing supply pressure
is below 25 bar, a larger nozzle size must be chosen. In this case a nozzle size of W
250 must be chosen.
Nozzle selection chart
Figure 1 om5560_35_nozchax0055470en.wmf
OM5560_37#B.1
NOZZLES
Nozzles
1 Fitting and removal of nozzles

A nozzle can be replaced without affecting the function of the hydraulic nozzle shut-
off valves.
Inspection and change of the nozzles are easily done as the burner is constructed with
a swing flange.
Exchanging of an oil nozzle:

• Unscrew the lock-nut, and the casing can be swung out
• For mounting/dismounting use a spanner and keep the nozzle head fixed by means
of another spanner
• After replacing the nozzle ensure that it is tight
To prevent entry of air into the oil system it is advisable to close the stop valves in the
suction intake and return line during exchange of the nozzle.
As a general rule a nozzle should always be exchanged if it is dirty or worn out. A good
burner performance can only be guaranteed with a new and/or a clean nozzle.
The nozzles should only be cleaned due to a shortage of nozzles.
The nozzles should be dismantled into individual parts and washed in a suitable fluid
such as benzine or petrol. If available, compressed air is the most suitable cleaning
medium.
Note: Solid objects such as steel needles are completely unusable, and they are
under NO circumstances to be used as cleaning tools.
Note: Nozzles cannot be returned for credit or exchange.
When extra oil nozzles are ordered please state the through-put in US Gal/h and the
spray angle.
OM5560_51#A.2
PRE-SERVICE
Pre-service
1 Pre-service inspection
These pre-service instructions imply that the previous paragraphs describing the indi-
vidual parts of the burner have been studied very thoroughly. The necessary adjust-
ments of the oil pump, the electric pre-heater, the combustion head, the servomotor
and the ignition electrodes must be made before proceeding further with this instruc-
tion.
Before the burner is started, the special instructions for the boiler and the control system
should be consulted.
Step A: Switch on the “MAIN SWITCH”, and reset the switch for “CONTROL
VOLTAGE”.
Step B: The water level indicator alarm and “Water level too low” should be tested
by raising and lowering the water level in the boiler. It might be necessary
to make adjustments.
It should also be checked that the start/stop signals are given to the feed water pump
unit.
Step C: The set points for the pressure switches listed below should be adjusted:
• “Steam pressure high”
• “Steam pressure low”
• Set point for “BURNER START/STOP”
• “Fuel oil pressure low ” in the ring line
• “Fuel return line pressure high”
• “Start stand-by oil pump”
Step D: The functions and set points should be checked after remounting.
Step E: The burner swing out alarm and function are tested by opening the burner
flange.
1.1 Fuel oil transfer pump
The fuel oil transfer pump can now be started, but before doing this, please consult the
instructions for the fuel pump.
Note: Before the fuel oil transfer pump is started, make sure that the oil system
has been flushed and is free of foreign objects which can damage the pump
unit.
Step A: Vent the fuel oil transfer pump.

Step B: Open the valves for the diesel oil tank, and close the quick closing valves to
the oil burner. Start the fuel oil transfer pump.
OM5560_51#A.2
PRE-SERVICE
Step C: Check that the fuel oil transfer pump is running with the correct direction of
rotation.
Step D: Adjust the oil pressure in the ring line at the pressure regulating valve to
min. 1.0 bar and max. 5.0 bar.
Step E: Check for leakage.
1.2 Check of the burner motor and the control system
The burner motor and control system should now be checked.
Step A: Remove the fuses from the burner motor.

Step B: Set the switch for oil type in position “DIESEL OIL”.
Step C: Adjust aux. switches in the servo motor roughly:
• Cam-switch No. 1: opened
• Cam-switch No. 2: closed
• Cam-switch No. 3: ignition load downward
• Cam-switch No. 4: ignition load upward
• Cam-switch No. 5: not in use
• Cam-switch No. 6: partial load downward
• Cam-switch No. 7: partial load upward
Step D: Switch to burner mode: “AUT”
The burner sequence control box will give a signal to the servomotor, and the air
damper opens for purge. After the fixed purge time is expired, the servomotor will get
a signal from the sequence control box to close the air damper and commence the
ignition load.
The ignition transformer will be energised.
After the pre purge time, the solenoid valve will be energised. The photo-cell is now
waiting for illumination from the flame. As the burner motor is not running due to the
removed fuses, the control box will cut out after maximum five seconds. The control
panel will give an alarm for ”Flame failure".
Step E: Check and simulate a flame signal by using a flash light pointed directly at
the photo cell.
If the simulated flame is not present, reverse the two photo cell wires for the correct
polarisation and repeat the flame failure check.
When the flash light is switched off, the control panel will shut off the power to the
solenoid valves and initiate a “Flame failure” alarm.
Step F: Open the quick closing valves.

Step G: Close the isolating valve for the pressure gauge at the burner fuel oil pump
and unscrew the pressure gauge.
Step H: Open the isolating valve for the pressure gauge very slowly and ventilate
the pump and oil hoses.A mixture of diesel oil and air is led out.
Step I: When the diesel oil is free from air close the isolating valve and mount the
pressure gauge.
Step J: Mount the burner motor fuses.
Step K: Set the burner mode to “AUT” and let the burner run for approximately five
seconds before stopping it.
Step L: Open the burner flange, and check that the nozzle has not sprayed oil into
the furnace.
Step M: Close the burner again.
OM5560_51#A.2
PRE-SERVICE
Step N: Start the burner and check the oil pump pressure. The oil pressure should be
approximately 26 bar. The burner should not ignite yet.
Final setting of the oil pump pressure should be done when the burner is running in
normal operation.
Step O: Open the burner flange again and check that the furnace is free from oil.
The burner is now ready for start-up.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning
1 General
The following commissioning instructions are valid for pressure atomizing burners
type WH with a standard delivery of individual parts for the burner unit and supply
systems from Alfa Laval.
Prior to commissioning, the instructions for the individual parts of the burner unit and
supply systems should be studied. The special instructions for the boiler and control
system should also be consulted. The instructions should only be considered as a
guideline. This is due to the fact that each plant should be commissioned individually
to obtain the best burner performance for the specific plant.
Attention: If the burner unit and supply systems include parts, which are not
standard delivery from Alfa Laval, the specific instructions for these
parts should be ignored in the following sections. The actual instruc-
tions for the specific parts should be thoroughly studied and followed
during commissioning.
During commissioning of the burner unit and supply systems, it might be necessary to
adjust some regulation parameters, timer settings, etc. in the control system to optimise
the function of the plant. These adjustments are not described in the following sections,
but should be carried out as the optimisation requirements emerge. Please see the in-
structions for the control system.
1.1 Pre-service checks
Before commissioning of the burner, the following work steps must be carried out:
Step A: Check that the boiler is ready for operation according to the special instruc-
tions for the boiler.
Step B: Increase or decrease the water level in the boiler to approximately 50 mm
below normal water level.
Step C: Check the electric wiring.
Step D: Switch on the power for the boiler plant and reset the control system. Ensure
that the burner is in stopped mode.
Step E: Check that the control system is operational according to the special in-
structions for the control system.
Step F: Pre-adjust the set points for boiler operation on the pressure switches and/
or pressure transmitter.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
1.2 Commissioning adjustments of the burner unit
On delivery from Alfa Laval, the burner unit has been pre-adjusted to fit the task. Even
though the burner unit has been pre-adjusted, it is advisable to carry out additional
checks during commissioning. These checks are described in the following.
1.2.1 Dismantling
Step A: Ensure that the power is switched off before any work is carried out on the
burner unit.
Step B: Close the quick closing valves for the burner unit.
Step C: Unscrew the screw that holds the burner flange and swing out the burner.
Step D: Mount the hooking device.
Step E: Dismount the cover for the servo motor.
1.2.2 Adjustment of the combustion head and diffuser disc
Step A: Check the positions of the combustion head and diffuser disc according to
the special instruction for these, see the chapter “Combustion head”.
Step B: Check that the diffuser disc is positioned in front of the nozzle(s) in order
to secure a sufficient cooling.
Note: Exact distances cannot be given, but has to be determined when the burner
is in operation. It is possible to affect the air velocity and thereby the shape
and quality of the flame by optimising the positions of the combustion head
and diffuser disc.
1.2.3 Adjustment of the ignition electrodes

Step A: Check the position of the ignition electrodes. The ignition electrodes should
be 0-3 mm in front and 3-5 mm above the nozzle tip. The distance between
the electrodes should be 3.5-4 mm. Adjust if necessary. Please also see the
special instruction “Ignition electrodes”.
Note: An exact setting of the ignition electrodes cannot be given, but has to be
established when the burner is ignited during operation.
1.2.4 Adjustment of the servomotor

Step A: Disengage the servomotor camshaft from the drive by means of the release
lever fitted to the gear box.
Step B: Calibrate the servomotor range in the control system. The low and high range
should be set to 0º and 90º opening of the air dampers respectively.Set the
position of the servomotor to 0º, which can be seen on the outer scale. The
raw data line in the control system displays a numerical value. This value
must be entered in low range menu line.
Step C: Set the position of the servomotor to 90º. The new numerical value, which
is displayed in the raw data line, must be entered as the high range.
Step D: Set the time to operate the servomotor from 0º to 90º in the control system
(normally 15 seconds).
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Note: Please consider the following proposed settings as guidelines only as the
final settings should be performed after measuring the flue gas (CO2/O2
content). The control system settings and cam switch settings depend on
burner size, nozzle size, furnace pressure, etc.
Two-stage burners:
Step A: Pre-adjust the stand-by position (burner stopped) to 0% (0º) in the control
system.
Step B: Pre-adjust the nozzle 1 position (ignition and operation on nozzle 1) to 28%
(25º) in the control system.
Step C: Pre-adjust the nozzle 2 opening position (open solenoid valve to nozzle 2)
to 50% (45º) in the control system.
Step D: Pre-adjust the nozzle 1 and 2 position (purge and full load) to 67% (60º) in
the control system.
Step E: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 3 to approximately 25°. The cam
switch controls the position of the air dampers in emergency operation mode
when the burner operates on nozzle 1, which is the same as minimum and
ignition load.
Step F: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 1 to approximately 60°. The cam
when the burner operates in purge position and on both nozzles. Please note
that the position of the air dampers is also limited by this setting when the
burner operates in automatic mode.
Step G: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 7 to approximately 45°. The cam
when the solenoid valve for nozzle 2 is operated (nozzle 2 is started).
Step H: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 2 to 0°. The cam switch controls the
position of the air dampers in emergency operation mode when the burner
is stopped. Please note that the position of the air dampers is also limited by
this setting when the burner operates in automatic mode.
Step I: After pre-adjusting the cam switches engage the camshaft again. When the
release lever is in the outer position, the drive is engaged.
Modulating burners:
Step A: Pre-adjust the stand-by position (burner stopped) to 0% (0º) in the control
system.
Step B: Pre-adjust the ignition position to 22% (20º) in the control system.
Step C: Pre-adjust the minimum firing position (partial load) to 33% (30º) in the
control system.
Step D: Pre-adjust the purge and full load position to 67% (60º) in the control system.
Step E: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 1 to approximately 60°. The cam
when the burner operates in purge and full load position. Please note that
the position of the air dampers is also limited by this setting when the burner
operates in automatic mode.
Step F: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 2 to 0°. The cam switch controls the
position of the air dampers in emergency operation mode when the burner
is stopped. Please note that the position of the air dampers is also limited by
this setting when the burner operates in automatic mode.
Step G: Pre-adjust servomotor cam switch No. 3 to approximately 20°. The cam
when the burner operates in ignition position.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Step H: After pre-adjusting the cam switches engage the camshaft again. When the
release lever is in the outer position, the drive is engaged.
1.2.5 Assembling
Step A: Mount the cover for the servo motor.
Step B: Close the burner and secure with the screw.
Step C: Switch on power and reset the control system.
1.3 Commissioning of the oil system
When the oil system is commissioned, it should initially be flushed by means of an

external pumping system. This must be done to ensure that the oil system is not clog-
ged-up and to prevent foreign objects from entering the pump unit which might cause
damage.
Warning: When the oil system is commissioned on diesel oil, the tracing of the
piping system must be off.
1.3.1 Commissioning
Step A: Check that oil is present in the diesel oil tank. Open the stop valves, which
connect the diesel oil tank to the oil system.
Step B: Select diesel oil on the manually operated three-way valves. Check that the
control system indicates diesel oil operation.
Step C: Open the inlet stop valves, and the outlet non-return valves for the oil pumps.
Step D: Open the stop valves for the pressure gauges on the oil pumps.
Note: The stop valves for the pressure gauges on the pump unit should only be
opened for pressure control purposes. The stop valves should be closed
during normal operation.
Step E: Open the stop valve for the pressure transmitter and/or switches.
Step F: Close the quick closing valves located at the gas/air separator unit. Check
that the micro switch is activated and that a shut down appears in the control
system.
Step G: Rotate the oil pumps by hand to ensure a free and an uninterrupted rotation.
Step H: Adjust the circuit breakers for both pumps to suit full load current of the
motors. The current appears from the motor identification plate and/or the
electric diagrams.
Step I: The oil pumps must be filled with diesel oil prior to operation. The vent
valve installed on the outlet side of the pump unit must be opened until the
air has escaped from the suction side of the pump. As soon as diesel oil
emerges, the vent valve may be closed.
1.3.2 Flushing the oil system
Step A: Start one of the oil pumps and check that it is running with the correct di-
rection of rotation. Open the vent valve again until only diesel oil emerges.
Step B: Adjust the oil pressure in the ring line on the pressure regulating valve lo-
cated at the gas/air separator unit to minimum 1.0 barg and maximum 5.0
barg. The normal pressure should be set to approximately 3.0 barg.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Step C: Stop the pump and start the other oil pump. Perform the same check and
venting procedures.
Note: The pressure relief valve installed in each pump is factory set and checked
and should not be adjusted during commissioning.
Step D: Flush the oil system for some time with one oil pump in operation. The total
flushing time should be determined with regard to the size of the oil system
and the amount of impurities (particles, grease, etc.). Check the complete
oil system for leaks.
Step E: When flushing is completed, stop the operational oil pump and clean the oil
filters in the fuel oil supply pump unit. Vent the oil pumps after the filters
have been cleaned.
1.3.3 Check and adjust the pressure transmitter
Step A: Check that the oil pressure indicated in the control system is identical to the
pressure indicated on the pressure gauge in the oil line.
Step B: Adjust the zero point and/or the span on the oil pressure transmitter if nec-
essary.
1.3.4 Check the low alarm for oil pressure and start of stand-by oil pump
Step A: Check and adjust the set point for low alarm in the control system.
Step B: Start one of the oil pumps and set the other pump into stand-by mode.
Step C: Decrease the oil pressure on the pressure regulating valve gradually until the
set point is reached. The operating oil pump should stop, and the pump in
stand-by mode should start. The control system should indicate an alarm.
Readjust if necessary.
Step D: Switch operation mode of the pumps and carry out the same procedure.
1.3.5 Check the low oil pressure shut down and trip function
Step A: Check and adjust the set point for low shut down and trip in the control
system.
Step B: Decrease the pressure somewhat more until the set point is reached. The
operating stand-by pump should stop, and a shut down should be indicated
in the control system. Readjust if necessary.
Step C: Readjust the oil pressure to approximately 3.0 barg on the pressure regulat-
ing valve and reset the alarms and shut downs.
1.3.6 Check the trip function for overload
Step A: Check the trip function for overload by pressing the test button for the pump
in operation on the circuit breaker.
Step B: The pump stops, and a shut down for pump failure should be indicated in
the control system.
Step C: When the stand-by pump is started, perform the same test with this pump.
Step D: Reset the circuit breakers and all shut downs after testing.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
2 Start-up
To continue the commissioning procedures, the oil system must be in normal operation.
Prior to the actual start-up of the burner, some additional checks should be carried out
with regard to ignition and start-up of the burner. When these checks are completed,
the burner should be commissioned on diesel oil and finally on heavy fuel oil.
Attention: Before and during start-up, the furnace must be checked with regular
intervals for oil spillage. If an oil spillage is present in the furnace, the
cause must be determined and the failure must be rectified. The fur-
nace should be purged until it is free of oil.
2.1 Additional commissioning checks
2.1.1 Check the burner motor and burner fuel oil pump
Note: For large size burners equipped with a separately mounted booster oil
pump please refer to the special instruction for this as well as the proce-
dures described in the section “Commissioning of the oil system”. The
burner fan and booster pump must be commissioned separately.
Step A: Rotate the burner motor by hand to ensure a free and an uninterrupted rota-
tion.
Step B: Adjust the circuit breaker for the burner motor to suit full load current of the
motor. The current appears from the motor identification plate and/or the
electric diagrams.
Step C: Open the quick closing valves for the burner unit.
Step D: Start one of the ring line fuel oil pumps and set the other into stand-by mode.
Step E: The burner fuel oil pump must be primed and vented before start-up, oth-
erwise the pump will be damaged due to cavitation. For priming remove the
pressure gauge connection plug on the suction sideof the pump and add some
oil. Afterwards screw in the plug again.
Step F: For oil pump venting, loosen the pressure gauge connection (do not remove
the pressure gauge from the hole).
Step G: Operate the burner as described in the chapter “Manual operation” Press the
“BURNER MOTOR” push button.
Step H: Check that the burner motor is running with the correct direction of rotation.
Step I: Check that the burner motor does not produce any abnormal mechanical
noises or vibrations.
Step J: Continue to operate the burner motor and vent the burner fuel oil pump until
only diesel oil emerges. Then retighten the pressure gauge.
2.1.2 Check the ignition electrodes
Step A: With the burner motor running press the “IGNITION” push button and keep
it pressed. The ignition transformer will be energised and the electrodes
ignite.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Step B: Check that the ignition spark appears, re-adjust the electrodes, if necessary,
as described the section “Commissioning adjustments of the burner unit”.
Step C: Stop the burner motor after the check procedure has been carried out.
2.2 Commissioning on diesel oil
When the burner is commissioned, the boiler pressure and temperature must not be
intensified too rapidly as this might cause stresses in the boiler. The burner should be
kept in minimum firing position during the first commissioning period. The burner
should also only be operated at relatively short intervals during the initial start-up.
When the burner is stopped during this firing-up procedure, the safety interlock shut
downs can be checked and adjusted.
2.2.1 Operation of the burner

In automatic mode, the start/stop sequences of the burner are handled by the control
system. A condition for the initiation of the start-up sequence is that no safety interlock
shut downs are present. If a safety interlock shut down is present, the cause must be
corrected.
The following check of the start-up sequence should be carefully monitored on site to
demonstrate the correct function of the start-up sequence locally. The start sequence
is also indicated in the control system.
Step A: Temporary open the by-pass valve for burner units equipped with oil flow
meter. This must be done to protect the flow meter against impurities during
the first operation.
Step B: Start one of the fuel oil pumps and set the other into stand-by mode.
Step C: Start the burner from the control system.
Step D: Check that the burner motor starts and that the servo motor opens the air
dampers for purge of the boiler furnace. For visual check of the servomotor
temporarily dismount the cover.
Step E: Observe that the furnace is purged for a period of time (minimum 30 sec-
onds) before the servo motor closes the air damper to ignition position.
Step F: Observe that the pre-ignition time is initiated. This means the servo motor
is in ignition position and the ignition transformer is energised.
Step G: Check the ignition spark between the electrodes. Use the inspection hole to
visually check the ignition spark. The ignition electrodes should be adjusted
if necessary.
Step H: Check that the burner ignites when the solenoid valves are activated and that
it remains ignited when the power to the ignition electrodes is switched off.
If the flame signal disappears after the end of the safety time the burner is
immediately shut down.
Note: A number of starts may be necessary before the burner ignites. If ignition
of the burner fails despite of several attempts, adjust the servomotor set-
ting, spring band for oil/air ratio (modulating burners), air velocity, and/
or oil pressure.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Step I: When the burner is operating adjust the burner fuel oil pump pressure ac-
cording to the special instruction for this, see the chapter “Burner fuel oil
pump”. In case of large size burners with separately mounted booster pump
adjust the oil pressure on the pressure regulating valve.
Step J: When firing diesel oil (DO) the oil must be atomized at a pressure of 20 –
25 barg and on heavy fuel oil (HFO) at a pressure of 25 – 30 barg.
Step K: The final pressure setting can be seen in the “Technical data” section.
Step L: Check that the burner is in ignition position after start-up.
Step M: Check that the flame does not pulsate. Adjust the servomotor setting, spring
band for oil/air ratio (modulating burners), and/or air velocity if necessary.
Step N: Check the shape and colour of the flame. Measure the CO2 and/or O2 content
and adjust the servomotor setting or spring band for oil/air ratio (modulating
burners) if necessary.
Step O: Check the colour of the flue gas. Measure the soot spot No. It should not
exceed a soot spot No. of 1-3 (Bachrach). Adjust the servomotor setting or
spring band for oil/air ratio (modulating burners) if necessary.
Note: The final adjustment of the combustion parameters should be carried out
when the burner operates on heavy fuel oil as this is the main fuel.
2.2.2 Check the stop sequence

Step A: The stop sequence should also be carefully monitored on site. Operate the
burner for a few minutes and stop it from the control system.
Step B: Check that the solenoid valves are activated and that the air dampers are
moved into closed position.
Step C: Check that the burner motor stops.
Step D: Check that the furnace is free of oil spillage.
2.2.3 Setting and testing of the minimum air pressure switch
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the minimum air pressure switch by
increasing the switch point for the switch. Unscrew the protective cover of
the switch and increase the switch point at the setting wheel. The burner
stops, and a shut down is indicated in the control system.
Step B: Decrease the switch point again. Reset the shut down after testing and start
the burner again.
Step C: Measure the pressure difference between the suction and pressure side of
the fan at minimum burner load. Use this value for determination of the
switch point. It should be approximately 80% of this value.
Step D: Adjust the setting wheel of the minimum pressure switch to the calculated
value and mount the protective cover.
2.2.4 Check the safety interlock shut down for flame failure equipment
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the flame failure equipment by re-
moving one of the flame scanners from the holder and cover the sensor. The
burner stops, and a shut down for flame failure is indicated in the control
system. Reset all shut downs.
Step B: Check and simulate a glowing furnace by using a flash light pointed directly
at the flame scanner.
Step C: Set the burner into start mode. The control system should indicate a shut
down for flame failure.
Step D: Mount the flame scanner into the holder and reset all shut downs.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
Step E: Perform the same checks with the other flame scanner.
2.2.5 Check the safety interlock shut down for burner swing out
Step A: When the burner is in operation, unscrew the screw that holds the burner
flange and carefully swing out the burner a few mm. The burner stops, and
a shut down for burner swing out is indicated in the control system.
Step B: Close the burner and secure with the screw. Reset all shut downs.
2.2.6 Check the safety interlock for the high oil pressure in return line switch
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the high oil pressure in return line
switch by decreasing the switch point for the switch. The burner stops, and
a shut down is indicated in the control system.
Step B: Increase the switch point again and reset the shut down after testing.
2.2.7 Check the safety interlock shut down for low oil pressure
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the low oil pressure shut down and
trip function as described in the paragraph “Commissioning of the oil sys-
tem”. The burner stops, and a shut down for low oil pressure is indicated in
the control system. Reset the shut downs after testing.
2.2.8 Check the trip function for burner motor overload
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the trip function for burner motor
overload by pressing the test button for the burner motor on the circuit
breaker.
Step B: The burner motor stops and a shut down for burner motor failure is indicated
in the control system.
Step C: Reset the circuit breakers and all shut downs after testing.
2.2.9 Check the safety interlock shut down for too low water level
Step A: When the burner is in operation, perform a live test of both of the water level
safety devises. One of the alarms must be deactivated while testing the other
and opposite.
Step B: Decrease the water level in the boiler by means of the blow-down valves
until the water level has fallen below the too low level mark. After the re-
sponse delay has expired the burner stops and a shut down is indicated in
the control system.
Step C: Increase the water level in the boiler and reset the shut down. Perform the
same test for the other safety device.
Step D: Increase the water level in the boiler and reset all alarms and shut downs.
Activate all safety devices again.
2.2.10 Check the safety interlock shut down for high steam pressure
Step A: When the burner is in operation, raise the boiler pressure until the set point
for high alarm is reached. The control system must indicate a high alarm.
Step B: With the burner in operation, check the shut down and trip function for high
steam pressure. Raise the steam pressure until the burner stops. A shut down
is indicated in the control system.
Step C: If the boiler safety system is equipped with more than one high steam pres-
sure shut down it is necessary to perform the same check with both high
steam pressure shut downs. One of the shut downs must be deactivated while
testing the other and opposite.
Step D: With all steam pressure safety interlocks activated, reset all alarms and shut
downs.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
2.2.11 Check the active safety interlock shut downs in emergency operation
Step A: Operate the burner as described in the chapter “Manual operation”.
Step B: When the burner is in operation, check the active safety interlock shut downs
such as e.g. flame failure, too low water level, etc. as described previously.
2.3 Commissioning on heavy fuel oil
When the burner has been commissioned on diesel oil the final commissioning on
heavy fuel oil can be carried out.
2.3.1 Change of fuel

Step A: Stop the burner.
Step B: Check that oil is present in the heavy fuel oil tank. Open the stop valves,
which connect the heavy fuel oil tank to the oil system. To avoid cavitation
of the ring line oil pumps, the viscosity of the oil in the heavy fuel oil tank
should not exceed 380 cSt. If necessary, the oil tank should be heated.
Step C: Select heavy fuel oil on the manually operated three-way valves. Check that
the control system indicates heavy fuel oil operation.
Step D: Adjust the oil temperature set point in the control system, see also the chapter
“Electric pre-heater”. The viscosity of the oil at the nozzle head should be
between 7.5 - 10 cSt. The pre-heating temperature can be determined by
means of the chart in the chapter "Viscosity-temperature chart".
Step E: Adjust the set points for low shut down, low alarm, and high alarm in the
control system. Adjust if necessary.
Step F: Start the burner from the control system. It might be necessary to start the
burner several times before the pre-heating temperature is sufficiently high.
Step G: Check that the temperature is raised to the desired set point. Adjust if nec-
essary.
Step H: Open the stop valves before and after the pre-heater, and close the by-pass
valve in case of burners with separately mounted pre-heater.
Step I: Check that the tracing systems for the oil system and the burner unit are
operational.
2.3.2 Operation on heavy fuel oil
When the burner is commissioned on heavy fuel oil, final adjustments of the combus-
tion process should be carried out to achieve high quality performance data. The aim
is to operate the burner with lowest possible O2 content and highest possible CO2
content without the risk of an uncompleted combustion (black smoke). At the same
time the reliability of the burner must be ensured.
The oil/air ratio should be checked and adjusted through the complete burner range to
ensure a correct combustion. The oil/air ratio can be checked by measurements of the
soot spot No. and the O2 content and/or the CO2 content in the flue gas. The visual
appearance of the flame should also be checked. If the amount of combustion air to
the burner for a given oil flow is too low, the combustion will be uncompleted, and it
produces black smoke. Although the O2 content is low, and the CO2 content is high,
the air flow should be increased. If, on the other hand, the O2 content is high and the
CO2 content is low, it indicates that the air flow for the combustion process must be
decreased.
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
It is not only the oil/air ratio which is an important factor for the combustion process,
but also the air velocity for the combustion.
The air velocity in the combustion head can be adjusted by moving the combustion
head and/or diffuser disc. For large size burners it is, furthermore, possible to adjust
the movement of the external and internal sleeve.However, the flame should be ad-
justed to a shape in which minimum contact to the furnace walls is achieved. The
adjustment should be checked when the burner is in full load condition.
The following commissioning steps imply that the lighting-up procedure of the boiler
is completed and that a sufficient load demand is present to carry out adjustments at
100% load.
Step A: Start the burner and check that it ignites when the ignition is on and the oil
valves are activated. It must also be checked that the burner remains ignited
when the ignition sequence step is completed. Adjust the servomotor setting
in the control system, the spring band for oil/air ratio (modulation burners),
and/or the air velocity if necessary.
Step B: Start the burner several times to ensure a reliable ignition of the burner.
Step C: Check that the flame is stable and does not pulsate when the burner operates
at ignition load. Carry out measurements of the soot spot No. and O2 content
and/or CO2 content. Adjust the servomotor setting in the control system, the
spring band for oil/air ratio (modulating burners), and/or the air velocity if
necessary.
Step D: The shape and colour of the flame must also be checked, adjust if necessary.
Note: If the position of the diffuser disc has to be altered in relation to the com-
bustion head, the air velocity and quantity in the combustion head will
change. Check the combustion values by means of flue gas analysis and, if
necessary, adjust the combustion air quantity to be adequate.
Step E: Carry out the same measurements when the burner operates on both nozzles
for two-stage burners or through the complete burner range in steps of 10%
(from minimum load to full load) for modulating burners. Adjust the ser-
vomotor setting in the control system and on the cam switches if necessary.
Step F: Operate the burner as described in the chapter “Manual operation”. Carry
out measurements when the burner operates on nozzle 1 and when it is start-
ing nozzle 2 for two-stage burners or in ignition position for modulating
burners. Adjust the servomotor setting on the cam switches if necessary.
Note: The cam switches which also are active in automatic operation of the burn-
er as well as the spring band for oil/air ratio (modulating burners) must
not be adjusted as these already have been commissioned previously.
2.3.3 Check the safety interlock shut down for low oil temperature
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the low oil temperature safety inter-
lock by disconnecting the electric power to the pre-heater. When the oil
temperature drops below the limit the burner stops, and a shut down is in-
dicated in the control system.
Step B: Connect the electric power again and reset the shut down
OM5560_52#C.1
COMMISSIONING
2.3.4 Check the safety interlock shut down for the pre-heater limit thermostat
Step A: When the burner is in operation, check the high temperature limit thermostat
by dismantling one of the wires at the terminals. The burner stops, and a shut
down is indicated in the control system.
Step B: Connect the wire again and reset the shut down
2.3.5 Additional function checks
Step A: Check/adjust additional safety interlock shut downs if provided. A number
of shut downs might be included in the safety interlock circuit depending on
the specified function and/or the classification society.
OM5560_53#B.1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Operating instructions
1 General
The following operating instructions are valid for pressure atomizing burners type WH
with a standard delivery of individual parts for the burner unit and supply systems from
Alfa Laval.
Attention: If the burner unit and supply systems include parts, which are not
standard delivery from Alfa Laval, the specific instructions for these
parts should be ignored in the following sections. The actual instruc-
tions for the specific parts should be thoroughly studied and followed
during operation of the burner.
The operation instructions in the following sections describe the normal burner oper-
ations with regard to preparation for start-up on the selected fuel type, normal start/
stop, change of fuel, etc. It is implied that the boiler, burner, control system, and ad-
ditional equipment for the boiler plant have been commissioned and are fully opera-
tional.
1.1 Descriptions
1.1.1 Descriptions
In the following sections various operating procedures are described such as:
• Diesel oil mode

• Heavy fuel oil mode
• Normal start/stop
• Change from diesel oil operation to heavy fuel oil operation
• Change from heavy fuel oil operation to diesel oil operation
• Change of heavy fuel oil bunker type
• Prolonged stop
1.2 Diesel oil mode
This section describes the actions that must be carried out before the burner unit and
oil system are operational on diesel oil.
Step B: Select diesel oil on the manually operated three-way valves. The control
system will indicate diesel oil operation.
OM5560_53#B.1
Step F: Open the quick closing valves for the burner unit.
Step G: Open the stop valve before and non-return valve after the booster pump in
case of large size burners with separately mounted burner fuel oil pump.
Step H: Set one of the oil pumps into operation mode and the other oil pump into
stand-by mode. If the burner is in automatic operation mode, the oil pumps
will not be operational before start-up of the burner is initiated.
Step I: Check that the oil pressure in the ring line is at the correct level.
Step J: The burner is now ready for operation.
Warning: When the oil system is operating on diesel oil, the tracing of the piping
system must be off.
1.3 Heavy fuel oil mode
This section describes the actions, which must be carried out before the burner unit
and oil system are operational on heavy fuel oil.
Step A: Check that oil is present in the heavy fuel oil service tank. Open the stop
valve, which connects the service tank to the oil system. To avoid cavitation
of the pumps, the viscosity of the oil in the heavy fuel oil tank should not
exceed 380 cSt. If necessary, the oil tank should be heated.
Step B: Select heavy fuel oil on the manually operated three-way valves. The control
system will indicate heavy fuel oil operation.
Step F: Open the quick closing valves for the burner unit.
Step G: Open the stop valve before and non-return valve after the booster pump in
case of large size burners with separately mounted burner fuel oil pump.
Step H: Open the stop valves before and after the pre-heater, and close the by-pass
valve in case of large size burners with separately mounted pre-heater.
Step I: Start one of the fuel oil pumps and set the other into stand-by mode.
Step J: Check that the oil pressure in the ring line is at the correct level.
Step K: Check that the tracing systems for the oil system and the burner unit are
operational.
Step L: The burner is now ready for operation.
OM5560_53#B.1
1.4 Normal start/stop
The control system automatically starts, stops, and regulates the burner in normal op-
eration depending on the steam demand. When the steam pressure is below the set
point for operation, the burner commences the start-up sequence.
In operation mode, the control system attempts to maintain the steam pressure at the
desired set point by regulation of the burner load. Two stage burners can be operated
on nozzle 1 load (minimum load) or nozzle 1+2 load (full load).Modulating burners
can be regulated through the complete load range from minimum load to full load.
However, should the steam demand decrease below the minimum firing load of the
burner, the steam pressure will increase to the set point for burner stop. The burner
stops and remains stopped until the set point for burner operation is reached again.
1.5 Change from diesel oil operation to heavy fuel oil operation
When the fuel supply is changed from diesel oil operation to heavy fuel oil operation,
the following work steps should be carried out:
Step A: Check that oil is present in the heavy fuel oil service tank. Open the stop
valve, which connects the service tank to the oil system. To avoid cavitation
of the pumps, the viscosity of the oil in the heavy fuel oil tank should not
exceed 380 cSt. If necessary, the oil tank should be heated.
Step B: Select heavy fuel oil on the manually operated three-way valves.
Step C: Check that the stop valves before and after the pre-heater are opened, and
that the by-pass valve is closed in case of large size burners with separately
mounted pre-heater.
Note: When the fuel type is changed from diesel oil to heavy fuel oil, a shut down
for low oil temperature may arise. If the burner is in operation, it will stop
due to this shut down.
Step D: Restart the burner when the low oil temperature shut down can be reset.
Step E: Check that the tracing systems for the oil system and the burner unit are
operational.
Step F: Check the heavy fuel oil temperature. The viscosity of the oil at the nozzle
head should be between 7.5-10 cSt. The pre-heating temperature can be
determined by means of the chart in the chapter "Viscosity-temperature
chart".
1.6 Change from heavy fuel oil operation to diesel oil operation
When the fuel supply is changed from heavy fuel oil operation to diesel oil operation,
the following work steps should be carried out:
Step B: Select diesel oil on the manually operated three-way valves.
OM5560_53#B.1
Step C: Check that the tracing of the piping system is off when the burner is in diesel
oil operation.
Caution: Heating of diesel oil in the piping system must be avoided.
1.7 Change of heavy fuel oil bunker type
If the heavy fuel oil bunker type is changed and the calorific value of the oil changes,
the oil/air ratio should be checked and adjusted to obtain the correct combustion data.
For further information about adjustment of the oil/air ratio please see the chapter
“Commissioning”.
1.8 Prolonged stop
When the boiler plant is stopped for a long period of time, the burner should be shortly
operated on diesel oil before the plant is shut down in order to flush the complete oil
system. Furthermore, tracing must be switched off.
OM5560_56#A.2
START OF THE BURNER
Start of the burner
1 Description
This section describes the necessary testing actions during start of the burner.
Note: Before the burner is started the set points for the safety device and the
water level controller should be checked according to the separate instruc-
tions.
Before the burner is started be sure that the water level is around “NORMAL WATER
LEVEL”.
Step A: Set the burner mode to “IGNITION LOAD” in “AUT”, and the burner will
start automatically.
The servomotor will move to maximum position (pre-purge position) and after the pre-
purge time back to ignition position. The ignition takes place, the solenoid valve is
actuated and the flame is established.If the flame is not established, it may be necessary
to adjust the ignition electrodes.
1.1 Check of the cam switch settings
If the combustion does not receive enough air, it will emit smoke. In this case:
Step A: Stop the burner, and adjust the position of cam switches on the servomotor.
Step B: Now restart the burner.
Note: If changes have been made to the position of the cam switches, it is neces-
sary to stop the burner and start it again in order to activate the new set-
tings.
Step C: When the burner is running correctly, switch to “PARTIAL LOAD” and
adjust the servomotor if the burner emits smoke.
Step D: When the burner is running correctly, switch to “FULL LOAD” and adjust
the servomotor if the burner emits smoke.
1.2 Manual operation functions
Test the manual operation functions:
Step A: Set the burner operation switch in position “MANUAL MOTOR”.

The burner motor should run approximately 100 seconds to ensure that the furnace is
free of oil gases.
OM5560_56#A.2
START OF THE BURNER
Step B: Set the burner operation switch in position “IGNITION”.

After the purge period (approximately 100 seconds), a spark will appear between the
two electrodes.
Step C: Check that the spark is visual.
Step D: Set the burner operation switch in position "OIL", and a flame will be es-
tablished.
Caution: The safety device for flame failure does only function in automatic op-
eration. This means that the operator has to control the flame at all
times. The burner can be equipped with a cut out device for manual
operation, but this depends on the classification society.
Note: In manual operation the start/stop signals for the burner are interrupted.
This means that the burner does not stop before the set point for the high
steam pressure switch is reached.
1.3 Check of the fuel oil system
Step A: Check the “STAND-BY PUMP STARTED” function. Stop the fuel oil
transfer pump in operation while the other pump is kept in stand-by
mode.When the pressure (see pressure gauge) drops to the set point for start
of the stand-by fuel oil pump, an alarm will appear and the stand-by pump
will start.
Step B: Check the “Low oil pressure” in the fuel oil ring line. Stop the fuel oil transfer
pump in operation while the other pump is in off position.
When the oil pressure (see pressure gauge) drops to the set point of the pressure switch
in the fuel oil ring line, an alarm will appear and the oil burner will stop.Check the
alarm for high pressure in the fuel oil return line, i.e. “Fuel return line pressure high”.
The following should be done:
Step C: Open the rod connection between the quick closing valves at the burner and
observe the burner cut out when the oil pressure raises to the set point.
Step D: Open the return valve again and refit the rod connection.
1.4 Check of the steam pressure alarms
Step A: Check the low steam pressure alarm by lowering the steam pressure below
the set point.
Step B: Check the high steam pressure alarm(s) by raising the steam pressure to the
set point, and observe if the burner cuts out.
1.5 Check the pressure switches for start/stop of the burner
The burner functions must be tested together with the control panel even if the pressure
switches and the pressure transmitter are adjusted, and the functions are tested in a
testing unit.
Test of the functions of the pressure switches and pressure transmitter in a testing unit
can only be considered as a rough test, and therefore all the set points should be checked
again by running the burner in automatic mode.
OM5560_56#A.2
START OF THE BURNER
1.6 Check of the flame detection and burner swing-out
The burner must be running in automatic mode.
Step A: The flame detector is checked by removing the photo cell from the burner
housing and covering the sensor.
The burner will cut out after two seconds and give an alarm for flame failure. If the
burner is running in ignition mode, the cut out time will be five seconds.The burner
swing-out should be checked when the burner is running. This is done as follows:
Step B: Screw out the screw which holds the burner flanges together and very care-
fully open the burner.
When the burner is opened a few mm, it will cut out for burner swing out.
OM5560_62#B.1
START ON DIESEL OIL
Start on diesel oil
1 Line of procedure
Usually the burner is operated on diesel oil (DO) when the boiler/steam system is cold
and heating is required.
Note: Please refer to the boiler instructions for information about heating up a
cold boiler.
The following briefly describes how the burner is started on DO.
Step A: Check that DO is available in the DO tank.

Step B: Switch on the “Main switch”.
Step C: Reset the switch for “Control voltage”.
Step D: Change to “Diesel oil” position.
The alarms for “Water Level too low”, “Steam pressure low", and ”Low oil pressure
in ring line" are on.
Step E: Open the air valve on top of the boiler.

Step F: Check all other valves on the boiler.
Step G: Start the feed water pump.
Step H: Start the fuel oil transfer pump and check that the oil pressure in the ring
line is between 1.0 and 5.0 bar, normally 2.0 bar.
Step I: If necessary, adjust the oil pressure by use of the pressure regulating valve.
Step J: When the water level is normal, reset the alarms at the reset switch. Only
the alarm “Steam pressure low” should be visible.
Step K: Check that the quick closing valves between the gas/air separator and burner
are opened.
Step L: Switch the burner mode to “AUT”, and the burner motor will start.
Diesel oil is now circulating through the burner system, and the servomotor moves to
the pre-purge position. After the pre-purge time, the servomotor moves to ignition load.
The ignition takes place, and after 2.5 s the solenoid valve is actuated. This closes the
re-circulation line, and diesel oil will be sprayed into the furnace. The atomized diesel
oil will be ignited, and the flame will be established.When the boiler is cold and dep-
ressurised, the burner must only operate in “PARTIAL LOAD".When the steam pres-
sure rises above the low steam pressure set point, the burner mode can be changed to
“FULL LOAD AUTO".
Caution: The main steam valve should always to be opened very slowly to avoid
water and steam shocks.
OM5560_62#B.1
START ON DIESEL OIL
Note: Never mix heavy fuel oil and diesel oil.
OM5560_65#A.2
CHANGE TO HEAVY FUEL OIL
Change to heavy fuel oil
1 Line of procedure
When heavy fuel oil (HFO) is to be used, the fuel oil must be pumpable. This is done
by turning on the tracing system on the fuel oil pipe lines. The temperature of the HFO
should be approximately 75°C. Then the fuel is heated in the pre-heater. The pre-heater
temperature set point can be read from the temperature-viscosity diagram.
At burner installations with the pre-heater type EV2D (low viscosity HFO), the ther-
mostat for regulating the set point is placed behind the cover of the pre-heater.
At burner installations with the pre-heater type WEV (high viscosity HFO), the set
point is adjusted on the CROw regulator placed in control panel.
When the burner mode is changed from DO to HFO, the following should be done:
Step A: Open the oil valves to the heavy fuel oil tank.
Step B: Change position of the three-way valve at the fuel oil tanks to operate on
HFO instead of DO.
The limit switch on the three-way valve will connect the electrical pre-heater with the
tracing system on the burner (i.e. heating of nozzle head, solenoid valve, burner oil
pump, etc.). Furthermore, this action connects the low oil temperature alarm, which
causes the burner to shut down due to low oil temperature alarm.
Step C: Check that the oil pressure in the fuel oil ring line is around 3.0 bar, and
adjust it, if necessary.
Step D: Reset the alarm on the boiler control panel.
Step E: Set the burner mode to “MANUAL MOTOR” and let the burner motor run
until the HFO is heated to a service temperature of approximately 75°C at
the fuel oil supply pump.
Step F: Switch the burner mode to “AUT” when the HFO service temperature has
been reached.
After about 50 seconds, the pre-purge period begins, and about 25 seconds later a flame
is established.If the oil is too cold, the burner may cut out after about 50 seconds. In
this case reset and try a new start. The oil temperature should be high enough at this
point.
Step G: When the boiler has been heated, the burner mode can be change to “FULL
LOAD AUTO”.
1.1 Start on cold HFO
However, if the burner has been stopped while running on HFO and has been out of
service for a long period, the fuel oil ring line is filled with cold oil. It is important that
the burner is started very carefully as described below:
OM5560_65#A.2
CHANGE TO HEAVY FUEL OIL
Step A: Switch on the power for the control panel with the burner in off position.
Step B: Start the tracing on the fuel oil ring line, and start the fuel oil transfer pump.
Step C: Set the burner mode to “MANUAL MOTOR” and let the burner motor run
until the HFO is heated to a service temperature of approximately 75°C at
the fuel oil supply pump.
Step D: Set the burner in “MANUAL IGNITION” mode and let it run for a few
seconds when the HFO service temperature has been reached.
Step E: Stop the burner again.
Step F: Switch the burner mode to “AUT” if the pump has no difficulties in circu-
lating the oil.
If the oil is too cold, the burner may cut out after about 50 seconds. In this case reset
and try a new start. The oil temperature should be high enough at this point.
Step G: When the boiler has been heated, the burner mode can be change to “FULL
LOAD AUTO”.
OM9280_01#E.1
VISCOSITY - TEMPERATURE CHART
Viscosity - temperature chart
1 Description
The preheating temperature can be determined by means of the viscosity - temperature
chart shown in Figure 1. In order to use the chart, the viscosity of the fuel oil must be
known at a reference temperature.
It should be noted that the preheating temperature should be set somewhat higher than
the temperature shown in the chart due to the heat loss between pre-heater and nozzle/
cup.
1.1 Example
The example is based on a pressure atomizing burner type MS or RMS.
Known:
Oil viscosity: 380 cSt. at 50°C
Required:
Preheating temperature in °C
Procedure to be followed:
Step A: Follow the reference temperature line at 50°C vertically down to the inter-
section with the 380 cSt. viscosity line.
Step B: From this point move parallel down with the nearest fuel grade line.
Step C: When the line meets the recommended nozzle viscosity line, go vertically
up to the temperature axis.
Step D: At this point read the desired preheating temperature of 150°C.
OM9280_01#E.1
VISCOSITY - TEMPERATURE CHART
Viscosity - temperature chart

Redwood
1 sec.
cSt.
cSt.
o o
Centigrade TEMPERATURE C
40,000 -15 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
10,000 10,000
9,000 9,000
8,000 8,000
30,000
7,000 7,000
6,000 Viscosity - temperature chart 6,000
20,000 5,000 5,000
4,500 4,500
15,000 4,000 4,000
3,500 3,500
3,000 3,000
10,000 2,500 2,500
8,000 2,000 2,000
1,500 1,500
5,000
4,000 1,000 1,000
900 900
3,000 800 800
700 700
600 600
2,000 500 500
450 450
400 400
1,500 350 350
300 300
1,000 250 250
KINEMATIC, CENTISTOKES
KINEMATIC, CENTISTOKES
800 200 200

REDWOOD, 1 SECOND
600 150 150

500
400 100 100
90 90
300 80 80
70 70
60 60
200 50 1 50
45 45
150 40 40
35 35
30 30
100 25 25
90
80 20 20
2
70
15 15
4
60
10 10
50 9 3 9
8 8
7 7
40 6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
28.5 1 1
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350
o o
Fahrenheit TEMPERATURE F
1 Recommended cup viscosity for rotary cup burners 45-60 cSt.

2 Recommended nozzle viscosity for steam atomizing burners 15-20 cSt.
3 Recommended nozzle viscosity for pressure atomizing burners type MS, RMS and Aalborg KBP 8-10 cSt.
4 Recommended nozzle viscosity for pressure atomizing burners type KBM and KBO 14-16 cSt.
Figure 1 visc1ex3264790en.wmf
OM5560_41#B.1
OIL SYSTEM
Oil system
1 Description
This section describes the oil system in general terms together with some of the re-
quirements needed to have a safe and reliable burner operation.
The fuel oil transfer pumps draw either diesel oil (DO) or heavy fuel oil (HFO) from
the oil tanks and pump it in the fuel oil ring line via a gas/air separator unit including
a quick closing valve and a filter to the burner.
From the burner excess oil is, via the return line, led to the gas/air separator unit from
where the oil transports the separated gases back to the fuel tank. Before the mixture
reaches the oil tank, a pressure regulating valve also located on the gas/air separator
unit ensures that the oil pressure in the ring line is between 1.0 and 5.0 bar. A three-
way ball valve leads the oil to the correct tank (DO or HFO).
From the oil pump, the oil is forced through a safety solenoid valve, which is open
when the burner is running. Then through the electric oil pre-heater where the oil is
preheated to the desired temperature suitable for a proper atomization.
From the pre-heater, the oil is lead to the nozzle head. When the burner is started, the
oil is forced to circulate through the nozzle head before being ignited to ensure a suf-
ficiently high temperature of the oil. This period is called the pre-purge time because
the furnace is ventilated at the same time. After ignition, a flame will be established,
and the burner is now running in normal operation.
In general it is recommended that the pipe lines to and from the fuel oil transfer pumps
are dimensioned so that the velocity inside the suction pipe does not exceed 1 m/s and
so that the velocity inside the pressure pipe does not exceed 3 m/s.
Whenever a boiler plant is intended to operate on heavy fuel oil, all pipes carrying fuel
oil must be insulated and traced in order to keep a sufficiently low viscosity of the oil.
The tracing can be done either by means of steam heating or by means of electric
heating cables. The fuel oil must be preheated to a temperature which secures the oil
pumps suitable operating conditions.
The oil pipes to the burner are made of flexible hoses. This enables the burner to be
swung out for service. During work on the oil system or the burner, the quick closing
valves should always be closed.
OM5560_74#C.1
MANUAL OPERATION
Manual operation
1 General
In the rare event of a total break down of the control system, the burner unit with
belonging systems can be operated in manual operation (also called emergency oper-
ation). Due to the fact that the majority of the safety interlock trips and alarms are
overruled in emergency mode, the safety precautions for the plant must be observed
very carefully.
Please note that in emergency operation mode the safety interlocks are reduced
to:
• Too low water level
• Flame failure
• Low combustion air pressure
Warning: When the burner operates in emergency mode, it is very important

that the boiler plant is carefully and continuously supervised by the
ship engineering personnel. Pay special attention to the steam pressure
and water level.
In emergency mode, the burner unit and supply systems are operated from inside the
local control panel and the power panel. Various operating switches are provided inside
the panels for operating purposes.
Before emergency operation of the burner is initiated, attempts to restart the control
system must be performed. If restart of the control system is impossible, the work steps
of the following sections must be followed.
2 Manual operation of the burner
2.1 Start and stop of the burner
2.1.1 Start of the burner

Step A: Turn the "AUTO/MANUAL" key-operated switch inside the local control
panel into position manual.
Step B: Turn the "AUTO/MANUAL" key-operated switch inside the power panel
into position manual.
Step C: Start one of the fuel oil pumps on the operating switch inside the power
panel, "FUEL OIL PUMP 1 START/STOP" or "FUEL OIL PUMP 2
START/STOP".
OM5560_74#C.1
MANUAL OPERATION
Step D: Press the "BURNER MOTOR" push button. The burner motor starts, and
the servomotor operates the air dampers into load nozzle 1 position (ignition/
nozzle 1 position).
Step E: Press the "LOAD UP" push button to purge the furnace. The pre-purge time
should be minimum 60 seconds.
Warning: Insufficient purging may cause danger of furnace explosions. If the

operator suspects that there is a risk of an oil spillage in the furnace,
it must be completely dried out before start of the burner is attempted.
Step F: Press the "LOAD DOWN" push button when the furnace has been suffi-
ciently purged.
Step G: Press the "IGNITION" push button and keep it pressed. The ignition trans-
former is energised.
Step H: Press the "OIL VALVES" push button and keep it pressed. At the same time
the safety valves open.
Step I: Release the "IGNITION" and "OIL VALVES" push buttons when the lamp
"FLAME"is illuminated. If the flame is not established within maximum 5
seconds, immediately return to step E.
Step J: When the flame is established the burner remains firing at load nozzle 1.
The burner load can be changed on the push buttons "LOAD DOWN" and
"LOAD UP" respectively.
Note: If the flame is distinguished during operation, immediately return to step

D. If the flame cannot be established in the following attempt, please see
the section for faults and rectifying faults.
Note: The automatic water level regulation is not operational in emergency

mode. This means that the water level in the boiler must be adjusted man-
ually.
Step K: In boiler plants with on/off regulation of the water level, one of the feed
water pumps should be started and stopped according to the water level in
the boiler.
Step L: In boiler plants with modulating control of the water level, one of the feed
water pumps should be started. The water level can then be regulated on the
feed water control valve by means of the manually operated hand wheel on
the actuator.
2.1.2 Stop of the burner
Step A: Press the "STOP" push button inside the local control panel to stop the
burner. The safety valves immediately close.
Step B: Press the "BURNER MOTOR" push button inside the power panel to stop
the burner motor.
OM5560_75#G.1
EMERGENCY OPERATION
Emergency operation
1 General
In the rare event of a total break down of the control system, the burner unit with
belonging systems can be operated in manual operation (also called emergency oper-
ation). Due to the fact that the majority of the safety interlocks trips and alarms are
overruled in emergency mode, the safety precautions for the plant must be observed
very carefully.
Please note that in emergency operation mode the safety interlocks are reduced
to:
• Too low water level
• Flame failure
• Low combustion air pressure
Warning: When the burner operates in emergency mode, it is very important

that the boiler plant is carefully and continuously supervised by the
ship engineering personnel. Pay special attention to the steam pressure
and water level.
In emergency mode, the burner unit and supply systems are operated from inside the
(local) control panel and the power panel. Various operating switches are provided
inside the panels for operating purposes.
Before emergency operation of the burner is initiated, attempts to restart the control
system must be performed. If restart of the control system is impossible, the work steps
of the following sections must be followed.
2 Manual operation of the burner
2.1 Start and stop of the burner
2.1.1 Start of the burner

Step A: Turn the "/MANUAL" key-operated switch inside (or mounted on the front
of ) the control panel into position manual.
Step B: Start one of the fuel oil pumps on the operating switch inside (or mounted
on the front of) the power panel."FUEL OIL PUMP 1 START/STOP" or
"FUEL OIL PUMP 2 START/STOP".
Step C: Switch the selector "BURNER MOTOR" to position “ON”, and the burner
motor starts.
OM5560_75#G.1
EMERGENCY OPERATION
Step D: Press the "AIR SERVO LOAD UP" push button until the burner reaches its
maximum firing position to purge the furnace. The pre-purge time should
be minimum 60 seconds.
Warning: Insufficient purging may cause danger of furnace explosions. If the

operator suspects that there is a risk of an oil spillage in the furnace,
it must be completely dried out before start of the burner is attempted.
Step E: When the furnace has been sufficiently purged press the "LOAD DOWN"
push button until the burner reaches its minimum firing position.
Step F: Press the "IGNITION" push button and keep it pressed. The ignition trans-
former is energised.
Step G: Press the "OIL VALVES" push button and keep it pressed. At the same time
the safety valves open.
Step H: Release the "IGNITION" and "OIL VALVES" push buttons when the lamp
"FLAME"is illuminated. If the flame is not established within maximum 5
seconds, immediately return to step D.
Step I: When the flame is established the burner remains firing at minimum load.
The burner load can be changed by pressing the push buttons "LOAD
DOWN" and "LOAD UP" for both air servomotor and oil servomotor.
Note: If the flame is distinguished during operation, immediately return to step

D. If the flame cannot be established in the following attempt, please see
the section for faults and rectifying faults.
Note: The automatic water level regulation is not operational in emergency

mode. This means that the water level in the boiler must be adjusted man-
ually.
Step J: In boiler plants with on/off regulation of the water level, one of the feed
water pumps should be started and stopped according to the water level in
the boiler.
Step K: In boiler plants with modulating control of the water level, one of the feed
water pumps should be started. The water level can then be regulated on the
feed water control valve by means of the manually operated hand wheel on
the actuator.
2.1.2 Stop of the burner
Step A: Press the "STOP" push button inside (or mounted on the front of ) the local
control panel to stop the burner. The safety valves immediately close.
Step B: Switch the selector "BURNER MOTOR" to position “OFF” inside (or
mounted on the front of ) the control panel to stop the burner motor.
OM5560_91#B.1
FAULTS AND RECTIFYING FAULTS
Faults and rectifying faults
1 Trouble shooting
If faults occur, the basic necessary conditions for operation must be checked:
• Is electric power supply available?

• Is oil available in the tanks?
• Are all the regulating controls, such as boiler pressure controls, low water switches,
safety cut out, etc. correctly adjusted?
If the cause of the fault is not due to any of these conditions, the functions connected
with the individual burner parts must be tested according to the fault finding chart in
Table 1.
Fault Finding Chart

Observation Cause Elimination of fault
1. Ignition
No ignition Ignition electrodes short - circuited Adjust
Ignition electrodes too far apart Adjust
Electrodes dirty or damp Clean
Ignition transformer defective Exchange
Insulator cracked Exchange
Ignition cable charred Exchange, find and eliminate cause
2. Motor
Does not run Automatic circuit breaker defective Exchange
Overload relay released Adjust
Motor defective Exchange
3. Oil Pump
Feeds no oil Gear damaged Exchange
Coupling damaged Exchange
Suction valve leaking Remove and clean or exchange
Oil lines leaking Tighten
Stop valves shut Open
Filter clogged Clean
Filter leaking Exchange
Quick action valve leaking Exchange pump
Capacity has decreased Exchange pump
Loud mechanical noise Pump sucks air Tighten threads
Vacuum in the oil line to high Clean filter, open valves completely
Cold oil Heat up the oil
4. Nozzles
OM5560_91#B.1
FAULTS AND RECTIFYING FAULTS
Fault Finding Chart

Uneven atomization Swirl plug loose Remove nozzle, tighten swirl plug
Bare partially clogged Exchange nozzle
Filter heavily contaminated Exchange nozzle
Nozzle worn out on account of age Exchange nozzle
Nozzle leaking Nozzle shut off defective Exchange nozzle
No oil passage Nozzle clogged Exchange nozzle
5. Burner Control with Flame Detector
Does not respond Flame detector dirty Clean
Motor does not run Burner control defect Exchange
Servomotor defect Exchange
Load feedback signal from potentiometer Exchange
No ignition Burner control defect Exchange
Servomotor defect Exchange
Load feedback signal from potentiometer Exchange
Lock out lamp lights up Flame fault Reset
6. Combustion Head
It is internally heavily fouled by Wrong adjustment Correct adjustment dimensions
oil, or has heavy carbon deposit Wrong combustion head Exchange
Nozzle too big or too small Exchange
Combustion air quantity too large or too small Readjust burner
Boiler room not sufficiently ventilated Start blowing fan in the engine room
Low oil temperature Heat up the oil
7. Solenoid Valve
Does not open Coil defective Exchange coil
Burner control defective Exchange burner control
Relay defective Exchange
Does not close tightly Contaminating particles on the sealing surface Open valve, clean set
Seat at valve destroyed Exchange
Table 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Fuel oil pump unit

.
Fuel oil supply pump, DS........................................... OM9295_05............... 22-2
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
FUEL OIL SUPPLY PUMP, DS)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
Fuel oil supply pump, DS

)XHORLOVXSSO\SXPS'6
OID 01 A
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Edition 01/01
Ausgabe 01/01
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Screw Spindle Pumps

Schraubenspindelpumpen
Double Stations DL / DS / DCL / DCS

For light and heavy fuel oil
Doppelstationen DL / DS / DCL / DCS

Für Heizöl leicht und schwer
22-2 //DQJXDJH8.
23 -1- Language UK
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
1. FUEL
ALLGEMEINE
OIL SUPPLY INFORMATION
PUMP, DS 1. GENERAL INFORMATION
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
- Betriebsanleitung ist gründlich durchzulesen und vom - The staff concerned with the unit should read the ope-
beteiligten Personal verbindlich zu befolgen. rating instructions and follow it.
- Die Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Instruktio- - The user is responsible for taking any precautions
nen übernimmt der Betreiber. outlined in this manual.
- Alle Pumpen werden einem Probelauf und einer Lei- - The capacity of all pumps has been tested during a
stungsprüfung unterzogen. Unser Werk verlassen nur test run. We supply only pumps which guarantee a
einwandfrei funktionierende Pumpen. trouble free operation.
- Maximale Werte der Einsatzbedingungen siehe Lei- - Maximum operation values are given on the perfor-
stungsschild. Abweichungen davon bedürfen unserer mance plate. Any differences require our confirma-
Zustimmung. Offene Fragen bitte mit unserem Werk tion. Contact us for any special information.
abklären.
- Das Fördermedium muß ausreichende Schmierfähig- - The medium must be lubricant. Mechanically abrasive
keiten aufweisen. Mechanisch abrasive und chemisch and chemically aggressive parts in the medium redu-
aggressive Bestandteile im Medium reduzieren die ce the life span of the pump. No guarantee can be gi-
Lebensdauer der Pumpe. Für Schäden die durch ven if the instructions in the manual have not been
Nichtbeachtung entstehen, übernehmen wir keine observed. The user must maintain the unit periodical-
Garantie. Verschleiß rechtzeitig wahrnehmen und ly and replace the wearing parts.
entsprechende Wartung vornehmen.
- Anlagen, bei denen der Ausfall oder das Versagen zu - Installations which could lead to personal injury and/
Personen- oder Sachschäden führen kann, sind mit or material failure should be equipped with an alarm
Alarmeinrichtungen und/oder Reserveaggregaten system and/or reserve aggregate. This system should
auszustatten, und deren Funktionstüchtigkeit in regel- be checked periodically.
mäßigen Abständen zu überprüfen.
- Für die Einhaltung der allgemeinen Unfallverhütungs-, - The user is responsible for following the general pre-
Sicherheits- und Betriebsvorschriften ist der Betreiber ventation of accidents and the local safety and/or
verantwortlich. operating directions.
Wichtige Hinweise: Important Remark:

- Bei Rückfragen oder Ersatzteilbestellungen ist stets - For questions regarding the pump and for spare parts
die Type und Pumpen Nr. anzugeben. orders please always mention type and pump num-
ber.
- Kann eine Störung nicht selbst behoben werden, so - If any problems occur which need our help, return the
ist uns die Pumpe möglichst in ungeöffnetem Zustand complete pump (for a correct damage report) and
und kostengünstigst zurückzusenden (bessere Scha- choose the transportation with the lowest price. It is
densklärung). Bitte darauf achten, daß Zubehörteile important that all the assembling parts like screws,
wie Verschraubungen, Kupplungen und dergleichen coupling a.s.o. are being dismantled as no guarantee
demontiert werden, da für die Rücksendung keine is given for the return shipment.
Gewähr übernommen werden kann.
2. ANLIEFERUNG 2. DELIVERY
Lieferung auf Vollständigkeit überprüfen, Reklamatio- Inspect the received goods for any shortages. Report
nen sofort weitergeben (Spedition / Werk). any mistakes immediately (to the forwarding agent or
the factory).
3. GEWÄHRLEISTUNG 3. WARRANTY
Gewährleistungsumfang gemäß unseren Lieferbedin- Warranty according to our terms of delivery. Repairs
gungen. Instandsetzungsarbeiten während der Gar- during the guarantee period must be carried out only
antiezeit darf durch unsere ausdrückliche Zustim- by the user or any other person authorized by us and
mung und Anweisung nur der Betreiber selbst, oder in accordance with our agreement and instructions.
ein von uns Beauftragter, durchführen.
Language UK -2- 22-3 / 23

/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
4. AUSFÜHRUNGSBESCHREIBUNG
FUEL OIL SUPPLY PUMP, DS
4. DESCRIPTION
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
4.1 Aufbau und Konstruktion, Durchflußrichtungs- und 4.1 Design Construction, flow directions and the direc-
Drehrichtungsanzeige der Pumpe ➣ Bild 1 tion of rotation of the pump ➣ scheme 1
Rückschlagventil IEC-Motor
non return valve IEC-motor
Laterne Manometer
lantern manometer
Kupplung Sicherheitsventil
coupling safety valve
Druckraum Filterdeckel
pressure chamber filter cover
Schraubenspindelpumpe Umschalthebel
screw spindle pump switch over level
Dreiwegkugelhahn
Saugraum three way ball valve
suction chamber
Ölwanne Mano-Vakuummeter
oil pan mano-vacuummeter
Korbfilter
basket filter
4.2 Hydraulisches Schaltschema ➣ Bild 2 4.2 Hydraulic Schematic ➣ scheme 2
Baureihe/series DL2 Baureihe/series DL3, Baureihe/series DL7,

DL4, DS1, DS3, DS4 DS7, DCL7, DCS7
4 5 8 4 3 5 A B C D
M M M
M M M
9 6 7 9 6 7 8 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8
1) Thermometer thermometer 6) Sicherheitsventil safety valve
2) Dreiwegküken jeweils A/B + C/D three-way-cock A/B + C/D connected 7) Rückschlagventil non return valve
3) absperrbare Mano- und Vakuummeter lockable mano- and vacummeters 8) absperrbares Manometer lockable manometer
4) Korbfilter ( DL2 - Schutzsieb ) basket filter ( DL2 - strainer ) 9) Dreiwegkugelhahn three way ball valve
5) Pumpenaggregat pump aggregate
4.3 Einsatzgrenzen / Leistungsdaten 4.3 Range of Applicaton/Range of Capacity
➣ Bild 3 ➣ scheme 3
Die angegebenen Werte beziehen sich auf gut The mentioned values refer to good lubricating medi-
schmierende Fördermedien. um.
Leichtöl / light fuel oil Schweröl / heavy fuel oil
Blockaggregate DL 2 DL 2 DL 3 DL 4 DL 7 DCL 7 DS 1 DS 3 DS 4 DS 7 DCS 7 Block Aggregates
150 bis/up
240 1300
a Druck bar 6 6 6 6 6 40 6 6 6 6 40 pressure stage, bar
b Temperatur °C min. 10 10 10 10 10 10 50 50 50 50 50 temperature °C min.
Temperatur °C max. 50 50 50 50 50 50 130 130 130 130 150* temperature °C max.
c Min. Temperatur für Doppel- min.-temperature for material
max. -10°C max. -10°C
station-Werkstoffe of double stations
d Viskosität mm2/s min. 4 4 4 4 4 4 10 10 10 10 10 viskosity mm2/s min.
Viskosität mm2/s max. 37 37 37 37 37 37 700 700 700 700 700 viskosity mm2/s max.
e Drehzahl / Viskosität: RPM/Viscosity
2900 1/min - max. mm2/s 80 80 80 80 80 80 152 152 152 152 152 2900 1/min - max. mm2/s
1450 1/min - mm2/s 700 700 700 700 700 1450 1/min - mm2/s
Saughöhe siehe bei NPSH - Kennlinien see NPSH - characteristic lines suction head
f Zulaufdruck: inlet pressure:
- mit Radialdichtung 0.5 bar - with radial shaft seal
- mit Gleitringdichtung 5 bar - with mechanical seal
* ... ab 130°C bis 150°C ist eine Außenlagerung und * ... from 130°C to 150°C a outside bearing and
eine SiC-Gleitringdichtung erforderlich a mechanical seal (SiC) is necessary
Andere Werte auf Anfrage Other values upon request
22-4 //DQJXDJH8.
23 -3- Language UK
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
4.4 Erforderliche NPSH-Werte (m WS) ➣ Bild 5 4.4 NPSH Required m WC ➣ scheme 5
FUEL OIL SUPPLY
Die NPSH-Werte PUMP, DS nicht, ob das För-
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6
berücksichtigen The NPSH values do not 20B$
take into account whether
dermedium bei geringerem Unterdruck schon entgast the medium degases at lower pressure (e. g. light fuel
(z.B.: bei Heizöl EL und Dieselöl max. 4 m WS). sxoil or diesel oil max. 4 m WC).
Einbaupumpe Viskosität mm2/s Viscosity mm2/s

6* 37 152 380
insert pump Drehzahl 1/min RPM 1/min
1450 1750 2900 3500 1450 1750 2900 3500 1450 1750 2900 3500 1450 1750 2900 3500
NPSH erforderlich (m WS) NPSH required (m WC)
FE 5 / NE 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,1
NE 7,5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,3 3,5
NE 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,3 3 3,1 3,6 4
NE 13 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 3,6 4,1 3,2 3,4 4,4 5,1
NE 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,2 3 3 3,6 3,9
NE 20 3 3 3 3,1 3 3 3 3,1 3 3 3,4 3,8 3,1 3,3 4,1 4,7
NE 26 3 3 3,2 3,7 3 3 3,2 3,7 3 3 3,9 4,5 3,3 3,6 4,9 5,8
NE 32 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,3 3,7 3 3,2 4 4,5
NE 42 3 3 3,2 3,7 3 3 3,2 3,7 3 3 3,9 4,5 3,3 3,6 4,9 5,8
NE 54 3 3 3,5 4,2 3 3 4 4,9 3,1 3,4 5 6,2 3,8 4,2 6,4 ---
CLD 55 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 3,6 4,1 3,2 3,4 4,9 5,6
CLD 74 3 3 3,5 4,1 3 3 3,5 4,1 3 3,1 4,3 --- 3,5 3,8 5,9 ---
CLD 85 3 3 3,8 4,5 3 3 3,8 4,5 3 3,3 4,7 --- 3,6 4 6,5 ---
CLD 118 3 3 --- --- 3 3 --- --- 3,2 3,5 --- --- 3,9 4,3 --- ---
*
* Bei Heizöl EL empfehlen wir eine max. Saughöhe For fuel oil we recommend a max. suction head of 4 m WC,
von max. 4 m WS am Stations-Saugflansch gemessen. measured at suction flange of the station.
Zuordnung: Einbaupumpen - Stationen Allocation: insert pumps - stations

FE 5 DL2/ 150 NE 20 DL3/2300 DS3/1100 CLD 55 DL7/6000 DS7/2800 DCS7/3000
DL2/240 DL7/1100 DS3/2300 DCL7/6500 DS7/6000 6500
NE 5 DS1/ 150 DL7/2300 DS7/1100
CLD 74 DL7/8500 DS7/3500 DCS7/4100
DS1/ 240 NE 26 DL3/2900 DS3/1500 DCL7/7500 DS7/8500 7500
NE 7,5 DL2/ 400 DS1/ 400 DL3/1500 DS3/2900
CLD 85 DL7/9000 DS7/3800 DCS7/4500
DL2/ 750 DS1/ 750 DL3/2900 DS7/1500
DCL7/9000 DS7/9000 9000
DS7/2900
NE 10 DL2/ 320 DS1/ 320 CLD118 DS7/7000
DL2/ 500 DS1/ 500 NE 32 DL4/3200 DS4/1600
DL2/1000 DS1/1000 DL7/3200 DS4/3200
DS7/1600
NE 13 DL2/1300 DS1/1300 DS7/3200
NE 15 DL3/1800 DS3/ 900 NE 42 DL4/4000 DS4/2000

DL7/ 900 DS3/1800 DL7/4000 DS4/4000
DL7/1800 DS7/ 900 DS7/2000
DS7/4000
NE 54 DL4/6000 DS4/6000
4.5 Zulaufdruck / Saugverhalten ➣ Bild 7 4.5 Inlet Pressure/Suction Behaviour ➣ scheme 7
Das im Heizöl "Schwer" enthaltene Wasser verdampft The water contained in the heavy fuel oil is evapora-
bei zu hohen Temperaturen und zu geringem Zulauf- ting because of high temperatures and less inlet pres-
druck. Das Diagramm zeigt den Mindest-Zulaufdruck sure. The diagramm shows the minimum inlet pres-
am Saugstutzen der Pumpe. Diese Werte sind einzu- sure on the suction side of the pump. These values
halten, um einen einwandfreien Betrieb zu gewährlei- must be observed to guarantee perfect operating con-
sten (Temperatur max. 150°C). ditions (temperature max. 150° C).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Verdampfungsdruck Wasser / vapour pressure water

empfohlener Zulaufdruck / recommended inlet pressure
Language UK - 4 - 22-5 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
4.6 Sicherheitsventil 4.6 Safety Valve
FUEL OIL Sicherheitsventil
4.6.1 Das SUPPLY PUMP,dient DS)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6
zum Schutz der Pumpe 4.6.1 The built-in safety valve protects20B$
the pump from beco-
vor Überdruck und darf nicht als Steuer- oder Regel- ming overpressured and should not be used as a con-
ventil verwendet werden. trol valve.
4.6.2 Der Öffnungsdruck ist ca. 10% über dem Betriebs- 4.6.2 The opening pressure is adjusted 10 % above the
druck werkseitig eingestellt (jedoch nicht unter 3 bar). operating pressure (but not less than 3 bar).
4.6.3 Kontrolle des eingestellten Kurzschlußdruckes 4.6.3 Checking the Adjusted Opening Pressure.
Druckseitiges Absperrventil langsam schließen. Das Close the stop valve at the pressure side of the pump.
Manometer zeigt den Kurzschlußdruck an. Achtung: The manometer shows the opening pressure.
Ein zu langer Umlauf des Mediums innerhalb der Attention: When the medium is circulating too long in
Pumpe kann zu Erhitzung und in der Folge zu mecha- this way, the pump will warm up and as a result this
nischen Schäden führen. can cause mechanical damage.
4.6.4 Ventilverstellung ➣ Bild 8 4.6.4 Adjusting the Valve ➣ scheme 8
Drehen nach rechts (Uhrzeigersinn) erhöht den Öff- Turning the adjusting screw clockwise increases the
nungsdruck, drehen nach links vermindert den Öff- opening pressure, turning it anticlockwise decreases
nungsdruck. Beachtung: Bei DL7/DS7/DCL7/DCS7 ist it. Attention: Before adjusting the valve please remove
vor der Ventilverstellung die Fixierschraube zu lösen. the cover screw for DL7/DS7/DCL7/DCS7.
DL2 DL3, DL4, DS1, DS3, DS4 DL7, DS7, DCL7, DCS7
Fixierschraube / cover
4.7 Heizung 4.7 Heating , Optional
4.7.1 Bei hochviskosen Medien ist eine Pumpenheizung er- 4.7.1 It is necessary to install a heating if the fluid is of high
forderlich. Kaltstarts sind zu vermeiden (Aufheizzeiten viscosity. To avoid cavitation and damage of seals,
beachten). Kavitation und Wellendichtungsschäden don`t start up the pump with cold fluid. (Pay attention
können die Folge sein. Beim Aufheizvorgang sind we- to heating up period). When heating up, all valves
gen der Wärmeausdehnung sämtliche Ventile zu öff- must be opened because of expansion due to heat.
nen.
4.7.2 Elektro-Heizungen ➣ Bild 9 4.7.2 Electrical Heating ➣ scheme 9. Optional
E-Heizungen sind durch eine begrenzte Heizleistung Electrical heatings are dimensioned for a limited hea-
so dimensioniert, daß eine Überhitzung nicht möglich ting capacity and can therefore not overheat.
ist.
a) Spannung 220 Volt a) voltage 220 Volt
b) Frequenz 50 Hz / 60 Hz b) frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz
c) Leiterquerschnitt 2 x 1 mm2 c) wire cross section 2 x 1 mm2
Andere Werte auf Anfrage Other values upon request
DS 1 DS 3, DS 4 DS 7, DCS / L 7
Heizleistung / heating capacity Heizleistung / heating capacity Heizleistung / heating capacity
180 Watt 250 Watt 400 Watt
4.7.3 Medium-Heizung ➣ Bild 10 4.7.3 Medium Heating ➣ scheme 10, Optional

Beachten der Aufheiztemperaturen im Pumpen- und Pay attention to heating up temperature in pump/-
Dichtungsraum. and seal casing.
a) bei Radialdichtungen max. 80°C a) for radial shaft seals max. 80° C
b) bei Gleitringdichtungen max. 100°C b) for mechanical seals max. 100 ° C
Dampfheizung Steam Heating
a) Temperatur max. 180°C a) temperature max. 180°C
b) Druck max. 18 bar DS1 b) pressure max. 18 bar DS1
max. 6 bar DS3, DS4 max. 6 bar DS3, DS4
Bei der Dampfheizung muß dafür gesorgt werden, With steam heating it is important to avoid higher hea-
daß die Aufheiztemperatur von max. 100° C nicht ting up temperatures than max. 100° C, measured in
überschritten wird. the station casing.
22-6 //DQJXDJH8.
23 - 5 - Language UK
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
a) b) a) c) a)
FUEL OIL SUPPLY PUMP,
Elektrisch DS t (min)
Dampf
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 p t Dampfmenge t (min)
20B$
Aufheizzeiten/ Electrical 20°C 50°C Steam (bar) (°C) Steam Capacity 20°C 50°C
Heating Up Period DS1 (180W) 60 180 DS1 15 180 5 kg/h 30 100
DS4 (250W) 120 240 DS4 15 180 5 kg/h 40 120
DS7 (400W) 180 420 DS7 5 150 5 kg/h 60 240
DS1 DS3, DS4 DS7, DCS7

Standardausführung mit eingebauter Mediumheizung
Standard design with built in medium heating
Pumpe
Anschluß Mediumheizung
connection medium hea-
30 48
elektr. Heizung / electr. heating ➣ Bild 9 / scheme 9
ti
Einfüll-/Entlüftungsschraube
feed-/vent screw
Mediumheizung / medium heating ➣ Bild 10 / scheme 10
Bei nachträglichem Einbau wird die Heizung seitlich

eingeschraubt. Die Einfüll-/Entlüftungsschraube öff-
nen und mit Thermoöl auffüllen, bis ca. 65 mm von
Oberkante-Einfüllöffnung bis zum Ölspiegel (ent-
spricht ca. 1,4l Öl).
When the heating device is installed later, it must be
screwed in laterally. Open the feed-/vent screw and
fill with thermo oil approx. 65 mm below the upper ed-
ge (approx. 1,4l oil).
070,1 Abschlußdeckel *730,2 Flachdichtung 070,1 end cover *730,2 flat gasket
161 Wärmeleitplatte *730,5 Flachdichtung 161 head conductor plate *730,5 flat gasket
242 Heizblock 908,2 Verschlußschraube 242 heating block 908,2 screw plug
*481 Heizpatrone 908,3 Verschlußschraube *481 heating cartridge 908,3 screw plug
484 Klemmleiste 914,1 Zylinderschraube 484 porcelain terminal 914,1 socket screw
493 Verschraubung 915,4 Zylinderschraube 493 screw connection 915,4 socket screw
*empfohlene Ersatzteile * recommended spare parts
4.8 Druckanzeige ➣ Bild 11 4.8 Pressure Display ➣ scheme 11.
Absperrhähne bei Mano- und Vakuummeter sind Stop valves of mano- and vacuummeters are always
grundsätzlich geschlossen. Nur zu Kontrollzwecken closed. Open only for the purpose of checking!
öffnen!
Stellung offen Stellung geschlossen

position open position closed
5. MONTAGE 5. ASSEMBLING
5.1 Aufstellung
5.1 Installation
5.1.1 Bei der Standortwahl sind die Einsatzgrenzen und
5.1.1 To identify the best installation position consider the
NPSH-Werte zu beachten. ➣ Bild 5
max. application limits and NPSH values.➣ ➣scheme 5
5.1.2 Es sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu beachten.
5.1.2 Consider the environmental conditions.
Funktion, Sicherheit und Lebensdauer dürfen nicht
Influence of temperature, moisture and explosive at-
durch Feuchtigkeit, Temperatureinflüsse oder explo-
mosphere can affect function, security and life time of
sionsfähige Athmosphären beeinträchtigt werden.
the pump.
5.1.3 Beim Aufstellen ist darauf zu achten, daß alle Teile
5.1.3 When locating the unit ensure that it can be worked
der Pumpe gut zugänglich sind, und eine Wartung
on easily as you will need to maintain it.
leicht möglich ist.
Language UK - 6- 22-7 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
5.1.4 Einbaulage / Durchflußrichtungen ➣ Bild 12 5.1.4 Assembling Position/Flow Direction: ➣scheme 12
DL2 DL3, DL4, DS1, DS3, DS4 DL7, DS7, DCL7, DCS7
* Motorschaltschema
motor circuit schematic
für/for DL2/150 , DL2/240
EIN/ON
AUS/OFF
MP
(220V)
u 1 3
R
v
S
w
T M
5.2 Rohrleitungsanschluß 5.2 Pipework Connection

Rohrspannungen vermeiden. Grundsätzlich dürfen Avoid stress of pipes. The pumps should not serve as
die Pumpen nicht als Fixpunkt der angeschlossenen a fixed reference point for the installed pipe line. Such
Rohrleitungen dienen. Eventuell auftretende Kräfte occurences should be avoided, if possible, e. g. bra-
und Momente (z.B.: Verspannungen, Ausdehnungen cing, the expansion of pipe due to variations in tem-
der Rohrleitung durch Temperatureinflüsse, Reak- perature and unit stress. We recommend to install a
tionskräfte) sind zu vermeiden. Bei möglichen Wär- compensator in case of heat expansions of the pipes.
meausdehnungen der Rohrleitungen ist der Einbau The dimensions of the suction pipe must allow a liquid
von Kompensatoren zu empfehlen. Die Saugleitung velocity of 0,5 up to max. 1,3 m/sec and the pressure
ist so zu bemessen, daß die Fließgeschwindigkeit pipe must allow a liquid velocity of 2 - 3 m/sec. The
zwischen 0,5 bis max. 1,3 m/sec. und die Drucklei- suction pipework must be installed with a gradual rise
tung zwischen 2 bis 3 m/sec. liegt. Die Saugleitung and air-tight. The pipework and the pump must be
muß vakuumdicht und steigend verlegt werden. Rohr- free of impurity (e.g. flushing). When the pipework in-
system und Pumpe müssen frei von Verunreinigun- stallation is being tested for leaks pay attention to the
gen sein (z.B.: Spülung). Wird das Rohrsystem auf max. admissible inlet pressure of shaft seal. Attention:
Dichtheit geprüft, ist der max. zulässige Zulaufdruck don´t use water cause of rust formation. When drai-
der Wellendichtung zu beachten. Achtung: wegen ning the system it is important that pipe and pump are
Rostbildung kein Wasser verwenden. Beim Entleeren free from dirt (e. g. welding beads, pieces of steal
der Flüssigkeit ist darauf zu achten, daß die Rohrlei- etc). Carry out preservation (see Preservation). Oxy-
tung und die Pumpe frei von Verunreinigungen sind dation and impurity can cause a breakdown.
(z.B.: Schweißschlacke, Zunder). Konservierung vor-
nehmen (siehe Konservierung). Oxydation und Ver-
unreinigungen können zu einem Pumpenausfall füh-
ren.
5.5 Foot Valve
5.5 Fußventil With the suction operation it is necessary to install a
Bei Saugbetrieb ist ein Fußventil mit Saugkorb einzu- foot valve with strainer. This process prevents the in-
bauen. Der Ansaugvorgang wird erleichtert, grobe duction of impurity and draining of the suction pipe.
Verschmutzungen ferngehalten, und ein Entleeren
der Saugleitung verhindert.
5.6 Electrical Installation
5.6 Elektrischer Anschluß All electrical connections should be made overload
Motor ist entsprechend den örtlichen Vorschriften und protected in accordance with any local regulations
dem Motorleistungsschild überlastgeschützt anzu- and with the motor labels. Check motor labels for cor-
schließen. Vorhandene Netzspannung mit Motorlei- rect voltage and current ratings. Pay attention to the
stungsschild vergleichen. Schaltbild im Motorklemm- wiring schematic in the motor terminal box.
kasten beachten.
22-8 //DQJXDJH8.
23 - 7- Language UK
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
6. FUEL
INBETRIEBNAHME
OIL SUPPLY PUMP, DS
6. START UP
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
6.1 Trockenlaufschutz 6.1 Dry Running Protection
Pumpen dürfen nie trocken laufen, da es zur Zerstö- The pumps must never be allowed to run dry, as this
rung von Pumpenteilen kommen kann. Leichtgängig- will cause severe damage to all the pump parts.
keit händisch prüfen. Empfehlung: Pumpe sowie Sau- Check by hand if the pump runs easy. We recom-
gleitung mit Medium füllen und entlüften (A - Auffül- mend: to fill the pump and suction pipe with the medi-
len, B - Entlüften) ➣ Bild 16 um and vent. (A - to fill, B - to vent) ➣ scheme 16
Type DL2 Type DL3, DL4, DL7, DS1, DS3,
DS4, DS7, DCL7, DCS7
908.2
074
Füllvorgang: How to fill:
- Verschlußschraube 908,2 entfernen - remove screw plug 908,2 - Beide Filterdeckel 074 entfernen - Remove both filter covers 074
- Hebel nach links - Öl einfüllen - turn lever to the left - fill with oil und Station mit Öl auffüllen. and fill station with oil.
- Hebel nach rechts - Öl einfüllen - turn lever to the right - fill with oil
Pumpe händisch laut Drehrichtungspfeil durchdrehen Rotate the pump by hand in the direction of the arrow
und auf Leichtgängigkeit prüfen. and check if the pump runs easy.
6.2 Drehrichtungskontrolle 6.2 Checking the Direction of Rotation
Die Drehrichtung des Motors muß mit dem Drehrich- The direction of rotation of the motor should corre-
tungspfeil der Pumpe übereinstimmen. Zur Drehrich- spond with the arrow shown on the pump. To check
tungskontrolle kann der Motor, bei geöffneten Saug- the direction of rotation it is allowed to start the motor
und Druckventilen, kurzzeitig eingeschaltet werden. for a short time, when the suction and pressure val-
Bei falscher Drehrichtung saugt die Pumpe nicht an ves are open. In case of wrong sense of rotation
und führt zu Schäden an der Pumpe. Länger dauern- pump does not prime and as a result this can cause
de Drehrichtungskontrolle ist ohne Pumpe durchzu- damage of the pump. If checking the direction of ro-
führen. tation longer than recommended this process should
be continued without the pump.
6.3 Start 6.3 Start Up
Vor dem Anfahren saug- und druckseitige Ventile öff- Prior to start up open valves on suction and pressure
nen. Während des Anfahrvorganges ist die Pumpe / side. Vent pump/station during start up. Extreme tem-
Station zu entlüften. Extreme Temperaturschocks perature shock may destroy the pump/station. Pay at-
können die Pumpe / Station zerstören. Hebelstellung tention to the lever position at block aggregates and
bei Blockaggregaten und Stellung der Absperrventile to the position of the stop valve at single and double
bei den Einzel- und Doppelstationen beachten. stations.
➣ Bild 17 ➣ scheme 17
Type DL2
Type DL3,
DL4,
DS1 DS3 DS4
Hebel rechts: nur rechte Pum- Hebel links: nur linke Pumpe *Hebel Mittelstellung: beide
pe ist betriebsbereit ist betriebsbereit Pumpen sind betriebsbereit
Lever right: only right pump is Lever left: only left pump is re- Lever position middle: both
ready for operation ady for operation pumps are ready for operation
Type DL7,DS7,
DCL7, DCS7 1 2
linke Pumpe und linker Fil- rechte Pumpe und rechter linke Pumpe und rechter rechte Pumpe und linker
ter betriebsbereit Filter betriebsbereit Filter betriebsbereit Filter betriebsbereit
left pump and left filter rea- right pump and right filter left pump and right filter re- right pump and left filter re-
dy for operation ready for operation ady for operation ady for operation
1 beide Pumpen und linker Filter betriebsbereit 1 both pumps and left filters ready for operation
2 beide Pumpen und rechter Filter betriebsbereit 2 both pumps and right filters ready for operation
Language UK - 8- 22-9 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
7. BEDIENUNG, WARTUNG
7. MAINTENANCE
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
7.1 Wartung und Kontrolle 7.1 Maintenance and Inspection
Sicht- und Geräuschkontrolle sowie Dichtheitsüber- We recommend that the unit is given a visual and noi-
wachung sollten täglich durchgeführt werden. se check every day, as well as checking the function
of gaskets.
7.3 Filterreinigung 7.3 Cleaning the Filter
Die Filterreinigung ist abhängig vom Verschmut- The frequency of cleaning the filter is dependent on
zungsgrad des Fördermediums. Die angebauten Va- the contamination of the medium. The degree of con-
kuummeter dienen zur Verschmutzungsanzeige. tamination is visible on the vacuummeter built on.
Höchstzulässiges Vakuum bei Heizöl EL max. 0,5bar admissible vacuum at: light fuel oil max. 0,5 bar
Heizöl S max. 0,7bar heavy fuel oil max. 0,7 bar
Bei zu stark verschmutzten Filtern tritt Kavitation A high contamination of the filter will cause cavitation
(starke Geräusche) auf. Die Filterreinigung darf nicht (noise). Cleaning the filter is not allowed when lever is
bei Mittelstellung des Umschalthebels erfolgen. in the middle position. Turn the lever first to the spare
Zuerst auf die Reservepumpe schalten und dann den pump, then turn lever to the running pump (see 6.3
Umschalthebel zur laufenden Pumpe drehen (siehe start / position of lever) ➣ scheme 17
6.3 Start / Hebelstellung) ➣ Bild 17
7.4 Pumpenausbau 7.4 Dismantling the Pump
Zu beachten ist elektrische Abschaltung, Umschalthe- Pay attention to the electrical switch off, close lever or
bel oder Saug- und Druckventile schließen, Pumpen suction- and pressure valve, drain pump (drain plug),
entleeren (Entleerungsschraube), beim Wiedereinbau when installing the pump again check if flat gaskets/o-
Flachdichtungen und O-Ring auf evt. Schäden prüfen. rings are damaged. The insert pump can be removed
Der Ausbau einer Einbaupumpe kann ohne Betriebs- without interruption of operation. Turn the lever as
unterbrechung durchgeführt werden. Der Umschalt- described under point 7.3 "Cleaning the Filter". Dis-
vorgang ist wie bei der Filterreinigung 7.3 auszufüh- mantle the motor and lantern. Loosen insert pump by
ren. Motor und Laterne ausbauen. Einbaupumpe mit using 2 screw drivers. Check whether non return val-
2 Schraubendreher vorsichtig lösen und kontrollieren ves are leaky and oil is penetrating. If not remove the
ob eventuell durch undichte Rückschlagventile Öl insert pump. Before installing the insert pump, make
austritt. Bei Gutbefund Einbaupumpe herausheben. sure that the level of oil in the station casing is max.
Vor dem Einbau darauf achten, daß im Stationsge- 50 mm. Otherwise it may prove difficult to install due
häuse der Ölspiegel max. 5 cm hoch steht. Anson- to oil displacement Check the O-rings of the insert
sten erschwerter Einbau der Einbaupumpe durch Öl- pump whether they are damaged or not and grease
verdrängung. O-Ringe der Einbaupumpe auf Schä- them slightly. Push the insert pump under light pres-
den überprüfen und leicht einfetten. Einbaupumpe mit sure inside the station casing. Mount lantern and mo-
leichtem Druck ins Stationsgehäuse einschieben, La- tor and turn the lever to the middle position.
terne und Motor aufbauen und Umschalthebel in Mit-
telstellung bringen.
7.5 Konservierung, Einlagerung 7.5 Preservation and Storage
Durch den Prüflauf ist die Pumpe mit Prüföl benetzt The pumps have been wetted and preserved with hy-
und dadurch konserviert. Die vom Werk nicht konser- draulic oil ISO VG 46, during testing. The user has
vierten Teile sind nach den örtlichen Gegebenheiten got to preserve all other parts, which are not preser-
vom Betreiber durchzuführen. Bei längerem Stillstand ved in the factory, in accordance with the local condi-
oder Nichtinbetriebnahme ist vom Betreiber ein Korro- tions. If the pump is not in operation for any period of
sionsschutz anzubringen. Empfehlung: Pumpenin- time or stored the user has to preserve it with an anti
nenbereich - Säure und harzfreies Öl. Pumpenaußen- rust lubricant. We recommend: The inside surface of
bereich - Castrol Rustilo DWX 33 oder nach Wahl des the pump - acid and resin free oil. Pump outside - Ca-
Betreibers, ortsbezogen. strol Rustilo DWX 33 or others, selected by the user
regarding the local conditions.
7.6 Mögliche Schäden 7.6 Preventation of Damage Caused by Leakage
Mögliche Schäden durch evt. auftretende Undichthei- The user must install an alarm device to prevent da-
ten an der Pumpe sind verbraucherseits durch Einbau mage caused by leakage.
von Warngeräten zu verhindern.
7.7 Kontrolle der Reservepumpe 7.7 Checking of Spare Pump
Die Kontrolle der Reservepumpe sollte wöchentlich It is necessary to check the function of the spare
einmal durchgeführt werden. Die Kontrolle des Um- pump weekly. It is recommended to operate the lever
schalthebels auf Leichtgängigkeit ist empfehlenswert. weekly to guarantee that it doesn`t become stuck.
Die Rückschlagventile können durch Verschmutzun- Contamination of the non return valves can cause le-
gen undicht werden. Durch mehrmaliges Umschalten akage. Contamination can be removed by switching
der Pumpe 1 auf Pumpe 2, sowie gemeinsamen over from pump 1 to pump 2 or when both pumps are
Pumpenbetrieb können evt. Verschmutzungen gelöst operating together for a short period of time. If either
werden. Führt dies nicht zum Erfolg, ist Rücksprache of these solutions fail it is necessary to discuss it with
mit dem Werk erforderlich. the factory.
22-10/DQJXDJH8.
/ 23 -9- Language UK
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
8. FUEL
STÖRUNGEN / BEHEBUNG
OIL SUPPLY PUMP, DS
8. FAILURES/REMEDIES
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
Betriebsstörung Mögliche Ursache / Behebungsvorschlag Failures
Possible Reasons, Remedies

- Pumpe saugt nicht an 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12 - pump does not prime
- Pumpe bringt nicht die volle Leistung 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 17, 18 - pump does not produce full capacity
- Pumpe arbeitet laut 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 13, 17 - pump is noisy
- Motor wird zu warm 9, 10, 13 - motor heats up
- ungleichmäßige Förderung 3, 5, 8, 10, 11, 18 - irregular flow
- Wellendichtung ist undicht 7, 10, 14, 15, 16, 18 - leaking shaft seal
Nr. BEHEBUNGSVORSCHLAG
1 PUMPE IST TROCKEN
Pumpe mit Medium füllen No. REMEDIES
2 DREHRICHTUNG DER PUMPE IST FALSCH 1 PUMP IS DRY
Drehrichtung entsprechend dem Pfeil einstellen fill pump with liquid
3 SAUGFILTER, -VENTIL ODER -LEITUNG 2 INCORRECT DIRECTION OF ROTATION
VERSTOPFT adjust rotation according to arrow on pump
Teile überprüfen und reinigen 3 CLOGGED SUCTION STRAINER, VALVE OR PIPE
4 SAUGLEITUNG ODER WELLENDICHTUNG check parts and clean
UNDICHT
Saugleitung (Verbindungsstellen, Ventile) bzw. 4 SUCTION PIPE LOOSE, SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
Wellendichtung überprüfen check suction pipe (connections, valves) resp. shaft
5 SAUGHÖHE ZU GROSS seal
Ansaughöhe (Niveauunterschied) verringern,
Leitungslänge verringern, Leitungsquerschnitt vergrö- 5 SUCTION HEAD TOO HIGH
ßern, Viskosität des Mediums verringern (erwärmen) reduce static suction head or length of suction pipe,
größere Saugfilter einbauen. increase suction pipe dia. or decrease viscosity of li-
6 ACHSFEHLER Pumpe - Kupplung - Motor quid (heat up), use larger suction filter.
Wellenende genauer ausrichten, Kupplung
auswuchten 6 PUMP-COUPLING-MOTOR NOT CORRECTLY
7 SCHWINGUNGEN UND PULSATION IN DER ALIGNED
ANLAGE correct alignment, balance coupling
Aggregat elastisch lagern, Anschlüsse mit 7 PIPEWORK "HAMMER"
Schläuchen ausführen support elastic, connect suction and discharge to sta-
8 ÜBERDRUCKVENTIL VERKLEMMT BZW. ZU tion with flexible hoses
NIEDRIG EINGESTELLT
Ventil überprüfen bzw. neu einstellen 8 SAFETY VALVE JAMS, OR IS SET TOO LOW
9 FALSCHE SPANNUNG ODER FREQUENZ check valve or change pressure setting
Drehzahl und Stromaufnahme des Motors kontrollie-
ren, Spannung und Frequenz mit Typenschild 9 INCORRECT VOLTAGE OR FREQUENCY
vergleichen check speed and current of motor and compare
10 MEDIUM DICKFLÜSSIG voltage and frequency with the data shown on the
Mediumtemperatur erhöhen, kleinere Drehzahl name plate of the motor
11 LUFTEINSCHLÜSSE BZW. GASBILDUNG IM 10 LIQUID OF HIGH VISCOSITY
MEDIUM increase temperature of liquid, select lower speed
Lufteintrittsstellen beseitigen, Saughöhe verringern 11 AIR OR GAS IN LIQUID
bzw. Zulaufdruck erhöhen check if suction is airtight, reduce suction head, resp.
12 PUMPE ENTLÜFTET SICH NICHT increase inlet pressure
Druckleitung an der höchsten Stelle entlüften
13 MOTORLAGER BESCHÄDIGT 12 PUMP DOES NOT VENT
Motor neu lagern vent at highest point of discharge pipe
14 WELLENDICHTUNG BESCHÄDIGT 13 MOTOR BEARING DAMAGED
Wellendichtung auswechseln replace motor bearing
15 ZULAUFDRUCK ZU GROSS ODER ZU KLEIN 14 SHAFT SEAL DAMAGED
Zulaufdruck anlagenseitig verringern, druckseitig replace shaft seal
Rückschlagventil einbauen 15 SUCTION PRESSURE TOO HIGH OR TOO LOW
16 KALTSTART BEI FÖRDERUNG VON SCHWER-ÖL reduce suction pressure, install a non-return valve on
Pumpenheizung einbauen discharge side
17 SICHERHEITSVENTIL FLATTERT 16 START WITH COLD LIQUID (Heavy fuel oil)
Öffnungsdruck höher einstellen, durch Drehen der install a pump heating device
Language UK
- 10 - 22-11 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
9. ERSATZTEILE / DEMONTAGE
9. DISMANTLING OF SPARE PARTS
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6
9.1 Assembling Instructions 20B$
9.1 Montagehinweise
- Remove coupling with removal device and remove
- Abziehen der Kupplung mit Hilfe einer Abziehvor key also.
richtung und Paßfeder entfernen.
- Mark installation position of each part.
- Einbaulage und Stellung der einzelnen Teile markie- Attention: Spindle set must be reassembled in the ori-
ren. Wichtig: Spindelsatz muß in ursprünglicher Stel- ginal position.
lung wieder eingebaut werden.
- Check flat gaskets and o-rings whether they are da-
- Flachdichtung und O-Ringe auf Schadhaftigkeit kon- maged. If necessary replace them.
trollieren und evt. ersetzten.
- Clean and polish the running surface of the main
- Lauffläche der Hauptspindel im Bereich der O-Ringe spindle in the range of the o-rings and seal lips.
und Dichtlippen reinigen und glätten.
- The coupling end should be covered with an installa-
- Zum Schutz der O-Ringe und Dichtlippen muß der tion sleeve to protect the o-rings and the seal lips. For
Kupplungszapfen mit einer Montagehülse oder ähnli- an easy installation it is useful to grease the surface
chem abgedeckt werden. Flächen zur Montageer- slightly.
leichterung leicht einfetten.
- Install new radial shaft seals with spacer according to
- Neue Radialdichtringe mit Stützring entsprechend the section drawing and fill the space between with
dem Schnittbild einbauen und Zwischenräume mit grease. We recommend Molybdenum Disulphide gre-
Fett füllen. Wir empfehlen eine Molybdän-Disulfid Pa- ase.
ste.
- Mechanical Seal:
- Gleitringdichtung: Zur Erleichterung der Demontage To dismantle the mechanical seal, remove the slide
Gleitring und Feder durch Drehen im Uhrzeigersinn ring and the spring from the main spindle by twisting it
von der Hauptspindel abziehen. Gegenring mit einer clockwise. Press counter ring with a plastic sleeve out
Kunststoffhülse oder ähnlichem aus dem Gehäuse of the casing. When reassembling, make sure that the
drücken. Beim Einbau darauf achten, daß der Gegen- counter ring is closed to the o-ring.
ring satt auf dem O-Ring liegt.
- Be careful about the flat surfaces of the new mechani-
- Die Dichtflächen der neuen Gleitringdichtung äußerst cal seal. Clean it with petroleum ether and grease it
vorsichtig behandeln. Mit Waschbenzin reinigen und with a few drops of resin free oil. When installing try to
mit einigen Tropfen harzfreiem Schmieröl versehen. avoid touching the part and try to avoid getting it dirty
Beim Zusammenbau möglichst nicht berühren und je- also. Slide on the spring by turning it clockwise.
den Schmutz fernhalten. Aufschieben der Feder
durch Drehen im Uhrzeigersinn.
- When reassembling make sure also, that the overflow
- Beim Zusammenbau darauf achten, daß die Überlauf- bypasses from casing and seal correspond.
bohrungen vom Gehäuse und der Dichtung überein-
stimmen.
- After installation it is necessary to check if the pump
- Nach der Montage durch händisches Drehen Leicht- rotates easy when turning clockwise by hand.
gängigkeit prüfen.
22-12/DQJXDJH8.
/ 23 - 11 - Language UK

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
9.2. Explosionszeichnungen ➣ Bild 20 9.2 Cut View of Pump ➣ scheme 20
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
Einbaupumpe FE 5
Insert Pump FE 5
Language UK
- 12 - 22-13 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Einbaupumpe
insert pump
NE 5 - 13
NEG 5 - 13
Einbaupumpe
insert pump
NE 15 - 57
NEG 15 - 57
NEGA 15 - 57
22-14/DQJXDJH8.

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
Einbaupumpe
insert pump
CLDR 15 bis/to CLDR 42
CLDG 15 bis/to CLDG 42
Außenlagerung
outside bearing
1) CLDGA 15 - 26
2) CLDGA 32 - 42
Language UK
- 14 - 22-15 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Einbaupumpe
insert pump
CLDR 55 - 118
CLDG 55 - 118
Außenlagerung
outside bearing
CLDGA 55 - 118
22-16/DQJXDJH8.

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Nachträglicher Umbau der Stationen DCL und DCS auf Subsequent rebuilding of the station DCL and DCS with
FUEL OIL SUPPLY PUMP,
Außenlagerung DS
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 outside bearing 20B$
1. Motoren demontieren 1. dismantle motor

2. Muttern (HVM 09) heraus- 2. remove hexagon nut (HVM 09)
drehen
3. remove old lantern
3. bestehende Laterne ab-
4. remove pump
nehmen
5. remove bolt screw
4. Pumpe herausnehmen
6. cut again thread of bolt screws
5. Stiftschrauben herausdrehen
and clean it with nitro thinner
6. Gewinde für Stiftschrauben
nachschneiden und mit
7. glue the long bolt screws in
Nitroverdünnung reinigen
place e.g. with Loctite 270
7. lange Stiftschrauben mit z. B.
8. clean the seal surface and re
Loctite 270 einkleben
move dents
8. Dichtfläche säubern und etwai
9. insert sealing (HPD...)
ge Schläge legalisieren
10. install new lantern
9. Dichtung (HPD...) einlegen
11. install new pump
10. neue Laterne aufsetzen
12. tighten hexagon nut (HVM 09)
11. neue Pumpe einschieben
crosswise
12. Muttern (HVM 09) kreuzweise
13. install motor
anziehen
13. Motor montieren Necessary new parts:
coupling
Folgende Neuteile sind hierzu insert pump with o-ring
notwendig: lantern
Kupplung gasket (HPD)
Einschubpumpe mit O-Ring long stud screws
Laterne
Dichtung (HPD)
lange Stiftschrauben
Language UK
- 16 - 22-17 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
9. ERSATZTEILE-DEMONTAGE
9. DISMANTLING OF SPARE PARTS
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
9.3 Schnittbild und Teileliste 9.3 Section Drawing with Part List
Station DL2/150-240
Bild/scheme 21
908.2
730.2
739.2
529 739.1
915.1 606.1 704.1
870.1
055.1 885
735.1 915.2
900.1 040 730.1
060 304 908.1 915.3
222.1
001 137 166 704.2
501 730.3
730.2 809.1 300
735.1 739.3
908.2 751.1 859
900.3
119 894.1
222.2
900.2
241
Station DL2/320-1300
894.2 908.2 739.2

529 730.2
900.4 606.2 704.1
739.1
894.2 155.1
052 870.1 915.2
901 055.1
180 885
915.3
735.1 040 730.1
060
304 908.1 704.2
119
222.1 137 166 739.3
501
730.3 809.1 300
001
751.1 859
900.3
730.2 894.1
222.2
908.2
900.2
241
**001
001 Einbaupumpe * 735,1 Kupferdichtung * 001 insert pump * 735,1 Cu seal ring
040 Hülse * 739,1 O-Ring 040 spacer * 739,1 O-ring
* 052 Kupplung 739,2 O-Ring * 052 coupling 739,2 O-ring
* 055,1 Dichtring * 055,1 seal ring
060 Scheibe 739,3 O-Ring 060 disc 739,3 O-ring
119 Druckgehäuse * 751,1 Druckfeder 119 casing * 751,1 spring
137 Ventilgehäuse * 809,1 Kugel 137 valve casing * 809,1 ball
155,1 Rohr 859 Spannhülse 155,1 pipe 859 clamping sleeve
166 Verstellschraube * 870,1 Wellensicherungsring 166 adjusting screw * 870,1 circlip
180 Laterne 885 Gewindestift 180 lantern 885 set screw
* 222,1 Dichtung 894,1 Sechskantmutter * 222,1 gasket 894,1 hexagon nut
222,2 Dichtung 222,2 gasket
241 Ölwanne 894,2 Sechskantmutter 241 oilpan 894,2 hexagon nut
300 Ventilgriff 900,1 Sechskantschraube 300 lever 900,1 hexagon screw
304 Steuerküken 900,2 Sechskantschraube 304 control lever spindle 900,2 hexagon screw
* 501 Druckfeder 900,3 Sechskantschraube * 501 spring 900,3 hexagon screw
529 Motor 900,4 Sechskantschraube 529 motor 900,4 hexagon screw
* 606,1 absperrbares Manometer 901 Stiftschraube * 606,1 lockable manometer 901 locking screw
* 606,2 absperrbares Manometer 908,1 Verschlußschraube * 606,2 lockable manometer 908,1 screw plug
704,1 Flansch 704,1 flange
704,2 Flansch 908,2 Verschlußschraube 704,2 flange 908,2 screw plug
* 730,1 Flachdichtung 915,1 Zylinderschraube * 730,1 gasket 915,1 socket screw
22-18/DQJXDJH8.

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
6WDWLRQ'6
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
$
'HWDLO=

6FKQLWW$%

% =
(LQEDXSXPSH )ODFKGLFKWXQJ LQVHUWSXPS IODWJDVNHW

6LHENRUE .XSIHUGLFKWXQJ ILOWHUEDVNHW &XVHDOULQJ
.XSSOXQJ 25LQJ FRXSOLQJ 2ULQJ
'LFKWULQJ 25LQJ JDVNHW 2ULQJ
)LOWHUGHFNHO +XWPXWWHU ILOWHUFRYHU FDSQXW
$JJUHJDWJHKlXVHOLQNV 6HFKVNDQWPXWWHU OHIWFDVLQJ KH[DJRQQXW
$JJUHJDWJHKlXVHUHFKWV 6HFKVNDQWPXWWHU ULJKWFDVLQJ KH[DJRQQXW
5RKU 6HFKVNDQWVFKUDXEH SLSH KH[DJRQVFUHZ
:LQNHO 6HFKVNDQWVFKUDXEH DQJOH KH[DJRQVFUHZ
)ODQVFKODWHUQH 6HFKVNDQWVFKUDXEH IODQJHODQWHUQ KH[DJRQVFUHZ
)ODFKGLFKWXQJ 6WLIWVFKUDXEH IODWJDVNHW ORFNLQJVFUHZ
gOZDQQH 6WLIWVFKUDXEH RLOSDQ ORFNLQJVFUHZ
(QWOIWXQJVYHQWLO 6WLIWVFKUDXEH YHQWYDOYH ORFNLQJVFUHZ
.HJHO'UXFNIHGHU 6FKHLEH FRQLFDOVSULQJ GLVF
0RWRU 6FKHLEH PRWRU GLVF
DEVSHUUEDUHV 9HUVFKOXVFKUDXEH ORFNDEOH VFUHZSOXJ
9DNXXPPHWHU YDFXXPPHWHU
HPSIRKOHQH(UVDW]WHLOH UHFRPPHQGHGVSDUHSDUWV
6WHXHUEORFN 3RV &RQWUROGHYLFH SRV

'LFKWULQJ VHDOULQJ

9HQWLOJHKlXVH YDOYHFDVLQJ

9HUVFKOXVFKUDXEH VFUHZSOXJ

9HUVWHOOVFKUDXEH DGMXVWLQJVFUHZ
9HQWLOHLQVDW] YDOYHLQVHUW
9HQWLOHLQVDW] YDOYHLQVHUW
9HQWLOJULII OHYHU
9HQWLONHJHO YDOYHFRQH
9HQWLONHJHO YDOYHFRQH
9HUVWHOOVSLQGHO YDOYHVSLQGOH
6WHXHUNXJHO YDOYHEDOO
)RUPGLFKWXQJ IRUPJDVNHW
DEVSHUUEDUHV0DQRPHWHU ORFNDEOHPDQRPHWHU
)ODQVFK IODQJH
)ODFKGLFKWXQJ IODWJDVNHW
)ODFKGLFKWXQJ IODWJDVNHW

25LQJ 2ULQJ

25LQJ 2ULQJ
25LQJ 2ULQJ

25LQJ 2ULQJ

'UXFNIHGHU VSULQJ

'UXFNIHGHU VSULQJ
'UXFNIHGHU VSULQJ
7HOOHUIHGHU SODWHVSULQJ
.XJHO EDOO
6WW]ULQJ VXSSRUWLQJSODWH
:HOOHQVLFKHUXQJVULQJ FLUFOLS
*HZLQGHVWLIW VHWVFUHZ
=\OLQGHUVFKUDXEH VRFNHWVFUHZ
=\OLQGHUVFKUDXEH VRFNHWVFUHZ

Language UK
22-19 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Station DL3, DL4, DS3, DS4
Detail: Z 900.3
894.1
529 904.2
894.2 739.2
052
180 894.2
900.2
155.1
901.1 074
*675
901.2 739.1
116.1 893 423 501
900.1
904.1 018
735.1 001
894.2
901.3 116.2 730.1 606.1

160
241 908.1 055.1
001 Einbaupumpe * 735,1 Kupferdichtung 001 insert pump * 735,1 Cu seal ring
* 018 Siebkorb * 739,1 O-Ring * 018 filter gasket * 739,1 O-ring
052 Kupplung 739,2 O-Ring 052 coupling 739,2 O-ring
* 055,1 Dichtring 893 Hutmutter * 055,1 seal ring 893 cap nut
074 Filterdeckel 894,1 Sechskantmutter 074 filter cover 894,1 hexagon nut
116,1 Aggregatgehäuse links 894,2 Sechskantmutter 116,1 left casing 894,2 hexagon nut
116,2 Aggregatgehäuse rechts 900,1 Sechskantschraube 116,2 right casing 900,1 hexagon screw
155,1 Rohr 900,2 Sechskantschraube 155,1 pipe 900,2 hexagon screw
160 Winkel 900,3 Sechskantschraube 160 angle 900,3 hexagon screw
180 Flanschlaterne 901,1 Stiftschraube 180 flange lantern 901,1 locking screw
241 Ölwanne 901,2 Stiftschraube 241 oil pan 901,2 locking screw
423 Entlüftungsventil 901,3 Stiftschraube 423 vent valve 901,3 locking screw
501 Kegel-Druckfeder 904,1 Scheibe 501 conical spring 904,1 disc
529 Motor 904,2 Scheibe 529 motor 904,2 disc
* 606,1 absperrbares 908,1 Verschlußschraube * 606,1 lockable 908,1 screw plug
Vakuummeter vacuummeter
* 730,1 Flachdichtung * 730,1 flat gasket
111.2
055.1
606.2
055.2
908.2
869.1
739.5
886
868
300
Steuerblock *Pos. 675 A Control device *pos. 675

* 055,1 Dichtring * 055,1 seal ring
* 055,2 Dichtring C * 055,2 seal ring
111,1 Vorschweißflansch 111,1 flange
111,2 Vorschweißflansch 111,2 flange
137 Ventilgehäuse 137 valve casing
166 Verstellschraube 166 adjusting screw
* 222 Flachdichtung * 222 flat gasket
298 Ventileinsatz 298 valve insert
299 Ventileinsatz 299 valve insert
300 Ventilgriff 300 lever
* 304,1 Ventilkegel * 304,1 valve cone
* 304,2 Ventilkegel * 304,2 valve cone
312 Verstellspindel 312 valve spindle
407 Steuerkugel 407 valve ball
* 456 Formdichtung * 456 form gasket
* 606,2 absperrbares Manometer B D * 606,2 lockable manometer
729,1 Flachdichtung 729,1 flat gasket
729,2 Flachdichtung 729,2 flat gasket
900.4
729.2
751.1
809.1
729.1
900.4
111.1
* 739,3 O-Ring * 739,3 O-ring

166
407
137
312
* 739,4 O-Ring * 739,4 O-ring

* 739,5 O-Ring * 739,5 O-ring
304.2
739.3
304.1
298
* 751,1 Druckfeder Schnitt: A-B Schnitt: C-D * 751,1 spring

* 751,2 Druckfeder * 751,2 spring
* 751,3 Druckfeder * 751,3 spring
* 765 Tellerfeder * 765 plate spring
* 809,1 Kugel * 809,1 ball
868 Stützring 868 supporting plate
* 869,1 Wellensicherungring * 869,1 circlip
886 Gewindestift 886 set screw
900,4 Sechskantschraube 900,4 hexagon screw
908,2 Verschlußschraube 908,2 screw plug
* empfohlene * recommended
Ersatzteile spare parts
765
456
299
739.4
739.3
751.3
751.2
222
22-20/DQJXDJH8.
/ 23 Language UK

- 19 -
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Station DL7, DS7, DCL7, DCS7
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
052 870.2
222 300 Detail: Z
074 423
893 111.2 908.3
901.1 *611 730.4
730.3
501.1 116 111.1 894.1
739.1 001 *304.2 900.1
739.3 739.2
915.2 730.1
018 908.1 304.1
915.1 730.2 739.6
164.2 121
908.2
*Pos. 304.2 *Pos. 611

529 870.1
894.3
900.3 884.1 884.2

180 739.4 164.1
606.2 739.7
894.2 809.1
901.2 751.2
312 066
900.2 304.3 870.3
606.1
739.5 501.2
301
717 241 751.1
304.2 057
859 306 137

854
Z
001 Einbaupumpe * 730,2 Flachdichtung 001 insert pump * 730,2 flat gasket
* 018 Siebkorb * 730,3 Flachdichtung * 018 filter basket * 730,3 flat gasket
052 Kupplung * 730,4 Flachdichtung 052 coupling * 730,4 flat gasket
057 Gewindering * 739,1 O-Ring 057 ring nut * 739,1 O-ring
066 Dichtscheibe * 739,2 O-Ring 066 seal disc * 739,2 O-ring
074 Filterdeckel * 739,3 O-Ring 074 filter cover * 739,3 O-ring
111,1 Vorschweißflansch * 739,4 O-Ring 111,1 flange * 739,4 O-ring
111,2 Vorschweißflansch * 739,5 O-Ring 111,2 flange * 739,5 O-ring
116 Aggregatgehäuse * 739,6 O-Ring 116 casing * 739,6 O-ring
121 Filtergehäuse * 739,7 O-Ring 121 filter casing * 739,7 O-ring
137 Ventilgehäuse * 751,1 Druckfeder 137 valve casing * 751,1 spring
164,1 Verstellschraube * 751,2 Druckfeder 164,1 adjusting screw * 751,2 spring
164,2 Verstellschraube * 809,1 Kugel 164,2 adjusting screw * 809,1 ball
180 Flanschlaterne * 870,1 Wellensicherungsring 180 flange lantern * 870,1 circlip
* 222 Flachdichtung * 870,2 Wellensicherungsring * 222 flat gasket * 870,2 circlip
241 Ölwanne * 870,3 Wellensicherungsring 241 oil pan * 870,3 circlip
300 Aufsteckringschlüssel 854 Splint 300 lever 854 split pin
301 Tellerfeder 859 Spannhülse 301 spring plate 859 clamping sleeve
304,1 Steuerküken 884,1 Gewindestift 304,1 control lever spindle 884,1 set screw
Saug 884,2 Gewindestift suction set screw
304,2 Steuerküken 893 Hutmutter 304,2 control lever spindle 884,2 cap nut
Druck 894,1 Sechskantmutter pressure 893 hexagon nut
* 304,3 Ventilkegel 894,2 Sechskantmutter * 304,3 valve cone 894,1 hexagon nut
* 306 Verstellmutter 894,3 Sechskantmutter * 306 valve nut 894,2 hexagon nut
312 Verstellspindel 900,1 Sechskantschraube 312 valve spindle 894,3 hexagon screw
423 Entlüftungsventil 900,2 Sechskantschraube 423 vent valve 900,1 hexagon screw
501,1 Kegel-Druckfeder 900,3 Sechskantschraube 501,1 cone spring 900,2 hexagon screw
* 501,2 Druckfeder 901,1 Stiftschraube * 501,2 spring 900,3 locking screw
529 Motor 901,2 Stiftschraube 529 motor 901,1 locking screw
606,1 absperrbares 908,1 Verschlußschraube 606,1 lockable 901,2 screw plug
Vakuummeter 908,2 Verschlußschraube vacuummeter 908,1 screw plug
606,2 absperrbares 915,1 Zylinderschraube 606,2 lockable 908,2 socket screw
Manometer 915,2 Zylinderschraube manometer 915,1 socket screw
* 611 Rückschlagventil * 611 non return valve 915,2
* 717 Thermometer * 717 thermometer
* 730,1 Flachdichtung * empfohlene * 730,1 flat gasket * recommended
Ersatzteile spare parts
Language UK
- 20 - 22-21 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Einbaupumpe
Insert pump
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
Type FE 5 Type NE 5-13 Type NEG 5-13

866
870 457
866 915.1
915.1 063
735 155
735 080 869 074
870 062
080
063 739.2 745 739.2
745
809
131
056 817
739.2
042
879 751
739.3 739.3 739.3

669
417
042
669
070
131 070 131 669
915.2
915.2 915.2 417

417
070
Type NE 15-57 Type NEG 15-57 Type NEGA 15-57

866
052
866 745 457
063 870 058 870

870 915.1
059 039 739.1

739.1 817
127
739.2 739.2
861 861
056 056
739.3 739.3
869 869
042 042
669
669 131
131
070
915.2 070 915.2
039 Distanzhülse * 669 Spindelsatz 039 distance sleeve * 669 spindle set
* 042 Ausgleichshülse * 735 Kupferdichtung * 042 distance sleeve * 735 Cu seal ring
052 Kupplung * 739,1 O-Ring 052 coupling * 739,1 O-ring
056 Distanzring * 739,2 O-Ring 056 spacer * 739,2 O-ring
058 Aufnahmering * 739,3 O-Ring 058 mounting ring * 739,3 O-ring
059 Aufnahmering * 745 Radialdichtring 059 mounting ring * 745 radial shaft seal
062 Distanzscheibe 751 Druckfeder 062 spacer 751 spring
063 Stützring 809 Kugel 063 support plate 809 ball
070 Abschlußdeckel * 817 Kugellager 070 end cover * 817 ball bearing
074 Flanschdeckel 861 Zylinderkerbstift 074 flange cover 861 pin
080 Lagerdeckel 866 Paßfeder 080 bearing cover 866 key
127 Lagergehäuse * 869 Wellensicherungsring 127 bearing housing * 869 circlip
* 131 Gehäuse * 870 Wellensicherungsring * 131 casing * 870 circlip
155 Rohr 879 Zylinderstift 155 pipe 879 straight pin
* 417 Zylindersieb 915,1 Zylinderschraube * 417 strainer 915,1 socket screw
* 457 Gleitringdichtung 915,2 Zylinderschraube * 457 mechanical seal 915,2 socket screw
22-22/DQJXDJH8.

OM9295_05#B.1 OM9295_05.1
Einbaupumpe
Insert pump
)8(/2,/6833/<3803'6 20B$
CLDR 15-42 CLDG 15-20 CLDR 55-118 CLDG 26-118
866 457
063 457
866 869.1
884.1
868 134 063 041
884.1
868
745 041 745
915.1 222.1 915.2
134 809
869.1 817
134
222.2 809 222.2 222.1 454
454
817
751
074 751 074 056
739.1
739.1 915.1
131 042
1037
739.2
1037
739.2 661
661
131
CLDGA 15-26 CLDGA 32-118
074.1 751 809 412 074.1 062.1 464 817 412 057 661.1
817
057
915.1 134 464 074.2 661.1 915.3 872 127 074.2 915.3
041 Distanzhülse 457 Gleitringdichtung 041 distance sleeve 457 mechanical seal
* 042 Ausgleichszylinder 464 Nilos-Ring * 042 balance sleeve 464 Nilos-ring
056 Distanzring ab Gr.: CL55 661 Spindelsatz 056 spacer from size: CL55 661 spindle set
057 Gewindering 661,1 Spindelsatz 057 ring nut 661,1 spindle set
062,1 Distanzscheibe * 739,1 O-Ring 062,1 spacer * 739,1 O-ring
063 Stützring * 739,2 O-Ring 063 support plate * 739,2 O-ring
074 Flanschdeckel * 745 Radialdichtung 074 flange cover * 745 radial shaft seal
074,1 Flanschdeckel 751 Druckfeder 074,1 flange cover 751 spring
074,2 Flanschdeckel 809 Kugel 074,2 flange cover 809 ball
127 Lagergehäuse * 817 Kugellager 127 bearing housing * 817 ball bearing
* 131 Gehäuse 866 Paßfeder * 131 casing 866 key
134 Dichtungsgehäuse 868 Stützring 134 sealing housing 868 supporting plate
* 222,1 Dichtung * 872 Runddrahtsprengring * 222,1 gasket * 872 circlip
* 222,2 Dichtung 884,1 Gewindestift * 222,2 gasket 884,1 set screw
412 Schmiernippel 915,1 Zylinderschraube 412 lubricating nipple 915,1 socket screw
454 Dichtkantring 915,2 Zylinderschraube 454 edge seal 915,2 socket screw
915,3 Zylinderschraube 915,3 socket screw
1037 Lagerbüchsenset 1037 bearing shell set
*empfohlene Ersatzteile
* recommended spare parts
Language UK
- 22 - 22-23 / 23
/DQJXDJH8.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Aalborg control system (Touch)

.
Touch control system................................................. SD9306_05................ 23-2
SD9306_05#E.2
TOUCH CONTROL SYSTEM
Touch control system
1 General
The Aalborg Control Touch control system is designed to provide safe and functional
operation of the boiler plant both at the boiler and from a remote location such as the
engine control room. The general design is a common panel solution. Each panel is
capable of controlling one oilfired boiler and one exhaust gas boiler and consist of a
local control part and a power part integrated into one panel. The panel is locally
controlled by means of a touch screen in the front of the panel.
Figure 1 illustrates a typical configuration for a boiler system. The example shown is
for a Aalborg OS boiler plant with a Aalborg XS exhaust gas boiler. The control system
is constructed in a similar way for other single boiler installations.
The communication between the common panel and touch screen is achieved through
a 2-wire RS485 network. The cable type is a twisted pair with shield. The 2 x 0.5-1.5
mm2 cable should not exceed 1000 metres in total length.
Illustration of the control system
RS485
Ethernet
Figure 1 contouch_01x0195512en.wmf
Common panel
The common panel holds two Aalborg controllers, communication interface, relays,
flame monitoring equipment, water level control equipment, switches for emergency
operation but also power supply systems, motor starters and optional components like
smoke density monitoring system, salinity alarm equipment, oil detection equipment,
etc.
SD9306_05#E.2
The cabinet gives an IP 55 insulation class and can be located in ambient temperatures
between 0-45ºC with a relative humidity up to 90%. The maximum vibration level is
100 Gal at 10-30 Hz. And the power supply is 115 or 230 V AC, 45-65 Hz. The
maximum power consumption of the local panel is approximately 50 VA.
The two Aalborg controllers constitute a computerised control and monitoring system.
The panels are equipped with a number of digital and analogue input/output connec-
tions. These input and output connections are handled by the CPU, which operates the
panels. Two EPROMs contain the programme, and an E2PROM stores specified plant
data.
One of the controllers handles local control of the boiler plant such as e.g. fuel system
and plant settings. The other controller is the common controller and handles common
tasks such as e.g. control of the fuel oil- or, if provided, feed water pumps.
The complete boiler system can be operated from the controllers inside the local panel
with or without the touch screen in service. By use of the soft keys placed to the left
of the display, the burner can be operated in manual mode, and shut downs/alarms can
be acknowledged. The soft keys placed to the right of the display give access to the
menu structure. The actual menu levels or menu item lines are displayed on the four
line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Figure 2 illustrates the interface on the controllers.
It is also via these controllers that the basic configuration of the system is done during
commissioning. Access to a number of different parameters, settings, etc. is limited by
password entering. This secures the operation from unintentional entering and modi-
fication, which might cause damage to the boiler plant. The password routine is divided
into two steps. The entering of the common user password provides access to the most
common menu items, and the super user password, which is only known by Alfa Laval,
provides access to the more vital functions.
Illustration of the controller interface
Monitoring and control from the touch screen

The control system is provided with a touch screen with a graphic user interface for a
clear view of the boiler operation. This touch screen can be installed anywhere, as long
as the length of the cables does not exceed 1000 metres. The boiler plant can be moni-
tored and operated from the touch screen as well as from the local panels. Furthermore,
trend curves for the plant can be viewed and alarms can be acknowledged.
In Figure 3 the main screen of the touch screen is shown. By use of the touchscreen,
shut downs/alarms can be acknowledged from the bell-button in the upper right corner.
The buttons on the right side of the display give access to detailed information on the
steam system (and, if present, exhaust gas boiler), feed water system, fuel system and
burner operation. From the buttons on the left side of the touch screen, key lock, trend
curves and the set-up menu can be accessed. The button [BOILER] gives access to an
overview of the operation of the boiler system.
SD9306_05#E.2
Illustration of the main page of the touch screen
A password system provides the logged-on user with permissions/restrictions and en-
sures that no parameters can be changed by unauthorised personnel.
Mod-bus interface
An optional communication interface via Modbus protocol (RS485) to other systems
on board the ship can be provided.
The Modbus interface feature offers external control and monitoring of a limited num-
ber of parameters in the boiler control system from an external operating place such
as e.g. the cargo control room. It is possible to control and/or monitor parameters such
as boiler operation mode, state (stopped, starting, purge, etc.), manual start/stop and
load, selection of master/slave boiler, inert gas mode (if provided), boiler/system pres-
sure, and water level.
If Modbus is selected, Alfa Laval supplies a complete address list and a separate com-
munication port on the touch screen including a 9-pin DB9 plug.
Remote desktop
The system supports remote desktop using a web browser. Communication is carried
out over an ordinary Ethernet network (see Figure 1) using an Ethernet cable with RJ45
connectors (not supplied by Alfa Laval).
With the remote desktop feature it is possible to remote control the touch display seeing
the same picture as on the actual touch screen and using the computer mouse as input
device instead of ones finger.
For details please refer to the document “Touch Remote Desktop”.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Operation of the panels (Touch)

.
Operation of the panels............................................... OM9306_58............... 24-2
Operation of the touch screen...................................... OM9306_57............... 24-17
Key operation lock..................................................... OM9306_55............... 24-28
OM9306_58#D.2
OPERATION OF THE PANELS
Operation of the panels
1 General
The Aalborg Control Touch (ACT) control panel is usually equipped with both a local
controller and a common controller. The local controller controls the oil fired boiler
and burner operation, and the common controller controlscommon items and acces-
sories such as fuel oil pumps, feed water pumps, exhaustgas boilers, salinity, etc. On
ACT systems normal operation will be carried out from the touch screen but for system
configuration or in case the touch screen breaks down operation is carried out from the
controllers. Figure 1 illustrates the local controller and the operation of the soft keys.
Illustration of a controller
USER DEFINED VALUE 1 [VALUE 1]

[STATE] [MODE] [LOAD%]
Manual increase of the burner load. This Entering of different menu items for
facility is only available in manual operation modification of settings, parameters,
mode. Or manual increase of other remote etc. Password entering is required
control settings = 1. when this soft key is used.
Manual decrease of the burner load. This

Moves further out of a branch in the
facility is only available in manual operation
menu structure and changes digit
mode. Or manual decrease of other remote
position towards left.
control settings = 1.
Selection between automatic and manual Move further into a branch in the
operation mode. The yellow LED above menu structure and changes digit
the soft key shines in manual operation position towards right.
mode.
Acknowledgment of alarms and shut downs. Moves upwards in the menu structure
Low frequent flashes on the red LED and increases to a higher value.
above the soft key indicate alarms, and
high frequent flashes indicate shut downs/
burner cut-off.
Moves downwards in the menu structure

Starts the burner in manual operation mode. and decreases to a lower value.
The green LED above the soft key flashes.
When a feedback signal for combustion air
fan running is received, the LED shines.
Stops the burner in manual operation mode.

The green LED above the “ON” soft key is
switched off simultaneously.
BOILER PRES 0.0 BAR Display for surveillance of operation, servicing, and modification.
WATER LEVEL 0 mm The display is a 4-line display with maximum 20 characters in each line.
If the sign is indicated the boiler plant is operating in inert gas mode.
HFO PRES 0.0 BAR If the sign is indicated the boiler plant is stopped by an external stop.
STOPPED [ ] 0% If the sign is indicated the key operation lock is opened.
Figure 1 unisab2dx2411290en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
By use of the soft keys placed to the left of the display, the burner can be operated in
manual mode, and shut downs/alarms can be acknowledged. Furthermore, a number
of remote controls (e.g. oil pressure, water level, etc.) can be operated/controlled from
here provided the actual remote control setting is selected to "1" in the menu structure.
The soft keys placed to the right of the display give access to the menu structure. The
actual menu levels or menu item lines are displayed on the four line crystal display
(LCD).
The menu structure for the local and power panels can be found elsewhere in this
manual.
The communication between the panels included in a boiler plant is achieved through
wire connections.
2 Operating examples
In this section a number of operating examples are illustrated. The operating principles
in the examples shown are identical for all other boiler and burner types. This means
that regardless of the parameter, setting, etc., which should be entered or modified, the
procedure for operating the panels is the same.
Examples No. 2 to No. 5 imply that the key operation lock is unlocked. If this is not
the case then please refer to example No. 1 or the specific instruction for unlocking
the key operation lock.
The following operating examples are shown:
• Operating example No. 1:

- Unlock of the key operation lock for local panel 1. See Figure 2 and Figure 3.
- Change of burner operation mode from stopped mode to automatic mode. See
Figure 4, Figure 5, and Figure 6.
- Change of set point for low steam pressure alarm. See Figure 7, Figure 8, and
Figure 9.
- Inspection of the shut down list. See Figure 10, Figure 11, and Figure 12.
- Manual start and stop of the burner. See Figure 13 and Figure 14.
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 1: unlock the key operation lock
BOILER PRES 0.0 BAR

WATER LEVEL 0 mm
HFO PRES 0.0 BAR
STOPPED 0%
Press once
KEY POSITION PP1

REQUEST KEY NO
STOPPED 0%
Press once
KEY POSITION PP1

REQUEST KEY NO
STOPPED 0%
Continued in next picture Press once
Figure 2 unisab701ax2411370en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 1: unlock the key operation lock (continued)

Continued from previous picture
KEY POSITION PP1

REQUEST KEY YES
STOPPED 0%
Press once
KEY POSITION LP1

RELEASE KEY NO
STOPPED 0%
Press once
BOILER PRES 0.0 BAR

WATER LEVEL 0 mm
HFO PRES 0.0 BAR
STOPPED 0%
Figure 3 unisab702ax2411380en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 2: Change of operation mode
BOILER PRES 0.0 BAR

WATER LEVEL 0 mm
HFO PRES 0.0 BAR
STOPPED 0%
Press twice
BOILER PARTNER
FUEL OIL CMN CTRL
AIR SURVEIL
COMBUST SETUP
Press 7 times
BOILER PARTNER
FUEL OIL CMN CTRL
AIR SURVEIL
COMBUST SETUP
Continued in next picture
Press once
Figure 4 unisab301cx2411300en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 2: Change of operation mode (continued)

CTRL MODE LOGGINGS

TIMERS CALIBRATE
SETTINGS CONFIG
DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE
Press once
BURNER CTRL MODE

STOPPED
SETPOINT SELECT
LOW
Press once
BURNER CTRL MODE

STOPPED
SETPOINT SELECT
LOW
Press once
Figure 5 om9306_58_unisabx0062920en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 2: Change of operation mode (continued)

BURNER CTRL MODE

AUTO
SETPOINT SELECT
LOW
Press once
BURNER CTRL MODE

AUTO
SETPOINT SELECT
LOW
Press 4 times
BOILER PRES 0.0 BAR

WATER LEVEL 0 mm
HFO PRES 0.0 BAR
STARTING 0%
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 3: Change of set point
BOILER PRES 16.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
Press twice
BOILER PARTNER
FUEL OIL CMN CTRL
AIR SURVEIL
COMBUST SETUP
Press once

WATER LEVEL 20 mm
COMMON PRES 16.5 BAR
READY 0%
Press once
HI.SHT.DWN. 18.0 BAR

HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
LOW ALARM 4.0 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Press twice
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 3: Change of set point (continued)


HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
LOW ALARM 4.0 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Press once for

a few sec.
PASSWORD
1234
SET TO ACCEPT / QUIT
Press once

HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
LOW ALARM +004.0 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Press twice

HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Continued in next picture Press once
OM9306_58#D.2


HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Press once

HIGH ALARM 17.5 BAR
LOW ALARM 5.0 BAR
REG OUTPUT 0.0 %
Press 4 times

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 4: Inspection of the shut down list
BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
Press twice
BOILER PARTNER
FUEL OIL CMN CTRL
AIR SURVEIL
COMBUST SETUP
Press 7 times
BOILER PARTNER
FUEL OIL CMN CTRL
AIR SURVEIL
COMBUST SETUP
Press once
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 4: Inspection of the shut down list (continued)

CTRL MODE LOGGINGS

TIMERS CALIBRATE
SETTINGS CONFIG
DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE
Press 4 times
CTRL MODE LOGGINGS

TIMERS CALIBRATE
SETTINGS CONFIG
DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE
Press once
DATA LOG
INSPECT SHT.DWN. LOG
OIL SUMMARIZER
Press once
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 4: Inspection of the shut down list (continued)

SHT.DWN. 990530-1230
HFO PRESSURE LOW
Press soft key to

inspect shut down list
(maximum 20 shut downs)
SHT.DWN. 990530-1230
HFO PRESSURE LOW
Press 5 times
BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
Figure 12 unisab503fx2428980en.wmf
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 5: Manual start/stop
BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
Press once for manual

operation mode if auto
is selected in the
SETUP/CONTROL MODE
BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
Press once, and the

burner initiates a
start up sequence
BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
MAN LOAD 10%
Press to increase Continued in next picture

the burner load
OM9306_58#D.2
Example No. 5: Manual start/stop (continued)

BOILER PRES 7.5 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
MAN LOAD 50%
Press to decrease
the burner load
BOILER PRES 8.2 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
MAN LOAD 10%
Press once to
stop the burner
BOILER PRES 8.0 BAR

WATER LEVEL 12 mm
HFO PRES 22.0 BAR
READY 0%
OM9306_57#B.1
OPERATION OF THE TOUCH SCREEN
Operation of the touch screen
1 General
The control system is equipped with a touch screen, where the system can be controlled
and overviewed from. The boiler operation, which can be performed from the local
panel(s) can also be performed from the touch screen. Operation by use of the local
panels can be found elsewhere in the manual. Figure 1 illustrates the main picture of
the touch screen.
Main picture of touch screen
Figure 1 om9306_57_pic_0x0062860en.wmf
[ALARM]: The alarm button in the upper right corner is accessable from any screen
view. This button gives access to acknowledge alarms and view the alarm list.
[STEAM] The steam button gives access to an overview of the steam system, to set
alarm limits, to control the feedwater pumps and to access an overview of the ex-
haustgas boiler if present.
[WATER] The water button gives access to an overview of the feedwater system, to
set the alarm limits, and to control the feedwater pumps.
[FUEL] The fuel button gives access to an overview of the fuel system, to set the alarm
limits, and to control the fuel pumps.
OM9306_57#B.1
[BURNER] The burner button gives access an overview of the burner system including
fans and to set alarm limits.
[BOILER] The boiler button gives access to an overview of the performance of the
boiler system. Alarm limits for the system can be set.
[KEY] The key button gives access to get and release the key for operation.
[TREND] The trend button gives access to trend curves of the performance of the boiler
system.
[SET-UP] The set-up button gives access to the set-up menu, e.g. timers, plant limits,
and diagnostic information. This menu is described elsewhere in the manual.
The key in the top left corner indicates if present that the user has unlocked the system
and therefore can modify different parameters.
2 Operating examples
In this section a number of operating examples are illustrated. The examples show a
generic boiler with a Aalborg KBP, Aalborg KBO-E and Aalborg KBM burner at-
tached but the operating principles are identical for all other boiler and burner types.
This means that regardless of the parameter, setting, etc., which should be entered or
modified, the procedure for operating the touch screen is the same.
Examples No. 2 to No. 5 imply that the key operation lock is unlocked. If this is not
the case then please refer to example No. 1 or the specific instruction for unlocking
the key operation lock.
The following operating examples are shown:

- Unlock of the key operation lock for touch screen. See Figure 2 for a general
method and Figure 3 for a shortcut in parameter menues.
- Change of burner operation mode from stopped mode to automatic mode. See
Figure 4 and Figure 5.
- Change of set point for low steam pressure alarm. See Figure 6 and Figure 7.
- Inspection of the shut down list. See Figure 8.
- Manual start and stop of the burner. See Figure 9 and Figure 10.
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 1: unlock the operation lock
PP1
Request key:
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 1: unlock the operation lock in a parameter menu
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 2: change of operation mode
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No2: change op operation mode (contionued)
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 3: change of set point
OM9306_57#B.1
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 4: Inspection of the shut down list
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 5: Manual start/stop
OM9306_57#B.1
Example No. 5: Manual start/stop (continued)
OM9306_55#B.1
KEY OPERATION LOCK
Key operation lock
1 General
In the following the key operation lock system for the control system is described with
regard to function and operation.
1.1 Function
Operation of the boiler plant must be performed from the local panel(s) or the PC, if
provided. To ensure that operation of the boiler plant can only take place from one
place at the time, the control system is provided with a key operation lock system. This
prohibits unintentional alterations of settings, parameters, etc., which might cause
damage to the complete boiler plant. Even though the control system is locked, it still
controls the boiler plant automatically, and complete monitoring is also possible. Only
the operation of the boiler plant is limited.
However, it is possible to change between manual and automatic operation modes on

the local panel provided that the burner has been set to "AUTO" operation.
1.2 Operation
When the control system is powered up, the operation of the boiler plant is as default
set for key operation lock position to power panel 1. But as all operation of the boiler
plant must be performed from a local panel or PC, the system is locked. To unlock the
operation of the control system, the position of the key operation lock must be changed.
The key operation lock can be in one of the following positions:
- PP1 (power panel 1)

- LP1 (local panel 1 – this is also the position when using the touchscreen)
- LP2 (local panel 2, in twin boiler plants)
- PC (computer, in boiler plants with steam atomising burners)
In order to operate the boiler plant, the key operation lock must be opened on either
one of the local panels, on the touch screen, or on the PC. Then operation can take
place from the opened place (local panel 1, local panel 2, touch screen, or PC). Please
note that an operation place can only be selected if the position of the key operation
lock is at PP1 (power panel 1).
1.2.1 Operation from a local panel

Step A: When the front menu is displayed on the local panel press the ► soft key
once, and the menu for the key operation lock appears in the local panel
display. The top menu line shows the actual position of the key, and in the
next line an opening of the key can be requested on the actual panel.
Step B: Press the SET soft key, and the black bar will be placed in the [NO] position.
Step C: Press the ▲ soft key, and [YES] appears in the position of the black bar.
OM9306_55#B.1
KEY OPERATION LOCK
Step D: Press the SET soft key again, and the actual local panel will be active for
operation. The display of the actual key position in the top menu line changes
to the actual local panel (LP1 or LP2).
An unlocked local panel is also indicated by a key symbol in the bottom menu line.
1.2.2 Operation from the touch screen

The key status is always indicated in the top left part of the picture. When a key is
shown, the system is unlocked. If the key is not shown or blinking (warning the user
when in a parameter menu), the system is locked. There are two ways of unlocking the
system when using the touch panel.
Method 1 - Advanced:
Step A: This method can e.g. be used for checking who currently holds the key. In
the mainpictureof the touch panel press the [KEY] button in the left side of
the screen, and the menu for the key operation lock appears in the display.
Illustrated in Figure 1
Step B: The top field indicates current key position. The buttom key (dark grey)
indicates if the system is unlocked. [Yes] means that it is unlocked and [NO]
means the system is locked. By pressing the button one can toggle between
the two.
Method 2 – quick access:
Step A: This method is useful when setting parameters (requiring the key). To avoid
having to leave the current parameter picture to unlock the system one can
instead just press the key to toggle the status. Illustrated in
Notice that as the key is being retrieved, the button says “get” to indicate to the
user that the system is working.
OM9306_55#B.1
KEY OPERATION LOCK
Illustration of key operation - method 1
OM9306_55#B.1
KEY OPERATION LOCK
Illustration of key operation - method 2
Note: If any operation has not taken place within one minute, the key operation
lock automatically changes back to PP1 (power panel 1). A new unlocking
procedure must be performed before any operation can take place. Please
note that the time period for automatic change back to PP1 can be set to a
different value in the timer set-up menu. The name of the timer is "KEY
HOLD".
1.2.3 Operation from a PC

When operation from a PC should be performed, the key operation lock must be opened
on the PC. If the key operation lock is not opened, it is still possible to open all sub-
menus and dialog boxes, but it is not possible to perform any changes of settings,
parameters, operation modes, etc. For PC monitoring and control systems using Win-
dows 3.11 buttons are faded out and thereby inactive. For PC systems using Windows
2000 a dialog box for key request pops-up.
The number of key operation locks depends on the number of configured boiler systems
for the actual plant, e.g. one Aalborg OL boiler and one Aalborg OC boiler will include
two key operation locks.
Step A: For PC systems using Windows 3.11 place the cursor on the padlock (brown
colour) located in the right side of the PC screen and click once on the mouse.
The symbol changes from a locked padlock to an open padlock. Further-
more, the colour changes from brown to green.
Step B: For PC systems using Windows 2000 click the access field located in the
address/icon bar and request the key operation lock in the dialog box which
pops-up. The colour of the access field changes from white to green.
OM9306_55#B.1
KEY OPERATION LOCK
Note: It might be necessary to enter the user ID and pass code before the key
operation lock can be changed. By requesting the lock, the operator will
be asked for the entering of user ID and pass code.
Step C: Operation of the boiler plant can now take place from the PC.
Note: If any operation has not taken place within one minute, the key operation
lock will automatically change back to PP1 (power panel 1). A new un-
locking procedure must be performed before any operation can take place.
Please note that the time period for automatic change back to PP1 can be
set to a different value in the timer set-up menu on the local panel(s). The
name of the timer is "KEY HOLD".
1.3 Commissioning
In order to ease the commissioning work the key operation lock system is provided
with a feature which makes it possible to operate the control system from all operation
places. In the menu SETUP/CONFIG/BURNER OPTION on the local panel the key
operation lock can be disabled "DISABLE KEY". Thus with the key operation lock
disabled on the local panel(s), operation can be carried out from all operation places.
E.g. in a twin boiler plant with steam atomising burners and no touchscreen, operation
can take place from LP1 (local panel 1), LP2 (local panel 2), and the PC (computer).
However, the time period for non-operation of the local panel is still active. So it might
be advisable to set this time hold period to a higher value during commissioning. The
time period value can be changed in the SETUP/TIMERS/TIMER SETUP/SUR-
VAILLANCE menu and the name of the timer is "KEY HOLD". After commissioning
the timer must be set back to its original value.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Commisioning and service (Touch)

.
Commissioning and service........................................ OM9306_62............... 25-2
Monitoring and control via touch screen....................... OM9306_56............... 25-19
OM9306_62#F.1
COMMISSIONING AND SERVICE
Commissioning and service
1 General
The following sections describe some of the parts provided in the controller and the
actions which must be performed when the controller is commissioned or serviced.
The controller is designed as a computerised control and monitoring unit which pro-
vides the boiler plant with the necessary functions to have a safe and reliable operation.
The main parts of the controller consist of:
• The cabinet.
• The keyboard with soft keys for operation and entering the menu structure.
• The four line crystal display (LCD).
• The relay print, which includes the battery, relays, fuse, and connections for wiring,
power supply, and communication.
• The DI relay print for additional digital input connections.
• The CPU print, which includes the CPU, 2 x EPROM, and EEPROM. The CPU
print is fitted onto the relay print.
Figure 1 shows the keyboard and display, and Figure 2 shows the inside of the con-
troller.
Please note that the operation of the soft keys and the structure of the menus are not
described in this chapter, but can be found elsewhere in the instruction manual.
Illustration of the keyboard and display

[STATE] [MODE] [LOAD%]
OM9306_62#F.1
Illustration of the inside of the controller
Figure 2 unisab19x1478340en.bmp
Technical data for the controller:
• Power supply: 115/230 VAC, 45-65 HZ

• Voltage tolerance: +10 to -15%
• Consumption: 50 VA
• Ambient temperature: 0-55ºC (operation)
• Humidity: 20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)
• Density: IP 54
• Vibration: maximum 100 Gal at 10-30 Hz
1.1 Light diodes
Both the relay print and CPU print are equipped with a number of light diodes (LEDs).
The LEDs can be used during commissioning or servicing to determine the state of the
input/output signals, communication signals, etc. When the hinged door is open, the
LEDs can be inspected. The printed circuit boards are equipped with the following
LEDs:
• Digital input (12 LEDs, green).

• Digital output (18 LEDs, red).
• Communication (3 LEDs, red, yellow, and green).
• Supply (1 LED, red).
• CPU (2 LEDs, red and green).
The position and identification of the LEDs are shown in Figure 2.
OM9306_62#F.1
Digital input
The green LEDs are marked from DI1 to DI12. The attached functions appear from
the electrical diagrams. When a specific LED is illuminated, the input is active.
Digital output
The red LEDs are marked from DRL1 to DRL18. The attached functions appear from
the electrical diagrams. When a specific LED is illuminated, the output is active.
Communication
When the panel communicates with other panels, the LEDs flash irregularly. The red
LED indicates that the panel is transmitting information, and the green LED indicates
that information is received.
Supply
This LED flashes briefly when the power supply to the panel is switched on. During
normal operation the light is off. If the LED makes repeated flashes, it may be an
indication of a power supply error.
CPU print
The green idle LED (ACT1) flashes irregularly when the power supply to the panel is
on. A constant light or no light indicate malfunction.
The red reset LED (RST1) is normally not illuminated. The LED is only illuminated
for a brief moment when the CPU restarts the programme. This only occurs when the
power supply to the panel is switched on.
2 Commissioning of the panels

This instruction deals primarily with the initial work procedures which must be per-
formed to obtain a functional control system.
Note: Only qualified and skilled personnel are permitted to commission the pan-
els.
Prior to the initial commissioning precaution must be taken to avoid an unintentional

start of the boiler plant when the power supply to the control system is switched on.
This means that the power supply to motors, fans, pumps, etc. must be switched off.
Manually operated oil valves, which connect the oil system to the burner, should also
be closed.
Warning: The panels contain live parts making it absolutely necessary that the
service engineer complies with the safety regulations prescribed on
site. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment and affect per-
sonal safety. Even though the power supply to the panels is switched
off, some of the terminals may still be live.
OM9306_62#F.1
In the following sections it is assumed that the key operation lock has been unlocked
before any operation, alterations, etc. of the menu structure settings are performed.
2.1 Initial start-up
On delivery from Alfa Laval the electrical wiring inside the control panel is completed.
This also means that the electrical wiring, power supply, and data communication cable
between the terminal rows of the control panels and the controllers are connected. Even
though the internal wiring has been completed, some additional checks regarding the
controllers must be carried out. These procedures, among others, are described in the
following sections.
Some of the work procedures require visual checks inside the controllers. Therefore
access to the controllers should be provided by opening the hinged door.
2.2 Connection of the external wires
Prior to commissioning the connection of the external wires must be completed on site
in accordance with the electrical diagrams. This means that wires from pump motors,
transmitters, switches, regulating valves, etc. should be connected to the terminal rows
of the control panel.
During this work the power supply for the complete boiler plant must be switched off.
Furthermore, it must be ensured that no outside voltage is applied to the digital input
connections of the control panel.
If and when functional errors of connected electrical equipment are established prior
to or during the actual commissioning of the boiler plant, the fault must be corrected.
Functional errors might be present as a result of incorrect electrical wire connections.

If this is the case, the wires should be rearranged either at the terminal rows of control
panel or at the specified electrical equipment.
2.3 Check the setting of the jumpers
2.3.1 Check the bridge connection of the terminal row

Check that the controllers are provided with a bridge connection between terminal 137
and 139.
2.3.2 Check the setting of the RC jumper

The controllers are capable of operation in different modes (RC mode or non-RC
mode). This is achieved by means of the RC jumper. The jumper position that must be
applied for boiler plants can be seen in Figure 2.
2.3.3 Check the setting of the PNP/NPN jumper

When the control system should handle signals from a pick-up sensor/measuring
transducer (e.g. oil flow signals) the PNP/NPN signal jumper must be set in the correct
position. The jumper position that normally must be applied for boiler plants can be
seen in Figure 2.
OM9306_62#F.1
2.3.4 Check the external communication plug

The external communication plug is not used for boiler plants and should therefore not
be connected.
2.4 Installation of the data communication cable
The communication between controllers is achieved through a 2-wire RS485 network.

To obtain a correct function of the data communication between the controllers, the
communication cable must be connected according to the electrical wiring diagrams.
Please see the electrical drawings for details.
As indicated in the electrical wiring diagrams, the communication cable must be con-
nected in a string line from controller to controller. This applies both for the two con-
ductors and the screening. The total length of the cable must not exceed 1,000 m.
When the data communication cable is installed, and the power supply to the controller
is switched on, the function can be checked. The communication LEDs placed inside
the controller must flash irregularly. If this is not the case, the data communication
string should be carefully examined, and the error corrected. The position of the LEDs
can be seen in Figure 2.
2.5 Connection of the power supply to the controllers
Before the power supply to the controllers is switched on, it must once again be ensured
that the boiler plant is not unintentionally started.
Step A: Check that the EPROMs, EEPROM, and CPU are inserted in the CPU-print
for all included controllers.
Step B: Switch on the power supply to one of the controllers.
Step C: Check that the power LED and reset LED flash briefly when the power
supply is switched on.
Step D: Check that the idle LED and communication LEDs flash irregularly after
the power has been switched on.
Step E: Carry out the same procedures for all other included controllers.
2.6 Commissioning of the EPROM
When the control system is commissioned or the software is upgraded to a different

version number, the control system must be configured to fit the task. The items, which
must be configured to obtain an operational system, are, e.g. panel type, burner type,
number of burners, etc. Please note that the version number of the EPROMs in all
included controllers must be identical. Also note that each set of EPROMs should
match the panel in which the EPROMs are installed. The EPROMs are divided into
three different sets (Local, Power and EGB/EGE). In the following sections the start-
up procedure is described in work steps.
OM9306_62#F.1
2.6.1 Start-up procedure

Step A: When the electrical power to a controller is switched on, a message will be
displayed for 2-3 seconds, which indicates version number, time, and com-
pany names.
After this message the controller displays the menu item line "COPY EEPROM
[YES]". Please note that this menu only appears initially at start up if the EPROMs
have been changed or new software has been programmed onto the EPROMs.
The controller is among other things equipped with an EEPROM, which is used to
store settings that deviate from the default settings provided in the EPROMs (e.g.
settings for shut downs, alarms, start/stop set points, etc.). It is therefore important to
distinguish between commissioning of the plant and upgrade of the software.When the
control system is commissioned for the first time, "NO" should be selected because
the EEPROM does not contain any settings which deviate from the default settings. If,
on the other hand, the software is upgraded, it might be advisable to select "YES". In
this way all settings, which were set at the initial commissioning or at a later point,
will be maintained.
Step B: Press the SET soft key for a few seconds. Select "YES" or "NO" on the soft
keys ▲/▼ and press the set key.
Step C: If it is intended to select "YES", menu item B can be skipped by pressing
the soft key ◄. This is because the default setting is already "YES". In this
way the controller goes directly to the next menu.
Step D: When a selection has been made in the "COPY EEPROM" menu, press the
◄ soft key once, and the controller displays screen menu for setup of control
panel.
The displayed menu is the configuration menu where panel type, burner type, burner
family, baud rate, and communication are set. The default settings must be changed to
fit task.
Step E: With the black bar placed on "PANEL TYPE", press the SET soft key for a
few seconds. Enter the super user password and press the SET key once
more.
Step F: Select the panel type (LOCAL 1, LOCAL 2, POWER 1, POWER 2, EGE
or EGB) by means of the soft keys ▲/▼ and press the SET key again.
Step G: Move the black bar to the menu item line "BURNER TYPE" and press the
SET soft key for a few seconds.
Step H: Select the burner type (Aalborg KBSD, KBO-E, KBO-M, WH-RMS,
WHMSZ, Aalborg KBP, Aalborg KBE, KBO-H, Aalborg KBM, WH-LZ,
WH-RL or NOT DEF) by means of the soft keys ▲/▼ and press the SET
key again.
Step I: Move the black bar to the menu item line "F. O. SYSTEM" and press the
SET soft key for a few seconds.
Step J: Select the fuel oil system type (S, 0 → 17) by means of the soft keys ▲/▼
and press the SET key again.
OM9306_62#F.1
Note: The menu item line “SOFTWARE ID” is a non-edit line configured to
display the corresponding software ID from the configuration input from
“BURNER TYPE” and “F. O. SYSTEM”. This unique software ID must
be identical to the software ID stated at the oil system PI diagram for the
actual oil system. The software ID must be stated in enquiries concerning
the software. The software ID is not to be mistaken for software version as
these are two different parameters.
Step K: Move the black bar to the menu item line "IO CFG" and press the SET soft
key for a few seconds.
Step L: Select the input/output configuration of the system (AC or ACT) by means
of the soft keys ▲/▼ and press the SET key again.
Step M: Move the black bar to the menu item line "BURNER FAMILY" and press
the SET soft key for a few seconds.
Step N: Select burner family "MULTI" or "ALONE" by means of the soft keys ▲/
▼ and press the SET key again. If the plant includes two boilers, and master/
slave operation is intended, "MULTI" must be selected.
Step O: Move the black bar to the menu item line "NODE NO.OFFSET" and press
Step P: Select the communication channel (1-125) by means of the soft keys ◄/►/
▲/▼ and press the SET key again. The node No. offset should be selected
to the same value for all included controllers in case of a single boiler plant
or a multi boiler plant with common supply systems. For a multi boiler plant
with separate supply systems the node No. offset must be divided into
groups. This means that all included controllers for the first boiler should
have the same identical number and all included controllers for the second
boiler should have another identical number.The difference in the number
value must always be minimum 12. E.g. if the node number for the first
group of controllers is 1, then the second group of controllers must be set to
1 + 12 = 13.
Step Q: Move the black bar to the menu item line "PART NO.OFFSET" and press
Step R: Select the partner communication channel (1-125) by means of the soft keys
◄/►/▲/▼ and press the SET key again.The "node No.offset" of the partner
boiler panels in a multi boiler plant must be entered in the menu item line.
In case of a single boiler plant it is advisable also to enter the node No. offset
in this menu item line.
Step S: Move the black bar to the menu item line "BAUD RATE" and press the SET
soft key for a few seconds.
Step T: Select the baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400)
by means of the soft keys ▲/▼ and press the SET key again. The baud rate
should be selected to the same value for all included controllers in the plant
and as high as possible to obtain a high transmission speed.
Step U: Press the ◄ soft key once. After a few seconds the control system performs
an automatic reboot of the system. In this way the changed configuration
will be active.
2.6.2 Additional configuration
When the controller is restarted, the front menu is displayed, or if one or more shut
downs are present, the shut down list is displayed.
OM9306_62#F.1
By means of the arrow and SET soft keys the menu items listed in the following work
steps should be checked and/or configured. The menu tree and the explanation list
found in this manual can be used to guide the operator through the system.
When the additional checks and set-up procedures are performed the LOCAL 1 con-
troller (LP1), and if provided, LOCAL 2 controller (LP2), must be used.
Step A: Enter the menu item line "SETUP/CTRL MODE/BURNER CTRL MODE"
by means of the soft keys and check/set that the burner is in "STOPPED"
mode.
Step B: If "MULTI" was selected in the menu item line "SETUP/CONFIG/PANEL
SYSTEM/BURNER FAMILY", enter the menu item line "SETUP/CON-
FIG/ BURNER SYSTEM/MASTER-SLAVE". By means of the soft keys
set the burner operation to "MASTER or SLAVE".
Step C: Enter the menu item line "SETUP/CONFIG/BURNER OPTIONS" by
means of the soft keys and choose the relevant options for the boiler plant.
The actual options included in the boiler plant appear from the flow diagrams
and technical data found in the manual.
Step D: Enter the menu item line "SETUP/TIMERS/DATE/TIME" by means of the
soft keys and set the date and time.
Step E: Enter all menu items for "REMOTE CTRL" (sub menu level 4 or 5) by
means of the soft keys and check/set that the remote control output is "0".
This concludes the initial start-up procedure when the EPROMs are commissioned or
changed.
2.7 Additional start-up procedures
In the following section the actions which must be carried out before the boiler plant
is fully operational are briefly described.
2.7.1 Continue with the commissioning process

Before proceeding with the actual commissioning, the instructions for the boiler, burn-
er, and control system should be studied. The instructions must only be considered as
guidelines. This is due to the fact that each plant should be commissioned individually
to obtain the best burner performance for the specific plant. It is therefore difficult to
give an exact commissioning procedure to follow.
Prior to and during the commissioning of the boiler plant a number of settings, timers,
parameters, etc. should be checked and adjusted to optimise the function of the plant.
Adjustments should be carried out as the optimisation requirements emerge.
By means of the menu tree, the explanation list, sequence diagram, instructions, etc.
the commissioning engineer can be guided through the system.
2.7.2 Continue after exchange of EPROMs

All vital parameters and settings should be checked prior to start-up of the boiler plant.
A new version of the software might contain new or moved menu items, which should
be checked and/or set before start-up.
OM9306_62#F.1
2.8 Commissioning of the EEPROM
The EEPROM does not require any commissioning work because all settings, config-
urations, etc. are automatically stored in the EEPROM. But in plants which include
two identical boilers the commissioning work can be facilitated by copying the contents
of an EEPROM to another. The plants in question are, e.g. two Aalborg OS boilers
with two stage pressure atomizing burners.
Before the copy procedure is possible, a number of conditions must be fulfilled:
• The boilers, burners, water level control equipment, etc. must be completely iden-
tical.
• One of the boilers should be fully commissioned with regard to parameters, set-
tings, values, etc.
• The serial numbers must be different.
If these requirements are fulfilled, the contents of an EEPROM can be copied as de-
scribed in the following work procedures:
Step A: Switch off the power supply to the controller on the commissioned boiler.
Step B: Remove the EEPROM. See section 3.2 for instruction regarding insertion
and removal of an EPROM.
Step C: Switch off the power supply to the controller on the boiler, which should be
commissioned, and remove the EEPROM.
Step D: Insert the EEPROM from the non-commissioned boiler into the controller
of the commissioned boiler and switch on the power supply.
Step E: If the menu item line "COPY EEPROM [YES]" appears in the display, press
the SET soft key for a few seconds. Select "NO" on the soft keys ▲/▼, press
the SET key and the ◄ soft key. In this way the commissioning data, which
are saved in the RAM store circuit of the controller, will automatically be
copied into the EEPROM.
Step F: Switch off the power supply again and remove the EEPROM from the com-
missioned boiler.
Step G: Insert the original EEPROM into the controller, which was commissioned
first, and switch on the power supply.
Step H: Insert the "copied" EEPROM into the controller of the non-commissioned
boiler and switch on the power supply.
Step I: When the menu item line "COPY EEPROM [YES]" appears in the display,
press the ◄ soft key. The controller will then automatically reboot and the
data of the EEPROM will be copied into the RAM store circuit of the con-
troller.
Step J: If the boilers are operating as master/slave boilers, the local panels must be
set as "LOCAL 1" and "LOCAL 2" respectively. Select ""SETUP/CONFIG/
PANEL SYSTEM/PANEL TYPE", press “SET” for a few seconds, choose
panel type by the soft keys ▲/▼, then press the ◄ soft key. The control
system automatically performs a restart of the system.
In this way the EEPROM of the non-commissioned boiler will now contain the same
data as the EEPROM of the commissioned boiler. Please note that during the actual
commissioning of this boiler it might be necessary to readjust a number of settings,
timers, parameters, etc. to optimise the function of the boiler.
OM9306_62#F.1
Note: The copying process should not be performed between a local controller
and a common controller. If this is done, e.g. copying the contents of an
EEPROM from a local controller to the EEPROM from a common con-
troller, the common controller will be configured as a local controller.
3 Servicing of the panels

The following instruction describes the work procedures which should be carried out
in case some of the main parts of the controller are defective and must be replaced. It
is recommended that Alfa Laval is contacted before changing any of these parts.
Replacement of parts must be performed with the power supply to the controller
switched off. Please remember that outside control voltage may be connected. Fur-
thermore, precaution must be taken to avoid an unintentional start of the boiler plant
during servicing of the controllers.
3.1 General service notes
The general service notes describe the general initiatives which must be performed
whenever parts of the controller are serviced or replaced.
In the following sections references to section 3.1 are made. Each time such a reference
appears, the service engineer should consult the section for further information.
Step A: Switch off the power supply to the controller.
Note: When replacing the battery the power supply to the controller should re-
main switched on, if possible.
Step B: Open the door and remove the transparent plate, which covers the printed
boards.
Step C: Carry out the necessary work procedures as described in the following sec-
tions.
Step D: Mount the transparent plate and door again.
Step E: Switch on the power supply to the controller.
Caution: Electronic parts can be damaged by static electricity. To avoid this,

damage precautions must be taken to discharge the static electricity
without the current passing through the electronic parts. E.g. touch
physically the part, upon which the electronic part is placed, both before
and while removing it. And touch physically the metal of the controller
cabinet, in which the electronic part should be positioned both before
and while fitting it. Naturally, the same hand must be used that holds
(or is going to hold) the electronic part.
OM9306_62#F.1
3.2 Replacing an EPROM
The EPROM is a programmable module, placed in a socket on the CPU print, which
contains software for the control system. When the software is upgraded (or commis-
sioned) to a different version number, the control system must be configured to fit the
task. The configuration process includes setting of panel type, burner type, etc. If, on
the other hand, the EPROMs are exchanged to EPROMs with the same version number,
the reconfiguration procedure should not be performed. This also applies if one or both
EPROMs for some reason have been removed from the socket holder for a period of
time.
When the EPROM is replaced, the following work procedures must be carried out:
Step A: Before the power supply is switched off, note all settings. Even though the
EEPROM store all settings that deviate from the default settings provided
in the EPROMs, it is advisable to carry out this initiative. This is due to the
fact that if an irreversible error occurs during the replacement, the data will
still be available.
Step B: See section 3.1 for disassembling instructions.
Step C: Remove the EPROM from the socket on the CPU print. The position can be
seen in Figure 2.
Note: It is of great importance that the EPROM is handled with extreme care
because it is a sophisticated electronic device. An EPROM must always be
carefully manoeuvred in and out of the socket holder due to the risk of
bending the pins on the EPROM.
Step D: Check the version number on the new EPROM. The version number appears
from the white label on the surface of the EPROM. Please note that the
version number of the EPROM must be identical in all included controllers.
Step E: Insert the new EPROM in the appertaining socket (socket U17 or U18 de-
pendent of software package programmed onto EPROM) by using the fin-
gers. Take care that all pins on the EPROM are fitted into the socket. One
of the EPROM ends is provided with a notch. When the EPROM is inserted
in the socket holder, this notch must be in the same direction as the notch
indicated on the protection plate. Please see Figure 2. If the EPROM is in-
serted in the reversed direction, the display flashes when the power supply
is switched on again.
Step F: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
Step G: Carry out the work procedures described in section 2.6 if a re-configuration
of the control system is necessary (if the software is upgraded to a different
version number).
3.3 Replacing the EEPROM
The EEPROM is a programmable module, placed in a socket on the CPU print, in

which the settings are stored that deviate from the default settings provided in the
EPROM (e.g. settings for shut downs, alarms, start/stop set points, etc.).
OM9306_62#F.1
The panels should always be operated with the EEPROM inserted. But operation is
possible without the EEPROM inserted, and settings, configuration, etc. can be
changed and remembered even if the power supply is switched off. The data are also
stored in the RAM store circuit, which is supplied with power from the battery. When
the EEPROM is inserted in the CPU print again, these changes will automatically be
stored in the EEPROM.
If the EPROMs are replaced, e.g. due to upgrading of the software, and the EEPROM
is removed, all settings set during commissioning or at a later point will be lost.
When the EEPROM is replaced, the following work procedures must be followed:
Step A: Before the power supply is switched off, note all settings. If an irreversible
error occurs during the replacement, the data will still be available.
Step C: Remove the EEPROM from the socket on the CPU print. The position can
be seen in Figure 2. When the EEPROM is replaced, the same precautions
must be taken with regard to removal and insertion as during the replacement
of an EPROM, see section 3.2.
Step D: Insert the new EEPROM in the socket by using the fingers. Take care that
all pins on the EEPROM are fitted into the socket and that the direction is
correct.
Step E: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
The control system is now in normal operation, and no further initiatives are necessary.
The current settings, configuration, etc. are automatically transferred and stored into
the new empty EEPROM. This also applies when changes have been made after the
old EEPROM became defective or was removed.
3.4 Replacing the CPU
If the CPU is defect or removed, the display will be out, and several of the relays switch
continuously. The following work procedures should be performed when the CPU is
replaced:
Step A: See section 3.1 for disassembling instructions.

Step B: Remove the CPU from the socket on the CPU print. The position can be
seen in Figure 2. When the CPU is replaced, the same precautions must be
taken with regard to removal and insertion as during the replacement of an
EPROM, see section 3.2.
Step C: Insert the new CPU in the socket by using the fingers. Take care that all pins
on the CPU are fitted into the socket and that the direction is correct.
Step D: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
3.5 Replacing the CPU print
If the CPU print, which holds the EPROMs, EEPROM, and CPU (see Figure 2), must
be replaced, the following work procedures should be carried out:
OM9306_62#F.1
Step C: Remove the screws by which the CPU print is fixed.

Step D: Carefully pull out the CPU print. It should be pulled out at the side in which
the connecting plugs are positioned. This is the side opposite the position of
the EPROMs.
Step E: Remove the EPROMs and EEPROM from the CPU print. Please see sections
3.2 and 3.3 for instructions regarding removal and insertion of respectively,
EPROMs and EEPROM.
Step F: Insert the EPROMs and EEPROM in the new CPU print by using the fingers.
Take care that all pins on the EPROMs and EEPROM are fitted into the
sockets and that the directions are correct.
Step G: Insert the new CPU print into the socket connections on the DI relay print
and fix it with the screws.
Step H: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
press the ◄ soft key a few times. The controller automatically reboots and
the data of the EEPROM will be copied into the RAM store circuit of the
local panel.
If "NO" is selected in the menu item "COPY EEPROM", the system must be re-con-
figured once again. This is also the case if a new EEPROM is inserted in connection
with the replacement of a CPU print.
3.6 Replacing the DI relay print
If the DI relay print must be replaced, the following work procedures should be carried
out:
Step C: Remove the CPU print, see section 3.5 for disassembling instructions.
Step D: Remove the screws by which the DI relay print is fixed.
Step E: Carefully pull out the DI relay print. It should be pulled out at the side in
which the connecting plugs are positioned.
Step F: Insert the new DI relay print into the socket connections on the relay print
and fix it with the screws.
Step G: Insert the CPU print into the socket connections on the DI relay print and
fix it with the screws.
press the ◄ soft key a few times and the data of the EEPROM will be copied
into the RAM store circuit of the local panel.
If "NO" is selected in the menu item "COPY EEPROM", the system must be re-con-
figured once again. This is also the case if a new EEPROM is inserted in connection
with the replacement of a CPU print.
3.7 Replacing the relay print
When the relay print must be replaced, the following work procedures should be fol-
lowed:
OM9306_62#F.1
Step C: Mark all connected wires and disconnect these from the terminal rows of
the relay print. The position of the terminal rows, relay print, etc. can be seen
in Figure 2.
Warning: Some of the wires may still be live, and precautions must be taken to
secure personal safety.
Step D: Remove the screws that fix the print and tilt the print out of the plastic holders
positioned below the terminal row.
Step E: Pull the print off the guide opposite the terminal row and out of the cabinet.
Step F: Move the CPU print with the EPROMs and EEPROM onto the new relay
print, see section 3.5.
Step G: Insert the new relay print into the guide and click it into position at the plastic
holders. Fix the relay print by means of the screws.
Step H: Connect all the marked wires to the terminal rows in the correct order.
Step I: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
If the menu item line "COPY EEPROM [YES]" appears in the display when the control
system is restarted, perform the same work procedures as described in section 3.5.
3.8 Replacing an exchangeable relay
The digital output DRL1 to DRL4 are equipped with exchangeable relays. This is
because the actions that are controlled by these output signals cause an increased num-
ber of relay changes which increases the risk of wearing down these relays.
The following work procedures should be performed when an exchangeable relay is

replaced:

Step B: Push the black plastic clamp, which holds the relay to the side.
Step C: Pull up the relay and replace it. The relay must be inserted correctly, see the
connections on the relay bottom plate and the legs on the relay. Be careful
not to bend the legs on the relay.
Step D: Push back the clamp over the relay.
3.9 Replacing the display
If the display must be replaced, the following work procedures should be carried out:

Step B: Disconnect the connection plug for the display on the connection socket of
the relay print. The position can be seen in Figure 2.
Step C: Unscrew the two nuts that fix the top display print and carefully pull it out.
The two power supply wires to the bottom display print should also be dis-
connected.
OM9306_62#F.1
Step D: Unscrew the four nuts that fix the display protection plate and bottom display
print, which includes the display.
Step E: Replace the defective part (top display print, bottom display print, or both).
Step F: Assemble the bottom display print, display protection plate, and top display
print by means of the nuts and distance pieces. When assembled, the nuts
must not be fastened too mush or else several horizontal lines may appear
in the display.
Step G: Connect the two power supply wires between the prints and the connection
plug for the display into the connection socket of the relay print.
3.10 Replacing the soft keys
If the soft keys must be replaced, the following work procedures should be followed:

Step B: Disconnect the connection plug for the soft keys on the connection socket
of the relay print. The position can be seen in Figure 2.
Step C: Carefully remove the plastic cover that covers the soft key section.
Step D: Replace the soft key section.
Step E: Carefully mount the plastic cover again using silicone for sealing.
3.11 Replacing the door on power panels
If the door of a power panel must be replaced, the following work procedures should
be performed:

Step B: Disconnect the two connection plugs for the display and soft keys on the
connection sockets of the relay print. The positions can be seen in Fig-
ure 2.
Step C: Remove the two fuse straps as well as the earth connections and remove the
defective door.
Step D: Mount the two fuse straps and connect the earth connections between the
door and the panel cabinet.
Step E: Connect the connection plugs for the display and soft keys on the new door
to the connection sockets on the relay print.
3.12 Replacing the circuit fuse
If the circuit fuse needs to be replaced, the four line crystal display will be off. A new
circuit fuse with the specifications 3.15T/250 V, 5 x 20 glass should be inserted.
The following work procedures should be carried out when the circuit fuse is replaced:

Step B: Screw out the top of the fuse holder and replace the circuit fuse. The location
of the circuit fuse can be seen in Figure 2.
Step C: Screw in the top of the fuse holder with the circuit fuse.
OM9306_62#F.1
Step D: See section 3.1 for assembling instructions.
3.13 Replacing the battery
The battery is primarily used to ensure that the internal watch runs accurately after
power cut. This is done by supplying the RAM-stores during power cuts.
The battery is of the Lithium type (size AA) and has an expected life up to five years,
depending on the actual conditions such as humidity, ambient temperature, etc. Please
note that it is not recharged by the electronic circuit in the controller.
If the menu item line "COPY EEPROM [YES]" appears in the display after power cut,
the battery should most likely be replaced.
The following work procedures should be followed when the battery is replaced:

Step B: Cut off the cable binders, which hold the battery. The location of the battery
can be seen in Figure 2.
Step C: Disconnect the battery wires and replace the battery.
Note: Disposal of the old battery should be in accordance with the environmental
rules in force.
Step D: Use two new cable binders to fix the new battery in its correct place.
Step F: If the menu item line "COPY EEPROM [YES]" appears in the display, press
the ◄ soft key a few times and the data of the EEPROM will be copied into
the RAM store circuit of the controller.
The controller is now ready for normal operation. If a new battery is not available,
"YES" must be selected in the menu item line "COPY EEPROM" every time the panel
is started.
3.14 Replacing the data communication cable
If the communication cable is damaged, it must be replaced. The installation and com-
missioning work should be performed as described in section 2.4. When the cable is
replaced at one of the controllers, the screen must be connected correctly in the screwed
joint as shown in Figure 3.
The new cable must be of the same type as the original cable delivered by Alfa Laval
and as a minimum have the following data:
• Cable type: 2-conductor data cable with screening

• Loop resistance: 74 Ω/min.
• Insulation resistance, minimum: 100 MΩ-km
• Pair capacity: 85 pF/m
OM9306_62#F.1
Finishing of the cable screening in a screwed joint
1.
2.
3.
4.
Panel cabinet
5.
OM9306_56#B.1
MONITORING AND CONTROL VIA TOUCH SCREEN
Monitoring and control via touch screen
1 General
This section describes the mimic pictures, dialog boxes, lists, etc. for a standard mon-
itoring and control system. In the example pictures is shown a generic boiler with a
KBP burner and an EGBexhaustgas boiler. The illustrations and descriptions do not
show the completetouch screen system, but gives an insight into the system concept.
Notice also that the pictures show a maximum configuration meaning that e.g. inert
gas is shown. On the real system this will not be present if the system is not configured
for inert gas.
The touch screen is connected to the boiler control panels via a RS485 communication
network. By means of this connection the touch screen monitoring and control system
can receive, handle, and transmit data to and from the control panels. This enables
control of the boiler plant from the touch screen. The mimic pictures and lists are used
to monitor the boiler plant and the dialog windows are used to control and operate the
boiler plant.
Notice that it is still necessary to configure the basic settings such as burner type on
the local controller.
2 Operation of the touch screen system

When the touch screen is switched on, it will automatically start the monitoring and
control program after a short initialisation period. Figure 1 illustrates the start-up mimic
picture.
From the main picture, it is possible to acknowledge alarms have access to the different
subsystems of the plant: Steam (and exhaust gas boiler), water, fuel, and burner system
as well as an overview picture called boiler. In the main window the key can also be
retrieved, trend curves for the performance of the plant can be viewed and the set-up
menu can be accessed. A detailed description of the different menus is given in the
following. The subsystem pictures steam, water, fuel, burner and boiler as well as the
main- and alarm pictures areall accessible from each subsystem picture.
OM9306_56#B.1
Start-up picture on the touch screen
The key in the upper left corner shows that the system is unlocked allowing parameter
changes from the touch screen.How to retrieve and release the key lock can be seen in
the document “Key Operation Lock”.
2.1 Contact information
From the main picture access is given to contact information on Aalborg

Industries A/S by clicking the logo as illustrated in Figure 2.
Access to contact information
Figure 2 contouch_15bx0200170en.wmf
OM9306_56#B.1
Contact information picture
From the picture containing contact information access is given to the main menu by
clicking the arrow in the lower left corner (Figure 3).
2.2 Alarm menu
The [ALARM] button (Figure 4) placed in the upper right corner of the screen is
accessible from any of the submenus, which ensures full access to acknowledging
alarms independent of which picture is present on the screen.
Allarm button
Figure 4 contouch_17ax0200180en.wmf
The [ALARM] button gives access to the alarm list (Figure 5)
OM9306_56#B.1
Sub menu: Alarm list
Figure 5 om9306_56_alarmx0062290en.wmf
[ESC] Escape button. Return to the previous menu.
[↑] Scroll up in the alarm list.
[√] Acknowledge an alarm.
[ ] Enlarge text (cycles through sizes)
[ ] See timestamp and other information for the alarms.
[↓] Scroll down the alarm list.
2.3 Steam system menu
The steam system menu gives access to an overview of the steam system including
steam dump and inert gas status, modifying parameters and accessing the exhaustgas
boiler menuif such is part of the system. The structure of the steam menu is illustrated
in Figure 6
Menu structure for the steam menu
Main Steam Exhaustgas Feed water/circulation

boiler pump control
Parameters
OM9306_56#B.1
The steam system menu is entered from the main menu by clicking the [STEAM]
button (Figure 7).
Steam system menu
The picture under the steam menu is an overview of the steam system (Figure 8).
Steam system overview
In the steam overview picture, the actual values for boiler pressure, water level, and
load can be seen as well as the state of the steam dump valve and inert gas. Parameters
for the steam system are set under the [PARAM] button in the lower right corner and
in the middle left access is given to the exhaust gas boiler picture if configured.
OM9306_56#B.1
2.3.1 Parameters for the steam menu

From the steam menu there is access to the parameters submenu by clicking the [PAR-
AM] button in the lower right corner of the steam menu (see Figure 9)
Entering parameter sub menu for the steam menu
In the parameter sub menu (illustrated in Figure 10) the actual set point for the steam
dump is monitored as well as the process value and the regulator output. The set point
can be changed by pushing Set point button (dark grey). From the parameter submenu
there is also access to the inert gas menu, the main menu, the steam menu (arrow), and
the regulator parameters
Parameter sub menu under the steam menu
OM9306_56#B.1
Regulator parameters
The regulator sub menu (see Figure 11) gives access to monitoring and changing of
the regulation parameters: sampling time, proportional gain, integral time, and the
derivative time. Furthermore, the control mode of the valve can be monitored and
changed between auto and manual. If the valve is controlled manually, the position
can be set under the “Manual position set-point” as a percentage of full open. 0.0 % is
closed valve, and 100.0 % is a fully open valve. From this sub menu it is possible to
return to the parameter submenu (Arrow) or the main menu.
Regulator parameteres under the steam dump sub menu
Inert Gas sub menu

From the parameters sub menu there is access to the inert gas menu by pushing the
button [Inert gas] (Figure 12)
OM9306_56#B.1
Parameters submenu under the steam menu
In the inert gas menu (Figure 13 ) the load and forced load can be monitored.
Inert gas menu
From the Inert gas menu there is access to the main menu, the steam dump parame-
tersusing the [steam dump] button, and the steam menu, when pushing the arrow in
the lower left corner.
OM9306_56#B.1
2.3.2 Exhaust gas boiler picture

If an exhaust gas boiler is chosen, the Steam overview picture will show an EGE or
EGB button (Figure 14 shows an EGB button) depending on if and what exhaust gas
boiler is configured (done on the controller in the panel).
Exhaust gas boiler button
Pressing the button brings the user to the exhaust gas menu (see Figure 15).
Exhaust gas boiler menu
OM9306_56#B.1
In Figure 15 both circulation pumps are stopped. Manual control of the pumps can be
done by clicking the pump. Notice the * besides the pump. * marks that the icon (pump)
is a button.
2.3.3 Circulation/EGB feedwaterpumps

Depending on the boiler type chosen the exhaust gas water pumps are called circulation
pumps (EGE) or EGB feed water pumps (EGB). In the following they will just be
referred to as EGB feed water pumps.
Changing the state of these pumps is done by clicking the pump button (Figure 16).
Accessing EGB feed water pumps sub menu
The dialog window for the circulation pump is illustrated inFigure 17. In this dialog
box, the mode of the pump (start, stop, and stand by) can be set by pushing the buttons.
The status of the pump is seen under status. If any alarms were present, they would be
marked in the “Alarms” section of the window. It will be marked if the alarm is due
to no feedback or overload (Circulation pumps also have a low flow alarm).
OM9306_56#B.1
Dialog window for an EGB feed water pumps
From the pump dialog, it is possible to navigate back to the exhaust gas boiler picture
by pushing the arrow in the lower left corner, to the main menu by pushing the [MAIN]
button in the upper left corner or to go to the next pump on the exhaustgas boiler (if
available) by pressing the arrow in the lower right corner of the picture.
2.4 Water Menu
The water menu gives access to an overview of the feed water system and to change
the parameters of the system. The structure of the feed water menu is illustrated in
Figure 18
Menu structure for the water menu
Main Water Feed water pumps
Chemical dosing
Parameters
The water menu is entered from the main menu (Figure 19) or from any of the other
overview pictures.
OM9306_56#B.1
Water menu access
Figure 19 contouch_32ax0198790en.bmp
The mimic picture of the water menu gives an overview of the feed water system
(Figure 20).
Feed water system overview
At the feed water overview, the steam pressure, water level and load of the system can
be monitored. Furthermore, the status of the feed water valve is seen as a percentage
of open, in this example (Figure 20) the valve is closed. A measurement of the salinity
is also visible as well as it is possible to see if the pumps are running or stopped. In
Figure 20 the two circulation pumps from the hot well are running and the chemical
dosing pump is stopped.
OM9306_56#B.1
From the feed water menu there is access to monitoring and control of the different
pumps by pushing them and also parameters for the feed water system can be set under
the [PARAM] button in the lower right corner.
2.4.1 Feedwater Pump

Control and monitoring of the feedwater pumps can be done by clicking the pump as
illustrated in Figure 21.
Access to circulation pump
The dialog window for the feedwater pump is illustrated in Figure 22
Dialog window for a circulation pump
OM9306_56#B.1
As seen in the figure the pump control resembles the control described in Section 2.3.3.
From the dialog window of a water pump there is access to the main menu or the
overview of the feed water system by clicking the button in the lower left corner.
2.4.2 Parameters
Under the submenu parameters access is given to alarm settings, water level settings
etc. The submenu is entered from the feed water overview picture (Figure 23)
Access to the parameter submenu
The parameter submenu under the feed water system gives access to the water alarm
limits as illustrated in Figure 24. The shut-down limit and the alarm limits for salinity
can be monitored and changed.
OM9306_56#B.1
Parameter submenu
From the water alarm limits access is given to water level regulation parameters,to
feedwater ON/OFF regulation parameters, to the main menu, and to the water system
overview
Water level regulation

Access to the regulation and monitoring of the water level is done by clicking the button
on the left side of the picture (Figure 25).
Access to water level regulation
OM9306_56#B.1
The water level regulation and monitoring is carried out from the mimic picture illus-
trated in Figure 26. In the upper part of the level regulation dialog window the actual
values are monitored, i.e. the actual set point, the actual value, and the regulator output.
The set point and the process value are measured in mm from normal water level, where
a minus indicates that the water level is below normal water level, and no sign in front
of the figure means above normal water level. The lower part of the dialog window is
for changing the values of the set points and the normal/stand-by limits.
Water level regulation dialog window
From the water level regulation dialog window, there is access to the Salinity limits,
the ON/OFF regulation menu and it is possible to go to the main menu and well as
return to the overview of the feed water system (the buttons in the lower left of Fig-
ure 26). Furthermore, access is given to the regulator parameters.
Regulator Parameter
Access to the feed water regulator parameters is given from the water level menu as
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to feed water regulation parameters
The regulator parameters, which can be set is illustrated in Figure 28 and they are listed
and described below.
Feed water regulation parameters
Feed water level regulator parameters, which can be set:
[Neutral zone] The maximum deviation from the set point, which is accepted without
any regulation, takes place.
[I low limit] The lowest acceptable water level.
[I high limit] The highest acceptable water level.
OM9306_56#B.1
[Sampling time] The time between two samples.
[Proportional Gain] Regulator parameter
[Integral time] Regulator parameter
[Derivative time] Regulator parameter
[Valve control mode] For setting the valve in automatic or manual mode.
[Manual pos. set point] If the valve is set to be in manual mode, the position can here
be set as a percentage of fully open.
From the feed water level regulation dialog window, access is given back to the main
menu and the feed water overview (lower left arrow).
Feedwater ON/OFF regulation
The last menu point in the feed water menu is the feedwater ON/OFF regulation menu
accessible via the button with the same name on the left of the menu (see Figure 29).
Access to feed water ON/OFF regulation
The menu simply shows the status of the pumps (see Figure 30) to be used when running
an ON/OFF feedwater regulation.
OM9306_56#B.1
Feed water ON/OFF regulation dialog window
From the feedwater ON/OFF regulation dialog window, there is access to the Salinity
limits and the Level regulation menu. It is also possible to go to the main menu and
well as return to the overview of the feed water system (the buttons in the lower left
of Figure 30).
2.5 Fuel menu
From the fuel menu access is given to an overview of the fuel system and control of
the pumps in the system. The structure of the fuel menu is illustrated inFigure 31
Menu structure for the fuel meny
Main Fuel Fuel oil pumps
Parameters
The fuel menu is entered from the main menu as illustrated in Figure 32 or any of the
other system menus.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the fuel menu
The picture under the fuel menu is an overview of the fuel system, which is illustrated
in Figure 33.
Fuel oil system overview
On the overview of the fuel oil system access is given to the fuel oil pumps and pa-
rameters to be set in the fuel oil system. Furthermore, fuel oil temperature and pressure
can be monitored if available. It is also possible to see if the system is running HFO
or diesel and what type of oil heater is configured. If the heater is electric the status of
the element is indicated with a green bar meaning on. If the heater is a steam heater
the temperature of the steam used to heat the fuel oil is displayed.
OM9306_56#B.1
2.5.1 Fuel oil pumps

From the fuel oil system overview, access is given to the fuel oil pumps by clicking
the pumps as illustrated in Figure 34.
Access to fuel oil pump
As seen in Figure 35 the pump control resembles the control described in Section 2.3.3.
Fuel oil pump dialog window
OM9306_56#B.1
From the dialog window of a fuel oil pump there is access to the main menu or the
overview of the fuel oil system by clicking the button in the lower left corner. By
pressing the arrow in the lower right corner the picture switches to the next fuel oil
pump.
2.5.2 Parameters for the fuel oil system

Access to the parameter settings of the fuel oil system is given by clicking the [PAR-
AM] button in the lower left corner as illustrated in Figure 36
Acess to the fuel oil system parameters
The dialog window for the parameter settings for the fuel oil system is illustrated in
Figure 37. Notice that the illustration is for a KBP burner as mentioned in the intro-
duction. For some burners (e.g. RMS) the preheater is placed on the burner picture for
better correspondence with the actual burner design. Placement for menus relevant for
the preheater will therefore move as well.
OM9306_56#B.1
Parameters / Pressure alarm limits for the fuel oil system
Figure 37 om9306_56_hc_003x0062330en.wmf
Fuel oil pressurelimits menu

The top menu available (Figure 37) is the Pressurelimits list. The list holds the alarm
limits concerning fuel oil pressure.Notice that if a pressure measurement is not avail-
able on the burner (e.g. on MS), the common oil pressure on the common controller is
used.
The high shutdown alarm limit, low alarm limit, and the low shut-down limit can be
set by pressing the dark grey button after each point in the list.
From the menu there is access to the main menu or the overview of the fuel oil system
by clicking the button in the lower left corner. Accessis also available to the other menu
points: Oil temp. limits, Oil Temp reg. and burner limits.
Fuel Oil Temperature limits menu

The menu oil temp. limits holds alarm limits concerning fuel oil temperatures (see
Figure 38 ). Notice that this temperature is measured in the preheater.
OM9306_56#B.1
Temperature alarm limits for the fuel oil system
The high and low shutdown as well as the low alarm limit can be set by pressing the
dark grey button after each point in the list.
From the menu there is access to the main menu or the overview of the fuel oil system
by clicking the button in the lower left corner. Access is also available to the other
menu points: Pressure limits, Oil Temp reg. and burner limits.
Temperature regulator menu

In the Oil temp reg. menu (see Figure 39) the regulation set points are displayed in the
top.
Fuel oil temperature regulation
OM9306_56#B.1
Notice that KBP has two set points: One for standby and one for firing. If a steam
heater is chosen (as it is the case in Figure 39) the menu also displays control buttons
used for controlling the steam valve in the heater. The actuator can be set in manual
mode allowing manual control of its position by pressing the up arrow for increasing
the opening degree of the valve or down arrow for decreasing the degree. By pressing
the Regulator set points button in the bottom of the picture it is possible to configure
the regulator parameters. The parameters that can be set for a steam heater is illustrated
in Figure 40 and described in the list below.
Fuel oil temperature regulation parameters
Fuel oil temperature regulator parameters, which can be set:
[Neutral zone] A band around the set point where regulation is not carried out (the
process value error is ignored).
[Gain] Regulator parameter – Proportional gain
[Sampling time] The time between two samples.
[Integral time] Regulator parameter
[Difference time] Regulator parameter
[Minimum pulse] The minimum time the preheater can be on in each PWM period.
[Run time] Time for one PWM period.
From the parameters menu access is given either back to the temperature regulation
menu using the arrow in the lower left corner or to the main menu using the top left
button. Back in the Temperature regulation menu there is access to the main menu or
OM9306_56#B.1
the overview of the fuel oil system (button in the lower left corner). Access is also
available to the other menu points: Pressure limits, Oil Temp. limits and burner limits.
Burner limits menu

Some of the burners are equipped with an additional temperature measurement on the
burner. Alarms concerning this measurement can be set under the last menu – the
Burner limits menu illustrated in Figure 41.
Acess to preheater limits menu
The menu holds a high and low shutdown value that can be modified through the dark
grey indicators.From the Burner limits menu, access is given back to the main menu
and the fuel oil overview (lower left arrow). Access is also available to the three other
menu points: Pressure limits, Oil Temp. limits and Oil temp. reg.
2.6 Burner Menu
The burner menu gives access to an overview of the burner system and to alarm settings
of the system. The structure of the burner menu is illustrated in Figure 42
Menu structure for the burner menu
Main Burner Parameters
Access to the burner menu is given from the main picture (Figure 43) or from any of
the other system menus.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the burner menu
The overview of the burner system is illustrated in Figure 44
Burner system overview
In the overview picture a simplified diagram of the burner system is shown. On the
left side is the pressure, water level and boiler load. On the right side the main burner
components, that are important for illustrating the system state, are shown:
OM9306_56#B.1
• Position of the fuel valve and air damperdamper.State is shown as a percentage

of fully open. If actuators are mechanically connected only the fuel valve are
shown.
• Fuel oil flow(percentage of full load). If available.
• Uptake temperature.If available.
• State of the main valves. State is shown with green meaning activated and grey
meaning deactivated.
• State of the main switches.E.g. the combustion air pressure switch indicating if
pressure is high enough. If the switch is in an error state the switch symbol is red
(illustrated in Figure 44).
• State of burner system motorsThe state of the burner motor and, if separate as
in rotary cup burners, the combustion air fan motor is also monitored. Figure 44
Ç€äshows a KBP burner with a burner motor. The yellow cross means that the
burner is stopped. A green “rotation symbol”:indicates that the motor is running.
Nothing can be activated directly from the burner picture. If burner parameters has to
be modified, this must instead be carried out in the parameter menu.
2.6.1 Parameter settings

The parameter settings or alarm limit settings related to the burner system is accessed
from the burner overview picture by clicking the [PARAM] button (Figure 45).
Acess to the parameter settings in the burner system
The first menu displayed is the Uptake limits menu. Here limits can be set for the high
alarm and the high shut-down uptake temperature (see Figure 46).Notice that the il-
lustration is for a KBP burner as mentioned earlier. For some burners (e.g. RMS) the
preheater is placed on the burner picture for better correspondence with the actual
burner design. Placement for menus relevant for the preheater will therefore move as
well.
OM9306_56#B.1
Uptake limits list for burner system
From the uptake limits menu, access is given to the main menu and back to the burner
overview (lower left arrow). Figure 46 also shows another menu choice – the Servo
valves menu. If the system was configured with a burner that had a windbox another
menu choice would be possible as well – the windbox limits menu.
Windbox limits
The windbox limits menu is available on burners that is configurated with such and
can be accessed by pressing the windbox limits button on the left side of the screen
(Figure 47shows the parameter menu on KBE burner).
Access to th windbox limits menu
OM9306_56#B.1
The windbox limits menu actually just holds one limit – the temperature high limit
used to determine a threshold for the “fire in windbox” shutdown (see Figure 48).
Windbox limits list for the burner system
The last menu available is the servo valves menu.
Servo valves
The servo valve control menu is available by pressing the servo button on the left side
of the screen see Figure 49
Access to the servo valve control menu
OM9306_56#B.1
The servo valves menu allows for manual or automatic control of the oil (valve) and
air (damper) servos as well as setting different parameters relevant to this. The menu
is illustrated in Figure 50.
The servo valve control menu
In the menu the air damper and oil valve position can be monitored. The actuators can
be set in manual mode allowing manual control of their position by either entering the
position (as a percentage of full open) in the setpoint (dark grey) box or by pressing
the arrows. For each servo it is possible to configure the regulators behind their auto-
matic functioning. This is done by pressing the servo reg. param. button below the
servo that is to be changed (See Figure 51).
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the servo valve settings
The servo reg. param. menu allows the user to change to regulator parameters. The
menu for the air servo is displayed in Figure 52.
Servo control to air damper
Parameters which can be set are:
OM9306_56#B.1
Position neutral zone: The accepted distance from the actual position to the set point
position.
Sampling time: The time between two samples.
Proportional Gain: Regulator parameter
Integral time: Regulator parameter
Derivative time: Regulator parameter
Minimum pulse: The minimum on time that the servo relay can be activated.
Run time: A parameter indicating the time period in which the regulator operates. This
is not the same as the period the actuator is active but it affects this.
From the servo control menu access is given to the main menu, alarm limit list and
back to the parameter menu (arrow in lower left corner).
2.7 Boiler Menu
The boiler menu gives access to an overview of the entire boiler system and alarm
limits can be set. Manual control of the load can be taken. The menu structure of the
boiler menu is illustrated inFigure 53.
Menu structure of the boiler menu
Main Boiler Parameters
Access to the boiler menu is given from the main picture as illustrated in Figure 54.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the boiler menu
In the boiler overview picture the boiler pressure, water level, and the load of the boiler
can be monitored in the middle of the picture. Also oxygen level and the smoke density
can be monitored as illustrated in Figure 55.
Boiler menu overview
2.7.1 Parameter settings for the boiler system

From the boiler overview picture access is given to parameter settings of the boiler
settings as illustrated in Figure 56.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the parameter settings for the boiler menu
The alarm limits list is divided into two sections. In the upper section the alarm limits
concerning water level are placed, and in the lower section, the alarm limits concerning
the boiler pressure are placed.
The alarm limits, which can be changed,are for the water level: High and low shut-
down limits, and high and low alarm limits. For the boiler pressure high and low alarm
limits, and the high shut-down limit can be set.
Parameters / alarm limits for the boiler system
OM9306_56#B.1
From the alarm list, access is given to parameter settings for pressure regulation, smoke
density alarms, oxygen limits and load control in the left side of the picture.
Access to the pressure regulation dialog window is achieved by pressing the pressure
regulation button on the left (see Figure 58).
Access to pressure regulation parameters
The pressure regulation dialog window(see Figure 59) is divided into two sections.
The upper section is a monitoring section and the lower section is a control section,
where the parameters can be set. The values, which can be monitored,are the current
set point, pressure and regulator output. The parameters, which can be set, are the
normal set point and the high set point.
OM9306_56#B.1
Pressure regulating dialog box
From the pressure regulation dialog window access is given to the regulator parameters
as illustrated in Figure 60.
Pressure refulation dialog box
The regulator parameters for the boiler pressure regulation (Figure 61), which can be
changed, are:
Sampling time: The time between two samples.
OM9306_56#B.1
Proportional Gain: Regulator parameter
Integral time: Regulator parameter
Derivative time: Regulator parameter
Set point: The desired temperature.
Mode: For setting the valve in automatic or manual mode.
Regulator parameters for pressure regulation
From the pressure regulation parameters access is given to the main menu and back to
the pressure regulation (arrow in lower left corner).
Smoke Density
Access is given to the smoke density menu from the boiler system parameter menu as
illustrated in Figure 62 or from the other sub dialog windows under the boiler system
parameter list.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to the smoke density menu
In the smoke density menu, the high alarm limit can be set as a percentage (see Fig-
ure 63). The menu also allows operation of the smoke density blower. By switching
the lowest dark grey button from OFF to ON the smoke density blower is started.
Smoke density menu
From the smoke density alarm list access is given to the main menu, the alarm limit
dialog windows under the boiler alarm list in the left side of the picture.
OM9306_56#B.1
Load control
Access to manual load control of the boiler is also available from the parameter menu
or from the sub dialog windows (illustrated in Figure 64).
Access to manual load control
The manual load control dialog window (Figure 65) is not only for monitoring and
controlling the load. It is also to be used as a general purpose inspection screen.
The actual load of the boiler can be monitored in the bar in the left part of the window.
The load is displayed using a bar graph showing load as a percentage of the full load.
For precise read out the load value is also displayed numerically in the middle of the
bar. The state of the boiler is seen in the middle of the screen. The state can be set to
either stopped (as on Figure 65), automatic or manual.If in manual mode the burner
can be started and stopped and the load increased and decreased using the respective
buttons.In the top of the picture is the current boiler pressure to help when controlling
the load manually. In the bottomright is the set point choice for easy changing of set
points especially when running in automatic mode. To the left of this is the total oil
consumption value for easy readout of this common task.
OM9306_56#B.1
Manual load control dialog window
Notice that the burner must be in modulation free mode before the load can be con-
trolled.
2.8 Trend
From the main menu access is given to trend curves for selected parameters of the
plant. Access to the trend information is illustrated in Figure 66.
Access to the trend menu
The trend menu is illustrated in Figure 67. From this dialog window access is given to
trends of different plant variables, e.g. boiler pressure, load, fuel pressure, etc. A trend
curve for each of these variables is accessible by clicking the variable button on the
dialog window. A trend exampleis shown in Figure 68.
OM9306_56#B.1
Plant view for trend curves
Example of trend curve
Figure 68 om9306_56_trendx0062780en.wmf
There are several ways of controlling how the trend curve is displayed.
The vertical scaling (value) can be adjusted by setting the max and min value in the
lower right corner.
To adjust the horizontal axis (time / history) simply press anywhere on the graph to
bring up the history control buttons (see Figure 69).
OM9306_56#B.1
Activating history control
The buttons function as follows:
[<<] Large jump back in measurement history
[<] Jump back in measurement history
[-] Zoom in / decrease shown time span.
[^] Reset view
[+] Zoom out / increase shown time span.
[>] Jump forward in measurement history
[>>] Large jump forward in measurement history
2.9 Set-up
The set-up menu gives access to set timers, alarm limits, diagnostics, configuration of
the displayed system, etc. The structure of the set-up menu is illustrated in Figure 70
OM9306_56#B.1
Menu structure of the set up menu
Main Set-up Set-up Digital Input
Digital Input
Program Version
Program Layout Timer Settings
Display Layout Hour Counters
Plant Settings Oil Summarizer
Log-Out Plant Settings
Figure 70 contouch_83ax0200230en.wmf
Access to the set-up menu is given from the main picture as illustrated in Figure 71
Access to set-up menu
The set-up menu gives access to set-up of timers, counters, plant limits, diagnostic
digital input, diagnostic digital output, and configuration of the display layout.
OM9306_56#B.1
2.9.1 System
Under system setup information is given on the type of the panel and the burner. The
system clock and date can be monitored and set as illustrated in Figure 72.
System set-up dialog window
Diagnostic information on digital inputs and outputs

From the system dialog window access is given to the diagnostic information on the
digital inputs and outputs in the lower right corner as illustrated in Figure 73.
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to diagnostic information on in- and outputs
An example of on of the dialog windows with the digital inputs are illustrated in
Figure 74. The status of each input is seen in the box next to the line (Green marks
ON/Activated).
Diagnostic-digital input example
By pressing the arrow on the lower right corner of the picture the next window with
digital inputs are presented.
OM9306_56#B.1
Diagnostic Digital Output

The digital outputs can also be checked for diagnostic purposes. These pictures have
the same functionality as the inputs. Figure 75shows an example.
Diagnostic -digital input example
2.9.2 Program version

From the set-up menu access is given to monitor information on the software installed
as illustrated on Figure 76.
Access to program version information
OM9306_56#B.1
Information is given on the version number of the human-machine-interface software,

the controller version, and the date of the controller software as illustrated in Fig-
ure 77.
Program version informationÁà»
2.9.3 Plant layout

Information on communication addresses, and set-up of the units used for pressure
measurements are accessed from the system dialog window under set-up as illustrated
on Figure 78.
Access to plant layout
OM9306_56#B.1
Plant layout dialog window
2.9.4 Display layout

The elements displayed on the touchscreen depend on what is enabled / activated on
the controller. To view the status of the individual elements the display layout menu
can be used. The menu is accessed from the system dialog window under set-up as
illustrated onFigure 80.
Access to plant layout
OM9306_56#B.1
The menu indicates the viewing status for each screen element (see Figure 81). No
means that the element is not chosen / activated and therefore is not present on the
display. The arrow in the lower right corner switches to a screen with more elements.
Plant layout dialog window
2.9.5 Plant settings

Access to timers, counters, and limits for the plant is given from the set-up dialog
window as illustrated in Figure 82.
Access to plant settings
OM9306_56#B.1
The plant settings dialog window is illustrated in Figure 83.
Plant settings dialog window
From the plant setting dialog window (Figure 83) access is given to timer settings, hour
counters, and plant settings.
Timer settings
Several timers are used in the system. These timers are accessible in the timer settings
dialog window, accessed from the plant setting dialog window as illustrated in Fig-
ure 84.
Acess to the timer settings
OM9306_56#B.1
The timers menu is divided into five categories: sequence, surveillance, power, shared,
and communication. Notice that each category may contain several pictures. If avail-
able the next windows is accessed by clicking the arrow located in the lower right
corner. The value for the timer can be modified by clicking the dark grey button next
to each timer name. See also Figure 85 for an example.
Timer settings example
Hour Counters
The hour counters menu actually holds bothhours counters as well as start counters.
Here the monitoring and configuration of the counters can be carried out. Access to
the counters is given from the plant settings dialog window under the set-up menu as
OM9306_56#B.1
Access to houer counter settings
The counters are sorted into five main groups: Boiler, burner, fuel, water, and steam.
An example of the counter dialog windows is illustrated in Figure 87. Again notice
that each category may contain several pictures. If available the next windows is ac-
cessed by clicking the arrow located in the lower right corner.
Counter settings example
Typically each counter has a total counter that is not resettable (it loops as a mechanical
counter), a total service counter that can be used to keep track of the system since last
OM9306_56#B.1
service and a service value limit that can be used to generate a “service is needed”
alarm. Notice that the service counter value can be manually modified.
Plant Settings
The plant settings sub menu gives access to system parameters configuring the be-
haviour of the system. The parameters can e.g. be actuator positions during the different
steps in the start up sequence or the fuel/air ratio. Themenu is accessed from the plant
settings dialog window under the set-up menu as illustrated in Figure 88
Access to plant limits settings
The menu contains two submenus: Plant limits and Ratio. Plant limits (parameters)
concerning firing, ignition, purging, etc are done from this dialog window. An example
is illustrated in Figure 89.
OM9306_56#B.1
Plant limits
Notice that several pictures are available by pressing the arrow in the lower right corner.
Ratio
The Ratio submenu concerns air/fuel ratio for different load situations.The dialog
window for heavy fuel oil is illustrated in Figure 90 . For each of the displayed load
levels (oil flow) the corresponding air flow can be entered. Notice the corr. value in
the lower right corner. This correction factor is multiplied on all flows allowing for a
global displacement of the air/fuel curve. The factor is especially used for inert gas
systems.
Flow ration - air/HFO
OM9306_56#B.1
By pressing the arrow in the lower right corner the same picture is available for Diesel
Oil.
Oil summarizer
The Oil summarizer button (See Figure 91) allows for quick access to the oil con-
sumption monitoring picture.
Access to the oil summarizer
The picture (See Figure 92) shows the total amount of fuel oil that has been used. The
value is an integration of the flow meter measurement if available. Notice that the value
will loop when the maximum number is reached much like a normal mechanical coun-
ter. The total service litre functions in the same way but like the other counters it is
also here possible to enter a service value limit that will generate an alarm as well as
reset the counter.
OM9306_56#B.1
Oil summarizer picture
2.9.6 Log-out
Trying to change a parameter often requires a password. After the correct password
has been entered access is granted for 60 minutes. As the 60 minutes time out the system
again requires the password to be entered. It is possible to remove the grant before the
60 minutes by pressing the log-out button hence requiring the password to be entered.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Burner sequence diagram (Touch)

.
Burner sequence diagram............................................ OM5560_06............... 26-2
OM5560_06#F.1
BURNER SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
Burner sequence diagram
1 General
The following section describes the burner firing sequence for modulating pressure
atomizing burners. Figure 1 shows a guide to the diagrams, and Figure 2 to Figure 6
show the burner firing sequence. Figure 7 shows a selection of burner sequence related
parameters.
The burner firing sequence, e.g. start, purge, ignition, etc., is handled by the control
system. The sequence is divided into a number of steps, which are executed one by
one. When a specified step is active, the control system activates a number of output
signals and timers. In this way the necessary execution and surveillance of these actions
can be performed. On the local panel the actual sequence step will be indicated.
The burner firing sequence consists of 13 steps. The steps 0-8 handle the burner start
sequence, and the steps 10-13 concern the burner stop sequence. In the normal oper-
ation of the burner, step 8 (mod free) will be active. In this step the burner operates in
modulation free mode, and the load is controlled by the steam pressure regulation
output. If the steam pressure rises above the set point for stop of the burner, the control
system initiates the burner stop sequence. When the stop sequence is completed, the
burner will be in step 0 (ready). If the steam pressure falls below the set point for start
of the burner, a new start-up sequence will be initiated.
In addition to these steps, the sequence is provided with a stop step and a shutdown
step. The stop step must be selected on the local panel. In this step the burner remains
stopped regardless of the steam pressure. The shutdown step is active if one or more
safety interlock shut downs are present. If a safety interlock shut down arises in any
one of the sequence steps, the burner firing sequence is immediately interrupted. When
the safety interlock circuit is restored, and the shut down is reset, the sequence returns
to step 0 (ready).
OM5560_06#F.1
Diagram
Guide to diagram
When entering a sequence step, the associated outputs STEP No.

will be active, and the described actions will be executed Sequence
Conditions which must be fulfilled before leaving the above

step and entering the next step
Shut-down of the burner Normal stop
due to one or more active of the burner
safety interlocks. The
STEP No. sequence will return to
Continuance of sequence step Sequence step shut-down
(continued)
Figure 1 om5560_06_seqguix0054950en.wmf
OM5560_06#F.1
Sequence diagram
Burner firing sequence
Power on
One or more safety interlocks active

Deactivate start request to PMS
Stop ignition (switch off power to ignition transformer)
Deactivate oil valves STEP
Close oil safety valves 1 + 2 Shut-down
Deactivate start signal to burner motor
Set servo motor to closed position
Set all timers to zero, except timers for water level alarms/
shut downs
Safety interlocks OK. When all shut downs can be and are
reset change to step 0 (ready)
Shut-down
Stay in shut-down step if
To enter this step it must be chosen on the local panel safety interlocks are not OK
Set all timers to zero
STEP
Set burner to stop mode
Stopped
When the step is changed to step 0 (ready) on the local
panel, the burner in stop mode is canceled
Shut-down Stop
Stay in step stopped
Set servo motor to closed position

Stop burner motor STEP 0
Ready
In automatic mode change step if boiler pressure is

lower than set point chosen + master start difference
In manual mode change step if soft key for start is Shut-down Stop
activated Stay in step 0 (ready)
Send start request to PMS system, if this possibility is

provided in the control system STEP 1
Start timer for PMS feedback signal Starting
Start permission from PMS system given

Shut-down Stop
Change to step 0 (ready)
Start burner motor STEP 1
Reset timer for PMS feedback Starting
Start timer for maximum start sequence time (continued)
Start timer for burner motor start
Feedback signal for burner motor running

Shut-down Stop
Continued in next figure Reset timer for maximum
start sequence time
Figure 2 om5560_06_seqrmsx0054960en.wmf
OM5560_06#F.1
Sequence diagram, continued

Burner firing sequence continued from previous figure
Set servo motor to purge position STEP 2

Start timer for servo motor in position Purge
Feedback signal for servo motor in position

Shut-down Stop
Reset timer for maximum
STEP 2 start sequence time
Start timer for purge Purge
(continued)
If servo motor position is OK during purge period, change

step
If servo motor position is not OK, return to step 2 again
Shut-down Stop
Set servo motor to ignition position Reset timers for maximum
Start timer for servo motor in position STEP 3 start sequence time and
If the cold/warm start thermostat is active perform a flush Ignition purge time
sequence position
If the cold/warm start thermostat is inactive then skip the
flushing sequence

Continue when timer periods for flushing have expired
(the timers will not be active if flushing is skipped)
Shut-down Stop
Stop burner motor
Start ignition (energize ignition transformer) Reset timers for maximum
Open oil safety valves 1 + 2 STEP 4
start sequence time and
Start timer for ignition Ignition
ignition position
Change step when timer period for ignition has expired

Shut-down Stop
Stop ignition, close oil
safety valves 1 + 2
Activate oil valves STEP 5 Reset timer for maximum
Start timer for safety time Safety time start sequence time
Continue when timer period for safety time has expired
Shut-down Stop
Stop ignition
Reset timer for maximum
start sequence time
Change to step 13
(Post purge position)
Continued in next figure
Figure 3 seqrms12x2162350en.wmf
OM5560_06#F.1

STEP 5
Activate flame surveillance Safety time
Reset timer for maximum start sequence time (continued)
Shut-down Stop
Stop ignition
stop sequence initiates
Start timer for flame stable STEP 6 Change to step 13
Stop ignition (switch off ignition transformer) Flame (post purge position)
stable
Change step when timer period for flame stable has expired
Shut-down Stop
Change to step 13
(post purge position)
Step 7 has no function for modulating pressure atomizing
STEP 7
burners and is therefore skipped
Low firing
The timer for low firing should be set to 0 sec
Change step
Shut-down Stop
Change to step 13
Step 8 (rising part) has no function for modulating pressure STEP 8
atomizing burners and is therefore skipped Rising/
The timer for rising should be set to 0 sec mod. free
Continue step
Shut-down Stop
Change to step 13
Continued in next figure (post purge position)
Figure 4 seqrms10ax3101920en.wmf
OM5560_06#F.1

STEP 8
Modulating operation of the burner according to the signals Rising/
from the steam pressure transmitter mod. free
(continued)
In automatic mode change step if boiler pressure is

higher than set point chosen + stop differential set point
In manual mode change step if soft key for stop is activated Shut-down Stop
Change to step 13
STEP 10
Step 10 has no function for modulating pressure atomizing Steam
burners and is therefore skipped purge
The timer for steam purge position should be set to 0 sec position
Change step
Shut-down
Deactivate oil valves

Close oil safety valves 1 + 2 STEP 11
Deactivate flame surveillance
Steam
Step 11 has no other functions for modulating pressure
purge 1
atomizing burners
The timer for steam purge 1 should be set to 0 sec
Change step
Shut-down
Step 12 has no function for modulating pressure atomizing STEP 12

burners and is therefore skipped Steam
The timer for steam purge 2 should be set to 0 sec purge 2
Change step
Shut-down
Set servo motor to purge position STEP 13

Start timer for servo motor in position Postpurge

Shut-down
Continued in next figure
Figure 5 seqrms11ax3101930en.wmf
OM5560_06#F.1

STEP 13
Start timer for postpurge. If timer is set to 0 sec. the Postpurge
furnace will not be purged. (continued)
Change to step 0 (ready) when timer period for postpurge

has expired
Shut-down
STEP 0
Ready
Figure 6 om5560_06_seqrmsx0055000en.wmf
Burner sequence related parameters
Figure 7 seq100x2316330en.png
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Flame safeguard (Touch)

.
Flame safeguard........................................................ OM8200_07............... 27-2
OM8200_07#C.1
FLAME SAFEGUARD
Flame safeguard
1 Description
The flame safeguard LAE10 is designed for the supervision of the oil flame in con-
nection with a photo cell when the burner is in operation (Auto/Manual/Emergency).
It comprises a power section, a flame signal amplifier, a flame relay, and a flame
indication lamp located in the unit cover behind a viewing window.
All Alfa Laval burners are mounted with two flame safeguard units operating simul-
taneously in manual and automatic mode. This enables the control system to detect if
one flame safeguard unit malfunctions, thus increasing the burner operating safety.
In emergency mode only one flame safeguard unit is active and is connected directly
to a relay in the local panel.
In the event of non-ignition of the flame or loss of flame during burner operation, the
supply of fuel is always interrupted instantaneously. The flame safeguard unit detect
by means of the photocells whether or not a flame is present. This information is con-
verted into a digital signal that is continuously transmitted to the control system. The
control system will activate an immediate burner shutdown if a flame is not detected
when required. Any flame signal - in normal operation or a faulty flame signal - is also
signalled by the indicator lamp.
The switching function needed to enter the flame signal to the control circuit of the
burner system is provided by the flame relay “FR” of the flame safeguard. Figure 1
shows an illustration of the connection diagram for the flame safeguard. The connec-
tion of the terminals can be found in the chapter containing the electric diagrams.
Connection diagram
Figure 1 om8200_04_lae10x0058160en.wmf
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Spare parts for AQ-16

.
Safety valve.............................................................. SP 2611171................ 28-2
Stop valve................................................................. SP 2511092................ 28-3
Stop valve................................................................. SP 2501087................ 28-4
Stop valve................................................................. SP 2641087................ 28-5
Stop valve................................................................. SP 2501088................ 28-6
Water level gauge...................................................... SP 7010000430.......... 28-7
Water level gauge...................................................... SP 7010000431.......... 28-10
Feed water pump....................................................... SP 5541002001.......... 28-13
Chemical dosing unit................................................. SP 9296006003.......... 28-15
Control valve............................................................ SP 6050000240.......... 28-16
Stop valve................................................................. SP 2501086................ 28-18
Filter........................................................................ SP 7040000041.......... 28-19
Control valve............................................................ SP 6050000458.......... 28-20
Check valve.............................................................. SP 6020000101.......... 28-21
SP 2611171#C.1
SAFETY VALVE
SP 2611171 A
SPARE PARTS FOR VALVE
Spare parts for safety valve

Safety valve
Size: DN32 PN40/16
1
In/out orientation: Full lift
For further technical information,
please see data sheet for safety valve
TAG no.: C1/C301 2
8 11
9 12
10 13
Position Item number Item name Application Qty Notes/Recommended

1 9660400144 Cap 1
2 9660400205 Lifting device 1
3 9660400180 Adjusting screw 1
4 8580000001 Spring 1
5 9660400073 Spindle 1
6 9660400135 Bonnet 1
7 9660400198 Stud and Hexagon nut 1
8 9660400162 Guide/spring plate 1
9 9660400153 Disc, hardened 1
10 9660400127 Body 1
11 9660400118 Snap ring 1
12 9660400109 Spindelring 1
13 9660400100 Gasket 1
Gasket for flange TAG no.
14 3510000009 DN32 PN40 C1.1/C301.1 1 No item on drawing
For ordering spare parts and further information: E-mail: aalborgparts.aalborg@alfalaval.com
www.alfalaval.com - www.aalborg-industries.com
28-2 Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/1
SP 2511092#C.1
STOP VALVE
SP 2511092 A
Spare parts for stop valve

Stop valve
Size: DN65 PN25
In/out orientation: Angle
For further technical information, please see data sheet for stop valve

1 9660100163 Handwheel 1
2 9660100043 Stem 1
3 9660100127 Bonnet 1
4 9660100175 Packing 1
5 9660100187 Studs and hexagon nuts 1
6 9660100091 Gasket 1
7 9660100031 Plug 1
8 2511092-8 Seat ring 1
9 9660100115 Body 1
10 3510000012 Gasket for flange DN65 2 No item on drawing
LanguageUK
Language UK 28-3
Page/ 1/1
21
SP 2501087#C.1
STOP VALVE
SP 2501087 A

Stop valve
Size: DN20 PN25
In/out orientation: Straight
4 3
5 6
1 9660100049 Handwheel 1
2 9660100037 Stem 1
3 9660100014 Bonnet 1
4 9660100061 Packing 1
5 9660100085 Gasket 1
7 9660100025 Plug 1
8 2501087-8 Seat ring 1
9 9660100002 Body 1
28-4 Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/1
SP 2641087#C.1
STOP VALVE
SP 2641087 A

Stop valve
Size: DN20 PN25
In/out orientation: Straight, non return
4 3
5 6
10

1 9660100049 Handwheel 1
2 9660100038 Stem 1
3 9660100014 Bonnet 1
4 9660100061 Packing 1
5 9660100085 Gasket 1
7 9660100097 Spring 1
8 9660100026 Plug 1
9 2641087-9 Seat ring 1
10 9660100002 Body 1
LanguageUK
Language UK 28-5
Page/ 1/1
21
SP 2501088#C.1
STOP VALVE
SP 2501088 A

Stop valve
Size: DN25 PN25
4 3
5 6
1 9660100051 Handwheel 1
2 9660100039 Stem 1
3 9660100015 Bonnet 1
4 9660100063 Packing 1
5 9660100087 Gasket 1
7 9660100027 Plug 1
8 2501088-8 Seat ring 1
9 9660100003 Body 1
28-6 Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/1
SP 7010000430#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000430 A
SPARE PARTS FOR WATER LEVEL GAUGE
Spare parts for Water level gauge

Water
Type: Reflective,level gauge
size 26 (shown
Valve operation: Right
model is size 16)
Dimension: DN25 PN40, centre distance: 700 mm

For further technical information, please see data sheet for water level gauge
Tag no. C18
Language UK
Language UK 28-7
Page/ 1/3
21
SP 7010000430#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000430 A
28-8 Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 2/3
SP 7010000430#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000430 A

1 9670100202 Complete set of cocks DN25 PN40 right 1
2 7010000430-2 Stuffing box head 2
3 2163720 Packing sleeve for cocks 2
4 2163719 Gland ring 2
5 7010000430-5 Union nut 2
6 7010000430-6 Connection tube 2
7 7010000430-7 Bolts and nuts 1
8 7010000432 Body gauge size 26, c to c 700mm 1
9 8590000019 Reflex glass incl. 2 packing 2
10 3520000042 Complete packing set for glass 2
11 6000000103 Drain cock 1
12 9670100171 Packing sleeve for drain valve 1
13 8500000455 Repair kit for cocks 1 Pos. no. 3, 4, 12 + 14
14 9670100198 Joint ring 2
15 7010000430-15 Washer 2
16 7010000430-16 Screw 2
17 7010000430-17 Split ring 2
18 7010000430-18 Cock plug 2
19 7010000430-19 Tightening nut 2
Language UK
Language UK 28-9
Page/ 3/3
21
SP 7010000431#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000431 A
Spare parts for Water level gauge

Water level
Type: Reflective, gauge
size 26 (shown
Valve operation: Left
model is size 16)
Dimension: DN25 PN40, centre distance: 700 mm

For further technical information, please see data sheet for water level gauge
Tag no. C17
28-10Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/3
SP 7010000431#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000431 A
Language UK
Language UK 28-11
Page/ 2/3
21
SP 7010000431#A.1
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
SP 7010000431 A

1 9670100203 Complete set of cocks DN25 PN40 left 1
2 7010000431-2 Stuffing box head 2
3 2163720 Packing sleeve for cocks 2
4 2163719 Gland ring 2
5 7010000431-5 Union nut 2
6 7010000431-6 Connection tube 2
7 7010000431-7 Bolts and nuts 1
8 7010000432 Body gauge size 26, c to c 700mm 1
9 8590000019 Reflex glass incl. 2 packing 2
10 3520000042 Complete packing set for glass 2
11 6000000103 Drain cock 1
12 9670100171 Packing sleeve for drain valve 1
13 8500000455 Repair kit for cocks 1 Pos. no. 3, 4, 12 + 14
14 9670100198 Joint ring 2
15 7010000431-15 Washer 2
16 7010000431-16 Screw 2
17 7010000431-17 Split ring 2
18 7010000431-18 Cock plug 2
19 7010000431-19 Tightening nut 2
28-12Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 3/3
SP 5541002001#B.1
FEED WATER PUMP
SP 5541002001 A
SPARE PARTS FOR PUMP
Spare parts for Feed water pump

Feed water pump
Head pressure: 130 mWC
Capacity: 1.5 m3/h
For further technical information, please see data sheet for feed water pump
Language UK
Language UK 28-13
Page/ 1/2
21
SP 5541002001#B.1
FEED
SPWATER PUMPA
5541002001
SPARE PARTS FOR PUMP
Pos. Item number Item name Application Qty Notes/Recommended

1 5541002001-1 Kit, Gaskets, Rubber type: FKM 1 Pos. No. 100,37,38
2 5541002001-2 Kit, Gaskets, Rubber type: EPDM 1 Pos. No. 100,37,38
3 5541002001-3 Kit, shaft seal HQQE 1 Pos. No. 105
Pos. No.
4 5541002001-4 Kit, wear parts, Material type: BRONZE 1 65,45,64a,4a,47a,64c,66,67,39
Kit, wear parts, Material type: SILICON Pos. No.
5 5541002001-5 CARBIDE 1 65,45,64a,4a,47a,64c,66,67,39
6 5541002001-6 Motor 1
7 5541002001-7 Kit, coupling 1 Pos. No. 8,10a,9,10
8 5541002001-8 Pump head 1 Pos. No. 2
9 5541002001-9 Bulk, Chamber complete (10 PC) 1 Pos. No. 4
10 5541002001-10 Chamber, bottom 1 Pos. No. 5a
11 5541002001-11 Base 1 Pos. No. 6
12 5541002001-12 Bulk, Coupling guard (10 PC) 1 Pos. No. 7
13 5541002001-13 Drain plug with bypass valve 1 Pos. No. 25
14 5541002001-14 Staybolt 4 Pos. No. 26
15 5541002001-15 Bulk, Impeller complete (24 PC) 1 Pos. No. 49
16 5541002001-16 Pump shaft 1 Pos. No. 51
17 5541002001-17 Sleeve 1 Pos. No. 55
18 5541002001-18 Chamber stack 1 Pos. No. 80
For ordering spare parts and further information:
E-mail: aalborgparts.aalborg@alfalaval.com
28-14Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 2/2
SP 9296006003#C.1
CHEMICAL DOSING
SP 9296006003 B UNIT
SPARE PARTS FOR PUMP CHEMICAL DOSING
Spare parts for Chemical dosing unit

Chemical dosing unit
Control supply: 230V 50/60 Hz
Water regulation: On/off feed
For further technical information, please see data sheet for chemical dosing unit
TAG no: M23

1 6000000034 Dosing valve, spring loaded, 6mm x 1/2” 1
2 8615000022 Hose ø6/ø4, L = 5000 mm 1
Dosing pump incl. air escape valve, hoses,
3 5540000313 dosing valve and non return valve 230 V 1
4 8500000716 Manual stirrer for tank 1
5 8500000715 60 l chemical tank 1
6 6000000035 Non return valve 1
Spare parts kit consisting of:
Diaphragm, saf. diaphragm, suction valve,
disharge valve, complete set of o-rings and
7 9692960033 set of hose connection 1 No item on drawing
Language UK
Language UK 28-15
Page/ 1/1
21
SP 6050000240#B.1
SP 6050000240 B
CONTROL VALVE
SPARE PARTS FOR CONTROL VALVE
Spare parts for control valve

Control valve
Size: DN32 PN25
Kvs value: 6.3 m3/h
Actuator: Pneumatic
Closing pressure: 16.8
For further technical information, please see data sheet for control valve
28-16Language
/ 21 UK Language Page
UK 1/2
SP 6050000240#B.1
SP 6050000240 B
CONTROL VALVE

1 6050000240-1 Hand wheel 1
2 9685000003 I/P Positioner 1
3 9660500111 Spindle 1
PTFE-V unit: PTFE ring, Washer,
Spring, Guide band, Scraper and
4 9660500144 Spindle guide. 1
5 9660100089 Gasket 1
6 9660500133 Guiding bush 1
7 9660500103 Seatring 1
8 6050000240-8 Parabolic plug 1
9 2159108 Gasket DN 32 PN 25 for flange 2 No item on drawing
10
11
12
13
14

10 9660500164 Diaphragm 1
11 9660500170 Diaphragm plate 1
12 9660500173 Spring 1
Stem Sealing: Spindle guide,
Guiding band, O-ring (spindle),
13 9660500176 O-ring (guiding) and Scraper 1
14 9660500167 Bellow 1
Language UK
Language UK 28-17
Page/ 2/2
21
SP 2501086#C.1
STOP
SPVALVE
2501086 A

Stop
Size: DN15valve
PN25
4 3
5 6
1 9660100049 Handwheel 1
2 9660100037 Stem 1
3 9660100013 Bonnet 1
4 9660100061 Packing 1
5 9660100085 Gasket 1
7 9660100025 Plug 1
8 2501086-8 Seat ring 1
9 9660100001 Body 1
28-18Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/1
SP 7040000041#B.1
SP 7040000041 A
FILTER
SPARE PARTS FOR FILTER
Spare parts for filter

Filter
Size: DN15 PN25
For further technical information, please see data sheet for filter
1
2
3
4
5

1 9670400020 Screen 1
2 9670400008 Body 1
3 9670400026 Gasket 1
4 7040000041-4 Studs and hexagon nuts 1
5 9670400014 Cover 1
LanguageUK
Language UK 28-19
Page/ 1/1
21
SP 6050000458#A.1
CONTROL VALVE A
SP 6050000458
Spare parts for control valve

Control valve
Size: DN15 PN25
Kvs value: 4.0 m³/h
Cooling spacer

1 6050000458-1 Body 1
2 6050000458-2 Seat ring 1
3 6050000458-3 Cylinder screw 1
4 6050000458-4 Guide bushing 1
5 6050000458-5 Gasket 1
6 6050000458-6 Hood 1
7 6050000458-7 Spindle unit 3
8 6050000458-8 Pressure piece 1
9 6050000458-9 Hexagon nut 2
10 6050000458-10 Cooling spacer 1
11 6050000458-11 Spring 1
12 6050000458-12 Balanced bellow 1
28-20Language
/ 21 UK Language UK
Page 1/1
SP 6020000101#A.1
CHECK VALVE A
SP 6020000101
SPARE PARTS FOR CHECK VALVE
Spare parts for check valve

Check
Size: DN15 PN40
valve
Kvs value: 4,4 m³/h
5 3

1 6020000101-1 Body 1
2 6020000101-2 Retaining ring 1
3 6020000101-3 Spring plate 1
4 6020000101-4 Valve plate 1
5 6020000101-5 Spring 1
Language UK
Language UK 28-21
Page/ 1/1
21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of contents
Spare parts for burner

.
Pressure atomising burner........................................... SP 5560000009.......... 29-2
Gas air separator and filter.......................................... SP 81Y_045101.......... 29-7
SP 5560000009#F.1
PRESSURE ATOMISING
SP 5560000009 B BURNER
SPARE PARTS FOR BURNER
Spare parts for burner RMS7
Pressure atomising burner

Type: Pressure atomizing burner
Operation: Modulating
Application: Heavy fuel oil up to 380 cSt at 50°C
Control system: Aalborg control or relay
For further technical information, please see data sheet for burner
TAG no. F1
29-2 Language
/7 UK Language UK
Page 1/5
SP 5560000009#F.1
PRESSURE ATOMISING

1.2 9656000682 Swivel flange ø180 1
1.6 9656000680 Flange sealing ø202/ø280 1
1.8 9656000684 Swivel bolt 14 x 208 1
1.9 8500000436 Switch for burner swing out 1
Inspection tube cover complete
1.11 9656000681 with sight glass 1
Clear sight glass for inspection tube
1.12 9656000597 cover 1
1.15 9656000833 End/closing cover 1
1.21 9656000830 Transition nipple for burner casing 1
1.22 9656000679 Airlet plate 2
2.3 9656000733 Air regulation 1

2.12 9656000729 Air intake protection 1
2.13 9656000700 Inlet nozzle 1
2.15 9656000573 Closing plug ø35 1
2.18 9656000699 Air flap 150 x 240 Air regulation 1
2.19 9656000698 Air flap 64 x 240 Air regulation 1
2.21 9656000735 Shaft for air regulation 8 x 303.5 1

2.22 9656000660 Bearing screw 1
2.23 9656000598 Bearing bush 1
2.34 9656000666 Bearing bolt M6 x 18 1
Servomotor
3.1 9655300003 110V type SQM 10 1
Servomotor
3.1 9655300002 220V type SQM 10 1
Built-in Only for Aalborg
3.1 9656000392 Potentiometer 0-1000 Ohm servomotor 1 control touch systems
3.3 9656000379 Cover for servomotor 1
3.53 9656000765 Oil regulator Up to 280 kg/h 1
3.54 9656000461 Heating cartridge for oil regulator 1
3.55 9656000944 Regulating disc 1
5560000009-
4.1 4.1 Burner motor 1
5560000009-
4.1a 4.1a Bearing for burner motor 1
5.2 9656000672 Blower wheel, ø248 x 100, red Motor 60 Hz 1
6.5 5540000248 Pump type TA 2 1

6.6 9656000730 Connection parts for pump 1
6.11 8500000537 Shaft seal for pump 1
6.12 9656000026 Coupling for pump 1
6.14 9656000023 Coupling center piece 1
6.15 9656000021 Coupling cross 2
6.16 9656000766 Connection flange 1
Language UK
Language UK 29-3 /2/5
Page 7
SP 5560000009#F.1
PRESSURE ATOMISING

6.21 9656000463 Heating cartridge 230V 110W 1
5560000009-
6.22 6.22 Nipple for heating cartridge 1
Flexible oil hose
6.53 8615000032 (DN20) 3/4" x 1300 mm Marine execution 1
Flexible oil hose
Traced oil hose
Traced oil hose
Nipple
6.54 2000000024 M30x1.5-m, G 1"-m 1
Pipe elbow
6.55 2000000021 M30x1.5-m, M30x1.5-f 1
Solenoid valve for nozzle 19W,
7.2 9656000289 115V 50 Hz/120V 60 Hz Normally closed 1
7.3 9656000285 115V 50 Hz/120V 60 Hz Normally open 1
Solenoid valve 20W,
7.7 9656000266 58V 50 Hz/60V 60Hz Normally closed 1
Solenoid valve 20W,
Solenoid valve 20W,
Solenoid valve 20W,
Coil for solenoid valve 19W,
7.11 9656000279 115V 50 Hz/120V 60 Hz 1
7.11 9656000011 230V 50 Hz/240V 60 Hz 1
7.12 9656000280 58V 50 Hz/60V 60 Hz 1
7.12 9656000012 115V 50 Hz/120V 60 Hz 1
5560000009-
7.15 7.15 Filter G3/8" PN50 1
7.18 9656000821 Connection cable for solenoid valve 1
7.21 9656000862 Solenoid valve 1
7.22 9656001229 Distribution piece 1
7.23 9656000863 Connection parts 1
7.24 9656000370 Thermometer 0-160°C 1
7.32 9656000838 Heating cartridge complete 1
7.33 9656000461 Heating cartridge 1
Pressure monitor for fuel oil
7.37 9656000354 1-10bar 1
Pressure monitor for fuel oil
7.37 9656000352 3-25bar 1
29-4 Language
/7 UK Language UK
Page 3/5
SP 5560000009#F.1
PRESSURE ATOMISING

9.1 9656000422 Pressure monitor for air and gas 1
9.2 9656001278 Cap for pressure monitor 1
11.2 9656000673 Flame tube M6/1a 1

11.2 9656000706 Flame tube M7/1a 1
Air diffuser disk complete for

11.14 9656000678 flame tube M6/1a, 145 x 40 1
11.14 9656000676 flame tube M6/1a, M7/1a, 155 x 50 1
11.14 9656000677 flame tube M6/1a, M7/1a 165 x 50 1
11.14 9656000753 flame tube M6/1a, M7/1a 175 x 50 1
13.6b 9656000739 Nozzle support 1

13.12 8600000002 Nozzle head 1
13.20 9656000029 Temperature sensor 1
13.24 8620000005 Ignition electrode left 1
13.24 8620000006 Ignition electrode right 1
5560000009-
14.12 14-12 Nozzle 1 Check capacity
Only relay
Burner sequence control controlled
15.1 6020011 220 V - 50/60 Hz systems 1 Without base plate
Only relay
Burner sequence control controlled
15.3 8200000011 220 V - 50/60 Hz systems 1 Without base plate
15.12 6310720 Photo cell 1
15.12.1 8500001086 Rubber cover for photo cell 1
16.1 9656000248 Ignition unit 230 V 1
17.6 9656000404 Temperature regulator 1
<270kg/h
Oil viscocity up to 380
18.2 8645000002 Oil preheater EV2D Marine execution 1 cSt at 50 deg. C
>270;<301kg/h
Oil viscocity up to 700
18.2 8645000003 Oil preheater WEV2.2 Marine execution 1 cSt at 50 deg.
Temperature switch for burner

18.4 9656000399 release 1
5560000002-
18.5 18.5 Disk ø21 x 1.5 1
18.6 9656000403 Temperature limiter 1
5560000009-
18.8 18.8 Cover for preheater EV2D Marine execution 1
Language UK
Page 7
SP 5560000009#F.1
PRESSURE ATOMISING

5560000009- Heating elements for preheater
18.17 18.17 EV2D 1
5560000009- Oil coil complete for preheater
18.18 18.18 EV2D 1
18.41 9656001246 Sensor PT 100 for preheater 1
Pressure gauge
- 6633122 0-40 bar, kg/cm2, 0-4 Mpa 1
- 8500000011 Hooking device 1
29-6 Language
/7 UK Language UK
Page 5/5
SP 81Y_045101#E.1
GAS AIR SEPARATOR
SP 81Y:045101 B AND FILTER
SPARE PARTS FOR GAS AIR SEPARATOR AND FILTER UNIT
Spare parts for gas air separator and filter unit

Gas air separator
For further information,
TAG no. G121
and filter
please see sale documents
4 5 6 7 8 9
3 Air escape
Air escape
REMOTE OIL PRESS.
LOW OIL PRESS.
AUTO STAND-BY
2 12
Ring line inlet/return

Drain
10 11

1 8010000022 Pressure transmitter, 1/2” 1
1.1 2911602 Gasket for pressure transmitter, ø18/ø6.5 t=2 1
2 6010000002 Stop valve, drain, 1/2” 1
3 7045000001 Filter basket 1
3.1 3520000005 Gasket for filter basket, ø42x5 1
3.2 3520000004 Gasket for filter basket, ø80/ø62 t=1.5 2
4 6000000001 Air valve, G 1/2”-m 2
4.1 3520000007 Gasket for air valve, ø26/ø21 t=1.5 2
5 6632971 Pressure gauge, ø100 G 3/8” 1
5.1 2911601 Gasket for pressure gauge, ø14.5/ø6.5 t=2 2
6 6200050 Temperature gauge, ø63 G 1/2” –m 1
7 2750301 Control valve 3/4” PN25 1
7.1 3520000002 Gasket for Control valve, ø32/ø26 t=1.5 2
8 7060000003 Flowmeter, VZO 20 1
9 6010000012 Stop valve ball, by-pass 3/4” 3
10 4700100 Heating device, G 3/4”-m 1
11 2541002 Pressure gauge valve, 1/2” PN 400 1
11.1 2911602 Gasket for Pressure gauge valve, ø18/ø6.5 t=2 2
12 81K:008733 Ball valve incl. micro switch, DN 15, G 1/2”-f 1
12.1 81Y:045101-12.1 Micro switch for ball valve 1
12.2 3520000007 Gasket for ball valve, ø26/ø21 t=1.5 2
Language UK
Page 7

Instruction Manual BOILER

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Instruction Manual BOILER

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pressure Atomizing Burner

Aalborg Control System (Touch)

Burner sequence diagram (Touch)................................................................................26

Spare parts catalogue

Preface / conditions for use of manual

1 Preface / conditions for use of manuals

1.2 Prequalification / required basic knowledge

1.3 Content of manual(s)

1.5 Subject to change

1.6 Disclaimer of liability

General guarantee information

General guarantee information

1 Guarantee agreement and conditions

1.2 Trouble shooting

1.3 Requirement for support

1.4 Guarantee claim handling

1.3 Working clothes

Protective clothes must be of tight-fit.

Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting instructions.

1.6 General maintenance and fault rectification practice

1.7 Pressurized equipment and items

1.8 Chemicals, cleaning agents, lubricants, etc.

1.9 Electrical equipment

1.10 Hinged equipment

1.12 Rotating equipment

Rotating equipment must always be disconnected, electrically and/or hydraulically

1.13 Hot surfaces/equipment

1.14 Warning signs

1.15 Alterations to the construction of the equipment

1.16 Spare parts

1.17 Waste disposal

Note: In case of any doubts please contact Alfa Laval.

Technical data for boiler plant

• Request No./Order No.:..........................................................................106591-1

2 General plant data

• Language for manuals:..............................................................................English

Technical data for Aalborg AQ-16

• Request No./Order No.:..........................................................................106591-1

2 Dimensions for boiler unit

• Height to top of smoke outlet box:.........................................................4,285 mm

3 Water/steam process data

• Steam output, simultaneous operation:..................................................1,050 kg/h

4 Data for pressure part

• Boiler type:.......................................Vertical, composite smoke/water tube boiler

5 Combustion process data (oil-fired section)

• Min. calorific value of diesel oil:.......................................................42,200 kJ/kg

6 Combustion process data (exhaust gas sec-

7 Data for pressure loss layout

• Pressure loss across flue gas system, max.:...........................................10 mmWC

8 Data for burner

• Burner type:.............................................................................Pressure atomizing

9 Data for control system

10 Operational data for boiler plant

• Project No.: ................................................................................. 106591-01-2

2 Data for fuel oil pumps

• Pump type .................................................................................... DS1/150.32

3 Data for pump motor

• Motor make: ............................................................................................... AC

• Starting current: ...................................................................................... 2,8 A

Technical data for feed water pumps

• Request No./Order No.:.............................................................................106591

2 Data for pump